JP6678858B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a ball-and-ball game machine (pachinko machine), a torso gaming machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming table provided with a structure has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, in the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the structure.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming table having a structure.

A gaming table according to the present invention is a gaming table provided with a first structure, a second structure, a movable role, and a first driving means, wherein the movable role is A movable role including a first structure, wherein the movable role is a movable role including the second structure, and the first structure is located at a first position. A possible structure, wherein the first structure is a structure capable of being located at a third position, and the second structure is capable of being located at a second position. A structure, wherein the second structure is a structure capable of being located at a fourth position, wherein the first position is a position different from the third position, second position, the a position different from the fourth position, the first structure is thus driven in the first driving means, from said first position Serial a structure for changing the position to a third position, said second structure, said thus be driven in the first driving means to change the position to the fourth position from the second position A structure, wherein the first structure located at the first position overlaps a part of the second structure located at the second position and is located at the fourth position. the position in the longitudinal direction of the front end portion of the second structure is the position of the front than the position in the longitudinal direction of the front end portion of the first structure located in the third position, the movable for The accessory is a movable accessory that can execute a notice, the movable accessory is a movable accessory that can be located at an initial position, and in a state where the movable accessory is located at the initial position, It said first structure and can not be visually recognized the the second structure, the first structure If There positioned in the third position, a portion said first structure is visible from the front when located in the first position is not visible from the front, it is in the amusement machine, characterized in that .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game stand which has a characteristic in a structure can be implement | achieved.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 in the state which attached the back cover from the back (back). It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 in the state which removed the back cover from the back surface (back surface). (A) It is the schematic front view which extracted and showed the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246. (B) It is side sectional drawing in alignment with the AA in (a). FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. 10B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9D is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200. It is the elements on larger scale which show and enlarge the vicinity of the general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 in the game board 200. It is the schematic back view which looked at the unit 200a from the back side after the state which removed the accessory unit 950. It is the perspective view which looked at the unit 200a from the back side after the state where the accessory unit 950 was removed. It is a partial enlarged view which expands and shows a game ball storage part periphery. It is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the drop-and-deployment accessory unit 700. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the drop-and-deployment accessory unit 700. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the drop-and-deployment accessory unit 700. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 1st structure 712b. (B) It is the exploded perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 4th structure 712a. It is the schematic front view which showed the light emitting substrate 714 of the 1st structure 712b, and the light emitting substrate 714 of the 4th structure 712a. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of a lifting accessory unit 750. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a launching accessory unit 800. FIG. 9 is an enlarged perspective view of a relay board 806 provided in the launching accessory unit 800. It is an exploded perspective view of the V formation accessory unit 850. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the right light guide plate 854h of the V formation role right unit 854 from the back side. FIG. 9 is a front view of a center accessory unit 900. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the vertical movement of the falling and deploying role object 712 by extracting only the falling and deploying role unit 700. FIG. 9 is a view showing the vertical movement of the drop-and-development accessory 712 in the drop-and-development accessory unit 700 installed on the game board 200. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a rotation operation of the falling and deploying role object 712 by extracting only the falling and deploying role unit 700. FIG. 9 is a view showing a rotation operation of the drop-and-development accessory unit 712 in the drop-and-development accessory unit 700 installed on the game board 200. FIG. 9 is a view showing a rotation operation of the drop-and-development accessory unit 712 in the drop-and-development accessory unit 700 installed on the game board 200. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating operations of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 by extracting only the lifting accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800. It is a figure showing the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 installed on the game board 200. (A) It is a sectional side view of the game board 200 in the state in which the lifting part unit 750 is located at the initial position. (B) It is a sectional side view of the game board 200 in the state where the raising accessory unit 750 is operating. It is the figure which showed operation | movement of the V formation role unit 850 by extracting only the V formation role unit 850. It is a view showing the operation of the V forming accessory unit 850 installed on the gaming board 200. (A) It is a front view and a side view of drop deployment role thing 730 located in the 1st operation position. (B) It is the front view and side view of fall deployment role thing 730 located in a 2nd operation position. (C) It is the front view and side view of fall deployment role thing 730 located in the 3rd operation position. It is the figure which showed the initial operation | movement of the falling deployment role thing 730 in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the notice by the light emission of a light emission means in time series. It is the figure which showed the production and the like in special figure 1 fluctuation game. It is the figure which showed the production and the like in special figure 1 fluctuation game. It is the figure which showed the production and the like in special figure 1 fluctuation game. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example in which a display area of a display unit is overlapped with a movable body. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example which overlaps (hides) a movable body with another movable body. (A) It is the figure which showed the example in which the fall and deployment role thing 730 in an initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 735 which has the opening part 735a. (B) It is the figure which showed the example in which the fall deploying role thing 730 in an initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 736 which has the notch part 736a. (C) It is the figure which showed the example which the falling and deploying role thing 730 in an initial position is overlapped by the center part 900. (A) It is a front view and a side view of fall and deployment role thing 760 located in the 1st operation position. (B) It is the front view and side view of fall deployment role thing 760 located in a 2nd operation position. (C) It is the front view and side view of fall deployment role thing 760 located in the 3rd operation position. (A) It is a front view and a side view of drop deployment role thing 770 located in the 1st operation position. (B) It is the front view and side view of fall deployment role thing 770 located in the 2nd operation position. (C) It is the front view and side view of drop deployment role thing 770 located in the 3rd operation position. It is the figure which showed the operation examples 1-3 of the accessory 820 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation examples 1 and 2 of the accessory 830 in time series. It is a figure showing the basic concept of the present invention. It is a figure showing the basic concept of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) is a decorative symbol And (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the contents of a success / failure judgment table. It is a figure explaining the contents of a special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part timer interrupt processing, (d) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decoration design display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. FIG. 68 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 68. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example of an effect in another case following FIG. 69 (q). (A) is a figure explaining a display example of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining a notice icon display area information storage area stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon It is a figure explaining an example of digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before change, and (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after change. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect centering on decoration design display 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 74 is a view illustrating stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 73. FIG. 75 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 74. FIG. 76 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 75. FIG. 77 is a view illustrating stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 76. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step an example of an effect centering on decoration design display 208 of pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 85 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 85. FIG. 89 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 86. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 87. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 88. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of an increase effect of a notice icon. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the notice icon changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery while displaying the notice icon in a stepwise manner. It is a figure which shows step-by-step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production. FIG. 95 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 95. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure which shows step-by-step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production. It is a figure which shows the modification of the increase effect of the notice icon which can be applied to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 100 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a notice icon digestion effect. It is a figure showing step by step about an example of production using a movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure showing step by step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production. It is a figure which shows step-by-step another example of a production of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production. It is a figure which shows stepwise another modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which can be performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of other productions of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 116. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of other productions of a notice icon increase production and a digestion production applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 118 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 118. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing step by step another example of an effect concerning this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure showing gradually another example of a production of an advance notice icon increase production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relation between a notice icon and tutorial display. FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of a main control unit main process, and (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. 10B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9D is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. It is a figure which shows an example of a button effect in steps. FIG. 128 is a diagram for describing in detail operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a diagram for describing an effect involving operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the effect involving the operating means A and the effect involving the operating means B. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the effect involving the operation means. It is a figure showing step by step an example about an effect involving operation means A (chance button 136). FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating a step-by-step procedure continued from the example illustrated in FIG. 141. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a case where an effect involving the operating means A (chance button 136) is executed after a weak SP reach effect and a big hit is made. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 143 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 143 and 144. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a case where it loses while an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after a strong SP reach effect. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 146 in a stepwise manner. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a case where an effect involving the operation means B (transmissive unit 191) is executed after a strong SP reach effect and a big hit is achieved. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating a state that is continued from the example illustrated in FIG. 148 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating, at a stage, an example in which the chance button 136 as the operation unit A starts vibrating in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing, at a stage, an example in which a chance button 136 as an operation unit A is operated after an operation of a transmission unit 191 as an operation unit B. FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating, in stages, an example in a case where the operation timing of the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 151. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a transmission unit 191 that is an operation unit B vibrates when a housing vibrates. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. It is a figure showing step by step an example of a case where a scene in which an enemy role has won after a strong SP reach effect is displayed once, but a resurrection effect causes a big hit. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating a step-by-step continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 155. It is a figure showing an example of the 3rd production in steps. It is a figure showing stepwise another example of an announcement effect started according to operation of penetration part 191. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example demonstrated so far. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. 159. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which involved the pseudo run in steps. It is a figure showing step by step an example of other productions involving a pseudo run. It is a figure showing step by step an example in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed from the swing fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 163 in a stepwise manner. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128. It is a figure showing an example of the 4th production and the 5th production in steps. FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating, in stages, an example in a case where the timing of operating the button B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 166. It is a figure for further explaining the relation between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137). It is the figure which showed three examples of the promotion effect. It is a figure showing two other examples about a promotion effect. It is a figure for explaining a general timer notice. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example etc. which may display timer notice display T according to a button operation. It is a figure for explaining the relation between the timing of a back button operation, and the timing of hold increase. It is a figure showing two examples about button production in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method including timer notice display T. It is a figure which shows the example when a timer notice overlaps with another effect accompanied by countdown of remaining time. It is a figure showing other examples of a timer notice. It is a figure showing an example where timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from decorative symbol display device 208. It is a figure which shows step-by-step the state of the fluctuation | variation display of the decoration symbol in which animation of a hold icon is performed. It is a figure showing step-by-step an example of a simultaneous change of a hold icon during a design stop. It is a figure showing step by step an example of simultaneous change of a reservation icon when a reservation increase occurs during a symbol stop. It is a figure showing step by step an example of simultaneous change of a reservation icon when two reservations increase during a symbol change. It is a figure showing step by step an example of simultaneous change of a reservation icon when two reservations increase during symbol stop. It is a figure for explaining a winning order change. It is a figure showing step by step an example of simultaneous change of a reservation icon when reservation is increased in winning order change. It is a figure which shows the example at the time of a hold | maintenance increasing during hold | maintenance display in a winning order change, and it becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which a simultaneous change effect is not performed according to the kind of displayed hold icon, or is performed. It is a figure explaining the simultaneous change effect at the time of holding full in a winning order change. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the slot machine which can apply the present invention from the front side (the player side).

  Hereinafter, the gaming table (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, an overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a firing device 110, and a game board 200 as its external structure on its front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store.

  The main body 104 is a member which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertical rectangular game machine base body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112, which is called an inner frame. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is formed in a frame shape so that the inner side thereof can be opened. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at an opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door open sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a lock function and is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be completely stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. 200, a ball firing handle 134 for projecting to the game area 124, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a light for illuminating the chance button 136. A button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing the card unit to return a player's balance. 142, and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the status of the card unit. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a firing rod 146 that rotates when a ball firing handle 134 is operated by a player, and a firing hammer 148 that strikes a game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , Is provided.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

<Game board>
Next, the gaming board 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which game balls can roll. A decorative symbol display device 208 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units 950 (see FIG. 17) are provided therearound. The details of the accessory unit 950 will be described later.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the decorative design display device 208. However, the display device may be any type of display device, as long as the display device can display various effects and various game information. Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  A stage 244 is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in an area where the game balls can roll. The stage 244 is capable of temporarily rolling game balls or the like that have fallen out of the game area 124. A wall portion 200a3 described later is provided upright behind the stage 244, and a game ball rolling on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall portion 200a3 or the like. The game is led to the game area 124.

  Although not shown, the game board 200 includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as “Public symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “Special symbol”.

  The general-purpose display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. A first special map display device 212 (not shown) and a second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps. In the present embodiment, the first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The general-figure holding lamp 216 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating the number of general-figure fluctuation games (details will be described later) which are on hold. Up to one). The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of special figure change games (details will be described later) that are held. It is possible to suspend the figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur or a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from the probability state to the high probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, the game board 200 has a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, a first variable A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are provided on the gaming board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (not shown). When a prize is won, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the ball to be paid out to the player as a reward for winning may be referred to as a "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental", and the "prize ball" and the "ball rental" are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the front of the game board 200 is provided. One is provided on the right side as viewed. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric tuy), and in the present embodiment, only one is provided immediately below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 is provided with a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed right and left. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the prize is won in the general figure changing game. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a big winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, they are respectively arranged at the lower right of the gaming board 200 in a front view. The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are provided with a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed. When the display device stops displaying the big hit symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are set as prize balls. Discharge to plate 126. The balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called windmills and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are provided. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win any of the winning ports and the starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle of the player, and sets the firing rod 146. Then, the shot hammer 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and strikes the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction conversion member 236, the game nail, or the like, and receives a winning opening (a general winning opening 226, a first variable winning opening 234, A variable winning prize port 235) or a starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232) is won, or no winning port or starting port is won, or the general figure starting port 228. Only reaches the outlet 240.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 with the back cover attached, as viewed from the back (back). FIG. 4 is a view of the game board 200 with the back cover removed, as viewed from the back (back). FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back surface of the game board 200, a back cover 241 made of a transparent plate-like member is provided. The back cover 241 is rotatably attached to the game board 200 via hinge portions 242 provided at two places on the left side in rear view. Further, lock portions 243 for fixing the back cover 241 to the back surface of the gaming board 200 are provided at two upper and lower locations at an end of the back cover 241 opposite to the hinge portion 242.

  Below the back cover 241, a main control board case 244 capable of accommodating a control board (hereinafter, also referred to as a main control board or a main control board) constituting a main control unit 300 described later is provided. As shown in FIG. 4, a control board (hereinafter, a sub-control board or a sub-controller, which constitutes a first sub-control unit 400 described later) is located above the main control board case 244 and at a position covered by the back cover 241. A sub-control board case 245 capable of accommodating a control board (hereinafter, also referred to as a liquid crystal control board) constituting a second sub-control unit 500 described later. It is arranged.

  The sub-control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are covered with a back cover 241. Since the back cover 241 of this example is a transparent plate-like member, the sub-control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are provided. The states of various electronic components and the like accommodated in the board cases 245 and 246 can be visually recognized from the back (back) side through the back cover 241.

  FIG. 5A is a schematic front view showing the sub-control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246, and FIG. 5B is a side view taken along the line AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing.

  The liquid crystal control board case 246 houses the above-described liquid crystal control board 246a and a relay board 246b for electrically relaying the liquid crystal control board 246a to another control board. The sub-control board case 245 houses the above-described sub-control board 245a.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, when the right side surface in the side view of the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 is used as the reference plane, the liquid crystal control board 246a and the sub control board 245a and the relay board 246b are arranged in this order. In other words, the sub control board 245a is arranged at a position farther from the reference plane than the liquid crystal control board 246a, and is arranged at a position closer to the reference plane than the relay board 246b. 246a and the relay board 246b.

<Control unit>
Next, a circuit configuration of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is mainly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and an effect mainly produced in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. , A second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a command transmitted by the main controller 300. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout of the game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and the power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and a temporary data 308, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality in program processing. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random number value generation circuits. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting opening, a winning opening, a variable winning opening, a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a tongue sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random number value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 and a display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a general figure display device 210 are performed. Control circuit 326 and display control of various state display units 328 (for example, the general-purpose reserve lamp 216, the first special-purpose reserve lamp 218, the second special-purpose reserve lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like). And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234. doing.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. The random number generation circuit 318 generates the random number roughly in two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. The random number mode has two more methods. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derives the calculation result as a random number. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 obtains an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 uses the obtained value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the random number generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generating circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generating circuit 318 also determines the timing of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random number value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to provide a pachinko machine to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown). The game information of the machine 100 (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main controller 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although a signal can be transmitted, the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 cannot transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the whole of the first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. Is connected.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a driving circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shield device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shield device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136, a shield device sensor 430 and a chance button detection sensor A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the CPU 426 to the basic circuit 402; and image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404, and a display image is generated and decorated using a work area of the VRAM 436. VDP 434 (video) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208 Are connected Oh and display processor), the.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates a control program and data for controlling the entirety of the second sub-control unit 500, and data for image display. A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the accessory unit 950, various sensors 424 for detecting the current position of the accessory unit 950, and a detection signal from the various sensors 424 as a basic circuit. A sensor circuit 518 for outputting to the 502; a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532; and a game frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game frame lamp 542. A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 540 is connected. In this example, the example in which the accessory unit 950 is drive-controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 has been described. However, the drive unit is configured to be drive-controlled by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400). Is also good.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a lending ball. Is detected, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 supplying the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off (for example, for example). , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device via another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7A to 7C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps. FIG. 7A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is started on condition that the first starting figure sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of the special figure 1” in which all the seven segments are turned on and the central one segment is turned on. Also, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “variable display of special figure 2” in which all the seven segments are turned on and the central one segment is turned on. Do.

  These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the symbol variable display according to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time in the present invention) determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of No. 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or the start of the “variable display of the special figure 2”, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is changed. Until stop display is equivalent to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present invention. Hereinafter, after the "variable display of special figure 1 or 2" is started, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays up to this point is referred to as a symbol change stop display.

  As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 9A shows ten types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure J” as the stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display. In FIG. 3A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  "Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not a special jackpot game is a jackpot is made by random selection of hardware random numbers, and the determination of whether or not it is a special jackpot is made by random selection of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (big jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  After the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the state shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, a state in which the state shifts to the time saving state is referred to as a general high probability state, and a state in which the state does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a general low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and "Special figure B" which is a 15R jackpot symbol is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These “special figure A” and “special figure B” are patterns in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that “special figure C” is 2R as compared with “special figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that “special figure D” is 2R as compared with “special figure B” which is 15R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability general figure low probability state. The "special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol called suddenly normal, and is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. Each of these "special figure E" and "special figure F" is 2R and is in a state where it does not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, and each is a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the big hit without the 2R time saving. That is, the “special figure G” and the “special figure H” are in the same state as the “special figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different. By providing "G", "special figure H" and "special figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Further, "special figure I" is a first non-standard pattern, and "special figure J" is a second non-standard pattern.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than the “special symbol A” is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 7B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decoration patterns of this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10." That the ball has won the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, that is, that the first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are provided on condition that the second ignition port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special figure ignition port 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c To perform “decorative display of decorative symbols”. Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of the "special figure B", a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 "are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special figure A”, a symbol combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, “decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3” or “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7”) ) Etc. are stopped and displayed.

  Also, a 2R jackpot called “Tokuzu E” which is called a hidden probability change, a “2R jackpot” called “Tokuzu F” suddenly or a first small hit of “Tokuzu G”, and “Tokuzu H” When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, in order to notify a 2R jackpot called "sudden probability change" of "Tokuzu C" or a 2R jackpot called "sudden time saving of" Tokuzu D "," decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5 " Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of the "special figure I" and the second deviation of the "special figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. indicate.

  FIG. 1C shows an example of a stop display symbol of a general figure. There are two types of the stop display mode of the general symbol of the present embodiment, namely, a general symbol "common symbol A" which is a winning symbol and a general symbol "common symbol B". On the basis of the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol display device 210 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs "Picture change display". Then, when notifying the winning of the normal figure variable game, “standard figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the general figure change game, “standard figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 3C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission, setting of initial values, and the like. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in the WDT 314. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, When the voltage is lower than 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to step S103. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly performed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later at regular intervals in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from an output port (output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the power supply returns to the state before the power interruption (before the power failure). )), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (if the RAM clear is required), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register of 1-byte configuration whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not).

  When the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is the specific value. If the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). Further, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting each register, setting of interruption permission is performed. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the reset, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. In other words, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the (predetermined in step S115) instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state has been returned to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, the normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power restoration command, the normal return command returns to step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. Sent to one sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for respectively generating initial values of a general-purpose winning random number counter and a special-purpose random number value counter, a general-purpose timer random number value, and a special-purpose timer The two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, assuming that the value range that can be taken as the general-purpose timer random value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from a random-number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the general-purpose timer random value, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the execution of the timer interrupt process started every predetermined cycle.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once about every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203, the WDT is periodically (set) so that the WDT 314 count value does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (in order not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once about every 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-described front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower plate full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence or absence of the detection signal is monitored by input, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. To describe the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided two times before in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ) Is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the sphere detection sensors, and the information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals from the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt processing is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) When the information matches the general winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232. It is determined that there has been a ball entry or the passage of the ordinary figure starting port 228.

  That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is no winning in the general winning opening 226. Is determined, and the following processes associated with winning in the general winning opening 226 are performed. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals of the past three times does not match the winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether or not the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value updating process and a basic random number updating process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated. Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  Also, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a general-purpose winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value are stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general winning random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the general winning random number has made one round next time. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the general-purpose winning random number has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, a counter for obtaining the random number value shown in Toku-zu 1 and a counter for obtaining the random number value shown in Toku-zu 2 are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, an effect random number update process is performed. In the effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a general symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, and measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is achieved in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, the number of prize balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception processing, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the result of determination as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If there is a prize at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number generation circuit 318 stores a random value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. A value is obtained from the register for use, and a processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) is obtained as a special figure 1 winning random number value, and a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random number value, The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  If there is a prize at the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a random number value counter of the random number generating circuit 318 corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 The value is obtained from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) is obtained as the special figure 2 winning random number value, and the value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1) is obtained as a random number value in the special figure 2 and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, one byte. Bit 7 is strobe information (when ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 , Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal drawing state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state updating processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the ordinary symbol state update process during the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting and turning off of the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 are repeated. Turn off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the ordinary symbol state update process at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the winning symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so as to be in an aspect, and when the hit flag is turned off, the ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a display mode of a missing symbol. ON / OFF drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the ordinary state updating process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 7C) and the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 7C). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  Also, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used. In the set area, the normal operation is set, and for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 opens the blade member 232a. And the information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is out of range, the normal figure out flag is turned on as described later. When the off-normal-figure flag is on, even when the above-described predetermined halt display period ends (timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general-figure state update processing also includes: In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made that the normal drawing is not operating. In the ordinary figure state updating process in the case where the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing-related lottery process, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the holding of the general figure changing game is suspended. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal map variable game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made, and if a win is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off.

  Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the general-purpose timer random number value described above is acquired as the general-purpose timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are determined based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. From among the above, one of the times at which the general figure is variably displayed on the general figure display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the general figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in the general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this normal figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state updating processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state updating processing (the special figure 2 state updating processing) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following eight processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state updating process during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the above special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED included in the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off. Lighting / light-off drive control that repeats light-off is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process is terminated.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 stores a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure. Probability variation flags are provided. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation In the case where the flag is also on and the general figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure A and the 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 7A are on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, and the general figure probability variation flag is on. Is the special figure B, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is also on, and the special figure probability change flag is also on, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is off, the general figure When the probability variation flag is on, the special map D, the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, and when the ordinary figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure E, the 2R jackpot flag is on, Probability fluctuation flag is off, ordinary figure The special figure F when the rate change flag is also off, the special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, the special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, and the first off flag is on. In this case, the lighting control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is performed so that the special figure I is in the state of the special figure I and the special figure I is in the state of the special figure I when the second outlier flag is on. In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 is being stopped and displayed is made.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), the 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), the sudden change symbol (special symbol C), and the sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), Hidden probable symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first outlier symbol (special symbol) One of the symbols I) and the second losing symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. Further, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the time reduction flag is also turned off during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the process is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, a big hit flag is turned on as described later. If the big hit flag is ON, the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used to update the RAM 308. While the special figure 2 is in operation in the setting area, a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image notifying the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. For this purpose, information indicating a winning effect period is set in a storage area of a special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined prize effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 (until the winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). 332), a signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, and a door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closed period is set in the storage area of the management timer. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing when the control is completed, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the effect waiting time is stored in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is set. Also, if the normal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set to 100 time saving times, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  Here, the time reduction means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in a normal state high probability state. The probability of hitting the general fluctuating game is higher in the general figure high probability state than in the general figure low probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general-floor change game and the fluctuation time of the special-figure fluctuation game are shorter in the general-figure high-probability state than in the general-figure low-probability state. Furthermore, the open time in one open of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start-up port 232 is more likely to be longer in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the state of high probability in the normal state than in the state of low probability in the general state. Further, as described above, the time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the ordinary low probability state is maintained. This means that if the game is in the high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning ports 234 are set in the second special figure starting port 232 until the game balls enter the jackpot during the jackpot game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases when the ball enters and the gambling property is increased. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of range, the outlier flag is turned on as described later. When the outlier flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a state where the special figure 2 is not operating is set. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (a special figure 1 state update process) is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update processing is the same as the processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state updating processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 this time. Here too, the special figure-related lottery processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery processing) is first performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery processing) Is performed (step S231). Also in these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable Even when the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 1 variable game does not start to change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. Is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In the present embodiment, the command type such as a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a big hit round number designation command, a power restoration command, a RAM clear command, etc. is specified. Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol change stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, and the like are included. In the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of a prize in the second special figure starting port 232, a first variable winning port 234, or , The presence or absence of winning in the second variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery processing, and the special figure 2 related Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are set. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag A value, information indicating the number of suspended first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like are set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission processing, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag A value, information indicating the number of suspended first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like are set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the reserved first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game are stored. Set information such as the number. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the reserved first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game are stored. Set information such as the number. In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in command data, and advance notice information (advance notice information, false notice) Advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower tray full error, is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the first variable winning port 234, or the second variable winning port 235, and via the display circuits 324, 326, and 330. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display portions 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the process proceeds to step S243. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the interruption of the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In the timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main control unit main processing. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process described above.

<Process of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S311, when the press of the chance button is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button is performed. In step S313, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, the command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, the command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in Step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and effect random number values are updated.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. Thereby, the one-frame image stored in the display area not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 406), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then sets the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S605; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 stores information on image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the drawing end of the image has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S611. Wait for is entered. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Process of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S701. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for a timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. CPU 504 of second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400. In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed.

  In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the accessory unit 950, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt triggers a timer interrupt process. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S901 of the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-controller main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-controller timer interrupt process, an effect random number value update process and the like are performed.

<Direction equipment>
Next, the effect device provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200.

  The game board 200 of this example has a rear unit 200a on which a rendering device is provided, a front unit 200c that forms the above-described gaming area 124, and a plate-shaped member that separates the rear unit 200a and the front unit 200c. It is composed of three units of the plate 200b. A game board 200b is attached to the front of the rear unit 200a, and a front unit 200c is further attached to the front of the game board 200b, so that three units of the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are provided. Constitute the gaming board 200 together. The material of the game board 200b is not particularly limited, and may be a transparent resin or wooden.

  On the right side of the game board 200b in a front view, a gate through-hole 200b1 formed by a long hole through which a part of a general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 provided in the front unit 200c can penetrate, and the gate through-hole 200b1 And a notch portion 200b2 serving as a mark for specifying the position. In addition, a cutout portion 200a1 for a gate is formed on the right side of the rear unit 200a when viewed from the front, so that a part of a general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 provided in the front unit 200c can be touched (accessed). Have been.

  FIGS. 13A and 13B are partially enlarged views showing the vicinity of the general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 in the game board 200 in an enlarged manner. In a state in which the three units of the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are integrated, the rear end of the general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 provided in the front unit 200c is connected to the game board 200b. It is configured to penetrate through the gate through hole 200b1 and reach the inside of the gate cutout 200a1 of the rear unit 200a.

  A clerk of a game store or the like can easily and quickly specify the location of the general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 by using the cutout portion 200b2 of the game board 200b as a mark, and configures the game board 200. Without disassembling the unit, it is possible to exchange the general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 or visually check the general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 through the gate notch 200a1 of the rear unit 200a. it can. For this reason, maintenance work such as replacement or repair of the general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 becomes easier than before, and the presence or absence of fraudulent activity on the general-purpose starting port (gate) 228 can be easily confirmed. In some cases, it can be prevented beforehand.

<Game ball storage department>
Next, the game ball storage provided in the rear unit 200a will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 is a schematic rear view of the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed, as viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed. FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged view showing the periphery of the game ball storage section in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, a rear unit opening 200a2 is formed in the center of the rear unit 200a so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit 200a can be visually recognized. . A center role 900 is arranged above the rear unit opening 200a2 in the horizontal direction of the rear unit 200a, and a center role opening 900a is formed in the center of the center role 900 in an outline of the character's face. ing. Although the details will be described later, the face of the character applied to the cover means 718 of the fall-and-development accessory 712 disposed behind the center accessory 900 can be visually recognized from the center accessory opening 900a.

  Below the rear unit opening 200a2, a wall 200a3 made of a transparent plate-like member and a decorative portion 200a4 formed in an uneven shape are provided. Below the decorative portion 200a4, a horizontally long dish-shaped game ball storage portion 200a5 is provided from the vicinity of the left end to the vicinity of the right end of the rear unit opening 200a2 in rear view. As shown in FIG. 15, the game ball storage unit 200a5 is a portion that can temporarily store the game balls EB1.

  As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 16, the game ball storage section 200a5 of the present example has a second storage section 200a8 having a width capable of storing up to two game balls in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a. A first storage unit 200a7, which is in communication with the second storage unit 200a8 and has a width capable of accommodating a maximum of one game ball in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a, and a second storage unit A guiding portion 200a6 having an inclined surface inclined downward toward 200a8. Since the guiding portion 200a6 has the inclined surface, it is possible to guide the game ball that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a over the wall portion 200a3 or the like to the second storage portion 200a8.

  As shown in FIG. 14, below the game ball storage section 200a5, a plurality of connectors 200a9 to which a harness for electrically connecting the accessory unit 950 or the like and the rear unit 200a can be attached, A plurality of game ball paths 200a11 are provided for guiding the game balls deviating from the area 124 to a lower plate or the like. The game ball storage section 200a5 of this example also functions as a portion for preventing a game ball falling over the wall 200a3 or the like and falling behind the rear unit 200a from contacting the connector 200a9.

  By providing such a game ball storage unit 200a5, it is possible to prevent a situation such as a short circuit of the electric system or a breakage of the connector 200a9 due to the contact of the game ball with the connector 200a9, and stable game control. You may be able to do it.

  Further, in the present example, a gap having a width of at least one game ball is formed between the wall 200a3 and the decoration 200a4, and the gap is, as shown in FIG. Functioning as a second game ball storage unit 200a10 that can temporarily store the game ball EB2 that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a after getting over the game unit 200a.

<Private goods unit>
Next, the accessory unit 950 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950.

  The accessory unit 950 is a unit attached to the back of the rear unit 200a, and in this example, the falling and deploying accessory unit 700, the ascending accessory unit 750, the launching accessory unit 800, and the V-forming accessory unit 850. Composed of In the present example, the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are configured as one unit.

<Private character unit / Falling deployable character unit>
18 to 20 are exploded perspective views of the drop-and-deployable accessory unit 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the drop-and-deployment accessory unit 700 mainly includes a base 702 having a U-shape in a front view, and a pair of left and right driving units disposed on the left side and the right side in a front view of the base 702. 704, a right and left driving unit 706, a lock release unit 708 provided on the back side of the base 702, a relay board 710 for electrically connecting the falling and unfolding accessory unit 700 to another board, And a drop-and-development accessory 712 (see FIG. 20) slidable up and down by a left and right driving unit 704 and a right and left driving unit 706.

<Private unit / falling deployable unit / Left (right) vertical drive unit>
As shown in FIG. 18, the left and right driving unit 704 includes a cylindrical driving base 704a fixed to the base 702 with screws, a left driving motor 704b attached to an upper portion of the driving base 704a, and a driving motor 704b. A drive gear 704c fixed to the drive shaft and a plurality of gears 704d for transmitting the power of the drive gear 704c are provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the left up-down drive unit 704 is fitted into the base 702 and is slidable up and down along the base 702. The slider 704e is fixed to the slider 704e. And a gear portion 704g fixed to the slider 704e.

  The gear portion 704g is disposed so as to mesh with one of the plurality of gears 704d, and operates the left drive motor 704b to rotate the gear 704d, whereby the gear portion 704g, the accessory supporting portion 704f, and the slider 704e are integrated. And slides up and down. Note that the right up-down drive unit 706 has the same structure as the left up-down drive unit 704, and is as shown in FIGS.

  The falling and unfolding role 712 described later is supported at both ends by a role supporting portion 704f of the left vertical driving portion 704 and a role supporting portion 706f of the right vertical driving portion 706, and the left driving motor 704b and the right driving By operating the motor 706b, it is possible to slide up and down. Hereinafter, the operation of sliding the drop-and-development role 712 in the up-down direction may be referred to as “the vertical movement of the drop-and-development role 712”.

<Hotpot unit / falling roll accessory unit / unlock unit>
As shown in FIG. 18, the unlocking portion 708 includes a solenoid 708a driven by the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 6, a shaft 708b slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 708a, and an engagement with the shaft 708b. The movable portion 708c is slid in the up and down direction together with the shaft portion 708b, a rotating portion 708d is rotated in conjunction with the up and down movement of the movable portion 708c, and is moved in the direction indicated by the symbol A by the rotating portion 708d. And a slidable claw 708e.

  The claw portion 708 e of the lock release portion 708 is slidably disposed inside and outside a through hole 702 a formed in the base 702. When the solenoid 708a is operated to cause the claw portion 708e to enter the through hole 702a, the base 702 is prevented from sliding downward (locked), and the drop deploying member 712 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 708a is operated to retreat the claw portion 708e out of the through-hole 702a, the base 702 is allowed to slide downward (unlocked), and the falling deploying object 712 slides downward by its own weight. I do. In addition, in the above-mentioned “vertical movement of the drop deploying agent 712”, in addition to the downward sliding by the operation of the left drive motor 704b and the right drive motor 706b, the downward sliding by the own weight of the drop deploying agent 712 is also included. included.

<Private character unit / falling deployable character unit / falling deployable character>
As shown in FIG. 20, the drop-and-deployment accessory 712 includes a long plate-shaped fourth structure 712a whose both ends are supported by the accessory support portions 704f and 706f shown in FIG. 19, and the fourth structure 712a. A first long plate-shaped structure 712b rotatably attached to the front side of the first structure, a pair of left and right third structures 712c rotatably disposed on the fourth structure 712a, A pair of left and right second structures 712d rotatably disposed on the first structure 712b, a left rotation driving unit 712e for rotating the left side of the first structure 712b in front view, It has a right rotation drive section 712f for rotationally driving the right side of the structure 712b in front view, and a plate-shaped cover means 718 (see FIG. 21) disposed on the front side of the first structure 712b. It is composed.

  The left rotation drive section 712e is for decorating the left rotation motor base 712e1 fixed to the accessory support section 704f shown in FIG. 19, the left rotation motor 712e2 attached to the left rotation motor base 712e1, and the left motor base 712e1. 712e3, a gear 712e4 for transmitting the power of the left rotation motor 712e2, and is rotatable by the gear 712e4 and fixed to the left side surface of the first structure 712b in a front view. Rotating arm 712e5.

  The right rotation drive unit 712f has substantially the same structure as the left rotation drive unit 712e, and is as shown in FIG. 20. The rotation arm 712f5 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 712f51, and the position of the detection piece 712f51 is determined. The difference from the left rotation driving unit 712e is that a sensor 712f6 that can be detected is provided. The right rotation drive section 712f includes the detection piece 712f51 and the sensor 712f6, and thus can detect whether the first structure 712b is located at the initial position (the position shown in FIG. 30A). It is possible.

  By operating the left rotation motor 712e2, the rotation arm 712e5 of the fall-and-development object 712 rotates via the gear 712e4, and the left side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712e5 is fixed is viewed from the front. It is configured to rotate (tilt) to the side. Further, by operating the right rotation motor 712f2, the rotation arm 712f5 is rotated via the gear 712f4, and the right side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712f5 is fixed is rotated to the front side (tilted). ) Is configured.

  Therefore, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2 and the right rotation motor 712f2 at the same time, the first structure 712b can be rotated (inclined) to the front side (in a direction away from the fourth structure 712a). Hereinafter, the operation of rotating (tilting) the first structure 712b of the drop-and-development accessory 712 to the front side may be referred to as “rotational operation of the drop-and-development accessory 712”.

  A base 712g is fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b, and a gear 712h and an arm 712k having external teeth meshing with the gear 712h are rotatably disposed on the base 712g. Is done. On the other hand, an engaging portion 712m that can be engaged with the arm portion 712k is fixed to the fourth structure 712a.

  When the first structure 712b returns to the initial position shown in FIG. 30A, the arm 712k on the first structure 712b side is connected to the engaging portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a. The engagement holds the first structure 712b at the initial position. On the other hand, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side, the engagement between the arm 712k on the first structure 712b side and the engagement portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a is established. It is released.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the cover means 718 is fixed to a slider 721 that can slide up and down with respect to the first structure 712b. The slider 721 is engaged with the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and is urged downward by the spring 722. When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm 712k of the first structure 712b and the slider 721 is released, the slider urged by the spring 722 721 is configured to push the cover means 718 down. Although the face of the character is given to the cover means 718 in this example, other characters, characters, identification information (for example, model name), etc. may be given.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the base portion 712g is provided with a magnet 712n for magnetically attracting the iron metal piece 712c7 provided on the pair of third structures 712c. When the 712b is inclined by about 180 ° toward the front, the pair of third structures 712c is held by the base 712g by the magnetic force.

  Further, a pair of magnets 712b1 are provided at both ends of the first structure 712b, and a left rotating motor base decorative portion 712e3 and a right rotating motor base decorative portion 712f3 correspond to the pair of magnets 712b1. The metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7 made of iron are respectively disposed at the positions where the metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7. Thereby, the first structure 712b that has returned to the initial position is drawn to the left rotating motor base decorative portion 712e3 and the right rotating motor base decorative portion 712f3 by the magnetic force, and the initial position is held.

  Further, the third structure 712c on the left side in the front view is rotatable via the support shaft 712c2 with the support 712c1 fixed to the surface on the left side in the front view of the fourth structure 712a. An arm 712c3 is provided, an upper left body 712c4 fixed to the arm 712c3, a cap 712c5 and a emblem 712c6 fixed to the upper left body 712c4.

  Further, the third structure 712c on the right side in the front view is configured to be rotatable via a support shaft 712c2 with a support portion 712c1 fixed to the right surface in the front view of the fourth structure 712a. An arm 712c3 is provided, an upper right body 712c4 fixed to the arm 712c3, a hat 712c5 and a emblem 712c6 fixed to the upper right body 712c4.

  In addition, the second structure 712d on the left side in the front view is rotatable via a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the left side in the front view of the first structure 712b via the support shaft 712d2. An arm 712d3 is provided, a lower left body 712d4 fixed to the arm 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm 712d3 and the third structure 712c. You.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the second structure 712d on the right side in the front view is provided with a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the right side in the front view of the first structure 712b, and the support portion 712d1 via the support shaft 712d2. Arm 712d3 rotatably disposed, a lower right body portion 712b4 fixed to the arm 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm 712d3 and the third structure 712c. It is configured to have.

  In the fall deploying object 712, the upper left body portion 712c4, the hat portion 712c5, and the school emblem portion 712c6 of the third structure 712c on the left side in front view, and the upper right body portion 712c4 of the third structure 712c on the right side in front view are provided. , A hat part 712c5, a school emblem part 712c6, a lower left body part 712d4 of the second structure 712d on the left side in front view, and a lower right body part 712d4 of the second structure 712d on the right side in front view. It is configured so that a character is formed.

<Private unit / falling deployable unit / light emitting means of falling deployable accessory>
FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view showing a peripheral member of the first structure 712b, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view showing a peripheral member of the fourth structure 712a. FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic front view showing the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure 712a.

  On the front side of the first structure 712b, a light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting units 714a (in this example, LEDs) is attached, and by the plurality of second light emitting units 714a, It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through the cover means 718 disposed in the front. A light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (in this example, LEDs) is attached to the back side of the fourth structure 712a, and these plurality of first light emitting means 716a are provided. Accordingly, light can be output to the front side of the fourth structure 712a through the fourth structure 712a disposed in front.

  As shown in FIG. 22, a first harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712 a and the first sub-controller 400 can be connected to the light emitting substrate 716 of the fourth structure 712 a. The connector CN1, the second connector CN2 to which a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a and the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b can be connected, and the fourth structure 712a and the left A third connector CN3 to which a harness for electrically connecting the rotation motor 712e2 can be connected, and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a to the right rotation motor 712f2 and the sensor 712f6 can be connected. A fourth connector CN4 is provided.

<Private Character Unit / Ascending Character Unit>
FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting accessory unit 750. FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 23, the lifting accessory unit 750 mainly includes a base 752, a driving unit 754 disposed on the left side of the base 752 in a front view, a first lifting accessory 756, and a second lifting accessory 756. And an accessory 758.

  The drive section 754 includes a drive base 754a fixed to the base 752 with screws, a drive motor 754b attached to the drive base 754a, a drive gear 754c fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 754b, and a drive gear 754c. Gears 754d for transmitting the power, a sensor 754e capable of detecting the position of a detection piece 754d1 provided on one of the gears 754d, and one of the gears 754d And a cam 754f that meshes with.

  The first lifting role 756 includes a first lifting role base 756a, and an arm 756b that can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around the left side of the first lifting role base 756a in front view as a fulcrum. A first ascending role slider 756c slidable in the vertical direction in conjunction with the rotation of the arm portion 756b, and a first ascent attached to the first ascending role slider 756c and representing the appearance of the rock And an accessory decoration section 756d.

  The arm portion 756b is engaged with the front side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754d of the driving portion 754, and rotates clockwise or counterclockwise by rotating the cam 754d. The first rising role slider 756c and the first rising role decoration portion 756d rise when the arm 756b rotates counterclockwise, and fall when the arm 756b rotates clockwise.

  The second lifting role base 758a includes a second lifting role base 758a, a second lifting role slider 758b vertically slidable with respect to the second lifting role base 758a, and a second lifting role slider 758b. A second rising role decoration 758c that represents the appearance of a rock, a lock release portion 758d that can prevent the second rising role slider 758b from descending, and a cover that is attached to the rising role slider 758b. 758e.

  The second lifting role slider 758b is disposed at a position where it can be engaged with the first lifting role slider 756c. It is configured to rise in conjunction with the accessory slider 756c (details will be described later).

  The lock release portion 758d has a solenoid 758d1, a shaft portion 758d2 slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 758d1, and a claw portion 758d3 engaged with the shaft portion 758d2 and slidable in the direction indicated by the symbol B. It is composed.

  As will be described in detail later, when the solenoid 758d1 is operated to extend the claw portion 758d3, the lowering of the second lifting role slider 758b is prevented (locked), and the second lifting role slider 758b is fixed to the second lifting role slider 758b. The lifted second ornament decoration 758c is held at the raised position. On the other hand, when the solenoid 758d1 is operated to retreat the claw portion 758d3, the lowering of the second lifting role slider 758b is permitted (unlocked), and the second lifting role slider 758b fixed to the second lifting role slider 758b. The second ascending role decoration portion 758c slides downward by its own weight.

<Private character unit / Launch special character unit>
FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the launching accessory unit 800, and FIG. 25 is an enlarged perspective view of a relay board 806 included in the launching accessory unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the launching accessory unit 800 is mainly provided with a plate-shaped rear unit 802, a launching mechanism 804 disposed below the rear unit 802, and a right side of the rear unit 802 in a front view. Relay board 806 disposed in the vicinity of the provided game ball passage 802a, a protective film 808 affixed to the surface of the relay board 806, and a spacer for forming a movable space for a small piece accessory 804d composed of a plurality of small pieces. 810 and a plate-shaped front unit 812 that covers the front of the spacer 810.

  The launching mechanism 804 includes a slider 804a provided at a position where the slider 804a can be engaged with the rear convex portion of the cam 754f of the lifting accessory unit 750, a spring 804b for urging the slider 804a upward, and moving the slider 804a up and down. A guide portion 804c for guiding the small piece portion 804d in a free state above the slider 804a, and a pair of guide rails 804e for guiding the small piece portion 804d in the direction of the slider 804a. It is composed.

  As shown in FIG. 25 in an enlarged manner, a protective film 808 is attached to the front of the relay board 806 except for connectors and the like. The relay board 806 is disposed in the game ball path 802a of the rear unit 802. In this example, the game passing through the game ball path 802a is performed by attaching the protective film 808 to the front surface of the relay board 806. The configuration is such that the ball does not contact the relay board 806 (so that the game ball passing through the game ball path 802a and the relay board 806 are insulated). For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation such as a short circuit of the electric system or breakage of the relay board 806 in the relay board 806, and it may be possible to perform stable game control.

<Accessory unit / V-forming accessory unit>
FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the V forming accessory unit 850. As shown in FIG. 26, the V forming role unit 850 includes a V forming role left unit 852 disposed on the left side of the pachinko machine 100 in front view, and a V forming role disposed on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 in front view. And an accessory right unit 854. Since the V-forming role left unit 852 and the V-forming role right unit 854 have a symmetrical structure, a detailed description of the V-forming role right unit 854 will be omitted below.

  The V-forming role left unit 852 includes a V-forming role left base 852a, a driving unit 852b disposed at a lower end of the V-forming role left base 852a, and a left link unit rotatable by the driving unit 852b. 852c, a decorative portion 852d fixed to the V-forming role left base 852a, a left light-emitting substrate 852e disposed above the V-forming role left base 852a, and a V-forming left movable attached to the left link portion 852c. A portion 852f, a V forming left decorative portion 852g attached to the V forming left movable portion 852f, and a left light guiding slope 852h attached to the left light emitting substrate 852e.

  The drive unit 852b includes a drive motor 852b1 attached to the V forming accessory left base 852a, a drive gear 852b2 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 852b1, and a cam 852b3 rotated by the drive gear 852b2. It is configured to have.

  The V-forming left movable unit 852f of the V-forming role left unit 852 can rotate counterclockwise by a predetermined angle around the upper end by driving the driving unit 852b. The V-forming right movable portion 854f can be rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle around the upper end portion by driving the driving portion 854b. Therefore, by simultaneously driving the driving units 852b and 854d, a V-shaped left movable unit 852f and a V-formed right movable unit 854f form a V-shape in a front view.

  FIG. 27 is an external perspective view of the right light guide plate 854h of the V-forming role right unit 854 as viewed from the rear side. Ejector pin marks 854h1 formed during molding remain at two places above the right light guide plate 854h. The ejector pin mark 854h1 is a recess formed inevitably when the right light guide plate 854h is molded. The thickness of the portion including the ejector pin mark 854h1 is smaller than the thickness of the portion without the ejector pin mark 854h1. .

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 26, the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the right light emitting substrate 854e of the V forming accessory right unit 854 is disposed so as to face the ejector pin mark 854h1. With such a structure, in some cases, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) and enhance the effect.

<Private unit / Center special unit>
FIG. 28 is a front view of the center accessory unit 900, and FIG. 29 is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900.

  The center role 900 has a decorative portion 902 disposed on the upper portion of the game board 200 and a light emitting substrate 904 disposed on the back side of the decorative portion 902. The decorative portion 902 of this example includes a plurality of first portions 902a (see FIG. 29) radially arranged at predetermined intervals around the center accessory opening portion 900a, and an inner portion of the first portion 902a. And a second portion 902b (see FIG. 28) which is arranged at the center portion and forms the outer edge of the center part opening 900a.

  The first portion 902a is a portion formed of a transparent or translucent member capable of transmitting light, and in this example, a part of the plurality of first portions 902a is a light emitting substrate 904 of the center role 900. And the light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b described above. Can be transmitted. On the other hand, the second portion 902b is a portion made of an opaque member that cannot transmit light.

<Operation of the drop deployer>
Next, the operation of the falling and deploying accessory 712 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the falling and deploying accessory 712 can perform a vertical operation of sliding in the vertical direction and a rotating operation of rotating the first structure 712b forward.

<Operation of falling and deploying character / up and down operation>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the vertical movement of the drop-and-development role unit 712 by extracting only the drop-and-development role unit 700, and FIG. It is a figure showing up-and-down operation of deployment combination thing 712.

  FIGS. 30 (a) and 31 (a) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the falling and deploying accessory 712 is located at an initial position in the vertical movement. The initial position in the up and down motion is a position where the entirety of the drop deployment role object 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center role feature 900 above the game board 200.

  At this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the face of the character) provided on the front of the cover means 718 of the drop-and-development accessory 712 is visually recognized from the front through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. It becomes possible, and an integrated effect is provided by the center role 900 and the drop deployment role 712. Also, the initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (do not overlap) with the falling and deploying accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display device is viewed from the front. All of the display area 208 is visible.

  FIGS. 30 (b) and 31 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view in a case where the drop deploying object 712 is located at an intermediate position in the vertical movement. When the drop deploying member 712 is located at the initial position in the vertical movement, when the solenoid 708a (see FIG. 18) is operated to retreat the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 slides downward. Is allowed (unlocked), the falling and deploying object 712 slides downward by its own weight, and reaches the intermediate position.

  The intermediate position in the vertical movement is a position where the falling and deploying role 712 at the initial position descends and a part of the falling and deploying role 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center role 900. In this intermediate position, a part of the decoration provided on the front surface of the cover means 718 of the drop-and-deployment accessory 712 is visible through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. The middle position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) the falling and deploying object 712, and displays the decorative symbol from the front. Although the upper part of the display area of the device 208 is invisible, most of the display area is visible.

  30 (c) and 31 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the falling and deploying object 712 is located at the maximum movement position in the vertical movement. The maximum movement position in the vertical movement is a position at which the falling and deploying role 712 at the intermediate position further descends, and a part of the falling and deploying role 712 does not overlap the center role 900 (does not overlap). The maximum movement position is a position where the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) the falling and deploying role 712, and is decorated from the front. Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.

<Operation / Rotation of falling and deploying role>
FIG. 32 is a view showing the rotation operation of the drop-and-development accessory 712 by extracting only the drop-and-development accessory unit 700, and FIGS. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a rotation operation of a drop-and-deployer 700 in 700.

  FIGS. 32A and 33A are front views of the case where the first structure 712b of the drop-and-deployment accessory 712 is rotated by 45 ° toward the near side in the rotation operation. In the process of rotating the first structure 712b from 0 ° to 45 ° toward the near side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocking with the rotation of the first structure 712b replace the first structure 712b. While rotating in the direction approaching each other as a fulcrum, two left and right third structures 712c interlocking with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d approach each other with the fourth structure 712a as a fulcrum. Rotate in the direction.

  When the first structure 712b starts rotating from the initial position to the front side, and the engagement between the arm 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 (see FIG. 21) is released, the slider 721 pushes the cover means 718 down. Therefore, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is inclined by about 45 ° toward the front, but the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 32 (b) and 33 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the drop-and-deployer 712 is rotated by 90 ° toward the near side in the rotation operation. In the process of rotating the first structure 712b forward from 45 ° to 90 °, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structure 712b become the first structure 712b. The two left and right third structures 712c, which rotate in the direction closer to the front side than in the state rotated 45 ° toward the front side and are interlocked with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d, The structure 712b is rotated in a direction closer to the structure than when the structure 712b is rotated 45 ° toward the front.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined about 90 degrees toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 becomes invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a ( In this example, LED) becomes visible from the front.

  In addition, since the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712b, the cover means 718 is inclined about 90 ° toward the front. Even if it does, the amount of protrusion of the cover means 718 to the front side can be minimized. Thus, the game board 200 can be prevented from being unnecessarily thick, and a situation in which the cover unit 718 comes into contact with another member can be prevented beforehand.

  FIGS. 32C and 34A are front views showing a case where the first structure 712b of the drop-and-deployment accessory 712 is rotated by 135 ° toward the front in the rotation operation. In the process of rotating the first structure 712b forward from 90 ° to 135 °, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocking with the rotation of the first structure 712b become the first structure 712b. The left and right third structures 712c, which rotate in a direction closer to the front side than in the state rotated by 90 ° to the near side and interlock with the rotation of the left and right two second structures 712d, The structure 712b rotates closer to the direction than the structure in which the structure 712b is rotated by 90 ° toward the near side.

  Further, the cover means 718 is inclined at an angle of about 135 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a () disposed on the fourth structure 712a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 32D and 34B show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the falling and deploying accessory 712 is rotated by 180 ° toward the front in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 135 ° to 180 ° toward the near side, the two left and right second structures 712d interlocking with the rotation of the first structure 712b become the first structure 712b. It is in a state of contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the side than the state of rotating 135 ° to the front side, and two third right and left third members interlocked with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d. The structures 712c are in contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the first structure 712b than in the state in which the first structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the near side.

  Also, the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c are in contact with each other, and a character is formed by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c. Is done. The cover means 718 is inclined by about 180 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, and the light emitting means 716a (the book) provided on the fourth structure 712a is not provided. In the example, a part of the LED) is also covered by the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c, and thus cannot be seen from the front.

<Operation of the ascending character unit and the launching character unit>
FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the rising role unit 750 and the launching role unit 800 by extracting only the rising role unit 750 and the launching role unit 800, and FIG. 36 is installed on the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the operation | movement of the rising accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 of a state.

  FIGS. 35 (a) and 36 (a) show front views of a state in which the lifting accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are located at the initial position, and FIGS. 35 (b) and 36 ( (b) shows a front view of the process in which the first ascent component 756d and the second ascent component 758c are raised by the operation of the ascent component unit 750.

  When the cam 754f rotates clockwise by the operation of the drive motor 754b, the arm 756b is rotated counterclockwise by being pushed up by the front-side convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754f. When the arm portion 756b rotates counterclockwise, the first lifting role slider 756c engaged with the arm portion 756b slides upward, and the first lifting role slider 756c fixed to the first lifting role slider 756c. Riser decoration 756d rises.

  When the first lifting role slider 756c slides upward by a predetermined amount, the engaging portion 756c1 of the first lifting role slider 756c is moved to the engaging portion 758b1 of the second lifting role slider 758b. Engage. As a result, the second rising role slider 758b slides upward together with the first rising role slider 756c, and the second rising role decoration portion 758c fixed to the second rising role slider 758b is moved. To rise.

  FIGS. 35 (c) and 36 (c) show front views of a state in which the first rising role decoration part 756d and the second rising role decoration part 758c are raised to the maximum height. When the sensor 754e (see FIG. 23) detects that the cam 754f has further rotated clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 35B to the position shown in FIG. 35C, the solenoid 758d1 operates. The claw portion 758d3 extends in the direction of the second lifting role slider 758b. When the claw 758d3 extends, the downward movement of the second lifting role slider 758b is disabled, and the lowering of the second lifting role slider 758b is prevented (locked). The second lifting accessory decoration portion 758c fixed to the object slider 758b is held at the maximum height shown in FIG.

  FIG. 35D and FIG. 36D show front views of the state where the launching accessory unit 800 is operated. The cam 754f further rotates counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 35 (c), and the engagement between the front-side protrusion 754f1 of the cam 754f and the arm 756b is released. As a result, the first lifting role slider 756c engaged with the arm portion 756b slides downward, and the first lifting role decoration portion 756d fixed to the first lifting role slider 756c moves downward. (An effect expressing that a part of the climbing accessory unit 750 showing the appearance of the rock has been destroyed and sunk downward) is executed.

  On the other hand, since the lowering of the second lifting role slider 758b remains blocked (locked) by the elongated claw portion 758d3, the second lifting role fixed to the second lifting role slider 758b. The object decoration portion 758c remains held at the raised position.

  Further, when the engagement between the rear convex portion of the cam 754f and the slider 804a (see FIG. 24) of the launching accessory unit 800 is released by the rotation of the cam 754f, the slider 804a urged by the spring 804b moves upward. In this case, an effect is produced in which the small piece object 804d is slid upward, and the small piece object 804d is vigorously launched upward (an effect expressing that a part of the ascending role unit 750 showing the appearance of the rock has scattered).

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 35 (d) and 36 (d), in addition to the production by the rising character unit 750 and the launching character unit 800, the falling and deploying character 712 is moved to the positions shown in FIGS. After the effect of sliding downward from the initial position shown in (a) to the maximum movement position shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 31 (c) is executed, the rotation operation of the drop-and-development accessory 712 (shown in FIG. 32) (Rotational motion).

<Game ball passage>
In this example, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the ascending role unit 750 is provided with a first game ball path 750a and a second game ball path 750b through which game balls can pass, and Below one game ball passage 750a, an inclined surface 750c that is inclined downward in the front direction is formed. The inclined surface 750c plays a role of guiding the game balls that have passed through the first game ball passage 750a to below the game board 200. In the case of an enclosed game machine, the game balls that have passed through the first game ball passage 750a and the second game ball passage 750b may be guided to the circulation route.

<Gaming ball storage unit and ascending accessory unit>
FIG. 37 (a) is a side sectional view of the gaming board 200 in a state where the lifting accessory unit 750 is located at the initial position, and FIG. 37 (b) is a state in which the lifting accessory unit 750 is operating. 3 is a side sectional view of the gaming board 200 of FIG.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example includes two game ball storage units, the game ball storage unit 200a5 and the second game ball storage unit 200a10. However, as shown in FIG. 37 (a), a game ball that has fallen behind the pachinko machine 100 after climbing over the wall 200a3 of the game board 200 or the like is stored in any of the game ball storage units 200a5 and 200a10. Instead, there is a case where the robot reaches the upper part of the rising accessory unit 750 located at the initial position and comes into contact with the second rising accessory decoration part 758c.

  In such a case, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example moves the gaming ball in contact with the second elevating accessory decoration unit 758c with the operation of the elevating accessory unit 750, thereby moving the elevating auditors unit 750. From the area, it can be guided to the game ball storage section 200a5 ahead. For this reason, there is a case where the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 is not hindered by the gaming ball, and a failure of the ascending accessory unit 750 can be prevented beforehand.

<Operation of V-forming accessory unit>
FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the V forming accessory unit 850 by extracting only the V forming accessory unit 850, and FIG. 39 is an operation of the V forming accessory unit 850 installed on the game board 200. FIG.

  FIGS. 38 (a) and 39 (a) show front views when the V forming accessory unit 850 is located at the initial position. FIGS. 38 (b) and 39 (b) The front view in the case where the forming accessory unit 850 is operated and located at the intermediate position is shown.

  When the drive motor 852b1 of the V-forming role left unit 852 is driven, the V-forming left movable portion 852f rotates counterclockwise via the left link 852c, and drives the drive motor 854b1 of the V-forming role right unit 854. Then, the V-formed right movable portion 854f rotates clockwise via the right link portion 854c. As a result, the V-forming left movable portion 852f and the V-forming right movable portion 854f are brought closer to each other than the initial position.

  FIGS. 38 (c) and 39 (c) show front views when the V forming accessory unit 850 is operated and located at the maximum movement position. When the V-formed left movable part 852f and the V-formed right movable part 854f rotate to the maximum movement position, they are closer to each other than the intermediate position, and are viewed from the front by the V-formed left movable part 852f and the V-formed right movable part 854f. Form a V-shape.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is determined), the V forming accessory unit 850 is operated, and the V forming left movable section 852f and the V forming right movable section 854f. By forming a V-shape in a front view, it is configured to indicate to a player that a predetermined condition has been satisfied.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example is provided with a game device provided with the production means (for example, the drop-and-deployer 712 shown in FIG. 20). A stage, wherein the production means is a means having a first structure (for example, a first structure 712b shown in FIG. 20), and the production means is a second structure (for example, FIG. 20) Wherein the first structure is a structure capable of performing an unfolding effect, and the second structure is moved in accordance with the unfolding effect. The first structure is moved from a first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to a fourth position (for example, FIG. 32D) by the development effecting operation. To the position rotated 180 ° to the front from the initial position). The second structure is capable of being moved from a second position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to a fifth position (for example, FIG. ), The first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the first position is the second structure at the second position. (E.g., the first structure 712b), as shown in FIG. 32D, the first structure (e.g., the first structure 712b) at the fourth position. The body 712b) is a structure located behind the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fifth position, and the first structure is located at the fourth position. The foremost part of the effect means located at the first means is the effect means wherein the first structure is located at the first position. A game console that is located forward of the frontmost part of the game console.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, various effects can be provided while having a simple structure, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases. In some cases, the unfolding effect may provide a novel effect in which the effect means approaches the player.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 30, the first structure (for example, first structure 712b) at the first position is the second structure (for example, second structure) at the second position. May be a structure that covers at least a part of the structure 712d) from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 32D, the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fifth position is different from the first structure (for example, the second structure 712d) at the fourth position. , A structure that covers at least a part of the first structure 712b) from the front.

  Further, the effect means is means having first light emitting means (for example, first light emitting means 716a shown in FIG. 21 (b)), and as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the first position The first structure may be a structure that covers at least a part of the first light emitting unit from the front. Further, as shown in FIGS. 32A to 32D, the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a) is provided with the first structure (for example, the first structure). 712b) from the first position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32A) to the fourth position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 32D) becomes visible to the player. It may be a means.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32D, the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the fourth position is provided with the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means). The structure 716a) may not be covered from the front. Further, the effect means is a means having a third structure (for example, a third structure 712c shown in FIG. 20), and the third structure is the first structure (for example, a third structure 712c). It may be a structure that moves in response to the movement of one structure 712b). Further, the third structure is a structure movable from a third position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 30A) to a sixth position (for example, a position shown in FIG. 32D). It may be.

  Further, at least a part of a second end (for example, an upper end) of the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d shown in FIG. 32D) at the fifth position is A third structure (for example, a third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32 (d)) at a sixth position, capable of contacting at least a part of a third end (for example, a lower end); Is also good.

  Further, the third structure at the sixth position (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32D) is the same as the first light-emitting means (for example, the first light-emitting means 716a). A structure that covers at least a part from the front may be used. Further, the third structure at the sixth position (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 32D) is the same as the first light-emitting means (for example, the first light-emitting means 716a). It may be a structure that partially covers from the front.

  Further, the production means is means having a second light emitting means (for example, a second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 21A), and the second light emitting means is such that the first structure is The light-emitting device may be capable of emitting light when located at the first position. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is a means provided on the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b). You may.

  Further, the effect means is means having a cover means (for example, a cover means 718 shown in FIG. 21A). For example, as shown in FIG. 21, the cover means is provided with the second light emitting means ( For example, it is a means for covering the second light emitting means 714a). For example, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to (d), the cover means is provided for the first structure of the first structure. The light emitting device may be a device capable of changing a relative position with respect to the second light emitting device during movement from the position to the fourth position.

  Further, the rendering means is means having a third light emitting means (for example, a light emitting means (LED) provided on the back side of the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 21A). May be means capable of emitting light when the first structure is located at the fourth position. Further, the third light emitting means may be means provided on the first structure. Further, the effect means is a means having a light-emitting substrate (for example, a light-emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 21A), and the second light-emitting means (for example, the second light-emitting means 714a) is a light-emitting substrate. And the third light emitting means may be means provided on a second surface of the light emitting substrate.

  In addition, the forefront part (the part that protrudes most forward) of the staging means (for example, the drop deploying object 712 shown in FIG. 32D) in which the first structure is located at the fourth position is the aforementioned The first structure may be located in front of the forefront part of the effect means (for example, the drop deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 30) located at the first position.

  Further, the first structure may be a rotatable structure. In addition, a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 2) may be provided, and the effect unit may be a unit that can move in front of the display unit. Further, the first structure may be a structure rotatable around an axis parallel to the display means (for example, an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 2). .

  Further, the effect means may be means having a second light emitting substrate, and the first light emitting means may be means provided on the second light emitting substrate. Further, it may be provided with effect control means, and the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate which relays the effect control means and the light emitting substrate. Further, the effect means may be means having driving means, and the driving means may be means for moving the first structure.

  Further, the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control unit and the driving unit. Further, the effect means may be a means having a detecting means, and the detecting means may be a means for detecting the first structure located at the first position. Further, the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control means and the detection means.

  The second light-emitting substrate is a substrate having a first connector, the first connector is connected to a first harness, and the first harness is connected to the driving unit and the detection unit. Connected to the means, the first harness may be a bifurcated harness.

  The effect means may be a means having a fourth structure, and the fourth structure may be a structure having the second light emitting substrate. One of the first structure and the fourth structure is a structure having a first magnet, and the other of the first structure and the fourth structure is A first magnetic body or a structure having a second magnet, wherein the first magnetic body or the second magnet is attracted to the first magnet, whereby the first structure is The first position may be maintained.

  Further, the first magnet or the second magnet may be attracted to the first magnet via non-magnetism. Also, one of the first structure and the third structure is a structure having a third magnet, and the other of the first structure and the third structure is A structure having a second magnetic body or a fourth magnet, wherein the third magnetic body or the fourth magnet is attracted to the third magnet, whereby the third structure is The sixth position may be maintained.

  Further, the second magnetic body or the fourth magnet may be attracted to the third magnet via a non-magnetic body. Further, the effect means may be means having two or three or more drive means. Also, the effect means may be means having two or more of the detection means. The effect means may be means having two or three or more second structures. Further, the effect means may be means having two or three or more of the third structure. The first structure may include first image display means capable of displaying an image at the first position. Further, the first structure may include second image display means capable of displaying an image at the fourth position.

  Further, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine not shown) according to the present example includes a first driving unit (for example, a driving motor 754b shown in FIG. 23) and a second driving unit. (For example, the solenoid 758d1 shown in FIG. 23), the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration part 758c of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23), and the second effect means (for example, And a first ascending accessory decoration section 756d) of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23, wherein the first effecting means is driven by the first driving means. (For example, the operation of raising the second elevating accessory decoration unit 758c shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C), and the second effecting means is Second operation by driving the first driving means For example, it is means capable of performing the operation of raising the first ascending accessory decoration unit 756d shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C), and the second operation by the second effect means. During the period, the first operation by the first effector is executed, and the first effector is driven by the second driver to perform a third operation (e.g., by operating a solenoid 758d1 to perform a third operation). (A motion of lowering the second ascending accessory decoration 758c).

  According to the gaming table according to this example, various effects can be provided while having a simple structure, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases.

  Further, the first operation may be an operation different from the third operation. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), the first operation is performed when the first production means is in the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)). ) To a second position (for example, the position at the maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c)). Further, in the third operation, the first effect means (for example, the second rising accessory decoration part 758c) moves to the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A). It may be an operation.

  In the second operation, the second production means may be configured such that the second production means moves from a third position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 35A) to a fourth position (for example, a maximum height shown in FIG. 35C). (Movement to the position). Further, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending role decoration part 758c) contacts (engages) with the second effect means (for example, the first ascending role decoration part 756d). Accordingly, the first operation may be performed by the means.

  In addition, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending role decoration part 758c) is prevented from descending (locked) by a claw part 758d3 shown in a fifth position (for example, FIG. 35D). The fifth position is the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) and the second position (for example, FIG. 35). (The position of the maximum height shown in (c)).

  Further, the second position (for example, the position at the maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c)) is a position higher than the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)), The first directing means may move from the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c)) to the fifth position (for example, a nail shown in FIG. 35 (d) by its own weight. (A position where the lowering is prevented (locked) by the portion 758d3). In addition, the first rendering means is driven by the second drive means to move to the fifth position (for example, a position where the downward movement is prevented (locked) by the claw 758d3 shown in FIG. 35D). ) To a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 35A).

  Further, the first driving means may be a motor or a solenoid. Further, the second driving means may be a motor or a solenoid. In addition, a third effect unit may be provided, and the third effect unit may be a unit capable of executing a fourth operation by driving the first driving unit. In addition, a fourth effect unit may be provided, and the fourth effect unit may be a unit capable of executing a fifth operation by driving the first driving unit. Further, the first effect unit may include at least one of a light emitting unit, a display unit, and another driving unit. The second effect means may include at least one of a light emitting means, a display means, and another driving means.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine not shown) according to the present embodiment discharges the game balls that have entered the stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 2) out of the gaming table. (For example, an arm 756b shown in FIG. 35B, a first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35C, and a second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 35C). It is a gaming table provided with an effect movable body provided with (for example, a rising accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 35).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, an effect may be provided, and at the same time, unnecessary gaming balls may be discharged out of the gaming table.

  Further, the effect movable body may be a movable body located behind the stage. The effect movable body is a movable body having an arm portion (for example, an arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 37). For example, as shown in FIGS. May be an arm portion whose angle can be changed by the operation of the effect movable body, and the arm portion may be an arm portion capable of discharging a game ball by changing the angle. Further, a first ball passage means (for example, a first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35 (c)) through which game balls discharged by the operation of the effect movable body can pass may be provided.

  Further, the first ball passage means (for example, the first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 35 (c)) is provided on one side in the left-right direction of the effect movable body (for example, the front of the ascending role unit 750). (A left side as viewed). In addition, the game device includes second ball passage means (for example, a second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 35 (c)) through which game balls discharged by the operation of the effect movable body can pass. Is also good. Further, the second ball passage means may be a means provided on the other side in the left-right direction of the movable body (for example, on the right side in the front view of the lifting accessory unit 750). Further, the second ball passage means may be a means provided with a substrate (for example, a relay substrate 806 shown in FIGS. 24 and 25), and the substrate may be an insulating means (for example, FIG. The protection film 808) shown in FIG. 25 may be provided.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine (not shown)) according to the present embodiment can receive game balls that have entered behind a stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 2). A gaming table provided with a receiving portion (for example, a game ball storage portion 200a5 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, a clerk of an amusement store or the like can easily remove unnecessary game balls, thereby improving maintainability in some cases.

  Further, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of storing game balls. Further, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of discharging a game ball. The receiving portion is a receiving portion capable of storing game balls when in the first state, and discharges the game balls when in the second state. The first state is a state in which game balls that have entered the rear of the stage can be stored, and the second state has entered the rear of the stage. It may be a state in which game balls cannot be stored.

  Further, the receiving portion has a storage portion capable of storing game balls, and the receiving portion includes a guide portion (for example, a guide portion 200a6 shown in FIG. 16) for guiding game balls to the storage portion. It may have one. Further, the guiding section may be inclined toward the storage section. Further, a wall portion (for example, a wall portion 200a3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 16) is provided between the stage and the receiving portion. For example, as shown in FIGS. And the receiving portion may be provided at a position lower than the upper end portion of the wall portion.

  In addition, a movable body (for example, a second rising accessory decoration section 758d of the rising accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 37) is provided, and the receiving section may be a receiving section provided in front of the movable body. . Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball that has been in contact with the movable body by the operation of the movable body. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 37, the receiving portion may be provided in an area different from an operation area of the movable body. Further, a ball passage (for example, a game ball passage 200a11 shown in FIG. 14) may be provided below the receiving portion.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine (not shown)) according to the present example has a structure (for example, a center part opening 900a shown in FIG. 28) having a window (for example, a center role opening 900a shown in FIG. 28). 28 is a gaming table provided with a center role 900 shown in FIG. 28 and a movable body (for example, a drop deploying role 712 shown in FIG. 28), and a part of the movable body is moved from the window to the player. Is a game console that is visible.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, the manner of showing the movable body can be diversified, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced in some cases.

  In addition, when the movable body (for example, the drop deploying agent 712 shown in FIG. 28) is located at a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 31A), the movable body (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. When a part of the movable body is visible to the player and the movable body is located at the second position (for example, the maximum movement position shown in FIG. 31 (c)), the player moves the movable body through the window. It may not be visible.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31A, the movable body located at the first position may be a movable body that overlaps with the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the movable body located at the second position may be a movable body that does not overlap with the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the movable body located at the second position may be visible to a player.

  In addition, a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B) is provided, and the movable body located at the second position is a movable body overlapping the display unit. There may be. Further, the movable body may be a movable body having a light emitting unit (for example, a second light emitting unit 714a shown in FIG. 21A).

  Further, at least a part of the structure (for example, the first portion 902a of the center part opening 900a shown in FIG. 29) may be transparent or translucent. Further, the portion of the movable body located at the first position, which overlaps with the structure, may be a portion having a first display (for example, a character). The first display may be a character or a character. In addition, a part of the movable body that can be visually recognized by the player from the window may have a second display (for example, the face of the character illustrated in FIG. 28). Further, the second display may be a display having an outline corresponding to the outline of the window. The window may have a transmissive portion having transparency, and the window may be an opening.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine (not shown)) according to the present embodiment includes a decorative cover (for example, a decorative cover for the center role 900 shown in FIG. 28) and a light emitting device capable of emitting light. 28 (e.g., the drop deploying object 712 shown in FIG. 28), wherein the first portion 902 a of the transparent portion of the decorative cover (for example, the center portion opening 900 a shown in FIG. 29). ), The player can visually recognize the light from the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is a movable means.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, the effects produced by the light emitting means can be diversified, and the effect of the effects can be enhanced in some cases.

  Further, the decorative cover may be a non-movable decorative cover (for example, a decorative cover of the center role 900 shown in FIG. 28). Also, as shown in FIG. 31C, the light-emitting means (for example, the drop deploying part 712 shown in FIG. 28) without passing through the decorative cover (for example, the decorative cover of the center part 900 shown in FIG. 318). May be visible to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the light emitting means (for example, the falling and developing role object 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the first position is provided with the decorative cover (for example, the center role material shown in FIG. 318). 900 decorative cover). Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the light emitting means (for example, the falling and developing role 712 shown in FIG. 28) located at the second position is provided with the decorative cover (for example, the center role as shown in FIG. 318). 900 decorative cover).

  Further, the light emitting means (for example, the drop deploying agent 712 shown in FIG. 28) is a means having a second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the drop deploying agent 712), and the second decorative cover is provided. May be transparent or translucent, and the second decorative cover may be a decorative cover movable in accordance with the movement of the light emitting unit.

  Also, the light of the light emitting means is light that can be visually recognized by a player through the second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the falling and deploying role 712) and the decorative cover (for example, the center role 900). There may be. In addition, a second light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, a light-emitting substrate 904 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29) is provided, and a player can visually recognize light from the second light-emitting means through the decorative cover. The second light emitting means may be an immovable means.

  A first portion (for example, a first portion 902a shown in FIG. 29) of the decorative cover is a portion through which light of the light emitting unit can pass, and a first portion of the decorative cover (for example, first portion 902a). The first portion 902a) shown in FIG. 29 may be a portion through which the light of the second light emitting means can pass. Further, the first portion may be colorless or colored.

  The second part of the decorative cover (for example, the second part 902b shown in FIG. 28) is a part that does not transmit light of the light emitting unit, and the second part of the decorative cover (for example, FIG. 28). May be a part that does not transmit light of the second light emitting means. Further, the decorative cover may be configured to be movable. The light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the first mode at the first position, and the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the second mode at the second position. The first aspect and the second aspect may be different or the same.

<Modification Example 1 of Falling Deployment Character>
Next, a drop-and-development role 730 according to a first modification of the drop-and-development role 712 will be described.

<Falling and deploying role 730>
FIG. 40 (a) is a front view and a side view of the drop deploying object 730 located at the first operating position, and FIG. 40 (b) is a drop deploying object located at the second operating position. It is a front view and a side view of the accessory 730, and FIG. 17C is a front view and a side view of the falling and deploying accessory 730 located at the third operation position.

  In each of FIGS. 7A to 7C, the figure shown on the left side as viewed in the drawing is a front view of the fall deploying object 730, and the figure shown on the right side as viewed in the drawing is a falling figure. It is a side view of the deployment role thing 730. Further, in the side view, the horizontal direction of the paper surface is the front-back direction of the falling and deploying role 730, and the left side of the drawing is the front direction of the falling and developing role 730 (in this example, the same as the front direction of the gaming table). Direction), and the right side of the drawing is the rearward direction of the drop deploying object 730 (in this example, the same direction as the rear direction of the gaming table).

<Structure of drop deploying object 730>
Next, the structure of the drop deploying object 730 will be described. The drop deploying object 730 includes a first structure 731, a second structure 732 having substantially the same shape as the first structure 731 and being slightly smaller than the first structure 731, A support arm 733 rotatably supports the one structure 731 and the second structure 732, and a drive unit (not shown) for driving the support arm 733 to rotate. Note that the sizes and shapes of the first structure and the second structure according to the present invention are not limited to the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 of the present example.

  The first structure 731 covers the entire first plate-shaped base 731a, the first light-emitting substrate 731b fixed to the first base 731a, and the first light-emitting substrate 731b. , And a first cover 731c disposed in the first position. On a mounting surface on one side of the first light emitting substrate 731b, a plurality of first light emitting means 731d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at predetermined intervals. The first cover 731c is made of a transparent or translucent member, and can transmit light emitted from the first light emitting unit 731d.

  The second structure 732 covers the entire plate-shaped second base 732a, the second light-emitting substrate 732b fixed to the second base 732a, and the second light-emitting substrate 732b. , And a second cover 732c disposed on the second cover 732c. On a mounting surface on one side of the second light emitting substrate 732b, a plurality of second light emitting means 732d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at predetermined intervals. The second cover 732c is made of a transparent or translucent member, and can transmit light emitted from the second light emitting unit 732d.

  The drop deploying member 730 is arranged such that the first base member 731a of the first structure member 731 and the second base member 732a of the second structure member 732 are opposed to each other while being shifted in a predetermined direction, and the two members are bonded to each other. It is constituted by integrating. That is, in this example, the relative positions of the first structure 731 and the second structure 732 are configured not to change.

  Note that the first structure and the second structure according to the present invention are not limited to a structure in which the two structures are integrated, and the first structure and the second structure are separate bodies. And each may be individually movable. That is, the first structure and the second structure according to the present invention may have relative positions that change. Further, when both are separated, a first driving unit that drives at least the first structure and a second driving unit that drives at least the second structure may be provided. .

  Further, the first light emitting means 731d and the second light emitting means 732d are not limited to LEDs, but may be replaced with (or in addition to) LEDs, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, and an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence). Other display means and light emitting means including a display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  In this example, the surface area of the first cover 731c is made larger than the surface area of the second cover 732c, and the number of the first light emitting means 731d (LED) is made larger than the number of the second light emitting means 732d (LED). Have also many. Thus, the effect of the first base body 731 and the effect of the second base body 732 can be made different, and the effect of the game console can be enhanced. In addition, the surface area of the first cover 731c and the second cover 732c may be the same, and the number of the first light emitting means 731d (LED) and the number of the second light emitting means 732d (LED) may be the same. .

<Operation of Falling Deployment 730>
Next, the operation of the drop deploying object 730 will be described. The drop-and-deployer 730 rotates the support arm 733 in a predetermined direction (in this example, a counterclockwise direction indicated by a symbol A in FIG. 40A) by a driving unit (for example, a driving motor) not shown. The first structure 731 and the second structure 732 can be integrally rotated. Note that the rotation direction of the drop deploying object 730 is not limited to this example, and may be replaced (or added) in a predetermined direction, for example, in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, (reference numeral A in FIG. 40A). (A clockwise direction opposite to the direction indicated by).

<Operation of Falling and Rolling Actor / First Operation Position (Initial Operation Position)>
The state shown in FIG. 40A is a state in which the fall-and-development accessory 730 is located at a first operation position (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “initial operation position”). In this first operating position, the first structure 731 is located in front of the second structure 732. For this reason, as shown in the front view of FIG. 40A, a state where a part of the second structure 732 overlaps with a part of the first structure 731 (the state of the second structure 732). Although a part of the second structure 732 is not visible from the front, the other part of the second structure 732 is not overlapped with the first structure 731 (the other part of the second structure 732 is not visible). (Visible from the front).

  Further, in this state, the first light emitting means 731d can emit light, and an effect or a notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d can be executed. Here, as an effect or a notice by light emission of the first light emitting means 731d, for example, a light emission effect as a notice, an issuance effect as a pre-reading notice, a light emission effect as a reach effect, a light emission effect as a big hit effect, or a bonus effect , An effect for enlivening benefits such as RT and AT, an effect indicating the pressing order of the stop button, a gaseous effect (fake effect), and the like. The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means 731d is not particularly limited, and includes all lighting, partial lighting, blinking at predetermined intervals, irregular blinking, lighting according to a predetermined lighting pattern, and the like.

<Operation of fall deploying object 730 / second operation position>
Subsequently, when the drop-and-development accessory 730 is located at the first operation position, the support arm 733 is rotated by 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction indicated by a symbol A in FIG. 40A). Then, the drop deploying object 730 rotates to the second operation position shown in FIG. In the second operation position, the position of the front end 732e of the second structure 732 in the front-rear direction is the front position compared to the position of the front end 731e of the first structure 731 in the front-rear direction. In addition, although illustration is omitted, in the middle of the process in which the falling and deploying accessory 730 rotates from the first operation position to the second operation position, the position of the front end 732e of the second structure 732 in the front-rear direction is There is a state where the front end portion 731e of the first structure 731 has the same position as the position in the front-rear direction.

<Operation of falling deploying object 730 / third operation position>
Subsequently, when the fall-and-development role object 730 is located at the second operation position, the support arm 733 is rotated by 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction indicated by a symbol A in FIG. 40A). Then, the drop deploying object 730 rotates to the third operation position shown in FIG. In the third operation position, the second structure 732 is located in front of the first structure 731. Therefore, the second structure 732 has a state in which the drop-and-development accessory 730 is located in the third operation position, compared to a state in which the drop-and-development accessory 730 is located in the first operation position. , It is easy to see from the front.

  In this state, the position of the front end 732f of the second structure 732 in the front-rear direction is the front position of the position of the front end 731f of the first structure 731 in the front-rear direction. Further, in this state, a state in which a part of the first structure 731 overlaps a part of the second structure 732 (a state in which a part of the first structure 731 is not visible from the front). However, another part of the first structure 731 does not overlap with the second structure 732 (the other part of the first structure 731 is visible from the front).

  Further, in this state, the second light emitting means 732d can emit light, and an effect or a notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d can be executed. Here, as the effect or notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d, for example, as a light emission effect as a notice, an issuance effect as a prefetch notice, a light emission effect as a reach effect, a light emission effect as a big hit effect, a bonus effect , An effect for enlivening benefits such as RT and AT, an effect indicating the pressing order of the stop button, a gaseous effect (fake effect), and the like. The light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit 732d is not particularly limited, and includes, for example, all lighting, partial lighting, blinking at predetermined intervals, irregular blinking, and lighting according to a predetermined lighting pattern.

  In this example, in the state where the drop deploying object 730 is located at the first operation position, the effect and the advance notice can be made by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d, but other states (for example, The effect and the notice may be executable in a state where the drop deploying object 730 is moving from the first operation position to the second operation position). Further, in the state where the drop deploying object 730 is located at the third operation position, the effect and the announcement can be made by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d. In a state where the object 730 is moving from the second operation position to the third operation position), an effect or a notice may be executable.

<Initial operation of the drop deploying object 730>
Next, the initial operation of the drop deploying object 730 will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the initial operation of the falling deploying object 730 in chronological order. For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 41, the illustration of the first cover 731c of the first structure 731 and the second cover 732c of the second structure 732 is omitted, and FIGS. The illustration of the support arm 733 is omitted in FIG.

  In this example, the support arm 733 of the drop-and-development role 730 is configured to be vertically movable with respect to the gaming board 200, and the drop-and-development role 730 can be moved in the vertical direction by a driving unit (not shown). In addition, as described above, by rotationally driving the support arm 733, the fall-and-development role object 730 itself can also rotate. Note that the shape and size of the support arm 733 are not particularly limited, and the support arm 733 may be formed of a transparent, translucent, or colored member, or a light emitting unit (for example, an LED) may be provided on the support arm 733. The arrangement may be such that light emission is possible by arrangement, or a wiring cable may be arranged behind the support arm 733.

  In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed on the game board 200, and the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is configured to be vertically movable in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, when the falling and deploying character 730 descends (or ascends) to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with a part of the falling and deploying character 730. (A state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 cannot be visually recognized from the front). Note that the falling and unfolding object 730 may be configured to be vertically movable behind the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with a part of the drop-and-development accessory 730, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a drop-and-development accessory. It may be configured such that a privilege (eg, a big hit, a bonus, an AT, or the like) advantageous to the player is more easily provided than a state where the part 730 is not overlapped.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 100 has the V-forming role left unit 852 disposed on the left side in the front view of the game board 200 as a role other than the drop deploying role 730, and on the right side in the front view of the game board 200. A V-forming role right unit 854 is disposed, and a first lifting role 756 and a second lifting role 758 are disposed below the gaming board 200 in a front view. In other words, the pachinko machine 100 includes, as a structure (third structure) other than the first structure 731 and the second structure 732, the V-forming role left unit 852 and the V-forming role right unit 854. , A first lifting role 756, a second lifting role 758, and the like.

  The state shown in FIG. 41 (a) is a state in which the fall-and-development accessory 730 is located at the uppermost portion (initial position) of the game board 200, and is a state immediately before starting the initial operation. In this state, the drop deploying object 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. In addition, this state is a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with a part of the falling and developing role object 730.

  The following state shown in FIG. 40 (b) is a state in which the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is lowered from the initial position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the lowering of the support arm 733. is there. In this state, the drop deploying object 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. In addition, this state is a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730.

  The state shown in FIG. 40 (c) is such that the support arm 733 is driven to rotate forward, so that the fall / deployment accessory 730 maintains the vertical position and the first operation position shown in FIG. 40 (a). This is a state after performing a 90-degree rotation in the forward direction from the (initial operation position) to the second operation position shown in FIG. Also, in this state, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is partially overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730, but is more overlapped than the state shown in FIG. The displayed display area is smaller.

  The state shown in FIG. 40 (d) is such that the supporting arm 733 is driven to rotate forward, so that the drop-and-development accessory 730 maintains the vertical position and the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b). 40 to a third operation position shown in FIG. 40 (c) after a 90-degree rotation has been made in the forward rotation. Also, this state is a state where a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with a part of the falling and deploying accessory 730, as shown in FIG. 41 (b) and FIG. 41 (c). The state differs from the state in the display area to be overlapped.

  In the state shown in FIG. 40 (e), the falling / deploying accessory 730 is rotated in the rearward direction, so that the falling / deploying accessory 730 maintains the vertical position, and the third operation position shown in FIG. 40 (c). To the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b), after the 90-degree rotating operation is performed in the backward direction, which is the same state as the state shown in FIG. 41 (c).

  In the state shown in FIG. 40 (f), the falling / deployment role object 730 is driven to rotate rearward so that the falling / deploying accessory 730 maintains the vertical position and the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b). 40 to a first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. 40 (a), after the 90-degree rotation operation has been performed in the backward direction, and in the same state as the state shown in FIG. 41 (b). is there.

  The following state shown in FIG. 40 (g) is a state in which the falling and unfolding accessory 730 has returned from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the initial position shown in FIG. Yes, just after the initial operation is completed. In this state, the drop deploying object 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. In addition, this state is a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with a part of the falling and developing role object 730.

<Notice by light emission of light emitting means>
Next, a notice by light emission of the light emitting means will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a notice by light emission of the light emitting means in chronological order. 42, the first cover 731c of the first structure 731, the second cover 732c of the second structure 732, and the support arm 733 are omitted in FIG. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 can execute an effect or a notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d and an effect or a notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d. In this example, when the first notice start condition is satisfied in the state shown in FIG. 42A (in this example, during variable display), the first light emission is performed as shown in FIG. The notice by the light emission of the means 731d (in this example, the notice of the mode of lighting all the first light emitting means 731d) has started. Here, as the “satisfaction of the first notice start condition”, for example, it is determined that the success / failure result by pre-reading is determined to be a hit, that the transition to the reach state is determined, and the success / failure determination result is determined to be the big hit This means that the bonus has been internally won, that the AT has been assigned, that the production lottery has been won, and the like.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 42 (c) is a state in which the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is lowered from the initial position shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the lowering of the support arm 733. is there. In this state, the drop-and-deployer 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. 40A, and continues to give notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. Also, in this state, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, a part of the display area for displaying the decorative symbol) falls during the execution of the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. It is in a state of being overlapped with a part of the deployment role object 730.

  The state shown in FIG. 42 (d) is such that the support arm 733 is driven to rotate forward, so that the fall / deployment accessory 730 maintains the vertical position and the first operating position shown in FIG. 40 (a). This is a state after performing a 90-degree rotation in the forward direction from the (initial operation position) to the second operation position shown in FIG. In this state, while the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d is continued, the notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d (in this example, all Notice of the mode of lighting the second light emitting means 732d) has begun. Here, as the “satisfaction of the second notice start condition”, for example, it is determined that the success / failure result by pre-reading is determined to be a hit, that it is determined to shift to the reach state, and the success / failure determination result is determined to be a big hit This means that the bonus has been internally won, that the AT has been assigned, that the production lottery has been won, and the like.

  In this state, part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, part of the display area for displaying the decorative symbol) emits light from the first light emitting means 731d and the second light emitting means 732d. Is overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 in which the notice is executed, but the overlapped display area is smaller than the state shown in FIG. 42 (c).

  In the state shown in FIG. 42 (e), the falling / deploying accessory 730 is rotated in the forward direction so that the falling / deploying role object 730 maintains the vertical position and the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b). 40 to a third operation position shown in FIG. 40 (c) after a 90-degree rotation has been made in the forward rotation. In this state, when the first notice end condition is satisfied, the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d is ended, while the notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d is continued. Here, as the “establishment of the first notice end condition”, for example, the fact that the fall-and-development accessory 730 has shifted to the third operation position, and the predetermined time has elapsed since the first notice start condition was satisfied And that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change.

  Also, in this state, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, a part of the display area for displaying the decorative symbol) falls while executing the notice by the light emission of the second light emitting unit 732d. Although it is in a state of being overlapped with a part of the development role object 730, the display area to be overlapped is larger than the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the notice by the light emission of the second light emitting means 732d is ended when the second notice end condition is satisfied. Here, as the “establishment of the second notice end condition”, for example, the fact that the fall / deployment accessory 730 has shifted to the third operation position, or the predetermined time has elapsed since the second notice start condition was established And that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change.

  In the state shown in FIG. 42 (g), the falling / deploying accessory 730 is rotated in the rearward direction, so that the fall / deployment accessory 730 maintains the vertical position and the third operation position shown in FIG. 40 (c). To the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b) after the 90-degree rotating operation is performed in the backward direction. In the state shown in FIG. 42 (h), the falling / deploying accessory 730 is rotated in the backward direction so that the falling / deploying role object 730 maintains the vertical position and the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b). To the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. 40A after the 90-degree rotation operation is performed in the backward direction.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 42 (i) and (j), when the support arm 733 is raised, the falling and unfolding accessory 730 is moved from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the initial state shown in FIG. This is a state in which the robot has returned to the position, and is a state immediately after completing the initial operation. In this state, the drop deploying object 730 is located at the first operation position (initial operation position) shown in FIG. Further, this state is a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, a part of the display area for displaying the decorative symbol) is not overlapped with a part of the falling and deploying accessory 730. .

<Example of display by display means>
Next, a display example of the display unit 208 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 shows an effect in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in this order in chronological order. 43 (a) to 43 (h) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200, the general figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, and the general figure. The holding lamp 216, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted and shown.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in order from the top, a special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, a fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, and a special figure 2 reserved number display area a3 , A fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, an ordinary figure reserved number display area a5, and a fourth symbol display area a6 of the ordinary figure are arranged. The special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 is located on the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. From the center to the right side of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central part of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 803 for displaying a variable icon.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows a state where the special figure fluctuating game has been completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the second special symbol "special figure J" is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. “Decoration 5-Decoration 3-Decoration 4” indicating a loss is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208 a, 208 b, 208 c of the decoration symbol display device 208. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the special figure 2 variable game is being stopped, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays, for example, a first unusual symbol “special figure I” as a stop symbol mode. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable game is stopped is displayed. In addition, the normal figure fluctuation game is stopped, and for example, an out-of-design symbol “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed on the general figure display device 210 as a stop symbol mode. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the general figure, a display indicating that the general figure changing game is stopped is displayed. Further, in the fluctuating icon display area 803, fluctuating icons are not displayed and default display is performed.

  Three LEDs are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, which indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is "3". Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three reserved displays h1 to h3 are displayed, indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is three. In the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, a number “3” indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first and second hold displays h1 and h2 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 are normal hold displays, for example, black circle images are displayed. The third hold display h3 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the result of the look-ahead of the special figure 1, for example, a character image of "grandfather" is displayed.

  All the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, indicating that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is “0”. In addition, the special figure 2 reserved number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the reserved display is not performed and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. In the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, a number “0” indicating the reserved number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  All the LEDs are turned off in the general-purpose holding lamp 216, indicating that the reserved number of the general-purpose figure is “0”. Further, in the fluctuating icon display area 803, fluctuating icons are not displayed and default display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a number “0” indicating the number of reserved general symbols is displayed in the reserved number of ordinary symbols display area a5.

  FIG. 43 (b) shows the execution of the special figure 1 changing game, and the special figure 1 display device 212 changes the special figure 1 in which the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment are repeated. This shows a state where the display is being performed. The decorative symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol in which the decorative symbol moves from top to bottom (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. Since the special figure 1 holding game is reduced by one with the start of the special figure 1 floating game, two LEDs are lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is “2”. It is shown. In addition, two reserved displays h1 and h2 are displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is two. In the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, a number “2” indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a normal hold display, and the second hold display h2 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 1. In the floating icon display area 803 at the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, floating icons are displayed as black circle images as if the digested hold has moved.

  FIG. 43C shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the variable icon display area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a predetermined time has elapsed in the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 43D shows a state in which the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle and right symbol display areas 208b and 208c. ing. In FIG. 43 (e), the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b displays the decoration symbol. This shows a state in which the variable display is being performed.

  FIG. 43 (f) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the second special symbol "special figure J" is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. "Decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 7" indicating a loss is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 43 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of the special figure 1. The left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. One LED is lit on the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 because the special figure 1 holding game is reduced by one with the start of the special figure 1 floating game, and the holding number of the special figure 1 is “1”. It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, one reserved display h1 is displayed, indicating that the reserved number of the special figure 1 is one. In the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, a number “1” indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 1. In the fluctuation icon display area 803, a black circle image is displayed as if the digested hold has moved.

  FIG. 43H shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the variable icon display area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a predetermined time has elapsed in the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the middle and right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, respectively.

  FIG. 44 shows an effect and the like in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 44A to 44H show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in this order in a time series. The state shown in FIG. 44A is continued from the state shown in FIG.

  44A, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b displays the decoration symbol. This shows a normal reach state in which a fluctuation display is performed. FIG. 44 (b) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game has been completed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the second special symbol "special figure J" is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. “Decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” indicating a loss is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 44C shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of the special figure 1. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. Since the reservation of the special figure 1 is reduced by one with the start of the special figure 1 floating game, all the LEDs are turned off in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is “0”. It is shown. In addition, the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that the reserved display is not performed and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 0. In the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, a number “0” indicating the reserved number of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the fluctuating icon display area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fluctuating icon is displayed by an image of “grandfather” as if the digested hold has moved. Further, in the effect display area of the decorative design display device 208, a button press suggestion display is displayed with an image imitating the chance button 136 together with a message "press a button!" In addition, a button reception period display image indicating a period during which the press of the chance button 136 is received is displayed.

  If the player presses the chance button 136 or the button reception period elapses within the remaining time shown in the button reception period display image, as shown in FIG. Is displayed as a preview image that gives a preview of the result. The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  In FIG. 44 (e), the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b performs the variation display of the decoration symbol. This shows a normal reach state. FIG. 44 (f) shows a state where normal reach has been developed to super reach. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the display area is used as an effect display area. In this example, a super reach image is displayed in which the samurai shouts out loud, "I'm a match!"

  In FIG. 44 (g), the character "Win" is displayed when the samurai wins the game, and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. It shows the state where it was turned on.

  FIG. 44 (h) shows “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration” in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, which have been reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, move to the center of the display area to indicate a big hit. 7 "is enlarged and stopped. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. As described above, in this example, the special figure effect display corresponding to the special figure changing game as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 is performed.

  FIG. 45 shows an example of an effect produced by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45A illustrates a time setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 45B illustrates an effect setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 45C illustrates a volume setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 45D illustrates a luminance setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player can make various settings for the pachinko machine 100 on each screen shown in FIGS. 45 (a) to (d).

  FIG. 45 (e) illustrates a hit display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A large screen at the center of the display area is used as the effect display area, and in this example, a hit display image is displayed in which a samurai riding a horse is moving on a mountain path. Around the display area, for example, in the upper left corner, a special jackpot image of a number “7” indicating that the jackpot is a special jackpot is displayed. In addition, an acquired ball number display image is displayed on the upper side of the display area (in this example, “80 balls” is displayed). Further, a round number display image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area (in this example, “1R” is displayed). Further, in the lower right corner, a big hit number (number of consecutive holidays) display image is displayed (in this example, "big hit number: 1" is displayed).

  FIG. 45 (f) shows an example of a power support display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the power support state, the special figure fluctuating game is performed, and the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is performed in the center left and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c in the display area. In the power support state, the player should make a right strike to let many game balls pass through the second general figure starting port 229, and make the special figure 2 starting port 232 receive many game balls. For this reason, a character string of “Please hit right!” And the enlarged game ball in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the decorative symbol change display as the background display, and a launch direction by a clockwise arrow Suggestion is displayed. In addition, the fluctuating icon display area 803 displays a fluctuating icon based on the image of the special reserve 2 of the special figure 2, and a single normal reserve display h4 is provided in the special figure 2 pending display area.

  FIG. 45 (g) illustrates a demonstration display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the character string “Daito” is displayed. FIG. 45H illustrates an error display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a door open error screen and a full tank error screen are displayed.

<Example in which the display area of the display means overlaps with the movable body>
Next, an example in which the display area of the display means is overlapped (hidden) by the movable body will be described with reference to FIG. In the present example, an example will be described in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the falling and unfolding accessory 730. However, the display means is not limited to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable member is not limited thereto. It is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the falling deploying object 730.

  In addition, the display area overlapping with the falling and unfolding role 730 is referred to as a “display area extending over a part of the middle symbol display area 208b, a part of the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 and a part of the variable icon display area 803”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be used, or a plurality of display areas that are not continuous in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, FIG. The number-of-suspended display area a3 and the variable icon display area 803) may be used. Further, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be overlapped with a part of the falling and unfolding accessory 730 (for example, a support arm 733).

  FIG. 46A shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the falling and deploying accessory 730 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 43B. FIG. In this example, a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and a part of the normal hold display (black circle image) displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 are displayed. A part of the fluctuating icon display (black circle image) displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 803 is overlapped by the falling and deploying role object 730 which is executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46 (b) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the drop-and-development accessory 730 in the state where the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. FIG. In this example, a part of the decorative symbol (decoration 6) displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the look-ahead reserved display (the character image of “Grandfather”) displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801 are displayed. A part and a part of the fluctuating icon display (black circle image) displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 803 are overlapped with the falling and deploying character 730 executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. ing.

  FIG. 46C shows a state in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. It is a figure showing an example which overlaps. In this example, a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, a part of the message “press the button!” Displayed in the effect display area, and a display in the effect display area All of the displayed button press suggestions (images imitating the chance button 136), a part of the button reception period display image (meter display) displayed in the effect display area, and the change icon display area 803 A part of the fluctuating icon display (the character image of “Grandfather”) is overlapped with the falling and deploying role object 730 that is executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46D shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the drop-and-development accessory 730 in a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 shown in FIG. FIG. In this example, a part of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and a preview image (for imitating a Japanese flag) for previewing the result of the special figure 1 fluctuating game displayed in the effect display area Part of the image and the part of the fluctuating icon display (the “grandfather” character image) displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 803 are the drop deployer executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. Overlapped by object 730.

  FIG. 46E is a diagram showing an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the drop deploying object 730 in the normal reach state shown in FIG. In this example, a part of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the fluctuating icon display (the character image of “grandpa”) displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 803 are the first. It overlaps with the falling and deploying role object 730 that is performing the notice by the light emission of the light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46F shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the falling and deploying accessory 730 in a state where the normal reach shown in FIG. FIG. In this example, a part of a super reach image (an image in which a warrior shouts "Let's play!") Displayed in the effect display area is executing a notice by light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. It is overlapped by the falling deploying object 730.

  FIG. 46 (g) is a diagram showing an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the drop-and-development accessory 730 when the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 44 (g) is stopped and displayed. It is. In this example, a part of the result image of the super reach displayed in the effect display area (the image in which the character “Win” is displayed when the warrior has won the game) is partially emitted by the first light emitting unit 731d. It is overlapped with the falling deploying object 730 executing the notice.

  FIG. 46 (h) shows a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating the big hit shown in FIG. It is a figure which showed the example which overlaps with the drop deployment role thing 730. In this example, a part of the decorative symbol (decoration 7) displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and a part of the fluctuating icon display area 803 drop during the execution of the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. It is overlapped by the deployment role 730.

  FIG. 46 (i) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the drop-and-development accessory 730 in a state where the hit display screen shown in FIG. 45 (e) is displayed. FIG. In this example, a part of the hit display image (an image in which a samurai riding a horse is traveling on a mountain path) displayed in the effect display area and a part of the big hit count (number of consecutive villas) display image are: It overlaps with the falling and deploying role 730 which is executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

  FIG. 46 (j) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the falling and developing role object 730 in the state where the display screen during electric support shown in FIG. 45 (f) is displayed. FIG. In the present example, a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the background display (the character string of “Please right-click!” A part of the launch direction suggestion display by the clockwise arrow on the game ball and a part of the fluctuating icon display (black circle image) displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 803 are caused by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d. It is overlapped by the falling deploying object 730 executing the notice.

  FIG. 46 (k) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the falling and unfolding accessory 730 when the demo display screen shown in FIG. 45 (g) is displayed. FIG. In this example, a part of the character string “Daito” displayed in the effect display area is overlapped by the falling and deploying role object 730 that is executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting unit 731d.

  FIG. 46 (l) shows an example in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the falling and developing accessory 730 when the error display screen shown in FIG. 45 (h) is displayed. FIG. In this example, a part of the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, the door open error screen (the character string of “door open error”) displayed in the effect display area, and the full tank error A part of the screen (the character string of “full tank error”), a part of the normal reservation display (black circle image) displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display area 801, and a variable icon display area 803 are displayed. A part of the fluctuating icon display (black circle image) is overlapped with the falling and deploying role object 730 that is executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

<Example of overlapping a movable body with another movable body>
Next, an example of overlapping (hiding) a movable body with another movable body will be described with reference to FIG. In the present example, an example will be described in which a part of the falling and deploying character 730 is overlapped by the launching character unit 800. However, other movable bodies are not limited to the launching character unit 800, and other movable members may be used. Needless to say, the movable body (which is overlapped by the body) is not limited to the drop deploying object 730.

  In addition, the area that overlaps with the launching character unit 800 is defined as “a part of the falling and deploying character 730”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the entire area of the falling and deploying character 730. In addition, there may be a plurality of areas (for example, the left side of the first structure 731 in the front view and the right side of the second structure 732 in the front view) that are not continuous in the area of the drop deploying object 730. Further, when the launching accessory unit 800 is composed of a plurality of members, one of the plurality of members may overlap, but the other member may not overlap.

  FIG. 47A shows a state in which a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with a part of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state of overlapping. 730 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a part of a region 730 is further overlapped with a launching accessory unit 800. FIG. In this example, a part of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is overlapped by the falling and deploying character 730 executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d, A part of the area of the falling deploying accessory 730 in which the notice by the light emitting means 731d is being executed is further overlapped with the launching accessory unit 800.

<Example of overlapping another movable body with a movable body>
Next, an example of overlapping (hiding) another movable body with the movable body will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, an example in which a part of the launching accessory unit 800 is overlapped with the falling and deploying accessory 730 will be described. However, other movable bodies are not limited to the launching accessory unit 800, and other movable bodies may be used. Needless to say, the movable body (overlapping the body) is not limited to the falling deploying object 730.

  In addition, the area that overlaps with the falling and deploying character 730 is referred to as “part of the launching character unit 800”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the entire area of the launching character unit 800. However, a plurality of areas that are not continuous in the area of the launching accessory unit 800 (for example, a part of the launching accessory unit 800 on the left side in front view and a part on the right side in front view) may be used. Further, when the launching accessory unit 800 includes a plurality of members, one of the plurality of members may be overlapped, but the other member may not be overlapped.

  FIG. 47 (b) shows a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the launch character unit in a state where a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the launch character unit 800. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a part of an area 800 is further overlapped with a drop deploying object 730. In this example, a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is overlapped by the launching character unit 800, and a part of the area of the launching character unit 800 Are further overlapped with the falling and deploying role object 730 which is executing the notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 731d.

<Visual recognition mode of the fall deploying object 730 at the initial position>
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, a visual recognition mode of the drop deploying object 730 at the initial position will be described.

  FIG. 48A is a diagram illustrating an example in which the falling and unfolding accessory 730 at the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 735 having the opening 735a. In this example, a decoration means 735 having a rectangular opening 735a is provided at the upper part of the game board 200, and a drop-and-development accessory 730 is vertically movably arranged on the back side of the decoration means 735.

  The opening 735a of the decorating means 735 includes a part of the first structure 731 and a part of the second structure 732 of the drop-and-development object 730 when the drop-and-development object 730 is located at the initial position. Is designed so that the material, size, shape, and position can be viewed from the front. For this reason, a part of the area of the drop-and-development accessory 730 at the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 735, but another part of the area of the drop-and-development accessory 730 is overlapped by the decoration means 735. And can be visually recognized from the front through the opening 735a. Note that the opening 735a of the decorating means 735 includes a part of the first structure 731 of the drop-and-development accessory 730 and a portion of the second structure 732 in a state where the drop-and-development accessory 730 is located at the initial position. The size, shape, and position may be such that only one of them can be viewed from the front. Further, the size of one viewable region of the part of the first structure 731 and the size of the other viewable region of the second structure 732 may be different.

  FIG. 48B is a diagram showing an example in which the falling and unfolding accessory 730 at the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 736 having the notch 736a. In this example, a decoration means 736 having a cutout 736a extending upward from the lower end is provided at the upper part of the game board 200, and a drop deploying member 730 is vertically movably arranged on the back side of the decoration means 736. ing.

  The cutout portion 736a of the decorating means 736 holds a part of the first structure 731 and one of the second structures 732 of the drop-and-development object 730 in a state where the drop-and-development object 730 is located at the initial position. The material, size, shape and position are designed so that the part can be seen from the front. For this reason, a part of the area of the drop-and-development accessory 730 at the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 736, but another part of the area of the drop-and-development accessory 730 is overlapped by the decoration means 736. And can be visually recognized from the front through the notch 736a. Note that the notch 736a of the decorating means 736 is configured such that a part of the first structure 731 and the second structure The size, shape, and position may be such that only one of them can be viewed from the front. Further, the size of one viewable region of the part of the first structure 731 and the size of the other viewable region of the second structure 732 may be different.

  FIG. 48C is a diagram showing an example in which the drop deploying role 730 at the initial position is overlapped by the center role 900 (see FIG. 28 and the like). In this example, the falling and deploying role 730 is arranged on the rear side of the center role 900 so as to be vertically movable.

  In the state where the drop deploying agent 730 is located at the initial position, a part of the first structure 731 and a portion of the second structure 732 of the drop deploying agent 730 are viewed from the front. It is made of a member that cannot be visually recognized (in this example, a member that is opaque and larger than the drop deploying object 730). Therefore, the entire area of the drop deploying object 730 at the initial position is overlapped by the decoration means 736. In addition, by forming the center role 900 with a transmissive member (for example, a transmission liquid crystal device, a magic mirror, and instantaneous dimming glass), a part or all of the area of the drop deployment role 730 is visually recognized from the front. It may be possible. Further, in this case, the size of one visible region of the part of the first structure 731 and the size of the other visible region of the second structure 732 may be different.

<Variation example 2 of falling and deploying role>
Next, a falling and deploying role 760 according to a second modification of the falling and deploying role 712 will be described.

<Falling and deploying role 760>
FIG. 49 (a) is a front view and a side view of the drop deploying object 760 located at the first operating position, and FIG. 49 (b) is a drop deploying object located at the second operating position. It is a front view and a side view of the accessory 760, and FIG. 17C is a front view and a side view of the falling and deploying accessory 760 located at the third operation position.

  In each of FIGS. 7A to 7C, the figure shown on the left side of the drawing is a front view of the drop deploying object 760, and the figure shown on the right side of the drawing is a falling figure. It is a side view of the deployment role thing 760. Further, in the side view, the horizontal direction of the paper surface is the front-back direction of the drop-and-development accessory 760, and the left side toward the paper surface is the front direction of the drop-and-development accessory 760 (in this example, the same as the front direction of the gaming table). Direction), and the right side of the drawing is the rearward direction of the falling and deploying role 760 (in this example, the same direction as the rearward direction of the gaming table).

<Structure of the drop deploying accessory 760>
Next, the structure of the drop deploying object 760 will be described. The drop deploying object 760 includes a first structure 761, a second structure 762 having a different shape from the first structure 761, and a support arm 763 that rotatably supports the first structure 761. A first drive unit (not shown) for driving the support arm 763 to rotate; a support arm 764 for rotatably supporting the second structure 762; and a second drive for driving the support arm 764 to rotate. (Not shown).

  The first structure 761 includes a first base 761a having a T-shape in a side view, a first light-emitting substrate 761b fixed to the first base 761a, and an entirety of the first light-emitting substrate 761b. And a first cover 761c disposed so as to cover On a mounting surface on one side of the first light emitting substrate 761b, a plurality of first light emitting units 761d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at predetermined intervals. The first cover 761c is made of a transparent or translucent member, and can transmit light emitted from the first light emitting unit 761d.

  The second structure 762 includes a second base body 762a having a C shape in a side view, a second light emitting board 762b fixed to the second base body 762a, and a tip of the second light emitting board 762b. And a second cover 762c arranged to cover the portion. A plurality of second light emitting means 762d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at a predetermined interval on the mounting surface on one side at the tip of the second light emitting substrate 762b. The second cover 762c is made of a transparent or translucent member, and can transmit light emitted from the second light emitting unit 762d.

  The drop-and-deployment object 760 is different from the first structure 761 and the second structure 762 in that the first structure 761 can be rotated by rotating the support arm 763 and the support arm 764 can be rotated. By rotating, the second structure 762 can be rotated. Note that either one of the first structure 761 and the second structure 762 may be fixed (immovable).

  In this example, the number of the first light emitting means 761d (LED) is larger than the number of the second light emitting means 762d (LED). This makes it possible to make the production mode by the first base body 761 different from the production mode by the second base body 762, and to enhance the production effect of the gaming table. Note that the number of the first light emitting means 761d (LED) and the number of the second light emitting means 762d (LED) may be the same.

<Operation of Falling Deployment Agent 760>
Next, the operation of the drop deploying accessory 760 will be described. The falling and unfolding accessory 760 rotates the support arm 763 in a predetermined direction (in this example, a clockwise direction indicated by a symbol B in FIG. 49A) by a driving unit (for example, a driving motor) not shown. The first structure 731 is rotatable, and the support arm 764 is rotated in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction indicated by a symbol B in FIG. 49A) by a driving unit (for example, a driving motor) not shown. Thus, the second structure 762 can be rotated. In addition, the rotation direction of the drop deploying object 760 is not limited to this example, and may be replaced with (or added to) the predetermined direction, for example, in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, a reference sign B in FIG. (A counterclockwise direction opposite to the direction indicated by).

<Operation of Falling and Rolling Object 760 / First Operation Position (Initial Operation Position)>
The state shown in FIG. 49A is a state in which the fall-and-development accessory 760 is located at a first operation position (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “initial operation position”). In this first operating position, the first structure 761 is located in front of the second structure 762. For this reason, as shown in the front view of FIG. 49A, a state where a part of the second structure 762 overlaps a part of the first structure 761 (the state of the second structure 762). Although a part is invisible from the front), another part of the second structure 762 is not overlapped with the first structure 761 (the other part of the second structure 762 is not visible). (Visible from the front). Further, in this state, the first light emitting means 761d can emit light, and an effect or a notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 761d can be executed.

<Operation of fall deploying object 760 / second operation position>
Subsequently, when the drop-and-development accessory 760 is located at the first operating position, the support arm 763 is rotated by 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction indicated by the symbol B in FIG. 49A). The drop deploying object 760 rotates to the second operation position shown in FIG. In the second operation position, the position of the front end 762e of the second structure 762 in the front-rear direction is the front position compared to the position of the front end 761e of the first structure 761 in the front-rear direction. Although illustration is omitted, in the middle of the process in which the falling and deploying accessory 760 rotates from the first operation position to the second operation position, the position of the front end 762e of the second structure 762 in the front-rear direction is There is a state where the front end portion 761e of the first structure 761 has the same position as the position in the front-rear direction. Further, in this state, the second light emitting means 762d can emit light, and effects and notices can be executed by the light emission of the second light emitting means 762d.

<Operation of falling deploying object 760 / third operation position>
Subsequently, when the drop-and-development accessory 760 is located at the second operation position, the support arm 763 is rotated by 180 degrees in a predetermined direction (the clockwise direction indicated by the symbol B in FIG. 49A). The drop deploying object 760 rotates to the third operating position shown in FIG. In the third operation position, the second structure 762 is located in front of the first structure 761. Therefore, the second structure 762 has a state in which the drop-and-development accessory 760 is located in the third operating position, compared to a state in which the drop-and-development accessory 760 is located in the first operating position. , It is easy to see from the front.

  In this state, the position in the front-rear direction of the front end 762f of the second structure 762 is the front position compared to the position in the front-rear direction of the front end 761f of the first structure 731. Further, in this state, a state where a part of the first structure 761 overlaps a part of the second structure 762 (a state where a part of the first structure 761 is not visible from the front). However, the other part of the first structure 761 is not overlapped with the second structure 762 (the other part of the first structure 761 is visible from the front). Further, in this state, the second light emitting means 762d can emit light, and effects and notices can be executed by the light emission of the second light emitting means 762d.

<Variation 3 of Falling Developing Agent>
Next, a drop-and-development role 770 according to a third modification of the drop-and-development role 712 is described.

<Falling and deploying role 770>
FIG. 50 (a) is a front view and a side view of the drop deploying object 770 located at the first operating position, and FIG. 50 (b) is a drop deploying object located at the second operating position. It is a front view and a side view of the accessory 770, and FIG. 17C is a front view and a side view of the falling and deploying accessory 770 located at the third operation position.

  In each of FIGS. 7A to 7C, the figure shown on the left side of the drawing is a front view of the drop deploying object 770, and the figure shown on the right side of the drawing is a falling view. It is a side view of the deployment role thing 770. Further, in the side view, the horizontal direction of the paper surface is the front-back direction of the falling and deploying role 770, and the left side of the drawing is the front direction of the falling and deploying role 770 (in this example, the same as the front direction of the gaming table). Direction), and the right side of the drawing is the rearward direction of the falling and deploying role 770 (in this example, the same direction as the rearward direction of the gaming table).

<Structure of the drop deploying object 770>
Next, the structure of the drop deploying object 770 will be described. The drop-and-deployment object 770 includes a first structure 771, a second structure 772 having a different shape from the first structure 771, and a driving unit (not shown) that rotationally drives the first structure 771. ).

  The first structure 761 includes a first base body 771a having an annular driving wheel 771g, a first light emitting board 771b fixed to the first base body 771a, and a first light emitting board 771b. And a first cover 771c disposed so as to cover the entirety. A plurality of first light emitting units 771d (LEDs in this example) are arranged at a predetermined interval on one mounting surface of the first light emitting substrate 771b. The first cover 771c is made of a transparent or translucent member, and can transmit light emitted from the first light emitting unit 771d.

  The second structure 762 is a chain-like member in which a plurality of annular members are daisy-chained, and one end is wound around the drive wheel 771g of the first structure 771, and is in a state of hanging vertically by its own weight. ing.

<Operation of Falling Deployment Agent 770>
Next, the operation of the drop deploying object 770 will be described. The drop-and-deployment object 770 has a first structure by rotating a drive wheel 771 in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction indicated by reference numeral C in FIG. 50A) by driving means (for example, a drive motor) not shown. The direction of rotation of the drop-and-development accessory 770 capable of rotating the body 771 is not limited to this example, and may be replaced with (or added to) a predetermined direction, for example, in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, (FIG. (A) may be rotatable in a counterclockwise direction opposite to the direction indicated by the symbol C).

<Operation of Falling and Rolling Actor / First Operation Position (Initial Operation Position)>
The state shown in FIG. 50A is a state in which the falling and unfolding accessory 770 is located at a first operation position (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an “initial operation position”). In the first operating position, the first structure 771 is located in front of the second structure 772. For this reason, as shown in the front view of FIG. 50A, a state where a part of the second structure 772 overlaps a part of the first structure 771 (the state where the second structure 772 is A part of the second structure 772 is not overlapped with the first structure 771 (a part of the second structure 772 is not visible from the front), but another part of the second structure 772 is not overlapped with the first structure 771 (a part of the second structure 772 is not visible). (Visible from the front). Further, in this state, the first light emitting means 771d can emit light, and an effect or a notice by the light emission of the first light emitting means 771d can be executed.

<Operation of fall deploying object 770 / second operation position>
Subsequently, when the drop deploying object 770 is located at the first operating position, the drive wheel 771g is rotated by 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction indicated by reference C in FIG. 50A). The drop deploying object 770 rotates to the second operation position shown in FIG. In this state, all of the second structures 772 do not overlap with the first structures 771 (a state in which all of the second structures 772 can be viewed from the front).

<Operation of falling deploying object 770 / third operation position>
Subsequently, when the drop deploying object 770 is located at the second operating position, the drive wheel 771g is rotated by 90 degrees in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction indicated by reference C in FIG. 50A). The drop deploying object 770 rotates to the third operating position shown in FIG. In the third operation position, the second structure 772 is located in front of the first structure 771. Therefore, the second structure 772 has a state in which the drop-and-development role 770 is located in the third operating position, compared to a state in which the drop-and-development role 770 is located in the first operating position. , It is easy to see from the front.

  In this state, the position in the front-rear direction of the front end 772f of the second structure 772 is the front position compared to the position in the front-rear direction of the front end 771f of the first structure 771. Further, in this state, a state where a part of the first structure 771 overlaps a part of the second structure 772 (a state where a part of the first structure 771 is not visible from the front). However, another part of the first structure 771 does not overlap with the second structure 772 (the other part of the first structure 771 is visible from the front). In addition, although illustration is omitted, the position in the front-rear direction of the front end portion 772f of the second structure 772 is in the middle of the process in which the fall-and-development accessory 770 rotates from the second operation position to the third operation position. There is a state where the front end 771e of the first structure 771 is at the same position as the position in the front-rear direction.

<Operation example of other characters>
Next, an operation example of another accessory will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

<Operation example of other accessory / Operation example 1 of accessory 820>
FIGS. 51 (a-1) to (a-5) are diagrams showing the operation example 1 of the accessory 820 in time series. The accessory 820 moves the first structure 821 having a rectangular shape in a front view, the second structure 822 and the third structure 823 having a fan shape in a front view, and the first structure 821 in a vertical direction. The first driving means (not shown) capable of rotating the second structure 822 counterclockwise, and the third driving means (not shown) capable of rotating the second structure 822 counterclockwise. And third driving means (not shown) that can be rotated clockwise. The first structure 821 includes first light emitting means 821d (LED), the second structure 822 includes second light emitting means 822d (LED), and the third structure 823 includes 823d (LED).

  Further, the second structure 822 and the third structure 823 are disposed on the front side of the first structure 821 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the first structure 821. The second structure 822 is urged clockwise (in the direction of the third structure 823) by an elastic body (for example, a spring or rubber) (not shown), and is driven by a second driving unit (not shown). In the free state, which is not performed, a part of the area of the first structure 821 (the lower left area in the front view in this example) is overlapped (one of the lower left area of the first structure 821 in the front view). Part cannot be visually recognized from the front).

  The third structure 823 is urged counterclockwise (in the direction of the second structure 822) by an unillustrated elastic body (for example, a spring or rubber), and is actuated by third driving means (not shown). In the free state in which the first structure 821 is not driven, a part of the area of the first structure 821 (in this example, the area at the lower right in front view) overlaps (the lower right in the front view of the first structure 821). (Part of the area cannot be visually recognized from the front).

  The state shown in FIG. 51 (a-1) is a state where the accessory 820 is located at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 821 is positioned above the symbol display device 208 so that the display area of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (the entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is viewed from the front). Visible). The second structure 822 and the third structure 823 are urged by the elastic body to partially overlap the region of the first structure 821 (the region of the region of the first structure 821). (A part of which cannot be seen from the front).

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-2), the first structure 821 is lowered by the driving of the first driving unit, and the accessory 820 is moved from the initial position to the position in front of the symbol display device 208. This is the state after descending to. This state is a state in which the first structure 821 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208 so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 overlaps (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 is frontal). In a state where it cannot be visually recognized from). The second structure 822 and the third structure 823 are urged by the elastic body to partially overlap the region of the first structure 821 (the region of the region of the first structure 821). (A part of which cannot be seen from the front).

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-3), the second structure 822 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees by the driving of the second driving means, and the third structure is driven by the driving of the third driving means. This is a state after the body 823 has rotated 90 degrees clockwise. This state is a state in which the first structure 821 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208 so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 overlaps (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 is frontal). In a state where it cannot be visually recognized from). The second structure 822 and the third structure 823 overlap a part of the region of the first structure 821 (a part of the region of the first structure 821 cannot be visually recognized from the front). State) and a part thereof is located in front of the symbol display device 208 so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 overlaps (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 cannot be visually recognized from the front). State).

  In this state, the first structure 821 executes an effect by the first light emitting means 821d (LED), and the second structure 822 executes an effect by the second light emitting means 822d (LED). Then, the third structure 823 executes an effect by the third light emitting unit 823d (LED).

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-4), the second structure 822 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees to return to the initial position due to the release of the driving of the second driving means, and the third driving means is turned off. This is the state after the third structure 823 has rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise and returned to the initial position by the release of the drive, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-2). In this state, the first structure 821 ends the effect by the first light emitting means 821d (LED), and the second structure 822 ends the effect by the second light emitting means 822d (LED). Then, the third structure 823 ends the effect by the third light emitting unit 823d (LED).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 51 (a-5) is a state in which the accessory 820 has returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 51 (a-1). Note that, in the present example, an example is described in which the effect is produced by the light emitting means (LED) at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a-3). Further, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), and the like. May go.

<Operation example of other accessory / Operation example 2 of accessory 820>
FIGS. 51 (b-1) to (b-5) are diagrams showing the operation example 2 of the accessory 820 in chronological order. The description of the same operation as the operation example 1 shown in FIGS. 51 (a-1) to (a-5) will be omitted.

  The state shown in FIG. 51 (b-2) is a state after the second structure 822 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees by the driving of the second driving means in the initial position. In this state, the first structure 821 is located above the symbol display device 208 so that the display area of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (all of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is viewed from the front). Visible). The second structure 822 and the third structure 823 overlap a part of the region of the first structure 821 (a part of the region of the first structure 821 cannot be visually recognized from the front). State), but the area overlapping by the second structure 822 is smaller than the area overlapping by the third structure 823. In this state, the second structure 822 may execute an effect by the second light emitting unit 822d (LED) simultaneously with the rotation operation.

  The state shown in FIG. 51 (b-3) is a state after the third structure 823 is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees by the driving of the third driving means in the initial position. In this state, the first structure 821 is located above the symbol display device 208 so that the display area of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (all of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is viewed from the front). Visible). The second structure 822 and the third structure 823 overlap a part of the region of the first structure 821 (a part of the region of the first structure 821 cannot be visually recognized from the front). State), and the region overlapped by the second structure 822 and the region overlapped by the third structure 823 are the same. Note that, in this state, the third structure 823 may execute an effect by the third light emitting unit 823d (LED) simultaneously with the rotation operation.

  In the state shown in FIG. 51 (b-4) that follows, in the initial position, the first structure 821 executes an effect using the first light emitting unit 821d (LED), and the second structure 822 outputs the second structure 822. The effect by the light emitting means 822d (LED) is executed, and the third structure 823 is in a state where the effect by the third light emitting means 823d (LED) is executed.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 51 (b-5) is a state where the accessory 820 has returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 51 (b-1). Note that, in the present example, an example in which the effect by the light emitting means (LED) is executed at the timing shown in FIG. 51 (b-4), but the effect may be executed in another state. Further, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), and the like. May go.

<Operation example of other accessory / Operation example 3 of accessory 820>
FIGS. 51 (c-1) to (c-3) are diagrams showing the operation example 3 of the accessory 820 in chronological order. The description of the same operation as the operation example 1 shown in FIGS. 51 (a-1) to (a-5) will be omitted.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 51 (c-1), in the initial position, the first structure 821 performs an effect by the first light emitting unit 821d (LED), and the second structure 822 The second light emitting unit 822d (LED) performs an effect, and the third structure 823 executes the third light emitting unit 823d (LED). In this example, the first structure 821, the second structure 822, and the third structure 823 all have the effect of simultaneously performing the effect by the light emitting means (LED). The start timing of the effect may be shifted, or at least one effect may not be performed. Further, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), and the like. May go.

<Operation example of other accessory / Operation example 1 of accessory 830>
52 (a-1) to 52 (a-5) are diagrams showing the operation example 1 of the accessory 830 in time series. The accessory 830 moves the first structure 831 having a rectangular shape in a front view, the second structure 832 and the third structure 833 having a fan shape in a front view, and the first structure 831 in a vertical direction. A first driving unit (not shown) capable of moving the second structure 832 in the vertical direction, and a second driving unit (not shown) capable of moving the second structure 832 in the vertical direction. And third driving means (not shown) capable of moving in the direction. The first structure 831 includes first light emitting means 831d (LED), the second structure 832 includes second light emitting means 832d (LED), and the third structure 833 includes The light emitting means 833d (LED) is provided.

  Further, the second structure 832 and the third structure 833 are disposed on the front side of the first structure 831 so as to be relatively movable with respect to the first structure 831. The second structure 832 can be raised or lowered by the second driving means (not shown), but in a free state in which the excitation by the second driving means (not shown) is cut off, the second structure 832 is lowered by its own weight. As shown in FIG. 52 (a-1), a part of the area of the first structure 831 (in this example, the area at the lower left in front view) is overlapped (first structure 831). (A state in which a part of the lower left area in front view is not visible from the front).

  The third structure 833 can be raised or lowered by third driving means (not shown). However, in a free state in which the excitation by the third driving means (not shown) is interrupted, the third structure 833 is lowered by its own weight. As shown in FIG. 52 (a-1), a part of the area of the first structure 831 (in this example, the area at the lower right in front view) is overlapped (the first structure 831). 831 is a state in which a part of the lower right region of the front view 831 is not visible from the front).

  The state shown in FIG. 52 (a-1) is a state where the accessory 830 is located at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 831 is located above the symbol display device 208 so that the display area of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (the entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is viewed from the front). Visible). The second structure 832 and the third structure 833 are urged by the elastic body to partially overlap the region of the first structure 831 (the region of the region of the first structure 831). (A part of which cannot be seen from the front).

  In the state shown in FIG. 52 (a-2), the first structure 831 is lowered by the driving of the first driving unit, and the accessory 830 is moved from the initial position to the position in front of the symbol display device 208. This is the state after descending to. In this state, the first structure 831 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208 so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 overlaps (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 is frontal). In a state where it cannot be visually recognized from). The second structure 832 and the third structure 833 are urged by the elastic body to partially overlap the region of the first structure 831 (the region of the region of the first structure 831). (A part of which cannot be seen from the front).

  The state shown in FIG. 52 (a-3) is a state after the second structure 832 is moved up by the driving of the second driving means and the third structure 833 is moved up by the driving of the third driving means. State. In this state, the first structure 831 is positioned in front of the symbol display device 208 so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 overlaps (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 is frontal). In a state where it cannot be visually recognized from). In addition, the second structure 832 and the third structure 833 are in a state where a part of the region of the first structure 831 overlaps (a part of the region of the first structure 831 cannot be visually recognized from the front). State) and a part thereof is located in front of the symbol display device 208 so that the display region of the symbol variation display device 208 overlaps (a part of the display region of the symbol display device 208 cannot be visually recognized from the front). State).

  Further, in this state, the first structure 831 executes the effect by the first light emitting means 831d (LED), and the second structure 832 executes the effect by the second light emitting means 832d (LED). Then, the third structure 833 executes an effect by the third light emitting unit 833d (LED).

  In the state shown in FIG. 52 (a-4), the second structure 832 is freely dropped and returned to the initial position by the release of the excitation of the second drive means, and the second structure 832 is returned to the initial position by the release of the excitation of the third drive means. This is a state after the third structure 833 has freely dropped and returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 52 (a-2). In this state, the first structure 831 ends the effect by the first light emitting means 831d (LED), and the second structure 832 ends the effect by the second light emitting means 832d (LED). Then, the third structure 833 ends the effect by the third light emitting unit 833d (LED).

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (a-5) is a state where the accessory 830 has returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 52 (a-1). In this example, an example is described in which an effect is produced by the light emitting means (LED) at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (a-3), but the effect may be executed in another state. Further, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), and the like. May go.

<Operation example of other accessory / Operation example 2 of accessory 830>
FIGS. 52 (b-1) to 52 (b-5) are diagrams showing the operation example 2 of the accessory 830 in chronological order. The description of the same operation as the operation example 1 shown in FIGS. 52 (a-1) to 52 (a-5) is omitted.

  The state shown in FIG. 52 (b-2) is a state after the second structure 832 has been raised by the driving of the second driving means at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 831 is located above the symbol display device 208 so that the display area of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (the entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is viewed from the front). Visible). In addition, the second structure 832 and the third structure 833 are in a state where a part of the region of the first structure 831 overlaps (a part of the region of the first structure 831 cannot be visually recognized from the front). State), but the area overlapping by the second structure 832 is smaller than the area overlapping by the third structure 833. In this state, the second structure 832 may execute an effect by the second light emitting means 832d (LED) simultaneously with the rotation operation.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (b-3) is a state after the third structure 833 has been raised by the driving of the third driving means at the initial position. In this state, the first structure 831 is located above the symbol display device 208 so that the display area of the symbol variation display device 208 does not overlap (the entire display area of the symbol display device 208 is viewed from the front). Visible). In addition, the second structure 832 and the third structure 833 overlap a part of the region of the first structure 831 (a part of the region of the first structure 831 cannot be visually recognized from the front). State), and the region overlapped by the second structure 832 and the region overlapped by the third structure 833 are the same. Note that, in this state, the third structure 833 may execute an effect by the third light emitting unit 833d (LED) simultaneously with the rotation operation.

  In the state shown in FIG. 52 (b-4) that follows, in the initial position, the first structure 831 executes an effect using the first light emitting means 831d (LED), and the second structure 832 The effect by the light emitting means 832d (LED) is executed, and the third structure 833 is in a state where the effect by the third light emitting means 833d (LED) is executed.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (b-5) is a state where the accessory 830 has returned to the initial position, and is the same as the state shown in FIG. 52 (b-1). Note that, in the present example, an example is described in which an effect is produced by the light emitting means (LED) at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (b-4). Further, instead of (or in addition to) the effect by the light emitting means (LED), the effect by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect by the movement of another movable body, the effect by the sound of the sound output means (speaker), and the like. May go.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine or the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present example includes the first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. The first structure 731 shown in FIG. 5 and the first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51) and the second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 53A and the second structure shown in FIG. 40). A game console provided with a structure 732 and a second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51, wherein the first state (for example, the first state shown in FIG. In a state where the object 730 is located at the first operation position shown in FIG. 40A), a part of the second structure is overlapped with a part of the first structure, and In one state, another part of the second structure is not overlapped with the first structure, and the second structure (e.g., For example, in the second state shown in FIG. 53 (a) or when the falling and deploying object 730 is located in the second operation position shown in FIG. 40 (b) or the third operation position shown in FIG. 40 (c). State), the position of the front end of the second structure (for example, the front end 732e shown in FIG. 40B or the front end 732f shown in FIG. 40C) in the front-rear direction is the first position. The front end portion (for example, the front end portion 731e shown in FIG. 40B or the front end portion 731f shown in FIG. 40C) in the front-rear direction of the structure of FIG. In at least one of the first state and the second state, the second structure produces an effect (for example, an effect by the second light emitting means 732d (LED), a light emitting effect as a reach effect, a big hit effect). Luminous production as a bonus production A game console characterized by being a structure capable of executing an effect, an effect for enlivening benefits such as RT and AT, an effect indicating a pressing order of a stop button, and a gaseous effect (fake effect). .

  According to the gaming table according to this example, a novel effect in which the second structure is located at the same position or ahead of the position of the first structure can be performed, and the interest of the player can be improved. There are cases. In addition, since the second structure performs the effect in at least one of the plurality of states, the interest of the player may be further improved.

Further, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine or the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present example includes a first structure (for example, the cover means 718 shown in FIGS. 21 and 32) and a second structure. (For example, the second structure 712d shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 32), a movable role (for example, the drop deploying role 712 shown in FIG. 20 or 32), and a first driving unit (for example, FIG. And a left rotation motor 712e2 and a right rotation motor 712f2) shown in FIG. 32, wherein the movable role is a movable role having the first structure, and the movable role is a movable role. Is a movable member having the second structure, wherein the first structure is located at a first position (for example, a position where the cover means 718 shown in FIG. 32A is located). Wherein the first structure is in a third position (eg, A position structure that can be positioned) which cover means 718 is positioned as shown in FIG. 32 (d), said second structure, the second position (e.g., FIG. 32 (a) first shown in The second structure is a structure that can be located at a position where the second structure 712d is located), and the second structure is a fourth structure (for example, the second structure 712d shown in FIG. 32D). Is a structure that can be located at the first position, the first position is different from the third position, and the second position is different from the fourth position. a different position, the first structure, the thus driven in the first drive means is the third structure to change the position to the position from the first position, the second structure body is thus driven in the first drive means, the fourth position from the second position The first structure located at the first position overlaps a part of the second structure located at the second position, and the fourth structure is located at the first position. The position in the front-rear direction of the front end of the second structure located at the position of the second structure in the front position compared to the position in the front- rear direction of the front end of the first structure positioned at the third position The movable role is a movable role that is capable of executing a notice (for example, a notice by the second light emitting means 732d (LED), a light emission effect as a notice, an issuance effect as a pre-read notice). The thing is a movable role that can be located at an initial position (for example, a position where the falling and deploying role 712 shown in FIG. 48C is located), and a state where the movable role is located at the initial position. In the first structure and the second structure Are not visible, and when the first structure is located at the third position, a portion that is visible from the front when the first structure is located at the first position is visible from the front. A gaming table characterized by the inability to do so.

According to the gaming table according to this example, a novel effect in which the second structure is located at the same position or ahead of the position of the first structure can be performed, and the interest of the player can be improved. There are cases. In addition, by the first driving operation by the first driving means, without changing the position of the light emitting means, while changing the relative front and rear positions of the first structure and the second structure, respectively. In the case where the position itself or the appearance of the first structure from the front can also be changed, a variety of novel effects can be performed with a small number of driving means, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is. In addition to the fact that a notice by a movable character can be executed, when the position of the first structure is changed from the first position to the third position, when the first structure is located at the first position, In the process in which the position of the first structure is changed from the first position to the third position, the player is notified of the movable structure by the movable member because the portion that is visible from the front is not visible from the front. By showing to the player, the notice can be noticed by the player, and when the position of the first structure reaches the third position, by changing the appearance of the movable role from the front, The effect can be further enhanced.
Incidentally, it said second structure, said second than when located at a position rather legibility from the front towards the case located at the fourth position, the second structure is the second When it is located at a position, a part of the second structure may be visible from the front . In addition, a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 31) may be provided, and the movable accessory may be a movable accessory that may be located in front of the display unit. In addition, a second driving unit (for example, a left driving motor 704b or a right driving motor 706b shown in FIG. 18) may be provided, and the second driving unit may be a unit that drives the movable role in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first structure may be capable of rotating.

  The gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine or the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present example includes a first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. 53 (a) or the first structure shown in FIG. 51, a first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51) and a second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 53 (a), the second structure 732 shown in FIG. , A second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51), and the first state (for example, the first state shown in FIG. 41 (a), a state where it is located at a first operation position shown in FIG. 4 (b)), a part of the second structure is overlapped with a part of the first structure, In the first state, another part of the second structure does not overlap with the first structure, and the second structure (e.g., 53 (a) and the second deployment position shown in FIGS. 40 (b) and 41 (c) and the second operating position shown in FIGS. 40 (c) and 41 (d). In the third operating position shown in FIG. 40), the front end of the second structure (for example, the front end 732e shown in FIG. 40B or the front end 732f shown in FIG. 40C). ) In the front-rear direction of the first structure (for example, the front end 731e shown in FIG. 40 (b) or the front end 731f shown in FIG. 40 (c)) in the front-rear direction. And the second structure can execute an initial operation (eg, an initial operation 1/3 to 3/3 shown in FIG. 53C or an initial operation shown in FIG. 41). Structure, the second structure is in the first state during the initial operation. Kicking located position in said second state and position, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, a novel effect in which the second structure is located at the same position or ahead of the position of the first structure can be performed, and the interest of the player can be improved. There are cases. In addition, since the second structure is located at the position in the first state and the position in the second state in the initial operation, it may be easy to confirm the operation of the initial operation.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine or the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present example includes a first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. 54 (a) or the first structure shown in FIG. 54, a second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 54A, a second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51), and a third structure (for example, FIG. 54). A game console provided with the structure 3 shown in FIG. 51A and the third structure 823 shown in FIG. 51, and in a first state (for example, a first state shown in FIG. 54A). )), A part of the second structure is overlapped with a part of the first structure, and in the first state, another part of the second structure is the first structure. In the second state (for example, the second state shown in FIG. 54A) without being overlapped by the structure, the front end of the second structure The position in the front-rear direction is the same or the front position as compared with the position in the front-rear direction of the front end of the first structure, and the position of the third structure is the position in the first state. The gaming table may be the same as the position in the second state.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, a novel effect in which the second structure is located at the same position or ahead of the position of the first structure can be performed, and the interest of the player can be improved. There are cases. In addition, since the change in the position of the second structure can be seen with reference to the position of the third structure, the degree of change in the second structure can be emphasized, and the interest of the player can be further improved. You may be able to.

  Note that the second structure may be easier to see in the second state than in the first state. In addition, the second structure includes a light emitting unit (for example, a second light emitting unit 732d (LED) shown in FIG. 40, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display). Device, leaf type display device, plasma display, projector). The display device further includes display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 41), and the second structure is configured to display the display means in at least one of the first state and the second state. It may be a structure located ahead of it. Also, a first drive unit (for example, a drive motor for moving the first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51 in the vertical direction) is provided, and the first drive unit is provided with the first structure (for example, FIG. Means for driving at least the first structure 821) shown in FIG. Also, a second driving unit (for example, a driving motor for rotating the second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51) is provided, and the second driving unit is provided with the second structure (for example, shown in FIG. 51). Means for at least driving the second structure 822) may be used. Further, at least one of the first structure and the second structure may be capable of rotating.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine or the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) according to the present example includes a first structure (for example, the structure 1 shown in FIG. 54 (b) or the first structure shown in FIG. 54, a second structure (for example, the structure 2 shown in FIG. 54 (b) or a second structure 822 shown in FIG. 51), and a first driving unit (for example, FIG. 54). The motor 1 shown in (b), the driving motor for moving the first structure 821 shown in FIG. 51 in the vertical direction, and the second driving means (for example, the motor 2 shown in FIG. (A drive motor for rotating the second structure 822 shown in FIG. 5), and the first driving means causes the first structure to perform a first operation (for example, FIG. 51 ( a-2) or the downward movement operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-2)). Means for causing the second structure to execute a second operation (for example, a rotation operation shown in FIG. 51 (a-3) or an upward movement operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-3)); Is a means for causing the first structure to execute a third operation (for example, an ascending movement operation shown in FIG. 51 (a-5) or FIG. 52 (a-5)). Is a means for causing the second structure to execute a fourth operation (for example, a rotation operation shown in FIG. 51 (a-4) and a drop operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-4)). The second structure is a structure capable of performing an effect, which is a gaming table.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, a novel effect can be performed, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases.

  It should be noted that a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 51 and 52) is provided, and the first structure is a structure which may be located in front of the display means in some cases. The second structure may be a structure that may be located ahead of the display unit. Further, the first structure has a structure including a first light emitting unit (for example, a first light emitting unit 821d (LED) shown in FIG. 51 and a first light emitting unit 831d (LED) shown in FIG. 52). It may be a body. Further, the second structure has a second light emitting means (for example, a second light emitting means 822d (LED) shown in FIG. 51 and a second light emitting means 832d (LED) shown in FIG. 52). It may be a body. Further, the fourth operation may be a drop operation of the second structure (for example, a drop operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-4)). Further, the fourth operation is an operation in which the second structure operates without depending on the driving force of the second driving unit (for example, a drop operation of the second structure due to its own weight). Is also good. Further, the fourth operation by the second structure may be restricted when the second driving unit is not driven. In addition, the first operation is an operation (for example, an operation in which the first structure moves away from a first initial position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 51 (a-1) or 52 (a-1)). 51 (a-2) or 52 (a-2)), and the second operation means that the second structure is in a second initial position (for example, 51 (a-2) or the initial position shown in FIG. 52 (a-2) (for example, the rotation operation shown in FIG. 51 (a-3) or the rising operation shown in FIG. 52 (a-3)). The third operation is an operation (for example, FIG. 51 (a-5) or FIG. 52 (a-5)) in which the first structure approaches the first initial position. ), The fourth operation is an operation in which the second structure approaches the second initial position (for example, 51 (a-4) rotating operation shown in, or may be an operation comprising dropping operation) shown in FIG. 52 (a-4).

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine not shown) according to the present example has a structure (for example, a center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 28) having a window (for example, A gaming table provided with a center role 900 shown in FIG. 28 and a movable body (for example, the drop deployment role 712 shown in FIG. 28), wherein the movable body is a first movable part (for example, A movable body having “cover means 718” shown in FIGS. 21, 30 and the like, wherein the movable body is a second movable part (for example, “third structure 712c” shown in FIGS. 20, 30 and the like). ), And a part of the second movable part is in a first state (for example, when the drop deploying object 712 is in the “initial position” shown in FIG. 30 (a), FIG. 31 (a), etc. ), The first movable part is partially over In the first state, at least a part of an outer end of the first movable part in a front view is overlapped with the structure, and another part of the second movable part is In the first state, the other part is located outside the outer end portion, and the other part is overlapped with the structure in the first state, and the second movable part is A gaming table, which is a movable section that may be located in front of the first movable section.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, by performing a novel effect of positioning the second movable part of the movable body ahead of the first movable part, it is possible to make the manner of showing the movable body various. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by overlapping at least a part of the outer end portion of the first movable portion in a front view with a structure, the entire shape of the first movable portion can be concealed. In some cases, the player can imagine the overall shape and movement, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, by overlapping the other part of the second movable part with the structure, the entire shape of the second movable part can be concealed. In some cases, it is possible to make the player imagine and improve the interest of the player.

  Further, all of the outer end portions of the first movable portion when viewed from the front are in the second state (for example, when the drop deploying agent 712 is in the “initial position” shown in FIGS. 30A and 31A). ) To the “intermediate position” shown in FIGS. 30 (b) and 31 (b), etc.), the second movable portion is overlapped with the structure, and the second movable portion is in the third state ( For example, in FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. 34 (b)), the movable portion is located forward of the first movable portion and passes through the second state after the first state. A transition to the third state may occur. Further, the movable body is a movable body having a mechanism (for example, a “main part support portion 704f” or a “left-rotating motor base 712e1” shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), and at least one of the mechanism portions The portion may be located below a lower end of the first movable portion.

  Further, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine not shown) according to the present example includes a first driving unit (for example, a driving motor 754b shown in FIG. 23) and a second driving unit. (For example, the solenoid 758d1 shown in FIG. 23), the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration part 758c of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23), and the second effect means (for example, And a first ascending accessory decoration section 756d) of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 23, wherein the first effecting means is driven by the first driving means. (For example, the operation of raising the second elevating accessory decoration unit 758c shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C), and the second effecting means is Second operation by driving the first driving means For example, it is means capable of executing the operation of raising the first ascending role decoration part 756d shown in FIGS. 35A to 35C), and the second operation by the second effect means. During the period, the first operation by the first effector is performed, and the first effector is driven by the second driver to perform a third operation (for example, by operating a solenoid 758d1 to perform a third operation). (The operation of lowering the second ascending role decoration part 758c). The first operation is an operation different from the third operation, and the first operation is the first operation. Is an operation in which the directing means moves from a first position (for example, an initial position shown in FIG. 35 (a)) to a second position (for example, a position at a maximum height shown in FIG. 35 (c)). The third operation is an operation in which the first production means moves to the first position. In the second operation, the second production means is configured such that the second production means moves from the third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 35A) to the fourth position (for example, the maximum height shown in FIG. 35C). The first effect means is a means capable of executing the first operation by contacting the second effect means, and the first effect means Is a means capable of being located at a fifth position (for example, a position where the downward movement is prevented (locked) by the claw portion 758d3 shown in FIG. 35D), and the fifth position is: The first position is a position between the first position and the second position, the second position is a position higher than the first position, the first production means, the weight of the first, It is means movable from the second position to the fifth position, the first production means, The second drive means is a means capable of moving from the fifth position to the first position by driving of the second drive means, and the second drive means is configured such that the first effect means descends from the fifth position. It may be a solenoid that operates a claw part that can prevent such a situation.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, various effects can be provided, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases.

<Overall configuration>
Next, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console that allows a player to obtain a profit when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertical rectangular game machine base shaft body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk of a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, with a locking function via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also called a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 below the main body 104 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) which can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish was opened. The door 108 with a ball storage tray includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored on the upper plate 126, a ball-pulling button 130 for discharging game balls stored on the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. The ball launch handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, a production button 136 that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 57) by operation of the player, and a production button 136 that are built-in. A chance button lamp 138 that causes the exit button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing a ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the status of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 55 is provided with a lower plate full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is provided.

  The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a firing rod 146 that rotates when a ball firing handle 134 is operated by a player, and a firing hammer 148 that strikes a game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , Is provided. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 moves the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (eg, 0.6 seconds). It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed when the ball firing handle 134 is operated may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 55, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.
FIG. 56 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 55 viewed from the rear side.

  At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when connected to a predetermined position, is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game ball flowing into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thereby, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the condition, a game value (game ball) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 constituting a main control section 300 (see FIG. 58) for performing control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 58) that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400 The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 58) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 (which performs control processing related to payout of game balls) A payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with an error canceling switch 168 for canceling an error by an operation of a game clerk, as shown in FIG. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 58) that performs control processing related to the above, and a power control section 660 (see FIG. 58) that supplies power to various electric game machines. A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.
FIG. 57 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which game balls can roll.

  At a substantially center of the game area 124, an effect device 206 is provided. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a “common symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs an effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in this embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing a symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in a form that enhances the effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of the predetermined first variable game held (a general figure variable game described later in detail). (For example, four) can be reserved.

  The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable game games (special figure variable game described in detail later) that are held. In the embodiment, it is possible to suspend a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “suspending” here means suspending the start of various determination processes (lottery process and the like) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying unit) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability middle lamp 222 is configured to provide a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and not to indicate the current symbol control state thereafter. I have. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state returns to the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off. Although the symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time-saving state (electric support state), and a probable change state. It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, the description will be made using a word indicating a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the wording of the control state includes a concept of a so-called gaming state.

  Around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a general drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are provided on the gaming board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (not shown). When a prize is won, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 56 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 55 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the ball to be paid out to the player as a reward for winning may be referred to as a "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is provided. One. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting area in which its size does not change.

  In this embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the general figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid is provided, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric tuy). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the difficulty of winning the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, in the case where the player has won the general figure fluctuation game and the general figure display device 210 has hit and stopped and displayed the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Is possible (a winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In a state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable starting area is smaller than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the gaming board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states. The closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. It is a stationary state that matches the plane. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 becomes substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 keeps a closed state until a big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change between the open state and the closed state is repeated. In addition, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 57 as long as the winning of the game ball is obtained by passing or entering the game ball. When the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the big hit symbol after winning the special figure change game, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Note that the ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped ball-hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are provided in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win any of the winning ports and the starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  The ball accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing its traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and receives a winning opening (a general winning opening 226, a variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. (The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), or the out port 240 without passing any of the winning ports or the starting ports, or only passing through the general figure starting port 228. To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a region where the game ball can roll, and a stage movable body 224 is arranged in a region where the game ball cannot roll. . On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a door) are provided. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warping device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp entrance 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b, a ball riding on the game nail 238, and the like. A special route 244a that facilitates the ball is provided.

  The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm in this embodiment, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) for rotating the upper arm 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move right and left, respectively, with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the respective inner ends, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the respective inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern is the displayed decorative pattern. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative design display device 208 behind the lattice hole to be visible, or cover the sash part of the lattice hole with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely visually recognized by the player, or the sash portion of the hole of the lattice may be completely closed (shielded), and the decorative pattern display device 208 at the rear may be made completely invisible. Is also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 55, the decorative design display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 indicating the specification of the gaming table is attached at a position visible to the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and a main effect of the production in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-controller 400 for performing control, a second sub-controller 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a main controller 300 in response to a command transmitted by the main controller 300. A payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number and the number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit incorporates two counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting opening, a winning opening, a variable winning opening, and a front frame door opening. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a first special figure display device 212 or a second special figure display device 214; A drive circuit 326 for performing a display control of the symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general-purpose reserve lamp 216, the special-purpose 1 reserve lamp 218, the special-purpose second reserve lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc., and various types of driving for opening and closing predetermined movable members such as the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. And store it in the register. Similarly, when receiving a signal indicating that a ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 also latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 at that timing. Then, the latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board 349. The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main controller 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with one sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although the configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, the first sub-controller 400 is configured not to transmit signals such as commands to the main controller 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Is also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138). A drive circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246; a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246; a chance button sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136; A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the operation, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. Reads image data and the like stored in ROM 406 based on a signal from sensor circuit 428 and CPU 404 A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. 518 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game frame lamp drive for controlling the game frame lamp 542. The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp driving circuit 530 and the game frame lamp driving circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball loan. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. The payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 receives prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls. Is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. In addition, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open, and outputs an open signal. When outputting the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 supplying the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off (for example, for example). , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500 and the discharge unit Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative design display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 fluctuating game is started on condition that the ball is detected by the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor. When the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. (Fluctuating game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats “lighting of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment ( (Figure game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 2 Is elapsed, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of the special figure may be performed continuously plural times.

  FIG. 59 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 59 (a), nine types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure I" are shown. In FIG. 59 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols (“special symbol A” to “special symbol G”) are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special symbol. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) big hit symbol, and is a 15R certain variable big hit pattern in which it is possible to expect a winning in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit pattern. Therefore, while it is possible to expect winning in five out of fifteen rounds, the remaining round is a real 5R probability variable jackpot symbol in which no winning is expected, and the “special figure C” is a 15R jackpot symbol. There is a 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and the “special figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds while it is expected to obtain a ball in one round. It is a real 4R-RUB in which it is possible to expect to obtain a ball in four rounds of the und, but not to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds. Fig. G "is a 2R jackpot design, which is called a latent probability change or hidden probability change in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a winning is expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit in a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). (The 9th round or the 9th round), it is a jackpot in which the player is inspired to determine whether or not the round in which the expected payout can be obtained continues.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure fluctuating game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure probability change” or simply “probability change”), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure state. Called a low probability state. In addition, the game may shift to the time-saving state (electric support state) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the electric support state is defined as a predetermined time where the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Refers to the state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the state not in the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure low probability state. As described above, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to ordinary figures, and the “time reduction state” is a state related to special figures or a state related to ordinary figures and special figures. A time-saving flag is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the vehicle is in the power-supply state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game in the normal state than in the low probability state of the general figure (probable change of the general figure). For example, the winning probability of the general-purpose fluctuating game is 1/100 in the general-purpose low probability state (non-electric support state), whereas it increases to 99/100 in the general-purpose high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose fluctuating game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (normal-figure variation). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is reduced to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the non-electric support state (the electric chew open period is extended). For example, in the non-power support state, the power chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power support state. Further, the blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened). For example, a wing member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per prize to the normal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). By extending the power chew opening period or increasing the number of times the power chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-electric support state is maintained. This is because a game ball is picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls in a big hit game, and if the number of game balls prize to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, the player may be disadvantaged. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time saving state), all of the figure change, the figure change, the extension of the power chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the power chew is opened are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player has a higher advantage, and may be in the electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, game balls are less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is changed into a prize difficult state in which game balls are difficult to enter and an easy prize state in which game balls are easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy winning state for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state (the normal figure high probability state) is continued until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and the “special figure F” is stopped and displayed. After the big hit game that is performed thereafter, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure changing game is performed 100 times. Transition to the support state (low probability state in ordinary figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without an electric support ("Tokuzu G") is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. When the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game is over. When the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  In this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hitting game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 keeps the open state for a maximum of only 0.1 second per operation. In addition, in the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) at the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (the predetermined number of balls) is obtained. If so, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends. "Special figure H" shown in FIG. 59 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing count and opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning port 234 in the big hit game to which the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed and shifted. Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 59 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. FIG. 59 (b) shows six types of special figures, "special figure a" to "special figure f", and five special figures are big hits ("special figure a" to "special figure a"). E)). The "special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and a 15R probability variable jackpot symbol which can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds. The "special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to obtain balls in all rounds of the round, and the "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot design, and is expected to obtain balls in eight of the 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds, and the “Tokuzu d” is a 15R jackpot design, and it is expected to obtain a ball in four of the 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB for which it is not expected to obtain a payout, and the “special figure e” is a 2R ordinary big hit symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decoration patterns of this embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10." The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second entrance sensor detects that a ball has entered the starting slot 232. In the symbol display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner, separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of the decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying the real 5R probability variable jackpot (“special figure B”), the 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and the 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), the “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns in which three decorative patterns of the same number other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1-decoration 1" Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "). When notifying the 15R sure-change jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the royal pattern. A combination of decorative patterns (for example, “decoration 1-decoration-decoration 1” or “decoration 4-decoration-decoration 4”) that is a decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”), which is the 2R big hit, is notified, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol of “Special Figure I” or “Special Figure f”, a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described above (for example, Eye) stop display.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the decorative symbol variable display. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 59 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode in a general figure. There are two types of the stop display mode of the general symbol of the present embodiment, namely, a general symbol "A", which is a winning symbol, and a general symbol "B", which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228, the general-purpose display device 210 displays all seven segments and a central one-segment. Performing the "floating display of the ordinary figure" (the ordinary figure fluctuating game) which repeats the lighting. Then, after the elapse of the fluctuation time, one of the symbols "Picture B", which is different from the "Picture A", which is a winning symbol, is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 59 (d) as well, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “floating display of ordinary figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the ordinary figure may be referred to as “figure display of ordinary figure”.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58, a special figure random number, a special figure round decision random number, a special figure electric support decision random number, and a special figure design decision random number are stored. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the special figure winning random number value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawing is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special maps stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores the set of start information in winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal performs a reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission, setting of initial values, and the like. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in the WDT 314.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to step S103. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly performed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later at regular intervals in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from an output port (output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the power supply returns to the state before the power interruption (before the power failure). )), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 56 is turned on (indicating that an operation has been performed). Is determined, that is, whether or not the RAM clear is required. If the RAM clear signal is ON (if the RAM clear is required), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is determined. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register of 1-byte configuration whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the checksum result is normal or not). When the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is the specific value. If the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to bring the pachinko machine 100 into the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). Further, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting each register, setting of interruption permission is performed. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the reset, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. In other words, the processing is restarted from the instruction following the (predetermined in step S115) instruction executed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt processing (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state has been returned to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

  In step S113, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, the normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main controller 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power restoration command, the normal return command returns to step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. Sent to one sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the execution of the timer interrupt process started every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (about once every 4 ms in the present embodiment). The unit timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (set) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (do not detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once about every 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 58 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the various signals are stored in the RAM 308. It is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. To describe the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided two times before in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ) Is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the sphere detection sensors, and the information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals from the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt processing is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 58 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) When the match is made with the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the general figure starting port 228 Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning ports 234, 226 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in the first starting port sensor that detects the ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a prize in the starting port 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the processing following the prize in the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the subsequent process of winning the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether or not the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value updating process and a basic random number updating process are performed. In these basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the general-purpose winning random number value and Update the random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a general-purpose winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value are stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general winning random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the general winning random number has made one round next time. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the general-purpose winning random number has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, an effect random number update process is performed. In the effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used in the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, the symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various kinds of timers, including a special figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation / stop display, a timer for measuring a predetermined prize production time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end production period, and the like. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is achieved in the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. Read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning reception process is performed. In the winning reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information is acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here is stored as a set of start information in an empty area in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219 executed after step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 58 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 , Power-on information (in the case of ON, this indicates that the command is transmitted for the first time after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal drawing state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state updating processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the ordinary symbol state update process during the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting and turning off of the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 are repeated. Turn off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the ordinary symbol state update processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the winning symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so as to be in a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the ordinary state updating process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 59 (c)) and the lost symbol (the ordinary symbol B shown in FIG. 59 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  Also, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used. In the setting area, the normal operation is set, and for a predetermined opening period (for example, two seconds), the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 opens the blade member 2321 in an open state. And the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Further, if the result of the general-floor fluctuation game is a loss, the general-figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the general-figure losing flag is on, even in the general-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made that the normal drawing is not operating. In the ordinary figure state updating process in the case where the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing-related lottery process, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the holding of the general figure changing game is suspended. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the universal map variable game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the universal figure winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made, and if a win is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is obtained as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to obtain a general-purpose timer random value from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the obtained general-purpose timer random number value. One time for changing and displaying the figure is selected, and this changing display time is stored in the normal figure changing time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure changing display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in the general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this normal figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state updating processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state updating processing (the special figure 2 state updating processing) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED included in the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is repeated. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (a special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and the process is terminated.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R big hit flag is on, When the probability variation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability variation flag is also on, any of the special map a, the special map b, the special map c, and the special map d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure f is on when the loss flag is on. The control for turning on / off the 7-segment LED is performed, and the setting indicating that the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), the 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and the losing symbol ( One of the symbols in the special figure f) is confirmed and displayed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings. If not, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the process is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). To set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image that informs the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, information indicating the winning effect period is set in a storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning port 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning port 234. Is output in the RAM 308, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Is set to indicate the closing period. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing that is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and starts at the end of the opening / closing control of the door member, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is set to indicate the effect waiting period. Also, if the normal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the big hit game. Turns on the saved time flag. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved in the number of times saved storage unit is not set, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  Here, the time reduction means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is a state of high probability of general figure (probable change of general figure). In the high probability figure state, the probability of hitting in the variable figure game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general-floor fluctuation game is shorter in the general-figure high-probability state than in the general-figure low-probability state (figure fluctuating). Furthermore, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is more likely to be longer in the state of high probability in the general figure than in the state of low probability in the general figure (electric chewing spread). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. The state in which any one of the normal figure change, the general figure change, and the power spread is set is referred to as a power support (start-up winning support by an electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the ordinary figure low probability state is maintained. This means that if the game is in the high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable prize ports 234 are set in the special figure 2 starting port 232 during the jackpot game until the game balls enter the ball. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases due to the entry of the ball and the gambling property is increased, and this is intended to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission processing is executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a state where the special figure 2 is not operating is set. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (a special figure 1 state update process) is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update processing is the same as the processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state updating processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 this time. Here too, the special figure-related lottery processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery processing) is first performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery processing) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special drawing 2 are not performing the variable game, and the special drawing 2 is in a non-operating state and the special drawing 2 is suspended. The process is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number and the special figure 2 random number in the special figure 2 random number storage area, with the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more as a start condition. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special figure 2 are not performing the floating game, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive and the special figure 1 is suspended. Assuming that the number of variable games is one or more, the execution is performed using the first special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random number in the special figure 1 random number storage area.

  Also in these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable Even when the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 1 variable game does not start to change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, when the reserved number of the special figure 2 variable game is one or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the reservation of the special figure 1 variable game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. The lottery is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure variable game having a high degree of advantage (in this example, the special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over the special figure variable game having a low degree of advantage (in this example, the special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. The combination of the random number value of FIG. 2 and the random number value of the special figure 2) is acquired, and the ROM 306 is determined based on the random number value of the special figure 2 in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308. A determination is made as to whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss using the hit / fail judgment table stored in (1). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the determined result of the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is used, and the like. A symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the result in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail judgment result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the obtained special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main controller 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 subtracts 1 from the special figure 2 reserved number in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) is similarly performed. Note that the order of the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variable game having a low degree of advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reservation of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority change is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started in preference to the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 The special figure 1 priority change which is digested prior to the reservation may be used. In addition, without giving priority to either the special figure 2 variable game having a high degree of advantage or the special figure 1 variable game having a low degree of advantage, the special figure variable game relating to the reservation of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be awarded a starting mouth. The starting opening winning order may be changed in order. In the starting opening winning order change, since the upper limit of the number of suspensions is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, compare with the priority change in which the upper-limit number of the suspension is 4 in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed in accordance with the state of one special figure. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The process and the special drawing related lottery process may be performed independently for each of the special drawings 1 and 2 so that a plurality of special drawings may be changed simultaneously. In the case where a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed in this way, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided in the decorative design display device 208, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or one display may display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 following step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power restoration command, a RAM clear command, a pre-read result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the command transmission processing described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of the symbol change stop (rotation stop) command, the information includes the number of the big change flag, the small hit flag, the missed flag, the special figure probability change flag, and the like. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes the device information, the presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the prize in the variable special prize ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area described later, and a stop symbol stored in a prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data includes the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figure stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the timer number selected in the 2-related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, and the like stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games is set. In the above described special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as.

  In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in command data, and advance notice information (advance notice information, false notice) Advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 subsequent to step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 subsequent to step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area are read out in step S205, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full error is monitored. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 subsequent to step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the process proceeds to step S243. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the interruption of the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. And then enter the HALT state.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and preliminarily determines the stop symbol before the hit / fail determination processing, and determines the pre-determination result (special result). The prefetch result is stored in a prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 63A to 63C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit that stores the prefetch result of the special figure 1 and the number of the special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are stored. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, every time the special figure 1 prefetch number is reduced by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetch result of the highest rank (earliest) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted. Are processed such that the rank of the data is moved up by one. Also, every time the number of the special figure 1 prefetch increases by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch result is written in the next order of the data of the lowest (last) special figure 1 prefetch result.

  Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit that stores the prefetch result of the special figure 2 and the number of the special figure 2 prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit, each time the special figure 2 prefetch number is decreased by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining data of the special figure 2 prefetch result are ranked. Are processed to be moved up one by one. Also, every time the number of the special figure 2 prefetch increases by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch result is written in the next order of the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result of the lowest rank.

  In the special figure pre-reading process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is made, for example, by storing the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in the special figure 2. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 reservation number becomes the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information in FIG. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303. When it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is obtained before the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random number storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and, for example, a success / failure determination table and a special figure determination table used at the time of the success / failure determination, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is determined by the special figure 2 related lottery. The preliminary determination is made before the hit / fail determination processing in the processing (step S229). Note that this preliminary determination process may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used at the time of the determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the forefront free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the procedure moves to step S307.

  In step S307, main controller 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing or not is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, by storing the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure pre-reading process is terminated and the main control unit is started. Return to the timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not a non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that non-electric support is not being performed (electrical support is being performed (normally high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not a non-electric support is being performed. However, it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game, in addition to being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is obtained before the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and, for example, a success / failure determination table and a special figure determination table used at the time of the success / failure determination, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is determined by the special figure 1 related lottery. The preliminary determination is made before the hit / fail determination processing in the processing (step S231). Note that this preliminary determination process may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used at the time of the determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure pre-reading processing is ended, and the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt processing.

  In step S315, the pre-read result of the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the "undetermined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-fetched without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information. The copy is stored in the first available area. After that, the special figure pre-reading processing is ended, and the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt processing.

  In this embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the prefetch result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the prefetch result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be stored. All the prefetch results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 62, prefetching is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and prefetching is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to read the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in advance. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-read result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-read notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not a non-electric support is being performed), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always performed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute a lottery and an effect using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 63 illustrates a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 63A shows an example of a state where the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of holdable special figure 1 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (reservation 1 to reservation 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 63A, "special symbol I" (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special symbol I" as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area "hold 2". (Outlier) is stored in the storage area “hold 3”, and “special figure A” (15R probability large hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 3”. (Out) is stored.

  FIG. 63B shows an example of a state where the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reservable special figure 2 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (reservation 1 to reservation 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 63B, “special figure f” (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 63 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows an example of the pre-read result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electronic support. As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the storage area “hold 1” stores “undetermined” information instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stopped symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described stop symbol information, the result of the determination of success or failure, a variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are determined in advance, and the information is stored in a prefetch result storage unit. The information can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a winning / failing determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 64A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit / fail determination high probability table, and FIG. 64B is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit / fail determination low probability table. In the case of performing the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, refer to the hit / fail determination high probability table shown in FIG. 64A, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. 64 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated in the referred winning / failing determination table and the obtained random number, the winning / failing determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is selected as the hit determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the determination of the special figure 2, if the state is the special figure high probability state, the state is the special figure low probability state by referring to the high probability table for the determination of the special figure shown in FIG. In this case, a low-probability determination probability table shown in FIG. 64B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated in the referred hit / fail judgment table and the acquired random number, the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the result of the hit determination.

  FIG. 64C is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of order, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 64C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hit determination table and the obtained random number value. Then, the result of the special figure small hit lottery determination is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery hit / fail determination (lottery result) per special figure is the special figure 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the hit / failure determination result, and a loss is generated with a probability of 63536/65536. The small hit is not selected when the result of lottery winning / non-performing judgment (lottery result) per special figure is special figure 2.

  Next, the stop performed on the basis of the result of determination as to whether the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. A table for determining a special figure used for determining a symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 65 (a) is referred, and the special figure 1 is determined based on the success / failure result of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number. Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, one of the special figures A to G is selected. When the result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and if the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

  When the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 65 (b), based on the success / failure result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number, The lottery of the stop symbol of Toku-zu 2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected. When the result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display device is set.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 66A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 66A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 subsequent to step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed. The effect control processing will be described later.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the process of changing the effect data updated in step S409 to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In step S413 following step S411, an image control process is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes an instruction to the VDP 434, the instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, a sound control process is performed. In the sound control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, a lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the various lamps 418, the command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 subsequent to step S417, a shutter control process is performed. In the shutter control process, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the shielding device 246, the command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 66 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interruption process (strobe interruption process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 66C is a flowchart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S601 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-controller main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other update processing of the random number value for effect And so on.

  FIG. 66D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-controller main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 406), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then sets the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 434. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the input of the transfer end interrupt signal.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 on the basis of the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 executes information on image data (coordinate axes, image size of the VRAM 436) constituting the display image. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input (Yes in step S709), The process proceeds to step S711. If not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many images of the scene have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 67A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 67A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S801. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. CPU 504 of second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and effect data by the lamp) corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. Is performed, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, a lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from first sub-control unit 400 to effect movable body 224, this command is output to drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 67B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 67C is a flowchart of the timer interruption process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S1001 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 subsequent to step S1001, an update process of the effect random number value and the like are performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a view showing step by step an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 68 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol. Hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68A, a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not displayed here, a default background image described later is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped) or not, and from above, a symbol change notification area for a general symbol and a symbol change notification area for a special figure 1 from above. , The symbol change notification area of the special map 2. While the symbol in the ordinary figure is stopped, the square figure is lit and displayed, while the symbol in the ordinary figure is changed, the square figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, a round figure is lit and displayed, while the symbol of the special figure 1 is changed, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit and displayed, while the symbol of the special figure 2 fluctuates, the triangle figure blinks or is turned off. As described above, the fourth symbol not only has a different display position, but also has a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 68 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is provided.

  In the reserved icon display area 281 of Toku-zu 1, a reserved icon representing reserved of Toku-zu 1 is displayed, and in the reserved icon display area 282 of Toku-zu 2, a reserved icon representing reserved of Toku-zu 2 is displayed. . The reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of reserved icons of Toku-zu 1 in addition to the number of lighting of Toku-zu 1 reserved lamp 218. In addition, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in the special map 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons are displayed side by side, the reserve icon on the right side is the older reserved icon, and the reserved icon is displayed vertically in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. , The lower the hold icon, the older the winning icon becomes.

  In FIG. 68 (a), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and both the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 68 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserved icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no pending icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special map 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 68 is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), so that the electric chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start port 232. This is because In addition, in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a line defining the area is not actually displayed, but in FIG. Is shown by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line defining an area may be provided, or a line defining an area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserved icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the reserved icon display area of the special figure which is easier to win a prize in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located to the left of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special map is displayed on the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 68A, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is displayed. An area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reservation icon of Toku-zu 2 is a rectangular, plain, white display mode, which differs from the display position of the reservation icon of Toku-zu 1 in addition to the display mode ( Here, the shape is also different, so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. Note that the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol change display of the special figure is started in the order of the change start in the special figure display device → the start of blinking or turning off of the fourth symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the holding icon → the start of change of the decorative symbol. However, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 68 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation is started in the first special figure display device 212, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed. The pattern has not changed yet.

  In FIG. 68 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has been started. The movement animation here is such that the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current symbol change) located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280 and the second hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative symbol has not been started.

In FIG. 68 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 68 (e), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change, has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The variable display of the decorative pattern has not been started. At the time when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be used until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.
Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (g), an operation prompt notification image 136P for urging the user to press the effect button 136 within the validity period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol change display is started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the main character image. The change display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize from the fourth symbol 284 or the like that the special figure is changing. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 68 (h), the validity period has decreased, and in FIG. 68 (i), the player has pressed the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the validity period, as shown in FIG. 68 (j), a reach state entry notification image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry notice image 2071, a character display of "CHANCE" is displayed on the right side of the main character image.

  In FIG. 68 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the display of the change in the decorative pattern becomes visible, and thereafter, the apparatus enters the reach state as shown in FIG. Although the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, there is a case where the reach state is not entered, but the entry may be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that is a trigger of a notice of the currently performed symbol change display.

  In FIG. 68 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and is reduced and displayed. , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 68 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation of the scene is displayed.

The reach state entry notice image 2071 may be not only a notice of entering a reach state but also an advance notice of evolving to super reach.
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 68.

  In FIG. 69 (p) following FIG. 68 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 69 (s). In FIG. 69 (s), the protagonist of the main character has won the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. Note that a background image different from the background image may be displayed instead of non-display. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-display or a different background image. In addition, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remain disappearing, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” with the 15R certain-variable-big-hit determination is stopped and displayed. Also, the fourth symbol (circular figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 69 (v) is lit. In FIG. 69 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 69 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character image of "probable big hit" is displayed together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 68 (l) shows a case where a reach state is reached with a different decorative symbol (a symbol combination of a real 5R probability variable hit, a 5R normal hit, and a 2R normal hit), which is another diagram following FIG. 69 (t). In 69 (u '), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed. In FIG. 69 (v') following FIG. 69 (u '), "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration" The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 69 (w ′) subsequent to FIG. 69 (v ′), a character image “big hit” is displayed together with a background image celebrating the big hit (omitted here) as a big hit game start effect.
FIG. 70 is a diagram stepwise illustrating an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 69 (q).

  In FIG. 70 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 68 (o) continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 70 (b). In FIG. 70 (b), the main character, the lord, loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 70 (c), as in FIG. Eventually, in FIG. 70 (d), the swing fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is started. Here, the display of the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are restored, and the fluctuating icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (e), the fourth symbol (circular graphic) of the special figure 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. Is displayed. Next, during the period of the fixed display of the special figure 1, in the variable icon display area 280, a deletion animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 11F, the erasing animation of the fluctuating icon h0 is started. In FIG. 10G, the erasing animation is continued, and in FIG. 10H, the fluctuating icon h0 is completely disappeared. Note that an animation for erasing the fluctuating icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, a notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. Here, FIG. 71A is a diagram illustrating a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 71B is a diagram illustrating a notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. (C) is a diagram for explaining an example of a timing of digestion of a notice icon, and FIG. (D) is a diagram for explaining an example of an increase timing of a notice icon. FIG. 72 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a notice icon before change, and FIG. 72 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a notice icon after change.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed above the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is partitioned into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a fifth notice icon display area YA5, and a sixth notice icon display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is further displayed). Is a total of eight), it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area are different. The number of notice icons that can be displayed and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one, or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), a notice icon I6 of a hat composed of a hat pattern is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a notice box of a thousand boxes is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes consisting of symbols is displayed, a notice icon I10 of a fan consisting of a fan is displayed in the third notice icon display area YA3, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4 of the notice icon A notice icon I7 of a shuriken composed of a symbol of a shuriken is displayed, a notice icon I8 of a ribbon composed of a ribbon is displayed in a fifth notice icon display area YA5, and a sixth notice area YA6 of a notice icon is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is determined based on information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed for one area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed for one area.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c), for example. Is controlled to be This control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 71 (a), the notice icon I8 of the ribbon is consumed, and thereafter, the notice icon I8 of the consumed ribbon is displayed. A corresponding effect may be performed. After that, when the change is completed, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and when the change display of the decorative symbol (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 of the digested shuriken may be executed. Thereafter, when the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (in FIG. 71 (a), the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11) moves toward the change icon display area 280. Is started, and at the same time, the change display of the decorative symbol (symbol change corresponding to hold 2) is started. When 4 seconds elapse after the start of the symbol change, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and thereafter, An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. Further, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars is digested, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon I9 of the thousand cars may be executed. After that, when two seconds elapse after all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan announcement icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan announcement icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon is to notify the player in advance that the notice or the effect will be performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 71A, each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 has, for example, the timing shown in FIG. Is controlled to be increased by This control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when four seconds have elapsed since the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 71 (a), a lord appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a lord effect of increasing the notice icon is executed. Is done. In this lord effect, an effect is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the change is completed and the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is started, a DJ effect is performed in which a DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the number of notice icons is increased. In this DJ effect, an effect is performed in which a notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, after the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is completed and the symbol change corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the second pseudo continuous production, the lord-like effect is executed and the fan Is performed in such a manner that the notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo continuous production is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decoration symbol variation start and temporary stop display is executed a plurality of times in one special figure variation display.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a big hit is greater than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a loss. For example, the number of notice icons that increase in the design change display that is a loss may be set to at most one, and the number of notice icons that increase in the design change display that becomes a big hit may be set to at least two or more.

  Next, the effect content corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The notice icons include those for which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear, as shown in FIG. 72A, and those for which the content of the corresponding effect is clear, as shown in FIG. 72B.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), a preview icon I1 for the first palace and a preview icon I2 for the second palace, as shown in FIG. And a third button notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The first lord's notice icon I1 is a reminder icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is displayed in white, and the reliability of the big hit is low. In addition, the notice icon I2 of the second palace is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the face of the palace is displayed in green, and the reliability of the big hit is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a reminder icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is displayed in red, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is one of weak to strong. When the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord become a predetermined change display timing (for example, the timing of the increase display of the notice icon), the figure The icon changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 72 (b). Also, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 72 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may be changed to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  As described above, the first icon notice icon I1, the second icon notice icon I2, the third icon notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing symbols which are the objects of prefetching. In some cases, and may function as a prefetch notice. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, there may be a case where a character notation is additionally displayed. When the notice icon I2 for the second palace and the notice icon I3 for the third palace are displayed, a “question mark” may be additionally displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), a notice icon of a hat, a notice icon of a shuriken I7, and a notice icon of a ribbon There is a notice icon I8, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the clerk, and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, the pseudo continuous production may be performed only once. Here, the pseudo continuous production includes a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a goose pattern. In the pseudo-sequence production of the strong pattern, for example, as described later, when the pseudo-sequence production starts, the character of the number leader appears, but the display mode of the character with the number leader is different from normal (for example, the number of characters is aura). (In a wrapped display mode), thereby notifying that the reliability is high. Note that, for example, despite the fact that it is the second pseudo continuous production, the fact that it is the third pseudo continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is high. In the pseudo continuous production of the weak pattern, the appearance of the character having the leading number is displayed in a normal display mode, thereby notifying that the reliability is low. As will be described later, the pseudo continuous production of the gasp pattern is a production in which a pseudo continuous production is performed, and a missing display is performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I6 of the hat, if the degree of reliability is strong, “continuation” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. In some cases. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continuation” in black letters with “continuation” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the pseudo continuous production may be performed without fail. After the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by a character of the Oniwaban (ninja), and the reliability of the big hit is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, there is a case where the effect of switching the running notice effect to the strong notice effect effect after the freeze effect is performed. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the big hit is low, a stop symbol notice for notifying a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance may be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, if the degree of reliability is strong, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the reliability is weak, “A” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be always executed. After the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The notification icon I8 of the ribbon is a notification icon imitating a ribbon worn by the character of Princess Chibi, and the reliability of the big hit is high or low. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, an effect of shifting the background to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the change notice mode may be executed (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect of changing the displayed background from a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal game state to one of the backgrounds may be executed (stage change is weak). Direction). Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed in conjunction with the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, if the reliability is strong, "Steven" is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. In some cases. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is low, the “A” pattern may be displayed in black letters as “Steven”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, one of the strong stage change effect and the weak stage change effect may be always executed. After the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousands-box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating a thousand-square box thrown by the character of the lord toward the peasant, and the reliability of the big hit is determined to be a big hit, strong or weak. If the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect, and the reach transition effect is performed. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notice, and thereafter the high-reliability strong cut-in notice is executed (the advancement of the notice). Direction). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the advance promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars box, if the big hit is confirmed, the “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. If the degree of reliability is high, "Advance" may be displayed in red or black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. If the reliability is weak, the “A” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to an additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is consumed, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notification effect may be executed. After the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by the princess character, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed. When the announcement icon I10 of one fan is exhausted, the appearance of a premiere notice for notifying in advance that the jackpot is determined, or the premier reach in which the jackpot is determined is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested after the out-of-reach display is displayed, and a resurrection effect that is a big hit is executed (resurrection effect). In addition, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed along with the fan notice icon I10, "blessing" may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted, one of the premier effect and the resurrection effect may be always executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect to be produced differs depending on the timing at which the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, but the timing of digestion may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any of the weakest to the fixed big hit. When one second button notice icon I11 is consumed, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation accepting period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation accepting period, the digestion display of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed by the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, and the ribbon. , A notice icon I8 of a thousand cars and a notice icon I10 of a fan, and the corresponding effect may be executed. Alternatively, there is a case where any of the notice icons is erased and displayed without changing.

  In the present embodiment, when the above-described pre-change notice icon is changed to the post-change notice icon, the change display of the notice icon is performed. It is also possible to perform a display for deleting the advance notice icon (the advance notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 72 (b): erase effect). In this effect, it is informed that the change will be out of order. In other words, the notice is a gaseous notice indicating that the pattern has been determined to be out. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. In addition, even if the erasing effect is executed, a big hit may be caused.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect mainly on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 73 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a general figure display device 210, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, The drawing holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 68. For example, the display result of the fourth symbol is displayed by the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. Note that the fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of the game board 200, and is driven and controlled by the first sub control unit 400. The fourth symbol display device 284a is, from the top, a general symbol variation notification area, a special symbol variation notification area of the special figure 1, and a symbol variation notification area of the special figure 2. While the symbol in the ordinary figure is stopped, the LED in the area where the square figure is displayed is lit and displayed, while the symbol in the ordinary figure is fluctuating or blinking. While the symbol in the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, while the symbol in the special figure 1 is fluctuating or blinking. While the symbol in the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed. As described above, the fourth symbol not only has a different display position, but also has a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a distinction at a glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 73A, the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part. In FIG. 73 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Also, as shown in FIG. 73 (1), the first special figure display device 212 performs a symbol variation display, and accordingly, the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a variation symbol display. At the same time, the fourth symbol display device 284a performs a variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1. The notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

  In FIG. 73 (1), the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 of these two special maps 1 are displayed in a default display mode (circular blank pattern and white display mode). Although the display of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted in this effect example, the second reserved icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (2), the lighting number of the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and is held. The number is shown to be three. Further, a third suspension icon h13 of the special figure 1 is also displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold targeted for prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as described later. For the sake of convenience of description, hatching is given to the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched, but actually the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 is shown. The display mode (circular, unpatterned and white display mode) is adopted. The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 73 (4), the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 has been started, and the lighting of the fourth symbol has been performed, but the change has not yet occurred in the hold icon and the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 73 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 changes to the special figure. The first hold icon h12 of FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is an effect that is executed when it is determined to display a notice icon based on the result of pre-reading. Here, the lord character YM has a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (7), the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display for throwing toward area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the decorative design display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the lord character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and expresses a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, by displaying the notice icon 16 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it can be said that the pseudo continuous effect is to be executed in the future.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (11) to FIG. 73 (12), a display in which the main character YM is framed out below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 1-decorative 4-decorative 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 73.

  In FIG. 74 (14) subsequent to FIG. 73 (13), the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and until the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed. Not yet.

  In FIG. 74 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon becomes the icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the main character YM has a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 of a fan.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (17), the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. An effect is displayed in which the icon I9 and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (19), the advance notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the advance notice icon second display area YA2 of the advance notice icon display area 285, and the advance notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is displayed in the advance notice icon third display area. The notification icon I10 of the fan is displayed in YA3, and the notification icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 73 (10) to (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and reports the display result of the loss. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 74 (21), the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and further, the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed.

  In FIG. 74 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, four seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 74 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. A display in which the notice icon I6 of the worn hat is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect of digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. In addition, as shown in FIG. 74 (23), when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two notice icons I6 of the hats are displayed, Although the displayed notice icon is set in advance so as to be digested with priority, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the advance notice icons to use may be determined at random, or the advance notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate, limited to the above.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (24), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 74 (25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of “Continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Is also good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice or the like. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing of FIG. 74 (26), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of “continue” and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (27). Then, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that the vehicle is in the non-reach state.
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 74.

  In FIG. 75 (28) which follows from FIG. 74 (27), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the number leader appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is stopped and displayed. The effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed, and the player is notified that the pseudo continuous effect may be started. In the present embodiment, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again after the number character BC pushes up the right symbol. However, for example, the right symbol and the left symbol are the same decorative symbols (for example, “ A decoration state may be formed as the decoration 1 "), and the reach effect may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 continuously stops and displays the left symbol and the right symbol, and displays a pseudo-continuous symbol representing the lord character in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display moves at a low speed from above to below.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 75 (30), as shown in FIG. Is performed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-sequence symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo-sequence is to be executed. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbol is framed downward without being stopped and displayed, the pseudo consecutive symbol is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are out is stopped and displayed as it is. Further, in the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous production may be executed even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the second decorative symbol variable display by the pseudo consecutive effect has started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, the reach effect has not been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (34), a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon 16 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notification icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (35) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of “continuation” for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing of FIG. 75 (37), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the display of “continuation”, and thereafter, in FIG. In response to the digestion of the notice icon I6, the character BC of the chief appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect is displayed in which the stopped right symbol is pushed up, and the second pseudo continuous effect is performed. Is notified to the player that the game may be started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character BC of the number-leader pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c changes from “decoration 1” to “decoration 1”. The decoration is changed to "decoration 2", the non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo continuous symbol moves at a low speed from top to bottom is performed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo consecutive symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed, the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the character information “pseudo × 2” may be changed while the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed. In this effect example, after the number character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 75 (40), as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and the fact that the pseudo-run is to be executed is notified. In the present embodiment, in one symbol change display, the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the more easily a big hit is made. That is, the case where the preview icon I6 of the hat is digested only once and the pseudo continuous production is performed only once and the case where the preview icon I6 of the hat is digested twice and the pseudo continuous production is performed twice are different from each other. If two notice icons I6 are digested, it is likely to be a big hit, and only two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested. Thus, in the case where the pseudo consecutive production is performed three times, it can be said that the one who has digested three of the hat notice icons I6 is likely to be a big hit.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third decorative symbol variable display by the pseudo continuous effect has started.
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 75.

  In FIG. 76 (43) subsequent to FIG. 75 (42), the decorative symbol of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Here, the reach production is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (44), the game reaches the above-described super reach (swordsman reach). It should be noted that the decorative symbol variable display, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced. Is displayed. The image of the enemy swordsman is greatly displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (44), and the duel between the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (45). The animation display of the scene starts.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is moved to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (47), and above the notice icon I9 of the enlarged thousand boxes, The character display of "promotion" for announcing the shift to the effect with higher reliability is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, may be displayed before the enlarged display is performed, or may be performed after the enlarged display is performed. Is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing of FIG. At the timing of 76 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 76 (49), the displayed reach effect is slightly darkened in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character of the lord appears in a cut-in display. A display for cutting the reach effect display being executed is displayed, and then the background darkens as shown in FIG. 76 (50).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 76 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character "Which is too hot?" Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (53), a character display of "blow" is displayed to notify that a button effect is to be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button image 136a together with a button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (55), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. It shows that the button reach production failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 76 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the ornament symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”.
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 76.

  In FIG. 77 (58) subsequent to FIG. 76 (57), the entire display including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 77 (59), the swing fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 2−decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Thereafter, for example, when two seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display in which the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I10 of the fan moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 77 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit will be determined may be added below the enlarged display of the fan notification icon I10. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time when the fan notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. May be performed after the display is enlarged.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing of FIG. 77 (62), the fan preview icon I10 is erased, and the preview icon display area 285 is framed out upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 77 (63), the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols, which fluctuate in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, is resumed, and a re-fluctuation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-fluctuation effect is started.

  In the fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 77 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced and displayed. You.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 77 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 1−decoration 1−decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols with the big hit determination of “decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the "special figure A", which is a 15R probability variable big hit, and the fourth symbol display device 284a displays the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 (circular figure). Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the above-described big hit game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan advance notice icon I10 displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is digested, so that the re-change effect is executed and a big hit occurs. However, the advance notice icon I10 of the fan appears in the advance notice icon display area. In the case where it is not displayed at 285, there is a case where the display result of the loss is derived without performing the re-fluctuation effect. That is, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of the 1000 boxes is missed, this reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when the notice icon I9 of one thousand cars is digested, when a reach transition effect as a false notice of the type corresponding to the notice icon I9 of the digested one thousand boxes is executed, the symbol variation display result Can be said to be missed. The same is true for the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I8 of the ribbon.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, a description has been given of a case in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the announcement icon may be executed by digesting the notice icon. In this case, the number of the notice icons to be consumed in the symbol variation display to be the target of the prefetch notice and the number of the notice icons to be consumed in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol to be subjected to the prefetch notice are made different. Or the same.

  Next, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon described above will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 78 to FIG. 80 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another effect of increasing the notice icon. 78 to 80, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 78 (8a) to (10a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 78 (8a), an effect is displayed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (9 a-1), the notice icon I 1 of the thrown first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 78 (9 a-2), after a display in which the first palace notice icon I 1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 explodes is performed, the timing shown in FIG. 78 (10 a) is performed. Then, the notice icon I1 of the first lord who exploded changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the lord character YM succeeds in the increase display of the notice icon, and an effect display is performed to give a happy expression. Even with this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 78 (8b) to (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 78 (8b), an effect display in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. When the effect button 136 is operated between the time when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the time when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button is displayed. The notice icon changes to one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. As described above, in this effect example, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the jackpot indicated by the preview icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the reliability of the jackpot is provided. May work to enhance the production effect. Note that a period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed may be an effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be disabled during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be disabled. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid during the stop display period. If the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the notice icon that is to be displayed when the effect button 136 is operated at the time of the effect of digestion of the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, and when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or when the operation validity period of the effect button 136 ends without operating the effect button 136, the notice scheduled to be displayed An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. In addition, after the first button notice icon I4 is consumed and the button effect is started, the notice icon that is to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is displayed. May be displayed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was to be displayed after the button effect was started may be performed. Until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon.

  FIGS. 78 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 78 (8c), as in FIG. 73 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 78 (9c), a state is shown in which the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the frame goes out from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaseous increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. In addition, the gasket increase effect using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6 may be performed. For example, a gasket increase effect may be less likely to be performed for a notice icon with a higher reliability of a big hit.

  FIGS. 78 (7d) to (9d) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 78 (7d) shows a state in which the lord character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 73 (7). After that, in FIG. 78 (8d), an effect display is performed in which not only one advance notice icon I6 of the hat but also three advance notice icons I6 of the hats are simultaneously thrown toward the advance notice icon display area 285. It is to be noted that the effect display may be such that the display is not performed simultaneously but one by one.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three hats thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of a plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced in some cases. For example, as shown in FIG. 78 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, a hat notice icon I6) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, and the pseudo link is displayed. Since it is guaranteed that the effect is performed three times, it may be announced that the big hit will be determined. In addition, a notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and a notice icon with low reliability is easily displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 78 (9d ′), some or all of the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partial gasse increase effect or an entire gasse increase effect that goes out of the frame.

  FIGS. 78 (7e) to (9e) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 78 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 73 (7), in addition to the notice icon I6 for one hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes and a notice icon I10 for a fan, a character YM having a notice icon I10 for a fan. Is moved to a predetermined throwing position and displayed. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest jackpot reliability may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest jackpot reliability may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected. Only the information may be displayed. After that, in FIG. 78 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It is to be noted that the effect display may be such that the display is not performed simultaneously but one by one. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other. For example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 78 (9e), the three notice icons thrown are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, the increase of a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed by one additional effect. Therefore, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice can be improved by increasing the number of the notice icons at a time, and the expectation for the execution of the plural kinds of notices can be increased, so that the effect can be further enhanced. There are cases.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 78 (9 e ′), some or all of the three notice icons thrown do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. A partial gasse increase effect or an all-gasse increase effect that goes out of the frame from the left of the region may be executed.

  FIGS. 78 (12f-1) to (12f-2) show other examples of the effect shown in FIG. 73 (12). That is, in FIG. 78 (12 f-1), similarly to FIG. 73 (12), the decorative design is fluctuated in a state in which the advance notice icon I 6 of the hat is displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA 1 of the advance notice icon display area 285. Has been done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (12f-2), the decorative symbol of "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. You. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, a big hit may be achieved. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 79 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 73 (8). That is, in FIG. 79 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice (display mode by the character of Sabohani), the main character YM displays the advance notice icon I6 of the hat and the advance notice icon display area 285. An effect display for throwing at is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the pre-read notice using the hold icon. Note that the effect of increasing the notice icon and the advance notice using the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 79 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 73 (8). That is, in FIG. 79 (8h), the decorative icon display device 208 does not display the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and moves the production holding lamp 286 to a predetermined position (for example, (In the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208), thereby displaying the number of reserved items. The production holding lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default light emitting mode (for example, lighting in white), light emission of a pre-reading notice is provided. Driving control according to an aspect (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 79 (8h), for the sake of convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be pre-read is hatched, but actually, the first special figure 1 Similarly, the second holding lamp of the special figure 1 is lit according to the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 79 (8i) to (9i-2) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 79 (8i), similarly to FIG. 73 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 79 (9i-1), a state is shown in which the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the reservation icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the reservation icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the display mode of the prefetch notice is displayed. Is effected (pending change effect). That is, in the present embodiment, the advance notice icon I6 of the hat is not displayed as the advance notice icon in the advance notice icon display area 285, but may appear as a trigger of the start of the prefetch advance notice by the hold icon. The hold change effect may be performed using an advance notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed as the reliability of the jackpot is higher.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (9 i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and uses the effect holding lamp 286 to hold the icon. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the first holding lamp of the special figure 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the prefetch notice.

  FIGS. 79 (8j) to (9j) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 73 (8), the main character YM appeared and threw a preview icon into the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 79 (8j), unlike FIG. 73 (8). The figure shows that a DJ character BY having a notice icon, instead of the main character YM, appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 79 (8j), the DJ character appears with the hat notice icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (9j), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and changes the notice icon I6 of the hat he has to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. Note that the number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, in a single increase effect of the notice icon by the DJ character BY, a plurality of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of the increase effect of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord character YM, a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). By configuring, there are cases where the effects are diversified and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  FIGS. 79 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 73 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 73 (8), the main character YM appears and throws the preview icon into the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 79 (8k), the DJ having the preview icon further has Of the character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (8k), the DJ character appears with a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (9k), the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the lord character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000 boxes that the user has is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 79 (9k ′), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by arranging it on a layer behind the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if it were. Also, as shown in FIG. 79 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is thrown by the character YM of the lord so as to overlap the notice icon 16 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may be performed. That is, an overwriting effect of the notice icon may be performed. As described above, the execution timing of the increase effect of the plurality of notice icons may be overlapped, and the effect of the effect may be further enhanced.

  FIG. 79 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 73 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 79 (12l), a character notation corresponding to each of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the letters "continuation", and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon display area YA2. Is displayed with a letter of "promotion", and a letter "blessing" is additionally displayed on a notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the third notice icon display area YA3, and a fourth notice icon is displayed. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "chan-me", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the fifth display area YA5 is "STENCHEN". Characters are additionally displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed with "question" along with "continue". The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the contents of the announcement effect whose execution is later announced.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (12l ″) and FIG. 79 (12l ″), part or all of the characters added to the notice icon are changed to “question mark” to clearly indicate the corresponding notice effect. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  Further, it may be notified that an effect display in which a jackpot is determined is executed based on a combination of a plurality of advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed advance notice icons. As shown in (12l ″ ″), when three advance notice icons I6 of the hats to which the notation of “continuation” is added are displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285, four simulations in which the big hit is determined are performed. The effect display including the continuous effect may be notified in advance. If the character added to the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, if the character “promotion” is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. May be a premier notice display for giving a notice that the result of the symbol fluctuation display when the symbol has been digested is a jackpot determination (or that there is a jackpot in the hold).

  In the above-described effect example, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the lord character YM or DJ character BY. However, in the effect example shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 80 (A1), the decorative symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The reach effect is, for example, a normal reach.

  After the start of the reach effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (A2), a notice icon design imitating a notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 80 (A2), a hat notice icon design imitating a hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon design of this hat, the character notation of "stock" is added, and when the notice icon design is stopped, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in an increased manner. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (A3), a display is performed in which the notice icon of the hat changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol of “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is a loss. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  In FIG. 80 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 80 (A1), the decorative symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. , The production of normal reach is started.

  After the start of the reach effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (B2), the first lord's notice icon pattern imitating the first lord's notice icon I1 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the effect example shown in FIG. 80 (B2), the character notation of “stock” is added over the notice icon design of the first palace, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. At 285, it is notified that the notice icon is increased and displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (B3), the display of the notice icon of the first palace changes to the notice icon I1 of the first palace and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is performed, as shown in FIG. 80 (B4), the decoration symbol of “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is a loss. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It is needless to say that the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon 16 of the hat, and may be another kind of notice icon. The timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period during which the symbol change display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may change during the execution of the next and subsequent symbol change displays, The change may not be made until the icon is digested. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the number of notice icons may be performed in this manner.

  Next, another example of the above-described notice icon digestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 81 to 84 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another effect of the notice icon digestion effect. 81 to 84, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 81 (38m) to (40m-3) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 75 (38) to (40). In FIGS. 81 (38m) to (39m), effects similar to those in FIGS. 75 (38) to (39) are performed, but in FIG. 81 (40m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is operated at a low speed. The pseudo-sequence symbol appears as a fluctuating display, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (40m-2), immediately before the pseudo-sequence symbol becomes the stop display position of the decorative symbol, the fluctuating display becomes fast, and the pseudo-sequence symbol is displayed. Is scrolled out below the display area, and as shown in FIG. 81 (40m-3), a temporary stop display is performed with a combination of decoration patterns of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 2”, and the fluctuation is displayed. Is stopped and displayed to inform that the result is a miss. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo continuous production may not be performed in some cases.

  FIGS. 81 (23n) to (24n) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (23n), the display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted is started. However, as shown in FIG. 81 (24n), the notice icon I6 of the consumed hat is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is without being performed is performed to notify that the digested effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 81 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (23o), the display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted is started, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (24o-1). 81 (24o-2), and as shown in FIG. 81 (24o-2), the combination of decorative patterns that have been lost without starting pseudo continuous production ("decoration 1-decoration 2" in FIG. 81 (24o-2)). −decoration 2 “decorative pattern combination”), the swing fluctuation is displayed, and then the stop display is performed to notify that the result is a loss. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo continuous production may not be performed in some cases.

  FIGS. 81 (22p) to (23p) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (22) to (23). In other words, as shown in FIG. 81 (22p), if, for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, in FIG. 81 (23p), the leftmost (notice icon) of the notice icon display area 285 The effect that the notice icon other than the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1) is consumed may be performed. In the effect example illustrated in FIG. 81 (23p), an effect is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is consumed. Thus, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be digested in order from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, in the order of stocking), but the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when the notice icon stored later is consumed first, a big hit may be easily made, or conversely, a big hit may be hardly made. Further, the order of digestion of the notice icons may be determined regardless of the order of the stocks. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, and the reliability of the jackpot may vary depending on the order of digestion of the notice icons. You may make it. In addition, by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order, the big hit may be determined to be announced. For example, a notice icon I6 for a hat and a notice for a shuriken may be displayed. A rule may be set such that if the notice icon I7, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken are consumed in this order, the big hit is determined. As a result, the player may be provided with an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that will be a big hit, and may be able to improve the game motivation.

  FIGS. 81 (24q-1) to (24q-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 74 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (24q-1), the notice icon 16 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 81 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left, respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digestive effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

  FIGS. 82 (Aa) to 82 (Ae) show an example of an effect in the case where the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed after the effect of digestion of the notice icon is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (Aa), after the notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed, and At the timing shown by 82 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and it is notified that the result is a display of a loss. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (Ac), the hold is exhausted and the display of the change of the decorative pattern is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 82 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon by the main character YM is performed. When the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 82 (Ae), the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted and the notice icon I3 becomes blank. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown into the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, an increasing number of notice icons may be displayed in a notice icon display area that becomes blank as the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 82 (B) shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blank spaces are generated in the notice icon display area due to the consumption of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 have been digested, the lord character YM When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 that are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this manner, a display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. When there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas in which the increasing notice icons are displayed is not limited to the above-described order, and may be another order. 400 may be set in advance. In addition, in this effect example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons to be displayed are not changed according to the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the number of displayed reliability icons or notice icons is different. For example, when an increasing number of advance notice icons are displayed in the rightmost notice icon sixth display area YA6 among the blank display areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least six advance notice icons are displayed. It may be suggested to be displayed in the display area 285, or it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is the highest.

  FIG. 82 (C) shows an example of an effect where the effect of digesting the notice icon and the effect of increasing the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol change display. That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), while the effect of digesting the advance notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 of the advance notice icon display area 285 is performed, The effect that the notice icon is increased by the character YM, and the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Here, the notice icon 16 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon that has been increased in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display was executed. In this way, the digestive effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during the execution of one symbol change display. At this time, the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed and the period during which the increase effect of the notice icon is performed may overlap. In addition, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the digestion effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon And the effect of increasing the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area where the increasing notice icon is displayed may be a blank area at the time of starting the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the increase effect of the announcement icon is displayed. The area may be blank before starting.

  FIG. 82 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (59r), before the effect of digestion of the notice icon is started, an effect of inducing whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed. Specifically, for example, of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is determined whether or not the notice icon is digested by, for example, starting to fluctuate the notice icon to be digested. I'm trying to fuel it. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (60), the fan advance notice icon I10 may be exhausted, or the fan advance notice icon I10 may not be exhausted. If the user is not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the display of the notice icon may be maintained, and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (59r), when the fan announcement icon I10 is deleted without being digested, it is then stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative ornaments, and the result of the display of the error. That may be notified.

  FIGS. 82 (59s) to (60s) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 77 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 82 (59s), a notice icon I6 of two hats, a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and FIG. After the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 1−decoration 2−decoration 1”, the fan notice icon is displayed among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. When I10 is digested, it becomes a notice of a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 82 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, a notice icon I6 of a hat) are digested, it loses as it is. May be stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative pattern of the above.

  FIGS. 82 (23t) to (32t) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (23) to 75 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (23t), in this effect example, a digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added to the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIGS. 82 (23t) to (25t), when the digestion effect of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0. The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed after digestion as shown in FIGS. 82 (28t) to (32t), and the corresponding effect (simulated continuous effect). ) Is displayed continuously until the end of). The timing at which the display of the notice icon in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is started may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, or may be before the digestion effect of the notice icon is started. It may be the same as the start of the digestive effect of the notice icon. In addition, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished or before the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished. Good, may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, may be after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the end of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon May be, at the same time as the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or to the digested notice icon It may be at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, may be deleted at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure), or may be in progress. When the notification icon display area YA0 is deleted (for example, the notification icon display area 285 and the digestion notification icon display area YA0 are deleted in FIG. 76 (44), or only the digestion notification icon display area YA0 is deleted. Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are consumed during one symbol change display, the notice icon a in the notice notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A that has been consumed first is the digestion of the notice icon A. It may be deleted after or at the end of the effect, and no notice icon may be displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0, or the digestion effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be deleted at the same time as or after the start, or may be deleted at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digestion notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. During the digestive effect of the notice icon B, for example, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super-reach effect or a big hit effect, an island simultaneous effect, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased and the digestion notice is displayed. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

  FIG. 83 (Aa) to FIG. 83 (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. In other words, in FIG. 83 (Aa), the notice icon 16 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed. A notice icon I8 of the ribbon is displayed, and a notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the fourth notice icon display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested. The production starts. Here, the start timing of the digestive effect of each notice icon may be simultaneous or different. In this case, the order of digestion of the notice icons may be set to the order corresponding to the execution order of the effect.

  Thereafter, when the advance notice icon I6 of the hat and the advance notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, as shown in FIG. 83 (Ab), they are enlarged and displayed with character display. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is additionally displayed in the vicinity of the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, and a character display of “Stechen” is added in the vicinity of the enlarged display icon I8 of the ribbon. Is displayed.

Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83 (Ac), the shoji is closed, and after the character CH of Princess Chibi appears on the front side, the shoji is opened and the moon is opened as shown in FIG. 83 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. Note that during the execution of the stage change effect, the decorative symbol change display performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is changed to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to and zoom out.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (Ae), the ornamental pattern which has been reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area. Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed to push up the right symbol stopped and displayed, and the player is notified that a pseudo continuous effect may be executed thereafter. .

  In addition, in this effect example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icons are made different, but they may be started at the same time.

  FIG. 83 (66u-1) to FIG. 83 (66u-3) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 (66). In other words, in FIG. 83 (66u-1), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and the big hit is notified, but the notice icon display area 285 is continuously displayed. It is shown that there is an unannounced notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (66u-2), a jackpot start effect is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 83 (66u-3), the undigested game continues after the jackpot round game is started. Notice icon is displayed. In the present example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the execution of the big hit game, but may be displayed above the display area. In addition, in this effect example, the unexecuted notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect for notifying that the certainty big hit is confirmed), for example, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in -3), during the execution of the big hit game, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, the fact that the variable change big hit is confirmed is notified, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted. May notify that the 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when the other notice icons are consumed, for example, a meaning may be given to indicate that there is a possibility of being promoted. In this way, even if the same notice icon is consumed during execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. In this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be different. That is, a notice icon specific to a big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some notice icons may be commonly used. .

  FIG. 83 (Ba) to FIG. 83 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (Ba), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 83 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the preview icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed together with the preview icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 83 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be completely deleted when the stage change is performed. After the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be always deleted, only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or even if the notice icon may not be deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 83 (22v-1) to (23v) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 74 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 83 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 83 (22v-2), a lord character YM2 holding a placard appears and is digested. The type of the advance notice icon is notified in advance. After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (23v), the effect of using the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is started. In addition, even when the advance notice of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or the notice icon of a type different from the previously announced notice icon may be digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is consumed, it may be suggested that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 83 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 74 (22). In other words, as shown in FIG. 83 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, a notice icon that may be digested is highlighted to make the player pay attention to the digestion of the notice icon. Is also good.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the character BC of the chief appears and the pseudo continuous production is executed, and the other production icons are not executed. Is performed, and other effects are not performed. For example, even though the notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested, the character BC is not appeared but the princess character appears. When an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (for example, the jackpot is determined), the jackpot may be determined when an effect that does not correspond to the digested notification icon is executed (a so-called rule break).

  In the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested can be changed by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit occurs while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the big hit game is deleted when the game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit occurs in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the big hit game is temporarily hidden when the game is started, and is returned and displayed after the probable change state or the time saving state ends. It may be configured as follows. Further, the system may be configured not to carry over even after the probable change state or the time saving state ends.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which the content of the reach effect to be shifted to later is notified according to the type of the notice icon to be consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (Aa), when the “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, and reaches the reach state, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ab-1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ac-1), the enlarged character BC2 of the number length is displayed. Appears and then transitions to the number reach that corresponds to the appearing character. In addition, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of the thousand and two boxes is digested, then, as shown in FIG. Appears, and then transitions to the lord reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, as shown in FIG. 84 (Ab-3), when the fan notice icon I10 is digested, the princess character HM displayed in an enlarged manner is then displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (Ac-3). Appears, and then transitions to a princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, in this example of production, the reliability of the jackpot corresponding to the notice icon is corresponded, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach productions is configured to be in the order of princess reach> lord reach> bancho reach. I have. It should be noted that when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a maiden character enlarged and displayed after digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat appears) (when a so-called rule break occurs). May be configured such that the big hit is determined. A plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear in response to the combined notice to execute a combined notice. In addition, a special effect for rendering a plurality of advance icons (a multiple-exclusive effect) may be executed, and it is a big hit that a plurality of advance icons are consumed rather than a single advance icon is consumed. May be configured to have a high degree of reliability.

  Next, a button effect that is executed after the second button notice icon I11 has been consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (Ba), the second button advance notice icon I11 is displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 of the advance notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter as shown in FIG. It notifies that the operation can be accepted, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect performed after the second button notice icon I11 is consumed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (Ca), a second button advance notice icon I11 is displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 of the advance notice icon display area 285. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described button reach effect is performed, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to inform that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 84 (Cb), the display in which the second button notice icon I11 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 84 (Cc). Thus, the state changes to the protruding button image 136b in which the effect button 136 protrudes. That is, it is shown that the reliability of the big hit has been promoted to the button reach effect.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. FIG. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 86, and FIG. 88 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 88.

  In FIG. 85 (1) to FIG. 86 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon is the notice icon I6 of the hat, but has been changed to the notice icon I1 of the first palace. Except for this point, it is the same as FIG. 73 (1) to FIG. 74 (14), and the description is omitted here. Also, regarding the effect performed between FIG. 86 (14) and FIG. 86 (20), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon is all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first palace. 74 (15) to (19) except for the above.

  In FIG. 86 (20), the display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the loss is definitely displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 has also been deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 86 (21), the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and further, the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed, but no change has yet occurred in the reserved icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 86 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 86 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The display in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 86 (23), when the same notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in plurals, for example, four notice icons I1 of the first palace are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance that the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side is digested with priority, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which of the advance notice icons to use may be determined at random, or the advance notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to the order described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I1 of the first palace moves to the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in FIG. 86 (25), below the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo continuous production is to be performed is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, may be displayed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. Is also good.

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (26), the character display of “continue” added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After the reduced display of I6, a display for moving to the original display position, that is, the first notice icon display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. In addition, when the digested notice icon is displayed again at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed so as to be recognizable as digested.For example, the display area where the digested notice icon is displayed may be displayed. The display may be grayed out, or character information “done” may be added. Alternatively, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the effect contents shown in FIGS. 86 (27) to 87 (33) are such that the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon Since the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first palace, they are the same as those in FIGS. 74 (27) to 75 (33). Is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (34), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying the notice icon I1 of the first palace, which has been displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in FIG. 87 (36), below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo continuous production is performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (37), the character display of “continue” added to the hat notice icon I6 is deleted, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After the reduced display of I6, a display for moving to the original display position, that is, to the second preview icon display area YA2 of the preview icon display area 285 is performed.

  After that, the effect contents shown in FIGS. 87 (38) to (45) are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed, respectively. 75 (38) to FIG. 76 () except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first palace. 45), and the description is omitted here.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (46), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed on the notice icon third display area YA3 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I1 of the first palace moves to the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, the notice icon I1 changes to the notice icon I9 of a thousand cars at the timing shown in FIG. Above the displayed notice icon I9 of the 1000 boxes, a character display of "promotion" for announcing a shift to an effect with higher reliability is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is displayed in an enlarged manner, may be displayed before the enlarged display is performed, or may be performed after the enlarged display is performed. Is also good.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of "promotion" attached to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is erased, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 87 (48). Then, a display for moving to the original display position, that is, the third preview icon display area YA3 of the preview icon display area 285 is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 88 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. In this effect example, when the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 88 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display indicating that a power failure has occurred, and then performs a strong reliable strong reach. The production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this example of the effect is started, as shown in FIG. 87 (50-1), the decorative design display device 208 displays a character of "Is it a chance?" At the timing shown in FIG. 88 (50-2), the character display “NO” is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (51), after the character display of “Is it too hot?”, The character display of “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (53), a character display of "blow" is displayed to notify that a button effect is to be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button image 136a together with a button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (55), the button image 136a is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 88 (56). It shows that the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 88 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  In FIG. 88 (58), all of them including the notice icon display area 285 are temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 88 (59), the swing fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 2−decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Thereafter, for example, when two seconds have elapsed since the temporary symbol stop display, the display in which the first icon like the preview icon I1 displayed in the preview icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I1 of the first palace moves to the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, the notice icon I1 changes to the notice icon I10 of the fan and is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" for notifying that the big hit will be determined may be added below the enlarged display of the fan notification icon I10. In addition, when adding the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time when the fan notice icon I10 is enlarged and displayed, or may be performed before the enlarged display. May be performed after the display is enlarged.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fan notice icon I10 is reduced and displayed, the original display position, that is, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. The display for moving to YA4 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 89 (63), the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and a re-fluctuation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

  In the fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 89 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced and displayed. You.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 89 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" whose jackpot has been determined is stopped and displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the "special figure A", which is a 15R probability variable big hit, and the fourth symbol display device 284a displays the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 (circular figure). Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the big hit game is started after the above-described big hit game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon described above will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 90 to FIG. 92 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another effect of increasing the notice icon. In FIG. 90 to FIG. 92, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 90 (8a) to (9a) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 90 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I3 of the third palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I1 of the first palace. In addition, the same can be performed for the notice icon I2 of the second palace. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (9a), the notice icon I3 of the thrown third palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 90 (8b) to (9b) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 90 (8b), as in FIG. 85 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 90 (9 b), a state is shown in which the notice icon I 1 of the first palace does not reach the notice icon display area 285, and is framed out from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaseous increase effect using the lord's notice icon.

  FIGS. 90 (8c) to (9c) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 90 (8c), an effect is displayed in which not only the first notice icon I1 of the first palace but three notice icons I1 of the first palace are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. It is to be noted that the effect display may be such that the display is not performed simultaneously but one by one.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (9c), the three noticed icons I1 of the thrown first palace are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon of the notice icon display area 285. It is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of a plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced in some cases. Further, a highly reliable notice icon (for example, the third palace notice icon I3) is difficult to be displayed (not easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first palace icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this example of the production, the same notice icon (the notice icon I1 of the first palace) is increased by three, but a plurality of notice icons of different degrees of reliability may be simultaneously increased. Alternatively, the notice icon I1 of the first palace and the notice icon I3 of the third palace may be simultaneously increased.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 90 (9 c ′), some or all of the thrown three first palace notice icons I 1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative pattern is displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial gasse increase effect or an entire gaseous increase effect in which a frame is out of the display area of the display device 208 from the left.

  FIG. 90 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 (8). That is, in FIG. 90 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice (display mode by the character of Sabohani), the main character YM changes the first advance notice icon I1 to the advance notice icon I1. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the pre-read notice using the hold icon. Note that the effect of increasing the notice icon and the advance notice using the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 90 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 (8). In other words, in FIG. 90 (8f), the decoration symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and displays the number of reserved items by the effect retaining lamp 286. In FIG. 90 (8f), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be pre-read is hatched, but actually, the first special figure 1 Similarly, the second holding lamp of the special figure 1 is lit according to the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 90 (8g) to (9g-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 90 (8g), as in FIG. 85 (8), an effect display in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 90 (9g-1), a state is shown in which the notice icon I1 of the first palace does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first palace acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the prefetch notice. The effect display (pending change effect) that changes to the display mode of (1) is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first palace may not be displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for the start of the prefetch notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first palace. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed as the notice icon with a higher jackpot reliability is higher. Good.

  FIGS. 90 (12h-1) to (12h-2) show another example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 (12). That is, in FIG. 90 (12h-1), similarly to FIG. 85 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (12h-2), the decorative symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. You. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, a big hit may be achieved. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIGS. 91 (8i) to (9i) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 85 (8), the main character YM appeared and threw a preview icon into the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 91 (8i), unlike FIG. 85 (8). The figure shows that a DJ character BY having a notice icon, instead of the main character YM, appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon of the palace notice icon I1. After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (9i), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and displays the notice icon I1 of the first palace having the notice icon I1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display to be placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, in a single increase effect of the notice icon by the DJ character BY, a plurality of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of the increase effect of the notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first notice icon increase effect by the lord character YM, a second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY). By configuring, there are cases where the effects are diversified and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  FIGS. 91 (8j) to (9j) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 85 (8), the main character YM appears and throws the preview icon into the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 91 (8j), the DJ having the preview icon further has Of the character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first palace notice icon I1. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (9j), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the character BY places the notice icon I1 of the first palace held by the character BY in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 while flying toward the upper left corner. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged on a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 91 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is arranged on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if it is passing.

  FIGS. 91 (8k) to (9k) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 85 (8), the lord's character YM appeared and threw a preview icon at the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 91 (8k), a DJ having a preview icon further appears. Of the character BY appears on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 91 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with a third palace notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (9k), after the notice icon I1 of the first shrine thrown by the character YM of the shrine is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the DJ is displayed. While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first icon that the third icon of the lord has thrown by the character YM of the third person and is displayed in the first icon YA1 of the advance icon is displayed. In such a manner that the DJ character BY places the third-principal notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1, the effect display is performed. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a notice icon with a small jackpot reliability with a notice icon with a large jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution timing of the increase effect of the plurality of notice icons may be overlapped, and the effect of the effect may be further enhanced. The promotion effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 91 (121) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (121), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are each accompanied by the character notation "question mark". For example, a notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon I2 of the second notice is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and a notice icon third display area. In YA3, a notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed, in a fourth notice area YA4, a notice icon I2 of the second palace is displayed, and in a fifth notice icon display area YA5, a notice icon of the third palace is displayed. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the character notation of "question mark" is added to each notice icon. According to this effect example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 91 (12l '), the type of the notice icon after the change may be notified in text notation for some of the notice icons before the change. For example, a notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed on the notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon I2 of the second palace displayed on the notice icon second display area YA2, and a notice icon I4 The notice icon I2 of the second palace displayed in the display area YA4 has a character notation of "question mark" attached thereto, and the notice icon after the change cannot be recognized. The notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed on YA3 is informed of the change of the notice icon I7 of the shuriken with the character notation of "chan eyes" and displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third palace, which has been changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, is appended with the notation of "continuation". The notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed on the icon sixth display area YA6 is accompanied by the character notation of "question mark" along with "continuation", and is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat will change to the notice icon I6 of the hat. I have. These character notations may be notified at once for all or a part of the notice icon, or may be notified gradually over time.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 91 (12l ″), all or some of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 are changed to the notice icon after change, and the notice icon after change is displayed. The corresponding character notation may be added only to the object.

  FIGS. 92 (8m-1) to (9m) show another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 85 (8), the lord character YM appeared and threw a preview icon at the preview icon display area 285, but in FIG. 92 (8m-1), the preview icon is further provided. The appearance of the DJ character BY appearing on the flying carpet from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (8m-2), the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 92 (9m), the DJ character BY is throwing the notice icon I9 of the box held by the DJ while flying toward the upper left corner, and is thrown by the lord character YM to display the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places a notice icon I9 of a thousand cars in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed on YA1. According to this effect example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten on the notice icon after the change. As described above, the execution timing of the increase effect of the plurality of notice icons may be overlapped, and the effect of the effect may be further enhanced. The overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 92 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 85 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 85 (8), the lord character YM appeared and threw a notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 92 (8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. In this case, the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon of the palace icon I1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 92 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9n), the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner and throws the notice icon I1 of the first lord by the character YM of the lord, and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first palace notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I9 of the thousand cars displayed on YA1. In this manner, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten on the notice icon before the change. As described above, the execution timing of the increase effect of the plurality of notice icons may be overlapped, and the effect of the effect may be further enhanced. The overwriting effect may be performed during the execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwriting effect may be executed each time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first palace) is consumed, the notice icon after the change is replaced with the notice icon before overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be configured to be higher or the reliability of the jackpot may be configured to be lower when the notification icon after the overwriting is digested than when the notification icon before the overwriting is digested. It may be configured such that the jackpot reliability does not change.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the notice icon changes stepwise. In FIG. 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two reserve icons (reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is indicated that the start of the two symbol changes is suspended. ing. Each of these two hold icons has a default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be pre-read and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiments are the same. In addition, a notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and a notice icon I3 of the third sign is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), a tongue-like character YM2 holding a placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The placard has a character notation of “change”, which indicates that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, as shown in FIG. 93 (B1), the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I3 of the third palace changes to a notice icon I9 of a thousand cars. In addition, the display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both the notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 93 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Changes to The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, the display modes of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0. May change. As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the notice icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. In addition, the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may be changed by this effect.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 39 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, but is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right. Then, in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two reserve icons (reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is indicated that the start of the two symbol changes is suspended. ing. Each of these two hold icons has a default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be pre-read and is hatched for convenience of description, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiments are the same. In addition, a notice icon I1 of the first palace is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and a notice icon I3 of the third sign is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a little princess chance effect is performed. The little princess chance effect is an effect that may be started in the case where the above-described general-purpose fluctuating game is executed. Princess Chibi Chance production is a production that imitates an Ami-Dakuji, where the character of Princess Chibi selects one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and moves to the goal point. This is to notify that an effect corresponding to the indicated icon will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it is notified that the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 will be long opened, and the When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, it indicates that the result of the running symbol change display is likely to be a big hit, and when reaching the goal point indicated by the cross icon Forecast that the fluctuation display result of the ordinary figure is incorrect.

  Further, in this production example, when the goal point where the notice icon of the lord is reached is reached, as shown in FIG. 93 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. At least one changes to the notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 93 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third palace, which was displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, has changed to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. In addition, the display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first palace displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both the notice icons may change.

  In addition, when the character of Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 93 (D2), at least one of the hold icons of the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed. One changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 93 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, the display modes of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0. May change.

  As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the notice icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. In addition, the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may be changed by this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case where the power is cut off or restored during the display of the notice icon will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of a display in the case where the power is cut off or restored during the display of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, two reserve icons (reserve icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed, and it is indicated that the start of the two symbol changes is suspended. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. In addition, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and a thousand box is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. A preview icon I9 is displayed, and a fan preview icon I10 is displayed in the fourth preview icon display area YA4.

  In FIG. 94 (B), a power failure occurs for some reason, and FIG. 94 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power is restored instantaneously. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (C), a character display of "Recovery Please wait for a while" is displayed as a return display. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power interruption. After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the symbol variation display ends, and the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying “Special figure I” which is the display result of the loss. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol change display is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss. Then, when the power is cut off or the power is restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. Further, when the power is cut off or the power is restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or the power is restored, the pre-reading result information stored in the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 1 or the pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 in the RAM 308 is the “undetermined” information. The configuration may be such that Here, in the case where at least one of the subcommands including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit includes the “undetermined” information, the “undetermined” information is included. Until all the held reservations are exhausted, the pre-reading announcement including the digestion effect and the increase effect of the advance notice icon may not be performed. Also, for the newly increased hold after the power interruption / recovery (the hold in which the pre-read result is stored), the pre-read notice is not performed, and the pre-read notice is performed after all the holds including the “undetermined” information have been consumed. Alternatively, for a newly increased hold after a power failure or power recovery, a pre-reading advance notice may be made before the hold including the “undetermined” information is consumed.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. 96 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95. In FIGS. 95 to 96, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 95, the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be prefetched is on hold, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 95 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 73 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed large in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in the center of the display screen. FIG. 73 (5) is different from FIG. 73 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display area is formed above the reserved icon display area 281 and the three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed small. The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured such that, after the start of the change, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the final stop.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 95 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, different from FIG. 73 (6), the main character YM has a “house” notice icon I21 in which the character of “house” is circled.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 95 (3), the lord's character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. An effect display for throwing toward area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (5), the notice icon I21 of the thrown “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (6). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Thus, the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a later-described family crest effect may be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (7) to FIG. 95 (8), a display is performed in which the main character YM is framed out below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 95 (10), on the decorative design display device 208, the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by the moving animation, respectively. The suspended icon that has been displayed and is at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is the special icon 1 Is the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 95 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the main character YM has a “print” notice icon I22 in which the “print” character is surrounded by a circle.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (12), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (13), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” being carried is announced. An effect display to be thrown toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (14), the notice icon I22 of the thrown “print” is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, the same effect display as in FIG. 95 (6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIGS. 95 (7) to (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the loss. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 95 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. .

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (19) following FIG. The display in which the notice icon I22 of “print” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously exhausted is started. That is, the advance notice icon I21 of “house” displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 and the advance notice icon I22 of “print” displayed in the advance notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 and The display moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" have been consumed. The timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is deleted may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued thereafter. In addition, the timing of starting the movement of the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” may be simultaneous, or the start of movement of the notice icon I21 of “house” may be the notice icon I22 of “crest”. May be earlier than the start of the movement of the notice icon I22 of the "print", or may be earlier than the start of the movement of the notice icon I21 of the "house".

  After that, when the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 21), the crest role object 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a family crest displaying an effect image to that effect. A drop production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (22), the game reaches a super reach (a swordsman reach). The effects of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, as two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon") are digested, a corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. Is configured. In addition, even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. Further, when a family crest drop effect is performed, it may be assured that a big hit will occur in the symbol variation display, or a loss may occur. Further, the configuration may be such that a big hit can be made more easily when the family crest drop effect is performed than when the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, it may be configured such that the symbol variation display which is a big hit has a higher frequency of performing the family crest drop effect than the symbol variation display which is a loss. In addition, the design change display which becomes a big hit makes it easier to digest two specific notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon") than the design change display which becomes a loss. May be configured.

  FIGS. 97 and 98 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another effect of the notice icon digestion effect. 97 to 98, the first special figure display 212, the second special figure display 214, the general figure display 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIG. 97 (a1) is different from FIG. 95 (5) in that the notice icon I22 of “print” appears before the notice icon I21 of “house” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and thereafter As shown in FIG. 97 (a2), a notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (a3), the notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display region YA2 of “Crest” displayed in the notice icon first display region YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I21 of “house” that has been used is simultaneously extinguished is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of “Crest” displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of “Home” displayed in the second notice icon second display area YA2 are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and The display moving from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach state by “decoration 1” is formed, and a reach effect has been started.

Thereafter, when the notice icon I22 of “Crest” and the notice icon I21 of “Home” move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (a4-1). You. At this time, the images are displayed in the correct order (that is, in the order of “house” and “print”), not in the order of “print” and “house”. Further, as shown in FIG. 97 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of “print” and the notice icon I21 of “house” may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the order of “print” and “house”. In this effect example, even if it is the case shown in FIG. 97 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 97 (a4-2), the above-described family crest drop effect is performed thereafter. For example, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the arrangement order of “house” and “crest” (that is, the correct arrangement order), a family crest drop effect is performed, and the arrangement order of “crest” and “house” (that is, When the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order, the family crest drop effect may not be performed. Also, when the notice icon is displayed in an enlarged order in the order of “Crest” and “House”, the family crest drop effect is less likely to be started than when the notice icon is displayed in an enlarged order in the order of “House” and “Crest”. May be configured.
FIG. 97 (b1) to FIG. 97 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest falling effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (b1), only the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “print” is displayed. Is displayed without waiting for the advance notice icon I22 to be displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 97 (b3), The object 224 </ b> B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps with the front side of a part of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down. It is operating as if it is vibrating in the direction (flicking operation). At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “Creating a crest” indicating that there is a possibility that a crest drop effect may be performed is displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in an enlarged manner, while the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. And the direction of the lord has started. At this time, the lord character YM has a notice icon I22 of “Crest”. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (b4), when the lord's character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 Is displayed in the second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Note that the notice icon I22 of “Crest” remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Also, at this time, the crest role item 224B temporarily retreats to the initial position to make it easy to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but does not retreat to the initial position and continues the fluttering operation. Is also good. On the other hand, the character display of “Creating a family crest” is continuously displayed.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 97 (b6), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the crest role item 224B that has been evacuated descends again and resumes the panning operation. In this effect example, when, for example, the notice icon I22 of “Crest” displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest role item 224B descends, and FIG. A family crest drop effect shown in (21) is performed. Note that there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. In FIG. 97 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged state until the “monster” notice icon I22 displayed later is consumed. At that time, the notice icon I22 of the “print” may be stocked, but may be digested without stocking.

  FIG. 97 (c1) to FIG. 97 (c2-3) show another example of the notice icon digestion effect. In this effect example, a background notice in which the background changes due to digestion of the notice icon is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I31 of “don” in which the character of “don” is circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, a “Princess” notice icon I32 in which the character “Princess” is circled is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and a “Grandpa” notice icon I33 in which the character “Princess” is circled is noticed. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

  FIG. 97 (c2-1) shows a background display state after three notice icons of the “donor” notice icon I31, the “princess” notice icon I32, and the “grandfather” notice icon I33 have been digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 97 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image in which the face of the grandfather is up from the left side of the display screen and a face of the lord. A background display is displayed in which the uploaded image and the image of the princess face are divided into three equal parts. In the present embodiment, when all three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of “dono”, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “grandfather” are consumed, the reliability of the symbol change display to the big hit is displayed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that is highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. For example, the notice icon I31 of “dono”> “princess” May be set to have the highest reliability when digestion is performed in the order of the notice icon I32> the notice icon I33 of “grandfather”, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability for the big hit can be set as appropriate. .

  In FIG. 97 (c2-2), among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of “dono”, the notice icon I32 of “princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “grandfather”, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and The background display state after only the notice icon I33 of “Grandfather” has been digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 97 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image in which the princess's face is up from the left side of the display screen and an old man's face are displayed. A background display in which the uploaded image is bisected is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three advance notice icons of the notice icon I31 of "dono", the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are consumed, the symbol change display is performed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, but the reliability is lower than when three notice icons are consumed. In the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “grandfather” are digested out of the three notice icons has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notice icon I31 of "Princess" and the notice icon I31 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" may be digested. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "dono" and the notice icon I32 of "princess" are digested, "dono" The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I31 and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are digested. And when the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are digested, These can be set appropriately.

  In FIG. 97 (c2-3), among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 of “dono”, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “grandpa”, only the notice icon I33 of “grandpa” The background display after the is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 97 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background display in which an image in which the face of the old man is up is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three advance notice icons, the advance notice icon I31 of the "lord", the advance notice icon I32 of the "princess", and the advance notice icon I33 of the "grandfather" is consumed, the symbol change display is performed. Is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability of the big hit is lower than the reliability when the two notice icons are consumed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the notice icon I33 of “grandfather” has been digested out of the three notice icons. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notice icon I31 of “dono” has been digested. Alternatively, the “Princess” notice icon I32 may be digested. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “dono” is digested, the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon of “grandfather” The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notice icon I32 of "princess" is digested than when the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" is digested. However, these can be set as appropriate.

  In addition, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be made different depending on the type of the notice icon to be displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “dono” is displayed, the notice icon I32 of “princess” or “grandfather” Is higher than when the notice icon I33 is displayed, and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is greater than when the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" is displayed. May be high, or, for example, when the notice icon I31 of “dono” and the notice icon I32 of “princess” are displayed, the notice icon I31 of “dono” and the notice icon I33 of “grandpa” are displayed. Also, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case where the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "grandfather" are displayed, and the notice icon I31 of "dono" and that of "grandfather" are displayed. When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the reliability of the big hit may be higher than when the notification icon I32 of "princess" and the notification icon I33 of "grandfather" are displayed, but these may be set appropriately. can do.

  Also, in this effect example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is configured to be displayed, but the background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. May be performed, or the background display may not change. In this case, the fact that the big hit is fixed may be notified as a so-called rule break.

  When three notice icons are displayed, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol change display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol change display is performed. It may be. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be changed depending on the display order.

  Further, in this example of production, when the notice icon I31 of “lord” is digested, the character of the lord appears and the reach of the lord is started, and when the notice icon I32 of “princess” is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the “grandfather” notice icon I33 has been consumed, the grandfather character may appear and the grandfather reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I33 of “Grandfather” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” are digested, the character of the grandfather and the princess appear and the grandfather & princess reach is started, and the notification icon of “Dono” is displayed. When I31 and the princess notice icon I32 are digested, the lord character and the princess character appear, and the lord & princess reach is started, and the "princess" notice icon I31 and the "grandfather" notice icon When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear, and the lord & grandfather reach may be started. When the notice icon I31 of "do", the notice icon I32 of "princess", and the notice icon I33 of "grandpa" are digested, the character of the lord, the character of the princess, and the character of the grandfather appear, and Princess & grandfather reach may be started. In this way, a reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  In addition, what is displayed by digesting these notice icons is not limited to the above-described notice of the reach effect and the background display. Other notices (for example, various notices such as characters that increase the notice icon) may be made. The effect performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and a sound output (eg, music) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. The effect by the corresponding light emitting pattern may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, an example in which an effect may be performed when the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested and when the notice icon I22 of “monster” is digested may be performed. explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “print” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state by "decoration 1", and a reach effect has been started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (d2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only the “house” notice icon I21 of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “crest” notice icon I22 is digested. Is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (d3), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, a state in which the notice icon I21 of “house” is consumed to change to a chance symbol which is a special symbol is shown.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the display of the chance symbol, or as shown in FIG. 98 (d4-2), the family crest together with the effect image is displayed. A family crest drop effect of dropping the accessory 224B may be performed. After such an effect is performed, for example, the game may shift to the swordsman reach described above. In addition, after performing the effect of dropping the crest role 224B without displaying the effect image, the process may shift to the swordsman reach, or the effect image and the swordsman reach without performing the fall of the crest role 224B. The transition may be made. Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of "house".

  In addition, a transition to another super reach (family crest challenge reach) may be made when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of “decorative 1-chance symbol-decorative 1” and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (d4-4), In the decorative design display device 208, a character display of “Crest Challenge” indicating that the process has shifted to the Family Crest Challenge Reach is performed. The first decorative symbol fluctuates while maintaining the combination of “decorative 1-chance symbol-decorative 1” at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (d5-4), in the decorative design display device 208, the appearance of the lord character YM pulling the “monster” notice icon I22 with a rope is shown, and the “monster” notice is displayed. The fact that the icon I22 is attracted indicates that the sense of expectation for the big hit increases.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (d6-4), when the main character YM succeeds in drawing the notice icon I22 of the “print”, the family crest role object 224B falls as shown in FIG. 98 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect in which a predetermined effect image is displayed is performed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the “print” has been successfully digested. After the family crest drop effect is performed, for example, the process shifts to the swordsman reach described above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the lord character YM may break and fail to pull the notice icon I22 of the "print". In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the process may shift to the swordsman reach described above. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lower than in the case where the notice icon I22 of the “print” is successfully drawn. Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the lord character YM breaks and the pulling of the notice icon I22 of “Crest” fails, FIG. 98 (d7-4b) As shown, the loss result may be displayed as it is. Note that the same may be applied to a case where the notice icon I22 of “print” is digested first. Further, it may be configured such that the family crest drop effect is more likely to occur when the “print” notice icon I22 is digested than when the “house” notice icon I21 is digested. The opposite is also possible.

  Note that, in addition to the above-mentioned “house” notice icon I21, “monster” notice icon I22, “dono” notice icon I31, “princess” notice icon I32, and “grandpa” notice icon I33, There may be a notice icon of gasse that resembles the icon, for example, a notice icon of “U”, a notice icon of “Shark”, a notice icon of “Old”, a notice icon of “Minister”, and “ May be prepared. For example, even if the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "shark" are digested, the crest drop effect may not be performed, or the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "crest" may be digested. The crest drop effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the notice icon of the “house” and the notice icon of the “shark” are digested than when the notice icon of the “house” is digested. In addition, the notice icon of the gasket such as “Shark” may change to the notice icon such as “Crest”.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, one word is formed by two characters of “house” and “mon”, and a predetermined effect is performed by satisfying a requirement for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three or more characters may be used in this effect example. For example, a notice icon of “suspect”, a notice icon of “similar”, and a notice icon of “ren” When three of the icons are digested, a pseudo continuous production may be performed.

  In this example of production, for example, when the user wants to stock the notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest”, when there is only one free space in the notice icon display area 285, , The notice icon I21 of “house” and the notice icon I22 of “crest” may not be displayed. In addition, only one of the advance notice icons I21 and I22 of the "house" and the advance notice icon I22 of the "monster" may be displayed. In this case, the advance notice icon that cannot be displayed is displayed as the advance notice icon. The display may be increased when a space is generated in the area 285, or may not be even used in the first place when no space is generated in the notice icon display area 285. In addition, even when the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be used as it is.

  If the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" have been exhausted and there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of them is not displayed, for example, "house" When the notice icon I21 of "?" Is digested, the effect of digesting the notice icon I22 of "Crest" may be performed together, or the effect of digesting only the notice icon I21 of "house" may be performed.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows an increase effect of a notice icon and a digestive effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in a stepwise manner. In FIG. 99, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 99 (e1), the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is a holding icon that is a target of the prefetch notice, and its display mode is another holding icon (for example, the first holding icon). It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is in a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any of the display areas. In this effect example, the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the pre-reading notice, shows a state in which various parts are added. In FIG. 99 (e1), the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281. The second hold icon h12 is a first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body of a snowman. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (e1), a state is shown in which the unscrupulous merchant character EC is framed in from the left side of the display screen. Carrying the second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1. The second notice part P2 is an image imitating the head of a snowman.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the unscrupulous merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the main character YM has a third notice part P3. The third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket put on the head of the snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 99 (e3), in the decorative design display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out, and the eyes and the mouth are drawn in the second notice part P2. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (e4), after the main character YM has moved to the predetermined throwing position and displayed, at a timing shown in FIG. Is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking the notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, the main character YM is framed out in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 95 (6) to (8).

  FIG. 99 (e6) illustrates a state in which the loss display result is derived, and one of the suspended variable displays of the special figure 1 is digested to start the symbol variable display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 informs, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, and the display mode of the hold icon which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice is more reliable. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a higher display mode. In addition, a big hit announcement display in the running symbol variation display is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (e7), symbol variation display has been started in the chance roulette display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the third notice part P3 is digested. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon which is a display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. The DJ character BY has a fourth preview part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image imitating a muffler wound around the neck of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second imitating the head constituting the first holding icon h11 which is a display mode of a snowman. And the DJ character BY jumps toward the upper left corner of the display screen and moves the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the notice icon P2 in the notice icon display area 285. The effect display to be placed in the second display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, the symbols are still displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (e10), a display result in which the character “Get” is displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 in the chance roulette display area 287 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image imitating a pair of twigs functioning as both arms of the snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the trunk constituting the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of a snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 99 (e11 ′), the fifth notice component P5 is not immediately mounted, and the first notice component in the notice icon display area 285 where the third notice component P3 is once displayed. The information may be temporarily displayed (stocked) in the display area YA1. In this case, instead of displaying the notice icon in the first display area YA1, the notice icon may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notice icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 99 (e12), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and loses. Is displayed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In addition, in this effect example, at this time, the change icon h0 is still displayed, but may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 99 (e13), the reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative design display device 208, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the change icon h0 which is a display mode of a snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the change icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the change icon h0 (or the hold icon) of the display mode of the snowman is displayed. ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. If the display mode of the completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and moreover, it is notified that the change is highly reliable to the big hit.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 may be attached not only during the normal symbol change display but also when, for example, a super-reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 99 (e14-2) In the decorative symbol display device 208, in the swordsman reach, the fourth notice part P4 is digested and attached to the fluctuating icon h0 in the snowman display mode at the timing shown in FIG. You may make it. Here, since the fluctuating icon h0 shifts to the super reach, the fluctuating icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 frame out downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon which is the target of the pre-read notice.For example, the displayed notice parts are consumed, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. A display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be reduced. Also, when the displayed notice part is consumed, it is attached to the hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading, it functions as another pre-read notice of hold, or it is attached to the floating icon that is not the target of pre-read. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing step by step a modification of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, in which an increase in the number of advance notice icons applicable to the present embodiment and It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestion effect step by step, and FIG. 101 is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 100 step by step. 100 to 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 100, the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the holding is a target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 The default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11. 100 to 101 are different from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub-display device are provided. . Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is located at the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Partly overlaps the front side. The first decorative symbol display device 208A displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 and displays a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12, respectively. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed large over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second decorative symbol display device. The variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. As shown in FIG. 100 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord effect is started. Here, the lord character YM has a hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the lord character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or five or more. In addition, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icons can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the preview icons are displayed in all of the four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display for increasing the display area is displayed, and it is notified that the preview icons can be stocked. For example, for example, every time the display area being displayed becomes full with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas become full with the notice icon, May display all remaining four display areas that were not displayed. Further, when the lord character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the lord character YM. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are full of notice icons. In the case where the lord's character YM has one notice icon when the lord's effect is started, one display area is set when the lord's character YM performs an action of throwing the notice icon. May be increased, or the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the lord character YM possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by three when the action of the lord character YM throwing the notice icon is performed. Alternatively, all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. In addition, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icons can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second When the notice icons are displayed in all of the four display areas displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice) including four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed. Icon display area), and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) including four new display areas in which no notice icon is displayed is newly displayed, and the second notice icon is displayed. A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second notice icon display area is displayed may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. In addition, the number of the preview icons displayed in the preview icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the notice icon stock area is displayed in place of the notice icon display area 285. Alternatively, the notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, there is a case where the pre-reading notice can be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 100 (3), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display for throwing toward is performed. In this effect example, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the main character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notification icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. When displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icon may not be straddled between the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. For example, the first decorative symbol display device The notice icon that has entered the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A may appear in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (6), In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and expresses a happy expression is performed. Thereby, the advance notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285A, thereby informing that there is a possibility that a pseudo continuous appearance will be executed in the future. Thereafter, the lord character YM moves out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  In FIG. 100 (7), the first decorative symbol display device 208A stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, as a result of performing the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the variation display of the first special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 100 (8), the first decoration symbol display device 208A displays “decoration 7-decoration 6”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decorative patterns of “decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued as before, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 100 (9), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved by the movement animation in the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The suspended icon that was displayed and was at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. A display in which the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the notice icon 16 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the notification icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. When the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (11), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and is then enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (12). Is done. Note that the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display is changed to the first decorative symbol display shown in FIG. The timing may be a timing at which the device has moved to the center of the device 208A, or a timing at which the notice icon shown in FIG. 100 (12) is enlarged and displayed.

  In FIG. 101 (13) subsequent to FIG. 100 (12), a character display of “continuation” for giving a notice that the pseudo continuous production is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged notice icon 16 of the hat. Note that the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing at which the character display of “continue” is additionally displayed, or “ The timing may be the timing after the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of “continuation” is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), at the timing of FIG. 101 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of “continuation”, and the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice. The display including the icon display area 285A has been switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed over two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that the vehicle is in the non-reach state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (16), the enlarged character BC2 of the number length appears and is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, an effect display in which the number character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the stopped right symbol is displayed. It informs the player that the pseudo continuous production may be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the number character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 101 (16), the number character BC2 does not have to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, “display across” is displayed in cooperation with each other on the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be that. Further, the display may be performed integrally by the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display region of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, a display for moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (18), a display is performed in which the pseudo continuous symbol enters the frame from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B and moves downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B from the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (19). Thereafter, for example, a pseudo continuous production is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 102 and FIG. 103 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the advance notice icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 104 shows the advance notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of a digestion effect step by step. 102 to 104, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the hold icon which is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  FIGS. 102 (a1) to (a7-2) are the same as the configurations shown in FIGS. 100 to 101, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The difference is that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be able to overlap with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and a hold icon h11, h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed large over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 102 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (a2), a notice icon I6 of a hat is derived and displayed on the chance roulette display area 287 in the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps substantially the center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image that surrounds the second decorative symbol display device 208B so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B stands out. Note that the preview icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 102 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 100 (2) and described above, and thus detailed description is omitted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (a5-1), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and the display is stopped at the combination of “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2” which is the result of the loss. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is not deleted, but may be deleted at a timing before the end of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. In FIG. 102 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the first decorative symbol is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B, it may be easier to recognize that the notice icon is stocked. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during the symbol stop display. In addition, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interrupting the symbol stop display and the symbol change display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102 (a5-2), even after the notice icon 16 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B keeps the state of being lowered until the symbol change display in which all the preview icons displayed in the preview icon display area 285A are exhausted, but at what timing Whether to raise the decorative symbol display device 208B can be appropriately set. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is completed, and both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are the result of the loss, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2” "Is stopped and displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed at the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 102 (a6-2) illustrates a state in which two reservations have been exhausted, and the symbol variation display, which is the object of prefetching, has been started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variation of the second decorative symbol is changed. The display has been made.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is consumed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged as shown in FIG. 102 (a7-2). Then, the image is protruded from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A and displayed. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, below the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo continuous production is performed is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A from the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It is displayed over. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so as to be easily recognized by the player. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be kept in a lowered state until the symbol change is completed.

  FIG. 102 (b1) to FIG. 102 (b4) show the number of notice icons displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208) instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. An example in which a device 288 is provided is shown. The notice icon display number display device 288 is constituted by, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) of notice icons displayed.

  FIGS. 102 (b1) to (b3) have the same effect contents as FIGS. 74 (17) to (19), but in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, A state in which the numerical value changes in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is shown. That is, in FIG. 102 (b1), since only one advance notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285, “01” indicating the number is displayed on the advance notice icon display number display device 288. I have. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (b2), the lord character YM is throwing three notice icons (a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I9 for a thousand cars, and a notice icon I10 for a fan). Has not yet been displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285, the value indicated on the advance notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (so-called gaseous display) may be displayed. Then, when the above three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 102 (b4), when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is consumed, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the advance notice icons decreases by one, the advance notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. The timing of decreasing the value of the notice icon display number display device may be the timing before the notice icon is consumed, may be the same as the notice icon is consumed, or may be the notice icon. It may be the timing after digestion. As indicated by the dashed line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is consumed, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do so. In this production example, the number of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments, but, for example, an operation by a light emitting unit such as an LED or a movable unit such as a production movable body, A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, a voice, a decorative symbol display device (a decorative symbol display device in which a preview icon display area 285 is displayed, and other devices). The number of notice icons to be displayed may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like.

  The effect examples shown in FIGS. 103 (c1) to (c9) use two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 100 to 101. However, they differ in that they use display devices of the same size. In FIG. 103, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 103 (c1), the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be prefetched is to be held. The mode is a default display mode, for example, like the first hold icon h11. Note that the second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C. They are arranged so as to substantially overlap. The first decorative symbol display device 208C displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 and displays a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12, respectively. In the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are reserved. "2" and "0" are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 103 (c1). At the timing indicated by, the decorative symbol is being displayed for change. In the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-mentioned chance roulette display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (c1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed. It is shown. Also, the background display is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (c1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 103 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208D changes the first decorative symbol. The user descends to a position covering the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the advance notice icon display area 285B, and is derived and displayed in the advance notice icon first display area Y1 of the advance notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C changes the display mode to the time when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed.

  In FIG. 103 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, in the first notice icon first display area YA1 and the second notice icon display area YA2, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, and in the third notice icon display area YA3, a notice icon I7 of a shuriken is displayed. . Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (c3), the number of reservations is one, so "1" indicating that fact is displayed in the special figure 1 second reservation number display H1.

  FIG. 103 (c4) shows a state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the notice of chance is performed by the notice icon I7 of the shuriken being consumed. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 103 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of the losing is a chance and informs that the symbol variation display which is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, by displaying this chance, a prefetch notice is given.

  FIG. 103 (c6) shows a state in which the notice icon I6 of the second hat has been digested after the symbol change of the special figure 1 has started. That is, it is foretelling that the second pseudo consecutive notice is performed. Since the notice icon I6 of the second hat has been consumed, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 103 (c8), the decorative symbols are displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (c9), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the second hat, the number character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and is stopped and displayed. The effect display that pushes up the right symbol is performed, and the player is notified that the second pseudo consecutive effect may be started. At this time, the number character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (c9), when the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a numeral symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a preview icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying small decorative symbols, small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols are displayed, and large symbols and small symbols are displayed in different display modes, but large symbols and small symbols are displayed. However, only the size may be changed so that the display mode is the same.

  In addition, in this effect example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Alternatively, both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in the directions in which they are separated from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device may be moved. When the device 208D is separated, the accessories arranged on the rear side may be configured to be visible, and further, the accessories may be moved so as to protrude forward. May be. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 103 (d) shows an example in which three decorative pattern display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 103 (d), a first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and a second decorative symbol display arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by a device 208F and a third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but have a slightly smaller width. In addition, all three decorative design display devices may be the same size.

  The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (d), a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2 Is displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In the third notification icon display area YA3, a notification icon I9 of a thousand cars is displayed, and in the fourth notification icon display area YA4, a notification icon I10 of a fan is displayed. Also, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for one symbol row. That is, the left symbol display region 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display region 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device. It is displayed on the device 208G. Note that there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative design display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable to the embodiments described above and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 104 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 104, a first decorative symbol display device 208H disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and a second decorative symbol display device 208I disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display is performed by a third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same length in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction as compared with the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The second decorative symbol display device 208I has a frame portion protruding from the upper edge, the lower edge, and the left edge, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper edge, the lower edge, the right edge, and the like. Each has a frame portion projecting therefrom. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are positioned closest to each other, The two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can perform a display as if one screen is displayed, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be coated.

  Also, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 104 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 76 (47), and covers the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. This shows that a swordsman reach is taking place. That is, in FIG. 104 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is digested, and it is notified that the effect will be shifted to an effect with higher reliability. Is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in directions approaching each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digestion of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. State. At this time, the reach transition effect described above with reference to FIG. 76 (49) is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. That is, the reach effect display that has been performed is slightly darkened over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display, and the reach effect that is being performed is performed. A display for cutting the display is performed. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (e3) to FIG. 104 (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect is started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is received. Is notified and the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, a variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is being performed.

  Thereafter, when the production button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 104 (e7), "decoration 1-decoration 2-" The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the ornament symbols of "decoration 1".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (e8) to FIG. 104 (e9), all are temporarily hidden, and in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. Then, it is rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other and return to the initial position, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (e10), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, The display of the swing fluctuation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative 1” is started over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also restarted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (e <b> 11-1), the notice icon I <b> 10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is deleted, and the decoration of “decoration 1 − decoration 2 − decoration 1” which fluctuates. The combination of symbols is stop-displayed and derived and displayed as a loss result.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (e11-2), the display in which the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is exhausted is started. That is, a display is performed in which the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. Thus, even if the notice icon is consumed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (e12-2), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The reduced decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced form on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and re-variable display is performed. Thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 1-decoration") 1-decoration 1) is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 104 (e7 ′) shows an example in which the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in FIG. 104 (e6) is performed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 104 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed over the third decoration symbol display device 208J, the first decoration symbol display device 208H, and the second decoration symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the big hit display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 104 (e7 '') shows a configuration in which when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. It shows an example of the effect in the case of being performed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also It is also possible to make it rotate integrally with. In this case, for example, a mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and a mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured, It may be configured as a body and configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can be rotated in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in FIG. 7E is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are performed. The devices 208J move in directions away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise, and, unlike FIG. 104 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208I. Each of the display screens of the decorative symbol display device 308J can be displayed in a state where the widths thereof are uniform.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another modification example of the increase effect and the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 105, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and has a predetermined lens cut in a transmission region of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that the transmission area has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can be seen to emit light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 105, the first layer panel arranged on the near side has a lens cut of the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel has a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that, in FIG. 105, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. The number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, but may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of a single layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern. Also, in FIG. 105, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 105, hatching icons in the holding icon display area 281 that are targets of the prefetch notice are hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is a default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 are displayed. In the suspension icon display area 281, a change icon h0 and suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and a chance roulette display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The contents displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 105 (f1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, as shown in FIG. 105 (f2-1), the darkened display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern simulating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 105 (f2-1), a stock effect of a notice icon is performed by dark display and light emission of the light guide plate IL. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (turns off), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display of the decorative design display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative design display device 208 is finished. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed while the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. It may be made to be performed.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 105 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display and guides light. The light plate IL is rotated 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction to emit light corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL so as to form a pattern imitating an effect image. You may do so. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured separately from the first layer panel and the second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated and the first layer panel is rotated. The panel of the layer may not be rotated, and the panel of the first layer may be rotated together with the panel of the second layer.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, so that the future simulation is performed. It is foretelling that the directing will be performed.

  FIG. 105 (g) shows a state in which the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been consumed. As shown in FIG. 105 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, and at that timing. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 105 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (prior to the execution of the stock effect of the notice icon). This shows a state in which a notice is given in advance. As shown in FIG. 105 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, symbol variation display is performed in a chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern simulating the notice icon I6 of the hat. Is announced in advance.

  FIG. 105 (i) shows another example of the effect of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 105 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then deleted, and at that timing, the light guide plate is displayed. The light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the IL emits light to form a pattern simulating the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel also emits light to simulate the effect image. The notice icon digestion production is also performed so as to make it form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel can be made to stand out.

  FIG. 105 (j) shows another example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 105 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after moving the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to the center of the display screen, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The display is enlarged to fill the entire screen, and at that time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, thereby performing the effect of notice icon digestion. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is deleted, but may be displayed.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of another effect of the notice icon digestion effect. 106 (1) to FIG. 106 (11) except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is replaced by a notice notice icon I31 of the drink instead of the notice icon I10 of the fan. 76 (44) to FIG. 76 (54), only parts different from the above description will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 76, and description of common parts will be omitted. In this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced in accordance with the effect content. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The drink notice icon I31 is a notice icon for notifying that the effect to be produced will be changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 106 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 106 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the drink is enlarged and displayed, and the effect image of sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the liquid image disappears, a projecting button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is at the projecting position is displayed. At this time, it is a state before the start of accepting the operation of the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (17), after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position, as shown in FIG. 106 (18), the decorative pattern display device 208 decreases the button reception time meter. Then, it is notified that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. May be the timing before the display of is displayed, or may be the timing after the projection button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestive effect of the notice icon I31 of the drink. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. In addition, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, it is lit (for example, lit in blue) in a manner to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period. Lighting (for example, lighting in red) may be performed in such a manner as to notify the user.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect using movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 107 (a1) to FIG. 107 (a3) show that when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notice icon stock. I have. FIG. 107 (a1) is a display similar to that of FIG. 95 (1), except that a rendering movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” attached to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rendered. It is arranged to be hidden behind 206.

FIG. 107 (a2) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden by the effect device 206 to a visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the user is notified in advance that one of the plurality of types of advance notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified. For example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the notification by sound or lamp may be performed. Alternatively, a plurality of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the type of the notice icon, and the type of the notice icon stocked according to the type of the appearing effect movable body 224C may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 107 (a3) shows a state where the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

  In FIG. 107 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that are rotatable around the depth direction as rotation axes are arranged in the upper and lower vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, near the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable body 224Da with the character "Large", the fifth effect movable body 224De with the asterisk symbol, and the "board" Are arranged in the horizontal direction, and near the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a third effect movable body 224Dc, which is indicated by the character “振”, A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with the character “Mai” are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate according to the number of notice icons (stocked) displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd are provided. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the rotation of the effected movable body of the digested number may be stopped, or the number of effected movable bodies corresponding to the total number of stocked notice icons may be rotated. Is also good.

  FIG. 107 (c1) to FIG. 107 (c6) show a state in which the effect of the prefetch mode has been notified by operating the effect movable body 224. In this effect example, a special training notice icon I41 may be displayed as a notice icon. When the special training notice icon I41 is consumed, the mode shifts to the prefetch mode for notifying that the variable display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 107 (c1) shows a state in which the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I41 of the special training displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and a state of moving to the center of the display screen is displayed. On the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a rendering movable body 224 imitating an arm is arranged. The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b. The upper end of the upper arm 224a is rotatably attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation axis ax1. . The forearm portion 224b has a base end portion rotatably attached to a distal end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation axis ax2.

  When the special-reading notice icon I41 is digested and the pre-reading mode is started, as shown in FIG. 107 (c2), in the decorative design display device 208, the character display of “preparing for special training” is displayed on the right in the band-shaped scroll display area. Is scrolled to the left. As a result, the player is notified that the mode has shifted to the prefetch mode. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, the initial position in which the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the position (first position) that covers the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. (A pre-reading operation) is performed. Note that the prefetching operation by the effect movable body 224 temporarily returns to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Also, during execution of the prefetching operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may also operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the forearm does not operate. Only the unit 224b may operate.

  FIG. 107 (c3) illustrates a state in which two “decorations 1” are aligned and a reach state is formed during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is the target of prefetching. Here, the pre-reading operation is continuously performed.

  FIG. 107 (c4) shows a state in which the special training reach as a super reach effect has been started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of “preparing for special training” is finished, and the character display of “start of special training” indicating that the special training reach has started is performed. Further, after once returning to the initial position, the effect movable body 224 moves the upper arm 224a from the initial position to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 107 (c5), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (c6). Then, the forearm portion 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon in a stepwise manner. It is. In FIG. 108, the first special figure display unit 212, the second special figure display unit 214, the general figure display unit 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 108, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is a target of a prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 The default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 108 (1) shows a display similar to that of FIG. 95 (1), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the lord character YM has a hat notice icon I6.

  In this effect example, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (3), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed. However, the notice icon I6 of the hat is not thrown yet, and FIG. 108 (4) As shown in the figure, in the state where the lord character YM stands by at the throwing position, the display is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  After that, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 108 (5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved by the moving animation, respectively. The suspended icon that has been displayed and is at the display position of the first reserved icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 is the special icon 1 Is the first hold icon h11. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The main character YM is still waiting at the throwing position.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this effect example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching is suspended, a notification that the preview icon is displayed is given during the symbol variation display that is being executed, but the announcement icon is stocked. However, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. It should be noted that, when the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading is suspended, a notice that the notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed is provided, but a so-called gaseous notice that does not display the notice icon is performed. You may. In this case, for example, the character YM of the lord may end the display before the variation display of the symbol to be pre-read starts, and, for example, immediately before the symbol variation display to be the pre-read, The display may be ended at the timing at which the result of the performed symbol variation display is derived. In addition, the display of the character YM of the lord may be terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading ends. For example, a super-reach performed during the symbol variation display of the target of pre-reading starts. The display of the character YM of the lord may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the main character YM may be displayed continuously after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, in a state where the main character is in a standby state, if a big hit occurs in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing of deriving the big hit symbol after the super reach (for example, (During swing fluctuation display), the standby display may be continued with the lord character holding a notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 108 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 108 (7) to (10) are performed as shown in FIGS. This is the same as (12) except that the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 108 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. I have. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 108 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to change the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 108 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon first display area YA1. A notice icon digestion effect in which the notice icon I6 of the worn hat is consumed is performed.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. In FIG. 109, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 109, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol change display to be prefetched is on hold, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 109 (a1) to FIG. 109 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after an effect for notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 109 (a1) shows a state in which a bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display portion 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and the success reward are shown. In the explanation display section 288 shown in FIG. 109 (a1), when a strike is obtained in a bowling game, a character display of “Item by strike” indicating that an item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, when a strike is obtained in a bowling game, a preview item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bowling effect by a lord character has been started. Note that the contents of the mission and the success reward displayed on the explanation display section 288 are, for example, those related to the change in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, May be related to a notice about the symbol change display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display section 288 may be a special effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that a boring effect as shown in FIG. 109 (a1) is performed, whereby the advance notice of the stocking of the advance notice icon is performed. In addition, this bowling effect may be a dedicated effect performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the running pattern fluctuation display, or may be used as another look-ahead advance notice You may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the bowling effect is not finished, and a character display of “following the next variation” is displayed, which indicates that the symbol variation display to be performed next is to be continuously performed. In addition, the display of the “item by strike” indicating the mission and the success reward is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the ball cast by the lord character rolls on the lane and heads for the ten aligned bowling pins. , Fueling the expectation that the notice icon might be stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (a4), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image of the scene where the strike has been taken along with the character display of “strike”. As shown in the figure, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon 16 of the hat to inform that the notice icon 16 of the hat is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 109 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a hat advance notice icon I6 is displayed in the advance notice icon first display area YA1 of the advance notice icon display area 285, and the hat advance notice icon I6 is displayed. It is notified that the stock was taken. As described above, in this effect example, the notice item is displayed without displaying the notice item (stock) during the symbol change display being executed when the design change display to be prefetched is suspended. Notice has been given.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (b), a wipe display area WP1 may be displayed at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-described bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a sub-display device 208K is arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub-display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285C for displaying a notice icon in the lower half is displayed, and the above-described boring effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and a notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the boring effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during swing fluctuation display). May be displayed, or a different background display may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 109 (a2) may be displayed.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 (b), when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be ended, but the display may be continued as it is. . In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 (c), if a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. You may.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, a description has been given of a case in which the variable display of the special figure 2 is preferentially performed over the special figure 1. However, in this effect example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. In other words, the present invention is applied to a case in which the special figure fluctuating game related to the reservation of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed in the starting opening winning order variation in which the starting start winning order is started. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to a case where special figure 2 priority change is performed. Further, in FIG. 110, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 110, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is a target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 The default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h 11, the third hold icon h 12, and the fifth hold icon h 13 are displayed in the first special figure starting port 230. The second holding icon h21 and the fourth holding icon h22, which are the change icons of the special figure 1 that have been won and held, have been won and held in the second special figure starting port 232. It is a hold icon showing the variable display of Toku-zu 2.

  The effect shown in FIG. 110 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display, which is the object of prefetching, is suspended, in which the character SB of Sabohani moves on the line in accordance with the rules of the lottery, and This is an effect (Amida effect) for acquiring a notice item or the like.

  First, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 1-decorative 4-decorative 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an Amida effect has been started. Specifically, when the Amida production is started, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-1), the Sabohani character SB is set at one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. Are displayed, and a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I10 of a fan, and an icon IX of a loss are arranged for each end point of the three horizontal lines. The number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines is appropriately set, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. Note that the number of vertical lines to be set is determined, for example, according to the number of reservations at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the character of Sabohani moves on the line in accordance with the rule of Amida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stored in stock. Then, when reaching the end point where the losing icon IX is arranged, it is notified that the notice icon will not be stocked. Then, every time the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that the Sabohani character SB may be moved to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-run is performed. For example, when the pseudo-run occurs, the character SB advances to the next vertical line. And so on. In addition, for one symbol variation display, the display may advance to a vertical line two or more ahead. The effect as shown in FIG. 110 can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K, as described above with reference to FIGS. 109 (c) and (d), for example. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue to display the Amami effect even during the execution of Super Reach. Then, for example, there may be a case where an effect of increasing the notice icon during super reach can be performed in parallel.

  Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 110 (a2-1), the holding icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are respectively moved by the moving animation, and the first holding icon is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative design starts the variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of the Savohani starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line of the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and a display is shown in which the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are connected by the vertical line, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 110 (a2-1), it has reached the middle of the middle horizontal line.

  After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is completed, the variable display of the special figure 2 is started, and the four reserved icons h21, h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the moving animation. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (a3-1), when the character SB of Sabohani reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the elimination of the smoke, this vertical line is found to have been cut in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is Continue straight along the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the variable display of the special figure 2 is completed, the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, and the three reserved icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the moving animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the elimination of the smoke, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Therefore, the character SB of Sabohani is moved from the middle horizontal line to the upper horizontal line by the vertical line in accordance with the rules of amidakuji. Move to horizontal line. As a result, the Sabohani character SB reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line on which the hat notice icon I6 is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 110 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that the information has been obtained is displayed, the Amida effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 110 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  In this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 110 (a1-1), any one of a plurality of notice icons of different types is selected. As shown in 2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged at all the end points of the horizontal line, and as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-3), the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged at all of the end points of the horizontal line. Is also good. In this manner, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all of the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that the displayed notice icon is determined to be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-3), as described above, the fan announcement icon I10 is an announcement icon indicating that an effect for announcing that the big hit will be confirmed is performed. In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be further increased. The effect as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-3) is a kind of the premier effect that rarely appears.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-4), the losing icon IX is not arranged, and the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes are arranged at the end of each horizontal line. It may be determined that one of the notice icons is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (a1-5), the character SB of Sabohani is arranged at all the start points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (hat notice icon I6 and fan notice icon I10) arranged at the end points of the respective horizontal lines are provided. Alternatively, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand boxes are stocked. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 110 (a1-5), since the announcement icon I10 of the fan is included, it is assured that an effect to announce that the big hit will be determined will be performed, so that the player can go to the big hit. In some cases, the sense of expectation can be further increased.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-6), at the end of each horizontal line, the type of the notice icon is not clear, the notice icon of the first lord (the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, the second The notice icon I3) of the third person may be arranged. In this case, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, expectations can be improved. Also, as described above, the notice icon of the lord differs in color depending on the type, and the reliability of the big hit differs depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third palace, which is the notice icon of the red palace, is more likely to be changed to the notice icon where the “pseudo-ren” is decided than the notice icon where the “pseudo-ren” is not decided. In contrast, the notice icon I1 of the first palace, which is the notice icon of “1”, can be easily changed to the notice icon in which “pseudo-ren” is not determined.

  Further, in this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 110 (a3-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke, and it is difficult to specify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani may be specified at the time when the Amida effect is started. As a result, the player can recognize in advance which notice icon will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production with confidence. Furthermore, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line on which the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  In this effect example, as described above with reference to FIG. 110 (a2-1), a notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 110 (a2-2), during execution of the Amida production, the area where the notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line is displayed is hidden by smoke, and thereafter, FIG. 110 (a2-2a). ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 110 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX has been changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and the content of the Amida effect has been promoted. It should be noted that, for example, the content of the amida effect is demoted such that a part or all of the preview icons arranged at the end point of each horizontal line are changed to a missing icon IX or a lower-ranking notification icon. It may be.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the Savohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida production, the smoke that has partially hidden the vertical line extends in the vertical direction, and as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-2a), the smoke disappears. The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example illustrated in FIG. 110 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, it is suggested that one of the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I10 of the fan can be acquired. Then, the third vertical line disappears, and it is assured that the fan notice icon I10 will be stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a4-1), the second vertical line is cut off halfway, so that the losing icon IX is not selected. As shown in FIG. 110 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut off, and therefore, after the loss icon IX is selected and the effect of the net is completed, FIG. 110 (a4-3a) As shown in (5), it may be notified that no notice icon is stocked in any of the notice icon display areas 285.

  Note that, in the above-described Amida production, a pre-reading advance notice may be made on the symbol variation display to be pre-read based on the type of the advance notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. is there. In FIG. 111, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 111, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, and the hold display is a display mode of a prefetch notice (a hold icon of Sabohani). This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 111 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (1), the first special figure display device 212 performs a symbol variation display, and accordingly, the decoration symbol display device 208 causes the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol. The symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 111 (1), the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 of these two special maps 1 are displayed in a default display mode (circular blank pattern and white display mode).

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (2), a third special icon 1 reserve icon h13 is displayed in the special icon 1 reserve icon display area 281. A message is displayed to notify that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold targeted for prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode of Sabohani).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 1”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 111 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively. The holding icon at the display position of the holding icon h11 moves to the changing icon display area 280 to become the changing icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 is the first holding icon of the special figure 1. The icon becomes the icon h11, and the reserved icon at the display position of the third reserved icon h13 becomes the second reserved icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the display of the decorative symbol is started to be changed. FIG. 111 (5) shows a state where the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (6), in the decorative design display device 208, the lord character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the lord character YM has a hat notice icon I6. Thus, in this effect example, in the effect that the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. A certain shrine production has started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (7), the main character YM moves to the predetermined throwing position and is displayed, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (8), the notice icon I6 of the hat being held is displayed as the notice icon. An effect display for throwing toward area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (10), In the decorative design display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the lord character YM succeeds in displaying the notice icon and expresses a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (11) to FIG. 11 (12), a display is performed in which the main character YM goes out of the frame toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 111 (14), the display is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the reserved icon at the display position of the second reserved icon h12 becomes the first reserved icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and loses. Is displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 111 (16), the display is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display which is the target of the prefetching is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. A notice icon digestion effect in which the notice icon I6 of the worn hat is consumed is performed. As described above, according to this effect example, it can be said that the pre-reading notice using the reservation icon and the pre-reading notice using the hold icon are simultaneously performed.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and illustrating another example of the effect of the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect in a stepwise manner. FIG. In FIG. 112, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216 and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 112, the third holding icon h13 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 112 (a1) to FIG. 112 (a3-1) show a state where a notice effect is given in advance to notify that the notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 112 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 1”, and the display of the loss. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 has also been deleted. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any of the display areas.

  After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 112 (a2-1), the display is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is performed. The icon moves to the fluctuating icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuating icon h0. The holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 and the third holding icon h13. The reserved icon at the display position becomes the second reserved icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for giving notice that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol variation display to be started next. Specifically, on the placard PL1, a hat notice icon I6 is displayed after "next change", and further, "was stock" is displayed, followed by a hat notice icon I6. Is notified in advance that the stock will always be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 has been started, during the execution of the pattern fluctuation display, for example, a tono-sama effect is performed. As shown in 112 (a3-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As a result, the player can recognize in advance that the advance notice icon I6 of the hat will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described effect example, the placard PL1 is displayed to notify that the notice icon is necessarily stocked. However, for example, the placard PL2 as shown in FIG. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on the placard PL2, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed after "in the next fluctuation", and further, "is stock" is displayed after this, but a question mark is added. It is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  If the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked during the next symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 112 (a3-2), no effect relating to the stock of the notice icon is performed. In addition, an effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, a lord effect) may be performed, but in this case, a so-called gasse stock effect in which the notice icon is not stocked is performed.

  FIGS. 112 (b1) to 112 (b3) show a state in which the prefetch mode, which is one of the prefetch notices, is being performed during the symbol variation display being executed at the time when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b1), the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 and the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, and the prefetching notice is displayed as the display mode of the third reserved icon h13. Of the display mode of Savohani as the display mode of (1) is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed in correspondence with the variable display of the special figure 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a look-ahead mode which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display having a high possibility of a big hit is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, in each of the two band-shaped scroll display areas, the character “intense heat approaching” scrolls from right to left. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 has started, as shown in FIG. 112 (b3), during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. The lord effect is performed, and a notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to perform the pre-reading advance notice by stocking the preliminary notice icon, the pre-reading advance notice by the change of the display mode of the hold icon, and the pre-reading advance notice by changing the background display.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) and 112 (c2), during the design variation display being executed at the time when the design variation display to be prefetched is suspended, a lord effect is performed, and a notice icon is displayed. May be performed.

  FIG. 112 (d1) to FIG. 112 (d3) show how the notice icon is stocked and consumed while the same symbol variation display is being executed. That is, stocking and digestion of a notice icon related to the fact that a notice effect is performed during the symbol change display is also executable.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the lord's effect, as shown in FIG. 112 (d2), the notice icon I6 of the hat becomes the notice icon display. The notice icon in the area 285 is temporarily stored in the first display area YA1. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), as shown in FIG. 112 (d3), a notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (e1) to FIG. 112 (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown into the notice icon display area 285 by the lord effect, but is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may make it.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, which is different from a notice icon increase effect and a digestive effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of this in steps. In FIG. 113, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 113, the second holding icon h12 in the holding icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 113 (a1) to FIG. 113 (a3) show a state where the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are also used.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “Castle Town”. I have. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of a notice or an explanation of a character appearing may be performed, or the notice display may be performed. Is also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned lord effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (a2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed, a character display of "stock" is added, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to a notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is displayed. A notice icon 16 of a hat is displayed in the first icon display area YA1.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (b1) to FIG. 113 (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that has appeared due to the lord's effect is not stocked, but as it is. It may be digested. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of digesting the notice icon relating to the notice during the symbol change display.

  FIG. 113 (c1) to FIG. 113 (c2) show a state where a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and a notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the kind of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end of the display screen, and a second notice icon display area is provided at the right end of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. But not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YAL3. Is displayed. Also, in the second notice icon display area 285F, there are four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Are provided, and no notice icon is displayed in any of the display areas. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed in a line at substantially the center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. Note that, in this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in each of the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. After that, in other words, when the second button notice icon I11 is filled after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, and when a smaller number of the second button notice icons I11 are used. Even if the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and then the second button notice icon I11 is digested, the reliability of the big hit may be made different. For example, the more the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, the better It may be configured so as to be easy with. Note that all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may not be digested. For example, four button notice icons I11 may be displayed or only two button notice icons I11 may be digested. In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be maintained in stock until the next symbol change display, or may be deleted without digestion. Also, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured such that the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the number of stocked notice items.

  FIG. 113 (d1) to FIG. 113 (d3) show another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (d1), the notice icon I6s of the hat is displayed in a small size superimposed on the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the notice icon I7s of the shuriken is displayed on the first hold icon. It is displayed small over the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the suspension icon may be displayed with the notice icon included.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced display hat displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 jumps out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed with a character display of "stock", and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Is done. In this effect example, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed on the change icon h0 is performed every time the holding of the symbol change display is exhausted. Not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 113 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the change icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  FIG. 113 (f1) to FIG. 113 (f3) show an example where the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  FIG. 113 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 113 (d1), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, after that, the erasing animation of the fluctuating icon h0 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (f2) when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (f3), h0 is deleted. At this time, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also deleted together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. As described above, even if the notice icon is displayed on the change icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  FIG. 113 (g1) to FIG. 113 (g3) show a state in which, when a certain notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained in which the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bouquet notice icon I51 as a notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more of the plural kinds of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 72 (b), and it is determined which notice icon is included. This is a mode that is difficult to specify.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen, and is enlarged and displayed. You.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (g3), the display of the bouquet notice icon I51 changes to a hat notice icon I6 and a ribbon notice icon I8, and the type of the notice icon included in the bouquet notice icon I51 Can be recognized. For this reason, the player may be able to give a sense of expectation as to which kind of notice icon is included while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described hereinafter, the notice icon may be displayed continuously even after the symbol is stopped and displayed. If the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, and if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without the symbol change display being held, the state of the stock even during the demonstration display May be maintained. Regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display is on hold, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked.
Also, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be announced.

  In addition, the effect that the notice icon that is stocked is changed or promoted (level up) may be performed. For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the stock hat is changed to the notice icon I10 of the fan is performed. In a case where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the chance eyes while the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked, an effect of changing the notice icon I6 of the hat to the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes may be performed. . Conversely, an effect in which the stocked preview icon is demoted (level down) may be performed.

  In addition, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is consumed may be changed or promoted (level-up) may be performed. For example, an effect in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is consumed is performed. The effect of changing to the fan notice icon I10 may be performed when the fan is running, or the number of pseudo repeats may be increased in the pseudo continuous production performed when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and executed. Good. Conversely, an effect in which the effect display performed when the notice icon is exhausted may be demoted (level down) may be performed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but may not be displayed.

  Alternatively, whether or not a notice of stocking the notice icon may be made or not may be determined based on the length of the symbol change display time.

  In addition, the length of the variable display time in the case where the notice of stocking the notice icon is not performed between the symbol change display that becomes a big hit and the symbol change display that becomes a loss may be the same or different.

  Further, as the variable display time of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 which is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the notice of stocking the advance icon may be controlled in a controllable manner.

  Further, in the case where the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so that the announcement of stocking the preview icon is not performed.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the variation time of the length of stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked preview icon may be digested in the interrupted symbol change display of the special figure 1 or may be exhausted during the interrupted symbol change display of the special figure 2.

  In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the stock is displayed in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 before the interruption is performed. The notice icon may be stored and not digested, or may be configured to be digested.

  Further, the type of the notice icon is not limited to the above-described one or the one described later, and various types can be adopted.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon. When the item for customization is exhausted, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a selection by a player are made. It may be possible to increase possible effect modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Also, for example, an effect selection item may be displayed, and when the effect selection item is exhausted, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, The brightness may be set.

  Also, for example, a user setting clearing item may be displayed, and when the user setting clearing item is exhausted, for example, the user setting may be cleared or the user setting may be cleared. It may be made possible to clear after confirming whether or not to perform.

  Also, for example, an effect mode ending item may be displayed.If the effect mode ending item is exhausted, for example, it is possible to end the pre-reading mode or end the effect mode. It may be configured such that the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode can be confirmed and confirmed.

  In addition, for example, point acquisition items and level-up presenting items may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points can be presented or the level can be raised. It may be.

  In addition, for example, a reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the icon of the lord is digested, the VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  In addition, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, for example, when the present icon is consumed, an icon of “next notice” is displayed, and a notice effect of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune-telling icon) from which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the demonstration for the customer, or may be displayed other than during the demonstration for the customer.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that displays information regarding the simultaneous island production when digested. For example, the countdown until the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the start of the island simultaneous production may be displayed, or the content of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Is also good.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that can be customized on the store side when digested. For example, even if it is possible to make settings such that an effect related to the area of the installed game store is performed (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or Chubu region mode) or the name of the installed game store. Good. For example, according to the setting, the character of the group notice (for example, Namahage group etc.) appearing in the Tohoku region mode can be made different from the character of the group notice (for example, Shachihoko group etc.) appearing in the Chubu region mode. There are cases.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon for starting the tutorial display when digested.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a roulette effect when digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed or a result indicating that a notice about the symbol change display is performed is displayed.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when digested.

  Next, a modified example of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of an effect that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table relating to notice items. It is.

  FIG. 114 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. The illustration of the general symbol display device 210, the general symbol holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114A, the reserved icon display region 281A of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of the special figure 2 are adjacent to each other below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 114 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped at "decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 4" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the loss. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the reserved icon display area 282A of the special map 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icon is displayed left-justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. In addition, the notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

  FIG. 114 (b) shows a state where two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed left-aligned. Each of these hold icons h11 and h12 has a default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the reserved icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, the reserved icon h12 corresponding to the second reserved has been moved to the left and the reserved icon h11 corresponding to the first reserved has been consumed because the first reserved has been consumed. Is displayed. At this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the reserve icon h21 corresponding to the first reservation is displayed left-justified in the reserve icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (d), the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in the special figure 1 is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice (the display mode in which “heat” is displayed). ).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 114 (e) after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, at the time of the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icon It and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed. You. That is, a display in which the number of the notice icons increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih which has increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is consumed. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by speech balloons of the characters “Atari” and “question mark” appears. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (g), "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which is the result of the loss. Will be notified.

  In the present embodiment, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. You. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, a notice icon is displayed. Is not digested, and the increase of the notice icon is not displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digestion of the notice icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the digestion and increase of the notice icon are performed. There may be. On the other hand, the reserved icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, all the reserved icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the reserved icon display of the special figure 2 may be performed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. When the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is performed by interruption, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the reserved icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (i), the display is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3−decoration 2−decoration 3”, and the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is notified that the result is incorrect. .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (j), after the symbol change display of the reserved special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is digested, and "Atari" and "question mark" are displayed. A lord character YI accompanied by a character notation balloon appears. Note that the timing of appearance of the main character YI may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 114 (j), a notice icon Id of the evil deputy is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the number of the notice icons increases is performed. Here, the timing of the additional display of the forewarning notice icon Id may be before, after or after the start of the digestion display of the notice icon It of the lord. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih and the bad servant notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and a princess character HI and an evil character DI appear. The appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the stop display timing of the left symbol. In addition, the timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or simultaneously with the timing of the appearance of the evil character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 114 (m), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops displaying “decoration 3” in the right symbol display region 208c, and then stops displaying “decoration 3” in the middle symbol display region 208b. , A big hit is reported.

  Next, a description will be given of the configuration of a lottery table related to a notice icon for determining whether or not to execute the increase display and the digestion display of the notice icon in this effect example.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetching of the reservation of the special figure 1, The increase of the notice icon of the lord is performed with a probability of / 50, the increase of the notice icon of the princess is performed with a probability of 3/50, and the increase of the notice icon of the evil magistrate is performed with a probability of 2/50. . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of 40/50, the display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of the bad officer is executed with a probability of 25/50. Execute the digest display. In addition, since the lottery for performing the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed simultaneously for two or more notice icons, or when the digest display is performed for the two or more notice icons simultaneously, There is.

  In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is unacceptable, as a result of the pre-reading of the hold in FIG. In 3/50, an increase in the notice icon of the Princess is executed with a probability of 3/50. Execute the display. On the other hand, the notice icon of the lord is displayed with a probability of 1/50, the notice icon of the princess is displayed with a probability of 10/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer with a probability of 15/50. Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol change display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetching of the suspension of the special figure 1 , The display of the icon of the Lord's notice is increased with a probability of 25/50, the display of the notice of the Princess is increased with a probability of 20/50, and the notice of the evil officer is increased with the probability of 7/50. Run. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of 20/50, the display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer is executed with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that does not expect to win the second special figure starting port 232 in the normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, The increase display may not be performed for the advance notice icon, and the digest display may not be performed for any advance notice icon.

  In addition, if the jackpot determination result executed at the start of the symbol change display of Toku-zu 2 is out of order, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the toku-zu 1, the increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons. No display is performed for any of the notice icons.

  In addition, for example, when the power support state is ended and one or a plurality of reserves remain in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the digestion display of the advance notice icon is not performed as a pre-reading advance notice of the special figure 2 hold. Alternatively, the increase display and the digest display of the advance notice icon may be performed in accordance with the jackpot determination result executed at the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 116 to FIG. 127 are diagrams illustrating step-by-step examples of a modification of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 116 to 127, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general special figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the general figure reservation The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. FIGS. 116 to 127 show an example in which three decorative design display devices are arranged in a row. That is, a first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, a second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. Note that the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a length in the width direction shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a slightly shorter height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a right end portion overlapping the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left edge portion corresponding to the left edge portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are closest to each other, they can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is configured to be able to. Note that the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily the ones in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and are named for convenience. It is added here, just in case, because it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in a transmission area. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that the transmission area emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like. In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 116 to 127, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of the light irradiation plate. Therefore, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 116 to 126 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 117 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 116. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit has a change icon h0 at its center. It is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a reserve icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four reserve icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 116 (a), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in a default display mode. Further, on the right side of the change icon h0, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged, and various information related to games and effects are displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 116 (a), "The lord is Yatsushiro general" is displayed, and a description of the lord character is made. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that the UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol. May overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and the stage is hot when the stage shifts to a certain stage, when the stage name is displayed in red, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. Conversely, if the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot compared to the red stage name display, so this may also be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 as an explanation display section for displaying a currently performed stage name or reach name is arranged at a lower portion of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 116 (a), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The main character may or may not always be displayed.

  Further, a crest role object 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. Further, the crest role object 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents. Above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a Yatsushiro role 224Fa and a Shogun role 224Fb, which are one of the production movable bodies, are arranged, and move in the vertical direction according to the production content. It is configured to be able to. Both the Yatsushiro role 224Fa and the shogun role 224Fb have built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the content of the effect.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (b), the third special figure 1 hold icon h13 (third hold icon) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, a sound output of “pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the loss. Is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the holding icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. Is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed, and the change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The holding icon at the display position of the third holding icon h13 becomes the second holding icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal, respectively. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 116 (d), the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. As described above, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character starts, and the lord character displays the icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. An attempt to throw is shown. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the performance by being thrown by the lord character. In addition, the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed by an animation in which the notice icon to be displayed can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be possible to specify from the middle of the throw or to specify from the beginning. In addition, an animation related to a notice icon having a high jackpot expectation degree when being digested (a high expectation notice icon) and an animation relating to a notice icon having a smaller jackpot expectation degree when digested than the high expectation notice animation. , The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 116 (f), it is shown that the lord character throws a bomb icon I61.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "the lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "by using the notice icon ..." There is an explanation of what happens. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the timing at which the bomb icon I61 changes. Of the bomb icon I61 from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be after the movement to. Thus, in the tutorial display section TT1, a plurality of types of explanation displays may be displayed in one symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character ruptures, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (i), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. . The swordsman notice icon I62 is an icon for giving a notice of shifting to swordsman reach, as described later. Further, when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of “Don” notifying the fact. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one to one to many to many (for example, N to N).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (j), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 116 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the lord character. The animation ends. As described above, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to recognize. Here, the difficulty in viewing means that the notice icon is more difficult to view than when the notice icon is not located at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. In other words, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is overlapped on the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, so that the player can easily draw attention to the display of the tutorial display section TT1 and the display of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. May be possible. Further, in some cases, it is possible to notice the existence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the description of the effect that may occur earlier or in the future.

The notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be arranged at a position near the tutorial display section TT1 in addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. You may be able to get. In addition, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman notice icon I62 or the contents completely unrelated to the swordsman notice icon I62. The content may be a content related to the current production, or may be a content completely unrelated to the current production. In FIG. 116 (j), the content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is a display related to the notice icon, and is a display related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, but the display of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman Is not displayed in connection with the text, but happens to be related to the content of the description, but the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. May be configured to be performed. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, and the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. They may be displayed simultaneously. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display section TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched, as described later. In addition, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be used in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 is resolved before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started. Note that, in this example of the effect, the preview icon is stored in the tutorial display section TT1, but the preview icon may be stored in the stage name display section ST1.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (l), the first decorative pattern of the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” is displayed on the first decoration symbol display device 208L. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 116 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from "notice icon digestion ..." to "panda is the master of the lord." , The relationship between the lord character and the panda character is described. That is, in this effect example, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be changed to new contents while the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has been started with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If the display change timing of the tutorial display section TT1 is before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display section TT1 displays a plurality of explanation displays in one symbol change display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 116 (m) shows a state where the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 has also been deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". As shown in FIG. 116 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is the master of the lord” to “When Yatsushiro moves ....”. It is described that something happens when the Yatsushiro role 224Fa and the Shogun role 224Fb operate.

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The held icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 116 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (p), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman starts swinging, and the sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is digested is fueled. By doing so, there are cases where the player can be longed for the notice icon to be used quickly. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62. Note that the effect display need not be performed. This effect display covers the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the explanation display.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 that has been swinging moves upward and is digested. At this time, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. As a result, the overlap state of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily recognized by the player.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (a) following FIG. 116 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that it will develop into super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the advance to the swordsman reach is announced by the digestion of the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in a small size above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, thereby producing a high degree of reliability for the big hit in this swordsman reach. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 117 (c) shows a state where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the castle town background to the background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display is performed. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, characters of "Swordsman Reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (c), a state where the character of the lord and the swordsman character face each other is displayed. Note that in the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed downward, so that the display position of the change icon h0 has moved downward. Also, at this time, the UI unit may go out of the frame after the hold icon is deleted, or the UI unit may go out of the frame for each hold icon. In addition, in the state where the explanation display is being performed in addition to the hold icon, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously deleted. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 117 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It notifies that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the operation of the effect button 136 to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, emits red light) indicating that the operation is in the operation accepting state. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. Alternatively, it may be after the timing when the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (f), as shown in FIG. 117 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays “Go” with the rise of the lord. The cut-in image to which the character display "Ze" is added is superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (h), the main character's palace is defeated by the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 117 (i), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived, and the fluctuation starts.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as “decoration 2”. The display is stopped at the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 2", and the display result of the loss is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, when the notice icon (for example, the above-mentioned notice icon I10 of a fan) for performing a resurrection effect is displayed after the loss is once displayed, the background display is changed from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town which is a normal background. You may be made to digest after returning.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of an advance notice icon increase effect and a digestive effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 119 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 118. It is. Note that FIGS. 118 (a) to (l) are the same as FIGS. 116 (a) to (l), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 118 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is performed immediately before the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading. At the timing shown in FIG. 118 (m), the notice icon pattern CS (sometimes called “decoration C”) displaying “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed, and “decoration 1—decoration C—decoration”. 6 "is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon pattern CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be always stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. In addition, the preview icon design CS may include an image (including an enlarged or reduced image itself) imitating the preview icon I63 of chance up, and may move to the preview icon display area. That is, the notice icon acquisition animation based on the symbol is different from the throw animation, as long as the notice icon is displayed so that the notice icon can be specified. In addition, there may be something that does not correspond to the notice icon design CS and the chance-up notice icon I63. Further, the types of the preview icons displayed in the design may be more or less than the types of the preview icons not displayed in the design. The type of the notice icon displayed at the time of the animation (for example, throwing animation) related to the character of the lord is the notice displayed at the time of the animation related to the design (for example, the animation performed by displaying the notice icon pattern CS). The type of the icon may be different, and at least some of the preview icons may be icons that are displayed when both animations are triggered. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed at two occasions, and may or may not be stocked at two different occasions due to one change. In the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is fluctuated in any symbol row. The change icon h0 is deleted here, but may be displayed. The display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "When Yatsushiro moves ...".

  As described above, when the preview icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 118 (n), the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out of the preview icon design CS, and FIG. As shown in ()), it is moved to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 and to the right of the swordsman notice icon I62, and is arranged (stocked). Then, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance-up notice icon I63 has been stocked. Note that at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, the notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the announcement icon pattern CS is derived, so that the player can easily recognize that the chance-up announcement icon I63 is stocked. However, the notification by voice may be performed. As described above, in this effect example, in some cases, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by using a plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this effect example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Also, in this effect example, the trigger for stocking the swordsman notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are different, and therefore, the effect contents until stocking are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (p), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”, and the display result of the loss. Is determined. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”.

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 118 (q), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The held icon is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and becomes the change icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 118 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a) following FIG. 118 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (b), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display section TT1. It also depends on the chance-up notice icon I63 that is stocked at the same time. Therefore, in addition to the explanation display, it may be possible to notice that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 that has been swinging moves upward and is being digested. At this time, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this effect example, the overlap state of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 still overlaps the tutorial display section TT1. When the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the notice icon I62 of the swordsman to make the notice icon I62 of the swordsman stand out. As shown, the effect display is over the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and the description display and the chance-up notice icon I63 may sometimes attract attention.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that it will develop into a swordsman reach. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in a small size above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on the light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63 that was not digested before shifting to the super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 119 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. I have. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative design display device, depending on the position viewed by the player, it is possible to avoid overlapping due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate, In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 can be easily viewed.

  FIG. 119 (f) shows a state where the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the castle town background to the background dedicated to swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display is performed. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, characters of "Swordsman Reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (f), a state in which the lord character and the swordsman character face each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI section is framed downward, and the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward. However, the notice icon I63 of the chance up is not affected by the change, and the display position is not affected. Not changed.

  In FIG. 119 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, emits red light) indicating that the operation is in the operation accepting state. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, which is fueling a sense of expectation as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (i), as shown in FIG. 119 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays "Go" with the rise of the lord. A cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display "Ze" is added is superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the oscillating chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward and is consumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the lord's face is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed over the first cut-in image, and the big hit It has been reported that the degree of confidence in the has increased. In other words, it is shown that the advance notice by the cut-in image has been ranked up by exhausting the chance-up advance notice icon I63. Note that the first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image may be replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. You may. Further, when another notice icon is stocked when the second cut-in image is displayed, the notice icon may be overlapped with the stock icon in which the second cut-in image is stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stocked preview icon. In the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. The timing may be a timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or a timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In this effect example, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon overlaps the tutorial display section TT1, but when the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed, any of the display icons is displayed. Also does not overlap. In other words, the stocked notice icon has a predetermined area to be displayed, and may overlap with another image at a certain moment, but may not overlap with another image at a certain moment. Can be. When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used for the promotion of the button display shown in FIG. 119 (h), the notice icon is exhausted and disappears before the start of the cut-in display which is another promotion target. It may or may not have disappeared.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (m), the main character's lord defeats the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 119 (n), both the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. Is derived and the swing fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as “decoration 2”. -Decoration 2-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed with the combination of decoration patterns, and the display result of the big hit is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  FIG. 120: is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. In FIG. 120, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> N, the effect display such as conveying the displayed notice icon to the stock position by sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> N is performed. The state of going is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (a1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in a default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a display mode of a prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 120 (a1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as described later, an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Also, in this effect example, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and "With notice icon digestion ..." is displayed. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (a2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps out from the inside downward. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "Notice icon digestion ..." to "Swordsman is the enemy of the lord." The timing of changing the description display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or at a timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or at a timing later than the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (a3), the bomb icon I6 that has jumped out of the treasure chest image TR explodes. The effect display of this rupture overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (a4), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, a sound of “Pakin” notifying the fact is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode as if the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). In this manner, the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner as if to move. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (a6), it is shown that the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has completely moved from the third decorative design display device 208N to the first decorative design display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman notice icon I62 on the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 120 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 120 (b1) to 120 (b8), another example of a notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (b1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in a default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a display mode of a prefetch notice. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the description "Swordsman is the archenemy of the lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 120 (b1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed below the display screen, and an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state is shown in which the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps out from the inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure chest image TR changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in an enlarged manner, and then, as shown in FIG. 120 (b4), the treasure chest image TR Is erased. At this time, a sound of “Pakin” notifying the fact is output from the speaker 120, indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of the sound output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing of changing from the bomb icon I6 to the swordsman notice icon I62, or may be the same as the timing of changing from the bombs icon I6 to the swordsman notice icon I62. The timing may be the timing before, the timing after the change from the bomb icon I6 to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, or the timing before the treasure box image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure box image TR is deleted, or may be the timing after the treasure box image TR is deleted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides leftward along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 120 (b5), a portion overlapping the UI displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is kept on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, a mode as if the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L). In this manner, the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N in a manner as if to move. At the timing shown in FIG. 120 (b6), it is shown that the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 120 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is eliminated, and the player In some cases, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easy to visually recognize.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120 (b8), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a sound of “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked. As described above, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to recognize.

  In this effect example, for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (b5 ′), the heights of the lower end edges of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are set to at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the 208L is higher than the position where the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. Since it is possible to create a non-overlapping state, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is located near the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , Slide the display, and while visually checking the display state of the tutorial display section TT1, the third decorative symbol table There is a case that can be seen also directed by the device 208N.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 120, when the preview icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the preview icon. May be overlapped, and an effect display in which the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transferred to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the preview icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlapping state of the preview icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visually recognized.

  FIG. 121: is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 121 shows a state in which the tutorial display section TT1 is out of the frame in the normal state, and enters the frame from below when the explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a1), since three variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. I have. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 121 (a1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged. At the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, frame-in of the tutorial display section TT1 is started from below the right frame of the display screen, and thereafter, shown in FIG. 121 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a4), “The main lord is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, when display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 121 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the description displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be deleted before the animation to start out of the frame, may be deleted at the timing when the animation to start out of the frame starts, or may go out of the frame. It may be deleted at the timing after the animation is started, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display section TT1 is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (a7), for example, after the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 116 (e) to (j), FIG. As shown, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from below the right frame of the display screen, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (a10). At the timing shown, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a11), an explanation display of “In advance of the notice icon ...” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, but the tutorial display section TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, and is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 frame-out starts, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman notice icon I62. The overlap state with TT1 is eliminated. In the case where the description displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of the frame, the description may be easily recognized by eliminating the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (a13), when the tutorial display section TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Also in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 121 (b1) to FIG. 121 (b2), when the notice icon is exhausted and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlap state to the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. FIGS. 121 (b1) to (b2) are as described above with reference to FIGS. 116 (p) to (q), and thus detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 122 shows a state in which a tutorial display is also performed in a conversation effect of a character in addition to the tutorial display in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a1), since three variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. I have. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and the display "Tuner is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 122 (a1). In this effect example, the tutorial display section TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display section. Further, in this effect example, a balloon TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Princess Chibi's character CH1 and balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversational effect (or a line effect) is performed, and perform a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, and the like. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a1), an explanation display that "gold is hotter than red" is displayed in the blowing portion TT2, and a description relating to a notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon TT2 may overlap the first decorative pattern, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, no hold icon is displayed in the balloon TT2 or the balloon TT3 described later. Further, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The display area of the tutorial display section TT1 may be larger or smaller than the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display section TT1 may have a larger or smaller font than the balloons TT2 and TT3. The font may be the same or different between the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. In addition, the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbol in some cases. However, the decorative symbol does not overlap in the display area where another explanation display is performed, but may overlap. In the tutorial display section TT1, the frequency of explanation display may be lower or higher than in the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display section TT1 and the balloon sections TT2, TT3 may be display areas partitioned by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 122 (a1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is deleted together with the character CH of Princess Chibi. In addition, the decorative design is still being displayed in a fluctuating manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display section TT1, the balloon section TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. Note that the balloon TT2 may also be configured to be able to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a3), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss Is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 still displays "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun."

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 122 (a4), the holding icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first holding icon h11 is displayed. Is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed, and the change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal where the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The holding icon at the display position of the third holding icon h13 becomes the second holding icon h12, and moves to the corresponding pedestal, respectively. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 122 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display of "The Lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is still displayed. As described above, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character starts, and the lord character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Have been. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again along with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and a conversation effect has started. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a5), an explanation indicating that "swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon TT2, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach is given. The timing at which the balloon TT2 is displayed may be a timing before the start of the throwing animation, may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or may be a timing after the start of the throwing animation. There may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a6), the appearance of the lord character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown. In addition, as shown in FIG. 122 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon TT3 as a third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the grandfather character GY1. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a line effect) is performed, and perform a tutorial display (explanatory display), a preview display, and the like. At the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a6), the balloon portion TT3 is displayed with the explanation "Panda intrusion", and the announcement effect is explained. Here, the balloon part TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. The timing at which the balloon portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the lord character cast the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the lord character cast the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be a timing later than the timing when the lord character throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the grandfather character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a7), the display is performed such that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what is displayed as "the lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "by notice icon digestion ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a7), the bomb icon I61 may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least some of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61 may be easily attracted to the player. Note that the timing at which the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3. The timing may be a timing before the timing or a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (a9), the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be located at a position overlapping the front side of the balloon TT3, and at least some of the characters displayed in the balloon TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Further, when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound of “Don” notifying the fact. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon TT2 and the balloon TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a10), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is placed at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display section TT1 while being displayed in a reduced size. Then, a sound “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has been stocked. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap with a plurality of display units (tutorial display unit TT1 and balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation display is performed.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 122 (a1) to 122 (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the speech balloon (speech balloon TT2 and speech balloon TT3) displayed together with the character. For example, as shown in FIG. 122B, the display mode of the balloon TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon TT2 is set to red), and the character “ For example, a preview display or a pre-reading advance display in the symbol variation display may be performed by displaying.

  FIGS. 122 (c1) to (c3) show other examples of the content displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. A state in which the notice icon I62 of the swordsman has begun to swing is shown. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 that has been swinging moves upward and is digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is the master of the lord” to “Evolve into a swordsman reach”, and an explanation display of an event that will occur in the future (a live broadcast) Display). With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is consumed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 122 (c3), a sound of “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the above-described effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation of the effect. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 122 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed. In addition to the change (for example, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red), the display of the symbol variation display may be performed, for example, to display the advance notice display or the advance notice display in the symbol variation display. Is also good.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 123 shows a state in which the UI unit is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 are integrated. Have been. Also, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. In this example, when the super reach is reached, the UI unit is configured to frame out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a rectangular frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 123 (a1) has a reserved icon display area formed in the center. The reserved icon display area is divided by four frames, and one reserved icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the suspension icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the suspension icon display area. The functional configurations of the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 are the same as those of the above-described tutorial display section TT1 and the stage name display section ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), "Notice of icon digestion ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general government role item are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a2), the third special figure 1 hold icon (third hold icon h13) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holdings has become three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display which is the target of the pre-reading. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a3), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the loss Is determined. At this time, the change icon h0 is not deleted, but may be deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  After that, the symbol change in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 123 (a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation described above with reference to FIGS. 116 (e) to (k).

  FIG. 123 (a5) shows that after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character ruptures, the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a princess notice icon I64 and moves to the stage name display section ST2 while being reduced and displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a5), the state overlaps with the stage name display section ST2 but does not reach the predetermined display position (stock position). . In this case, since the princess notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display section ST2, an explanation display of "Castle Town Stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. Note that the explanation display may be erased before the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display section ST2. In the case of a notice icon related to the notice icon pattern CS (see FIG. 118), the explanation display is deleted based on the timing of the acquisition of the notice icon, such that the explanation display is deleted before overlapping with the stage name display part ST2. May be configured to have different timings for erasing. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display section. In addition, a pattern (so-called gasket) in which a notice icon is not acquired after the animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display section ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may be configured not to be erased even when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display section ST2 (that is, the explanation display is not erased in the case of the gasp pattern, and is not really erased). In a true pattern in which a notice icon is acquired, for example, the description may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the stage name display ST2. Can be executed, and in the case where the UI section is hidden at the time of the dark turning effect, at least a part of the process from starting the bomb icon throwing animation to obtaining the notice icon and the gasket is executed while the dark turning effect is being executed. Specifically, after the animation of the bomb icon I61 is started, the darkening effect is started. When the darkening effect ends and the UI section is displayed again, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display is disappeared from the explanation display is displayed). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position on the stage name display portion ST2, the "castle town" which has been displayed so far is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2. The display of the description of the "stage" is deleted, and functions as an area exclusively for displaying a notice icon. Therefore, the character display of "STOCK" is displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display section ST2, the stage name is not displayed. It should be noted that the scene in which the notice icon is digested and the execution of the dark turning effect described above may be configured to overlap. In addition, when the notice icon is acquired, the moving means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, and the movable member is changed to the acquired notice icon. Or at least a part of the notice icons that have already been acquired (eg, at least one notice icon among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of one notice icon, etc.). May be. Further, an effect is provided in which the movable means moves during at least a part of the period from before the start of the animation of the bomb icon I61 to the end thereof, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. Is also good. That is, before the notice icon is displayed, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means, and after the notice icon is displayed, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuating time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (a7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the loss is determined. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 123 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the display of the first hold icon h11 is performed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this effect example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display section ST2 is in the non-display state, and when the stage name display section ST2 is in the non-display state, the stage name after the change is changed. No display is performed. When the stage is changed, the stage name after the change may be displayed on the stage name display section ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 123 (a9) shows a state where five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display part ST2, but if the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display part TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is deleted, and the function only functions as an area for displaying a notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display section TT4, the tutorial display (explanatory display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 123 (a9), first, a princess notice icon I64 and two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and subsequently, a tutorial display section. At TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In this effect example, for example, when the notice icons are consumed in order from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the consumed notice icons may be performed. More specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 123 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 move one by one to the left, respectively, and the tutorial display is performed. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed on the left side of the section TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display section ST2, and the notice icon I63 of the chance up displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the left side. I do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 moves to the stage name display section ST2, it may be moved instantaneously so as not to affect the visibility of other displays.

  Then, when all the preview icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 have been exhausted, the explanation display is restarted on the tutorial display section TT4, and all the advance icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 have been exhausted. In this case, the display of the stage name in the stage name display section ST2 is restarted. Note that the description display and the display of the stage name need not be restarted. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as the symbol variation display in which the notice icon has been digested (for example, after the super reach is over). When the explanation display is restarted, the same display may be restarted, or the display may be restarted from a different portion in the telop (scroll) display.

  Further, the type of the preview icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the type of the preview icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, if the notice icon is exhausted, the other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, It may be longer than the execution time of the icon moving animation.

  In this example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon to be stocked is first stored in the stage name display portion ST2, and when the number of stocked becomes three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is displayed in the tutorial display portion. The TT4 is configured so that up to three can be stocked. However, if the stock is first made in the tutorial display section TT4, and the number of stocks becomes three, a notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further added to the stage name display section ST2. It may be configured to be able to stock up to one.

  Further, in this effect example, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4). In (state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 or the tutorial display section TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after starting to move upward when the notice icon is consumed, the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 or the tutorial display section TT4, the explanation display is displayed. Immediately after the notice icon starts moving upward when the notice icon is used, the explanation display is not displayed. It may not be performed.

  In this effect example, the above-mentioned thing shown in FIG. 116 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation. However, it goes without saying that the modes shown in other figures can be combined.

  In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, for example, there may be a display area dedicated to a notice icon to be consumed, such as a variable icon display area.

  In addition, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a toothless manner, and another notice icon may be moved so as to fill an empty space. Good, you don't have to move.

  Also, a so-called MAX8 machine (8) which can be divided into a first special figure winning opening and a second special figure winning opening per starting opening, and can hold eight symbol change displays in a normal game state. In some cases, the hold icon display area has four reserve display areas prepared in advance, and when the number of reserves becomes four, the display area expands to five. Or may be expanded to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged holding icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  FIG. 123 (b1) to FIG. 123 (b2) show a state where the stocked notice icon is consumed.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Note that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are both displayed in a variable manner.

After that, the timing at which the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed is reached, and the state in which the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward as shown in FIG. 122 (b2) is shown. In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display section ST2, it is displayed as an explanation display. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. This is the same for the tutorial display section TT4. The display of the stage name may be restarted immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2.
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing stepwise another effect example according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 124 (a1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that both the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the fluctuation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 124 (a1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  FIGS. 124 (a1) to 124 (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 124 (a1) shows a state of the castle town stage. The display mode of the castle town stage is the same as the mode shown in FIG.

  FIG. 124 (a2) shows a state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L in the space stage differs from the castle town stage described above in that a UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section on the space stage, a fluctuating icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the fluctuating icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged vertically. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon on the castle town stage described above with reference to FIG. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 124 (a2), since three variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, three suspension icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. The display mode of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon, unlike the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage. , A white pentagonal display mode, and the display mode of the prefetch notice is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 124 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, since the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different on the space stage, the notice display icon does not overlap the tutorial display area TT1.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage, and various operations are performed in accordance with the progress of the game. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 124 (a3) shows a state immediately after shifting from another stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 124 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the description display is not displayed immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and the non-display state is maintained until a new description display is performed. Is done. As shown in FIG. 124 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the non-displayed tutorial display area TT1. Note that an explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when a transition is made to another stage (for example, a space stage) while the tutorial display region TT1 is in a non-display state in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display region TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  FIG. 124 (b1) to FIG. 124 (b2) show how the tutorial display area TT1 is deleted when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. Have been.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 124 (b1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in a default display mode, whereas the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a display mode of a prefetch notice. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 124 (b1), "Castle Town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and displays "With notice icon digestion ...". In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 124 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, the button icon IBT is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display section TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked. For example, the button icon IBT is an icon that informs in advance of the number of times of production of a button operation during a specific production. For example, the number of occurrences of button operation production is large. It can be said that the larger the jackpot reliability is, that is, the larger the stock number of the button icon IBT is, the more likely the jackpot is.

  Thus, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that performing another display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step examples of another effect of increasing an advance notice icon that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 125 shows another effect example using the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned lord character.

  FIG. 125 (a1) to FIG. 125 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon already stocked changes due to the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the change icon h0, a suspended icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four suspended icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a1), since two variable displays of the special figure 1 are suspended, two suspension icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the suspension icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and the text "The lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a1). Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (a1), a notice icon I66 of Hatena is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. The notice icon I66 of Hatena is an icon that may change to another notice icon before the timing of digestion, but does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if digestion is performed. Function as an advance notice icon. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display section ST1 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 125 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. On the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that a lord character is riding on the stage. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-described Yatsushiro role item 224Fa and the general role portion 224Fb are positioned above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character starts, and the lord character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Have been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a3), the appearance of the lord character throwing the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a4), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what is displayed as "the lord is Yatsushiro Shogun" has been changed to "by notice icon digestion ...".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and explodes. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the notice icon I66 of Hatena, and at least a part of the notice icon I66 of Hatena is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is large enough to at least cover the notice icon I66 of Hatena. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon to be changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a6), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the notice icon I66 of Hatena has changed to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Then, the sound of “Pakin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I66 of Hatena has been changed to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. At this time, since the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to recognize. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a6), what is displayed as "Notice icon digestion ..." has been changed to "The swordsman is the enemy of the lord." The timing of changing the description display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started, or the timing of changing the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. May be the timing before or the timing after the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is at least the same as the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 125 (b1) to FIG. 125 (b3) show how the notice icons that are already stocked are changed by the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 125 (b1) is the same as FIG. 125 (a4), and FIG. 125 (b3) is the same as FIG. 125 (a6), so description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1 in FIG. 125 (b3), "With notice icon digestion ..." is displayed.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 125 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 125 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character reaches the notice icon I66 of Hatena and explodes. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is overlapped and displayed on the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display section TT1. As a result, at least a part of the notice icon I66 of the hatena and the tutorial display section TT1 are made difficult to visually recognize, and the overlapping range is larger than that of the effect image shown in FIG. 125 (a5). When a plurality of notice icons are stocked, the notice icons may be overlapped with all the notice icons. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is at least the same as the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 125 (c1) to FIG. 125 (c3) show how the notice icons that are already stocked are changed by the throwing animation. Note that FIG. 125 (c1) is the same as FIG. 125 (b1), and FIG. 125 (c2) is the same as FIG. 125 (b2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 explodes at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (c2), as shown in FIG. 125 (c3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is erased, and the notice icon I66 of Hatena is changed to the notice of the swordsman. The icon has changed to an icon I62 and a notice icon I63 of a chance up. That is, one notice icon has changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

  FIG. 125 (d1) to FIG. 125 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 125 (d1) is the same as FIG. 125 (a4), the description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 125 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 125 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the lord character is replaced by the second hold icon h12 which is a display mode of the prefetch notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps the front side of the second reserve icon h12, and at least a part of the second reserve icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is large enough to at least cover the second reserve icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the holding icon to be changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (d3), the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is deleted, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, from the blue display mode to the red display mode). )doing. Then, a sound “pong” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is at least the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 125, at least a part of the animation when the notice icon is acquired is the same as a part of the other animations. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol display device). The same applies to animation performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating step-by-step examples of another effect of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 126 (a1) to FIG. 126 (a7) show a state in which a specific notice icon is stocked and a message to that effect is displayed to indicate that the mission has been achieved. It should be noted that FIGS. 126 (a1) to (a3) are the same as FIGS. 116 (h) to (j), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  After the effect shown in FIG. 126 (a3) is performed, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the lord character ends, as shown in FIG. 126 (a4). In addition, as shown in FIG. 126 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. Is displayed. In the achievement display section KM1, "swordsman stock" indicating that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is stocked is displayed. That is, when the mission for acquiring the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, and when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the fact is displayed on the achievement display section KM1 to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display section KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who foresees that an effect with a very high expectation to the big hit is performed is stocked. Is also good. The timing at which the achievement display section KM1 is displayed may be the same as the end of the throwing animation, may be a timing before the end of the throwing animation, or may be a timing after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. In addition, since the achievement display part KM1 is displayed near the notice icon I62 of the stocked swordsman, the achievement display part KM1 may be noticed in some cases. The notice icon to be stocked may be displayed on the achievement display section KM1 so as to overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration C” as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 1−decoration C−decoration” 6 "is temporarily stopped and displayed. The change icon h0 is deleted here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon design CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 of the chance up is displayed from the notice icon design CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 126 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1.

  Note that, in this effect example, for example, when the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 is determined by the type of the notice icon that is consumed. The overlap with the address may be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and when the notice icons are digested, and the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be arranged at a predetermined interval, among the plurality of notice icons, When a predetermined number of notice icons are consumed, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display section KM1 may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 126 (b1) to FIG. 126 (b3), for example, an example of the operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate when developing into super reach or when a big hit occurs is shown. It is shown.

  FIG. 126 (b1) shows a state where super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 126 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a change icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI section is framed downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the change icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, while the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed above the display screen, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the display of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in the direction approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the tutorial decorative portion TT1 overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There are cases. According to this, the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device and the phenomenon in which the explanation display is hidden may sometimes give attention to the explanation display while giving a sense of expectation to the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are close to each other, are integrally formed along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Further, the change icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a square shape. The image in which the character “celebration” is given in the frame is also displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 126 (b3), the family crest role item 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overlies the lower center portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The wrapping is performed, and the Yatsushiro role 224Fa and the general role 224Fb disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of the tutorial decorative portion TT1 overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There are cases. When the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may overlap with the Yatsushiro role 224Fa or the general role role 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may overlap with the family crest role item 224E. According to this, in some cases, the explanation display may be noticed while giving a sense of expectation to a big hit due to the phenomenon that the decoration operation and the effect movable body and the explanation display hide the explanation display.

  In FIG. 126 (c1) to FIG. 126 (c4), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is displayed at all times or at least for a certain period of time, and by changing the display state of the button image 136a, the effect button 136 is displayed. The state of notifying the state is shown.

  FIG. 126 (c1) shows an animation of a duel scene in swordsman reach. FIG. 126 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 117 (d), but the stage name display ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed at all times or at least for a certain period below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 126 (c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode for urging the user to press the effect button 136. With this display, it is notified that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 has been started, and the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, emits red light) indicating that the operation is in the operation accepting state.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c3), as shown in FIG. 126 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays “Go” together with the rise of the lord. The cut-in image to which the character display "Ze" is added is superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode on the assumption that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this effect example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (the first button notice icon I4 or the second button notice icon I11) becomes valid, as described above, In some cases, the operation of the effect button 136 can be promoted by the player.

  FIG. 126D illustrates an example of a notice icon that can be applied in the present embodiment. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned Hatena notice icon I66, pseudo consecutive notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, suspension promotion notice icon I67, chance notice notice icon I68 , A panda notice icon I69 is provided. Here, the reservation promotion notice icon I67 is an icon for giving a notice that, when exhausted, the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a display mode with higher reliability for the big hit. The pseudo consecutive announcement icon is an icon for notifying that a pseudo consecutive production will be performed when digested. In addition, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that a chance eye is derived as a display result of the decorative pattern when the chance eye is consumed. Further, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that a transition to the pre-reading zone will be made after digestion. Further, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon for notifying that the effect of the panda being intruded when the panda is digested, and that a big hit (probable) will always occur.

  FIG. 127 is a view for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIG. 127 (a1) to FIG. 127 (a7) show a state in which the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is the enemy of the lord”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 127 has the left side overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62.

  FIG. 127 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “Swordsman is the enemy of the lord” scrolls in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a2), only the “swordsman is” scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a3), only the “swordsman is the lord” is scrolled in. I have. In these cases, none of the characters overlap with the swordsman's notice icon I62, so the explanation display may be clearly recognizable.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a4), the entire character “Swordsman is the archenemy of the lord” is displayed. In this case, at least the character portion of "Swordsman" is overlapped with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a5), the “Swordsman” portion scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display section TT1, and the “I am the enemy of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of "the lord" is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a6), the part of “Swordsman is the lord” is scrolled out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part of “Nemesis” is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of "At the enemy" is overlapped with the swordsman notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a7) follows, the scrolling of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this effect example, the characters overlapped by the preview icon are changed over time due to the scroll of the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the description display causes a period in which the description display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the description display does not overlap. When the scroll of the explanation display is repeatedly performed, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  FIG. 127 (b1) to FIG. 127 (b7) show other explanations in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scroll display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is the enemy of the lord”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which a display (for example, a warning display of “superheat”) is performed is shown. 127 (b1) to FIG. 127 (b3) and FIGS. 127 (b6) to FIG. 127 (b7) correspond to FIGS. 127 (a1) to 127 (a3) and FIGS. 127 (a6) to 127 (a6), respectively. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 127 (b3), a preview display is performed in the tutorial display unit TT1 as illustrated in FIGS. 127 (b4) to 127 (b5). For the preview display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is set to red, and the character "" is displayed. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display is finished, the scroll display of the explanation display is restarted as shown in FIG. 127 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even while the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after the progress in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of the interruption. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (b7), the scroll display of the explanation display ends. In addition, although the preview display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the advance display.

  FIG. 127 (c1) to FIG. 127 (c5) show the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is the archenemy of the lord”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 when a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During display, a state is shown in which another notice icon moves as part of the notice icon is consumed.

  In FIG. 127 (c1), a chance-up notice icon I63 which is a notice icon of a chance to be consumed first and a notice icon I62 of a swordsman which is a notice icon to be consumed second is an advance notice icon I63. , The notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps on the left side of the tutorial display section TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (c2), when the notice icon I63 of the chance up is exhausted, as shown in FIGS. 127 (c3) to (c5), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman increases the chance. Of the notice icon moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed. As a result, after the range of the overlap with the tutorial display section TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the state of the overlap is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is easily recognized. May be. That is, in this effect example, the notice icons do not overlap in the tutorial display section TT1 depending on the number of notice icons that are stocked. When the explanation display is scrolled in the tutorial display section TT1, the movement display of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display in the movement animation of the notice icon may overlap.

In the above description,
“Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208 etc.]

  Symbol display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display;

Notice means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of notices [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542, etc.] and ,
A gaming table with

The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,

  The suspension display is a display displayed in a suspension display area [for example, the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the suspension icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.) in the image display means,

The suspension display is a display according to the number of the operations of the symbol change display suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “suspension number”) [for example, the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 includes , The number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The symbol change display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted,

The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,

  The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , And an advance notice icon can be displayed in each area],

  The notice means is means capable of executing, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon [for example, When the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is exhausted, a reach transition effect may be executed. ,

In the period in which the symbol change display is performed once, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, etc.] of the plurality of notice icons is the first number [for example, two, etc.]. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit when digested with a second number [eg, three, etc.] greater than the first number than when digested.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the image display means. However, according to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the image display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the variation of the effect can be increased.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the display of the notice icon makes it easy to recognize that the notice icon has a change that may be consumed, so that the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Further, according to the gaming table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase or digestion of the notice icon and improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not always execute the symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice means may be one that can execute only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be one that can be executed other than the plurality of kinds of notices. In addition, the notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices, or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  The image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may not display the plurality of types of advance notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than in the hold display area of the image display means.

  The hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be, for example, a character, a number, or a symbol.

  Also, the hold display may be one that displays only the number of holds, or one that displays other than the number of holds.

  Further, the symbol change display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started other than when the hold is exhausted. Further, the symbol change display may be always started when the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is exhausted.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in an area other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. The notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or more notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or more notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a notice of a type corresponding to the kind of noticed icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. When one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice other than the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon may be executable. In addition, the notice means may be configured to always execute a notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change that is consumed, so that the player can play the game so as not to miss the notice display. You may be able to.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be displayed in a number other than the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. Also, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed There may be.

  In addition, the "notification means may provide a false notice [e.g., a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition effect, etc., which is a loss, etc.] in the same form as the mode of the advance notice [e.g., a pseudo consecutive production, a reach transition production, etc. that may be a big hit]. Actionable means,

  When the notice icon [for example, the notice icon I6 for a hat, the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of the digested notice icon is reduced. Means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to (for example, a pseudo consecutive notice or a reach transition effect to be out)

After the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be out,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player can be nervous until the notice icon is consumed and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a false notice in the same mode as the notice mode, or may be capable of executing something other than the false notice in the same mode as the notice mode. You may. The notice means may always execute a false notice in the same mode as the notice mode, or may not execute a false notice in the same mode as the notice mode.

  In addition, the notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of noticed icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Alternatively, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a type other than a fake notice of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be executable. . The notice means may be such that, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a false notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon is necessarily executed. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol change display may be always out of place, or after the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol change display may be a big hit. There may be.

  After the fake notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that the possibility of displaying the big hit symbol on the symbol display means is high is executed.

In addition, "the number of the notice icons to be started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one symbol change display is being executed is smaller than the third number [e.g., one]. A fourth number (eg, three, etc.) larger than the third number is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing a display according to the number of holdings,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the hold display and the display of the notice icon can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only the display corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than the display corresponding to the number of holds. In addition, the hold display unit may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

Further, the “holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following.
According to this gaming table, the hold display may be clearly recognized in some cases.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted by only the light emitting means, or may be constituted by including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  Note that the light emitting means may include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be constituted by LEDs of a plurality of colors. For example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package, such as a full-color LED, and may be required. Further, the display device may be configured by a single-color LED.

  Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

  In addition, "read ahead notice means capable of executing look ahead notice [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 540, etc. ]

The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon may be displayed, thereby increasing the sense of expectation for the big hit in some cases.

  Here, the prefetch notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetch notice, or may be capable of executing other than the prefetch notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice, or may not execute the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing the pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. A pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

  In addition, the above-mentioned symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 73 (2), etc.]” ) Is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a fifth number (for example, three, etc.),

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “the first symbol variation display [for example, three of the pre-read targets shown in FIG. 73 (2)] In the period during which the symbol change is executed based on the hold held before the eye is held, the notice icon may be consumed by a sixth number [for example, one or the like]. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,

The suspension display is a display that informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [for example, in FIG. 73 (4). During the period in which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the prefetch target shown is performed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed. Etc. are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special map 1],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of digestion of the notice icon is different between the case where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed and the case where the symbol variation display is executed before the symbol variation display to be the prefetch target. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol change display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. In the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely digested by the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed. In some cases, the notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  In the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely digested by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  In addition, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed, or the first symbol variation display. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may be a message that always notifies that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol change display is executed, or the first symbol change display may be performed. During the period in which the variable display is being executed, the fact that the operation of the second symbol variable display is suspended may not be notified.

In addition, there is a case where the display of the notice icon is started during a period in which the symbol change display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) is performed [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (C), the display of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat and the increase of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand and two boxes, and the advance notice icon I10 of the fan are performed in one symbol change display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed, and thus the player may be able to have expectation until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, the display of the notice icon may always start, or in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be displayed. Display may not be started in some cases. In addition, the notice icon may be started to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol change display is executed, or may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol change display is executed. May be started to be displayed.

  In addition, you may be comprised so that a notice icon may not increase in the symbol change display which a notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”), the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon which is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is started to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat which is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (C) is the symbol variation display. Is increased during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, a notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be configured to be displayed, In a period other than the period in which the third symbol change display is being executed, the display of the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed may be started. In addition, during the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, a notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to always start to be displayed, During the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, there may be a case where the display of the notice icon which is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed is not started.

  It should be noted that the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol change display is being executed.

  Further, “the hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number (for example, four or eight, etc.),

The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number (for example, six or the like),
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the displayable number of the hold display is different from the displayable number of the notice icon, so that the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished in some cases.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  The notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number without fail, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  The maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the notice icon may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the advance notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the reserved display of the special map 1, or at least may be the same, or may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the reserved display of the special map 2, or at least may be the same, or may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the total of the maximum displayable numbers of the reserved displays of the special map 1 and the special map 2, or at least may be the same or may be the same.

  In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, production movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, game frame lamps 542] Etc.]

  One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIGS. 76 (49) to 50 (50) and FIG. 88 (49)).

One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 83 (Ac) or FIG. 83 (Bb)].
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,

  One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 76 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 88 (50-1) to (57). Directing etc.]

One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background or the like],
The first effect is a different effect from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect is performed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of effects. In addition, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute the plurality of types of effects.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. In addition, the advance notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is performed, or may notify that the effect other than the first effect is performed. . In addition, the first notice may always notify that the first effect is performed, or may not always notify that the first effect is performed.

  In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is performed, or may notify that the effect other than the second effect is performed. . In addition, the second notice may always notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, it is configured such that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always consumed [for example, FIG. 73 (1) to FIG. 77 (66) and FIG. 85 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 89 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. 』
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is always executed when the notice icon is displayed, so that the expectation of the player may be improved in some cases.
Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.],

Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, or the production holding lamp 286];
A gaming table with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,

  The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design preliminary production, stage change production, reach transition production, premium preliminary production production, re-fluctuation production, etc.]. And

The second display means displays a display in accordance with the number of pending symbol change display operations (hereinafter, referred to as “reserved number”) in a suspended display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , A reserved icon display area, a variable icon display area 280, a reserved display area of the effect reserved lamp 286, etc.] of the special figure 2 [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 includes: The number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The symbol change display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted,

  The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,

The notice icon is an icon that does not indicate the number of holds according to the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,

  The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [for example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , And an advance notice icon can be displayed in each area],

  The second display means is capable of displaying, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon. [For example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is exhausted, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes is exhausted, the reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],

In the period in which the symbol change display is performed once, the second number [for example, three, etc.] digestion larger than the first number is performed than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the image display means. However, according to this game console, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the image display means.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there are cases where the variation of the effect can be increased.

  Also, according to this gaming table, the display of the notice icon makes it easy to recognize that the notice icon has a change that may be consumed, so that the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Further, according to the gaming table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase or digestion of the notice icon and improve the interest of the game.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not always execute the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notice icons. In addition, the second display means may always display a plurality of notice icons, or may not display the plurality of notice icons.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notice displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of advance notice displays. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of advance notices, or may not display a plurality of types of advance notices.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in areas other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is exhausted, or may be started when the hold is not exhausted. The symbol change display may be started whenever the hold is exhausted, or may not be started even when the hold is exhausted.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or more notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or more notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the noticed icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Also, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice display other than a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon can be displayed. Is also good. Further, the second display means, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured such that a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed is displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285] Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change that is consumed, so that the game is performed so that the player does not miss the notice display. In some cases.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be displayed in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other than the above may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may display the number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

  In addition, the second display means may display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo-sequence production to reach a big hit, a reach transition effect, etc.] Transition effect, etc.].

  The second display means, when one of the advance notice icons [for example, the advance notice icon I6 of a hat, the advance notice icon I9 of a thousand cars box, etc.] displayed in the advance notice icon display area is digested, the notice that has been digested. Display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, a pseudo consecutive notice or a reach transition effect to be out of place],

After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be out,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player can be nervous until the notice icon is exhausted and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display form, or may be other than a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form. May also be able to be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  Further, the second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. Or if one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a type other than a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. Further, the second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the noticed icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed. May be present, or when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is consumed, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display may be always out of place, or after the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display becomes a big hit. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the fake notice display is displayed, a notice display with a high possibility that the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means may be displayed.

In addition, "the number of the notice icons to be started to be displayed in the notice icon display area during the period in which the one symbol change display is being executed is smaller than the third number [e.g., one]. A fourth number (eg, three, etc.) larger than the third number is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, "the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,

  One display unit of the plurality of display units is an image display unit [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like],

One display means of the plurality of display means is a reserved display means [for example, a first special figure reserved lamp 218, a second special figure reserved lamp 220, a production reserved lamp 286, etc.],
The suspension display unit is a display unit configured to include the suspension display area,

The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area [e.g., lighting a number of hold lamps corresponding to the number of holds],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the hold display and the display of the notice icon can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured to include something other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are always configured, or may not include at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

  Further, the suspension display means may be configured to include only the suspension display area, or may be configured to include anything other than the suspension display area. Also, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in areas other than the hold display area. Is also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be one capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

Further, the “holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, the hold display may be clearly recognized in some cases.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted by only the light emitting means, or may be constituted by including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  Note that the light emitting means may include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be constituted by LEDs of a plurality of colors. For example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package, such as a full-color LED, and may be required. Further, the display device may be configured by a single-color LED.

  Further, in addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, the “second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
According to the number of holds, a hold icon is displayed in the hold display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the display of the change of the decorative symbol and the holding icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that the number of holdings can be easily confirmed while visually checking the display of the change of the decorative symbol.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be one capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, "read ahead notice means capable of executing look ahead notice [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 540, etc. ]

The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon may be displayed, thereby increasing the sense of expectation for the big hit in some cases.

  Here, the prefetch notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetch notice, or may be capable of executing other than the prefetch notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice, or may not execute the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing the pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. A pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the pre-read notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

  In addition, the above-mentioned symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 73 (2), etc.]” ) Is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a fifth number (for example, three, etc.),

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “the first symbol variation display [for example, three of the pre-read targets shown in FIG. 73 (2)] In the period during which the symbol change is executed based on the hold held before the eye is held, the notice icon may be consumed by a sixth number [for example, one or the like]. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,

The display according to the number of holdings is a display that informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [for example, FIG. During the period in which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the second hold as the look-ahead target shown in (4) is executed, it corresponds to the second hold as the look-ahead target. A reserve icon h12 is displayed in a reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the number of digestion of the notice icon is different between the case where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed and the case where the symbol variation display is executed before the symbol variation display to be the prefetch target. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol change display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be consumed only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. In the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely digested by the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed. In some cases, the notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  In the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon may be configured to be surely digested by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  Also, the display according to the number of holdings may be one that can notify only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed. During the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of holdings may be a message that always notifies that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed, During the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may not be notified.

In addition, there is a case where the display of the notice icon is started during a period in which the symbol change display in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) is performed [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (C), the display of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat and the increase of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand and two boxes, and the advance notice icon I10 of the fan are performed in one symbol change display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is consumed, and thus the player may be able to have expectation until all the notice icons are consumed.

  Here, during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, the display of the notice icon may always start, or in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be displayed. Display may not be started in some cases. In addition, the notice icon may be started to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol change display is executed, or may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol change display is executed. May be started to be displayed.

  In addition, you may be comprised so that a notice icon may not increase in the symbol change display which a notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”), the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In some cases, the notice icon which is consumed during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed is started to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat which is consumed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (C) is the symbol variation display. Is increased during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only during the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, a notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be configured to be displayed, In a period other than the period in which the third symbol change display is being executed, the display of the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed may be started. In addition, during the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, a notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to always start to be displayed, During the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, there may be a case where the display of the notice icon which is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed is not started.

  It should be noted that the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol change display is being executed.

  Further, “the hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number (for example, four or eight),

The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number (for example, six or the like),
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of reservations differs from the displayable number of advance icons, so that the display of advance icons may be clearly distinguished in some cases.

  Here, the hold display area may display the display corresponding to the number of holds up to the seventh number, or may not display the display corresponding to the hold number up to the seventh number. Good.

  The notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number without fail, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of reservations may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the display according to the number of suspensions in the special map 1, or at least may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the maximum displayable number of the display corresponding to the number of suspensions in the special map 2, or at least may be the same.

  Also, the maximum displayable number of the preview icons may be larger than the total displayable maximum number of the displays according to the number of reservations in the special map 1 and the special map 2, or at least may be the same, Good.

  In addition, "a production means capable of executing a plurality of types of productions [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, production movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamps 532, game frame lamps 542] Etc.]

  One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIGS. 76 (49) to 50 (50) and FIG. 88 (49)].

One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a second advance notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 83 (Ac) or FIG. 83 (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,

  One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 76 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 88 (50-1) to (57). Directing etc.]

One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background or the like],
The first effect is a different effect from the second effect,

  The first notice display is a notice display that informs that the first effect is performed,

The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is to be executed. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, the player may be able to have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of effects. In addition, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute the plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first advance notice display and the second advance notice display, or may display advance notice displays other than the first advance notice display and the second advance notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display in some cases. Is also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice display may indicate that only the first effect is to be executed, or may indicate that an effect other than the first effect is to be executed. Good. Further, the first notice display may always notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  In addition, the second announcement display may indicate that only the second effect is to be performed, or may indicate that an effect other than the second effect is to be performed. Good. In addition, the second notice display may always notify that the second effect is to be executed, or may not always notify that the second effect is to be executed.

In addition, it is configured such that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always consumed [for example, FIG. 73 (1) to FIG. 77 (66) and FIG. 85 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 89 (66), the increased notice icons are all consumed, etc.]. 』
Was also explained.

According to this gaming table, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is always executed when the notice icon is displayed, so that the expectation of the player may be improved in some cases.
Also, "the gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Note that, in the embodiment described above, the advance notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or disappear even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or disappear even during the execution of the special background mode for prefetching. Is also good.

Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed in the case where the other notification icons (B, C, D) have been consumed, and is not displayed even if the other notification icons (B, C, D) are consumed. It may be configured such that the "symbol variation display on which the notice display a is displayed" is performed more easily than the "variation display" is performed, so that the big hit symbol is more easily displayed. The notice display b is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is consumed, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is consumed. It is a display, and it is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol when the "symbol change display with the notice display b" is executed than when the "symbol change display with the notice display c" is executed. May be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed. The notice display d is a notice display that is not displayed even when the other notice icons (A, B, and D) are consumed. When the digestion is completed, any of the advance display b, the advance display c, and the advance display d is displayed. When the "symbol change display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is consumed" is executed, the big hit symbol is definitely displayed rather than the "symbol change display in which the notice icon C is consumed". You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the "symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b, or the notice display c is displayed" is performed, the "symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed" is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy to confirm and display.
In the above description,

"First display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of performing symbol variation display,

Second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, or the production holding lamp 286];
A gaming table with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,

  The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice displays [for example, pseudo continuous production, freeze production, stop design preliminary production, stage change production, reach transition production, premium preliminary production production, re-fluctuation production, etc.]. And

The second display means displays a display in accordance with the number of pending symbol change display operations (hereinafter, referred to as “reserved number”) in a suspended display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , A reserved icon display area, a variable icon display area 280, a reserved display area of the effect reserved lamp 286, etc.] of the special figure 2 [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 includes: The number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special map 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
The symbol change display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted,

  The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,

The notice icon is an icon that does not indicate the number of holds according to the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,

  The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Notice icons can be displayed in each area],

  The second display means is a display means capable of displaying, when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is consumed, the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon [for example, When the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is exhausted, a reach transition effect may be executed. ,

  In the period in which the symbol change display is performed once, the second number [which is larger than the first number than the first number [for example, one, etc.]] For example, three, etc.] digestion is more likely to be a big hit,

The second display means displays the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 73 (2)]. Display means for displaying the advance notice icon in the advance notice icon display area as a pre-reading advance notice display prior to the start of the symbol variation display etc.]).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

In addition, it is configured that the number of the notice icons is displayed according to the number of times the notice display is likely to be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285] Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Also, the second display means may display a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode [for example, a pseudo-sequence production or a hit transition production such as a jackpot] Transition effect, etc.].

  The second display means, when one of the advance notice icons [for example, the advance notice icon I6 of a hat, the advance notice icon I9 of a thousand cars box, etc.] displayed in the advance notice icon display area is digested, the notice that has been digested. Display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, a pseudo consecutive notice or a reach transition effect to be out of place],

After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be out,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, the second display means is constituted by a plurality of display means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the production holding lamp 286, etc.]. Display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Also, one of the plurality of display units is an image display unit [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like],

One display means of the plurality of display means is a reserved display means [for example, a first special figure reserved lamp 218, a second special figure reserved lamp 220, a production reserved lamp 286, etc.],
The suspension display unit is a display unit configured to include the suspension display area,

The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area [e.g., lighting a number of hold lamps corresponding to the number of holds],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,

The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (9) to 74 (20), display of a notice icon as a prefetch notice Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Further, the “holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp or an LED]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
According to the number of holds, a hold icon is displayed in the hold display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, during the period in which the “second design variation display [for example, the design variation display based on the third hold, which is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 73 (2)], the notice icon is displayed. Fifth number [eg 3 etc.] may be digested,

The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, “the first symbol variation display [for example, three of the pre-read targets shown in FIG. 73 (2)] In the period during which the symbol change is executed based on the hold held before the eye is held, the notice icon may be consumed by a sixth number [for example, one or the like]. Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,

The display according to the number of holdings is a display that informs that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is executed [for example, FIG. During the period in which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the second hold as the look-ahead target shown in (4) is executed, it corresponds to the second hold as the look-ahead target. A reserve icon h12 is displayed in a reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, it is configured such that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always consumed until the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched [for example, FIG. 73 (1) As shown in FIG. 77 (66) and FIG. 85 (1) to FIG. 89 (66), the increased notice icon is all digested until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, the display of the notice icon may be started during the period in which the notice change icon in which the notice icon is consumed (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth sign change display”) is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 82 (C), the display of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat and the increase of the advance notice icon I6 of the hat, the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand and two boxes, and the advance notice icon I10 of the fan are performed in one symbol change display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the period is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon may start to be displayed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat digested at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (C) is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, the “suspension display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number (for example, four or eight, etc.) according to the number of suspensions,

The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number (for example, six or the like),
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, “the effect means which can execute plural kinds of effects [for example, decorative design display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game frame lamp 542] Etc.]

  As the notice icon, a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes shown in FIG. 76 (47) or FIG. 87 (47)] can be displayed.

  As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 on the ribbon shown in FIG. 83 (Ab) or the like] can be displayed.

  The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,

  One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIGS. 76 (49) to 50 (50) and FIG. 88 (49)].

One of the plurality of types of advance notices is a second advance notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 83 (Ac) or FIG. 83 (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,

  When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is configured to be displayed,

  When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is configured to be displayed,

  One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIGS. 76 (51) to (57) and FIGS. 88 (50-1) to (57). Directing etc.]

One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a moon background or the like],
The first effect is a different effect from the second effect,

  The first notice display is a notice display that informs that the first effect is performed,

The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display notifying that the second effect is to be executed. 』
Was also explained.
Further, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.]

Effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,

  The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,

  The main control unit is a unit that can execute control of the first display unit (for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.),

The effect control unit is a unit that can execute control of the second display unit [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,

  During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold to be prefetched shown in FIG. 73 (2)], the notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (9), the notice notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Displayed etc.],

  There is a case where the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 73 (9) to 74]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol change display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (14). ],

A symbol variation display that is displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol based on a third hold that is a prefetch target shown in FIG. 73 (2)] In this case, the first notice icon that has not been extinguished during the display of the first symbol variation display may be extinguished [for example, FIG. 74) As shown in FIG. 74 (25), the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (9) changes the symbol variation display to be prefetched as shown in FIG. 74 (23). Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

Also, "the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be consumed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the advance notice icon of the hat] The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested in the symbol variation display in which the display of I6 has been started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Also, as a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, there is a case where the display of the first announcement icon is started during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 74 (25), the symbol change which is the target of the look-ahead is performed so that the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (23). For example, a hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a pre-read notice of display],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, during the display of one symbol change display, a second number [for example, three or more] is displayed compared to a case where the first number [for example, one or more] of the first notice icons is digested. ] Is more likely to be a big hit when the first notice icon is digested,
The second number is a number greater than the first number,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Further, a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 or the like] can be displayed as the notice icon.

The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol fluctuation display will be a big hit, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Also, one of the plurality of types of display is a preview display [for example, a pseudo continuous production, a freeze production, a stop design preliminary announcement, a stage change production, a reach transition production, a premium preliminary production production, a fluctuation production production, and the like]. ,

When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] is consumed, the first notice display [for example, the pseudo-shown shown in FIGS. 75 (28) to (31)] is made as the notice display. Continuous production etc.] may be displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo continuous production or a reach transition production that becomes a miss, etc.],

  When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 or the like] is exhausted, a first false notice table [for example, a pseudo continuous staging that becomes a failure] is displayed as the false notice display. May be

  The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,

The first false notice display is configured to be shifted in the displayed symbol variation display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display [eg, a look-ahead effect effect that is an effect that shifts to a special stage as shown in FIG. 72 (b)].

  A third notice icon [for example, a notice icon I8 on a ribbon] can be displayed as the notice icon,

When the third notice icon is consumed, the look-ahead effect display may be started. [For example, if one ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, if the reliability of the big hit is high, There is an effect that the background shifts to the prefetch mode, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means [for example, the decorative design display device 208, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the production holding lamp 286, etc.]" Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display]. Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold to be prefetched shown in FIG. 73 (9)] The notice icon I6 and the like of the hat whose display has been started during the symbol variation display are necessarily digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, a hold that is a target of pre-reading] The notice icon I6 of the hat is being digested during the symbol change display based on
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, "The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 or the like] on the display means,

The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Notice icons can be displayed in each area],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, there is provided an effect control unit [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500]

The effect control unit is a unit that can execute control of the display unit [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Further, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.]

Symbol display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,

The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, a notice icon I21 of “house”, and a notice icon I22 of “print”. , A notice icon I31 of “dono”, a notice icon I32 of “princess”, a notice icon I33 of “grandfather”, etc.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

Big hit symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display which becomes a big hit based on the second hold shown in FIG. 95 (1)] which is the target of the prefetching, etc.]" ) Is suspended until the display of the second symbol change display ends, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of advance icons”) is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 95 to FIG. 96, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, “notice” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. And a notice icon I22 of “Crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is a staging display,

  When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 74 (23) to FIG. 75 (32), When the notice icon I6 of “1” is digested, a pseudo-run may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 76 (46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of a thousand cars is digested, a strong reach effect is produced. May be started],

A first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons (for example, a combination of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" shown in FIG. 95) is changed by one symbol change. By being digested in the display, the first effect display (for example, the effect image or the like displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 96 (21)) is displayed as the effect display. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Further, according to the gaming table, it may be possible to keep expecting that the first effect display may be displayed until the notice icon of the first combination is consumed.

  Further, according to this gaming table, a plurality of notice icons can be shown during the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display to be pre-read is started, and it is possible to give a sense of expectation to a big hit. May be possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, During the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. Further, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  When the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. May be displayed other than the effect display corresponding to. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, a staging display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. May not be displayed.

  Also, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be digested in one symbol change display, so that only the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Also, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol change display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. May be done. Further, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be digested in one symbol change display, so that the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. Alternatively, the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display by rendering the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons in one symbol change display.

  Also, the first combination of the plurality of displayed preview icons may be configured to be displayed as the first effect display only by being digested in one symbol change display. Also, it is configured such that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display in addition to the fact that the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol change display. May be done.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination including a first number (for example, two or the like) of the notice icons.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this game console, the first effect display until the first number notice icon is consumed after the first number notice icon of the first combination of the first number notice icons is displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that may be displayed.

  The “first combination” is a combination including a first notice icon [eg, “house” notice icon I21 etc.] and a second notice icon [eg, “crest” notice icon I22 etc.] ,

The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that the effect of the effect may be enhanced in some cases.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or may be a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. You may. Further, the first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be the case.

Further, the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 95 (1)] is suspended, and then the second symbol variation display is performed. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIG. 96 (19), the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. In the period from the end to the end of the symbol change display, the “house” notice icon I21 and the “monster” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been consumed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons are consumed, thereby corresponding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, there may be more than a plurality of notice icons that are consumed. Further, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may always be consumed, and During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, it is configured such that, in one symbol change display, even if only a part of the notice icon of the first combination is digested, the first effect display is not displayed [for example, Even if only one of the notice icon I21 of "house" and the notice icon I22 of "mon" is digested, the effect image shown in FIG. 96 (21) is not displayed, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol change display, so the first effect display May be able to give a sense of superiority to a player who has been able to see the game.

  Here, in one symbol change display, even if only a part of the advance notice icon of the first combination is digested, it may be configured such that only the first effect display is not displayed. In the symbol variation display, the configuration may be such that only a part of the preview icon of the first combination is consumed, and no display other than the first effect display is displayed. Also, in one symbol change display, even if only a part of the advance notice icon of the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be configured to not always be displayed, In the symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed even if only a part of the preview icon of the first combination is consumed.

  Also, only in one symbol change display, even if only a part of the advance notice icon of the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be configured not to be displayed, Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, a configuration may be made such that only a part of the preview icon of the first combination is consumed or the first effect display is not displayed.

Also, as the third notice icon [for example, the notice icon 16 of the hat shown in FIG. 74 etc.] is digested as the notice icon, a third effect display [eg, FIG. ), An effect display or the like in which the character BC of the number leader displayed in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat pushes up the right symbol or the like is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the variation of the effect is increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the third notice icon may be digested to display only the third effect display, or the third notice icon may be digested to display the third notice icon. The display other than the effect display may be configured to be displayed. In addition, the third effect icon may be digested, so that the third effect display may be displayed without fail. The display may not be displayed in some cases.

  Also, the third effect display may be displayed only by the third notice icon being digested, or the third notice icon may be displayed other than by digesting the third notice icon. The third effect display may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, “losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66)] The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends [for example, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 77 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target is suspended to when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target ends. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In addition, during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  Also, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

Also, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66) and the symbol variation display causing a loss] is suspended, In a period until the display of the fourth symbol change display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed by the time a certain symbol variation display is suspended and before the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  Also, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.

The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 95. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, the “notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 95 (the notice icon I21 of“ house ”and the notice of“ print ”). The icon I22 etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of the symbols in which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

“First display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 100, a first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 103, etc.];

Second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 100, a second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 103, etc.];
A gaming table with

  The first display means displays a notice relating to the notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 100 (10) to 101 (13) is exhausted, and FIGS. 101 (16) to FIG. ), The display of the character BC and the pseudo continuous production performed in response to the notice icon I6 of the hat, or the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 103 (c1) to 103 (c5). Etc.] can be displayed,

  The second display means displays a notice related to the notice icon [for example, a notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 100 (2) to FIG. 101 (13) and a notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 100 (5) to FIG. Of the notice icon I6 of the hat to be displayed, or the display of the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 103 (c6), etc.].

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display [for example, the notice icon illustrated in FIG. 72 may function as a pre-read notice display],

Big hit symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the second hold shown in FIG. 103 (c1)] which is a prefetch target, etc.] ) Is suspended until the display of the second symbol change display ends, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of advance icons”) is started. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 103 (c1) to 103 (c9), the notice icon is displayed during the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285B, a notice icon I6 of two hats and a notice icon I7 of one shuriken are displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Also, according to this gaming table, a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the player's line of sight looking at the display related to the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means, In some cases, the player can be entertained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display relating to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display a notice icon.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display relating to the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  In addition, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as a pre-reading advance notice display, or may be an icon that may not be displayed as a pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, During the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. Further, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, after the second symbol change display [for example, a symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold as a prefetch target shown in FIG. 103 (c1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is performed. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is ended, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 103 (c1) to 103 (c9), the notice icons are subject to prefetching. During the period from the suspension of the symbol change display to the end of the symbol change display, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken and the notice icon I6 of the two hats have been consumed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons are consumed, thereby corresponding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, there may be more than a plurality of notice icons that are consumed. Further, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may always be consumed, and During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

Also, the notice icon is displayed on the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 100, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 103, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (5), a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, since the display means for performing the stock effect is determined, it may be possible not to miss the notice icon that has been stocked.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display something other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Is also good.

In addition, "the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 100, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 103, and the like] indicates that the notice icon is displayed. In some cases, a display for giving a notice is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 100 (2) to (5), a display for giving a notice that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A (the lord) Is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a notice is given that a notice icon may be displayed.Therefore, in some cases, it is possible to make a player pay attention to the display means so that the player does not miss the display of the notice icon. is there.

  Here, on the first display means, there may be a case where only a display for giving notice that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, or on the first display means, a display for giving notice that the notice icon is displayed. There may be cases where other displays are also performed. Further, in the first display means, a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is to be displayed may always be performed, or in the first display means, a display for giving a notice that the notice icon is to be displayed may be provided. It may not be performed.

  In addition, only in the first display means, there may be a case where a display for giving notice that the notice icon is displayed may be performed, or in a case where the notice icon is displayed on display means other than the first display means. May be displayed in advance.

  In addition, “the first display unit is configured to display a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A illustrated in FIG. 100, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C illustrated in FIG. 103, etc.]” Means provided,

  The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 100, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 103, and the like]. Means,

The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 100 (4) and FIG. Etc. are displayed over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a high-impact notice icon and entertain the player in some cases.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. The first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  The second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. The second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed on a display other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over an area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. May be displayed.

  In addition, “the first display unit is configured to display a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A illustrated in FIG. 100, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C illustrated in FIG. 103, etc.]” Means provided,

  The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 100, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 103, and the like]. Means,

  The notice icon is an icon (for example, a plurality of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 72) displayed in a display mode according to the type,

When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 101 (16) to FIG. 18 (18), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the enlarged character BC2 of the number length is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display that is displayed over the second symbol 208B and the number character BC pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo continuous symbol is the second symbol symbol. Displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to produce a high-impact notice icon and entertain the player in some cases.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. The first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

  The second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. The second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or may not be provided with the second display area.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed only over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed over a display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Is also good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may always be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is consumed, the effect display corresponding to the type of the consumed notice icon may not be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.

  Further, when the notice icon is consumed, only the effect display corresponding to the kind of the consumed notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, “losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66)] The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends [for example, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 77 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target is suspended to when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target ends. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In addition, during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  Also, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

Also, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66) and the symbol variation display causing a loss] is suspended, In a period until the display of the fourth symbol change display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed by the time a certain symbol variation display is suspended and before the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  Also, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.

The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 100. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

Also, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reserves according to the displayed number [For example, the notice icon (the notice icon I6 of the hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that have been changed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

A display means [for example, a decorative design display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays;

A first movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 106 (12), a crest actor 224B shown in FIG. 98 (d4-2), etc.],
A gaming table with

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, a notice icon I21 of “house”, and a notice icon I22 of “print”. , Drink notice icon I31 etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

  Big hit symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display to become a big hit based on the third hold shown in FIG. 73 (2)] which is a prefetch target, etc.] ) Is suspended until the display of the second symbol change display ends, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of advance icons”) is started. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to 77 (66) and FIG. 106, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display ends, In the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 for two hats, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, a notice icon I31 for a drink, etc. are displayed, etc.

  The first movable means performs a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect for displacing the effect button 136 from a default position to a protruding position as shown in FIGS. 106 (12) to (17)]. Actionable means,

When the fourth notice icon [for example, the drink notice icon I31 or the like] among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the movable means. However, according to this game console, a game console having features in the movable means can be realized.

  Further, according to this gaming table, when the fourth notice icon is consumed on the display means, the first movable effect by the first movable means may be performed, so that it is possible to increase the variation of the effect. There are cases.

  According to this gaming table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect can be enhanced in some cases.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, During the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. Further, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. In addition, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  In addition, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the fourth notice icon is consumed, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed. Further, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be configured to be always executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is consumed.

  Also, only when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be configured to be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The first movable effect may be executed in a case other than when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

After the second symbol change display [for example, a symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is ended, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to 77 (66) and FIG. During the period from the suspension of the target symbol change display to the end of the symbol change display, the notice icons I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, the notice icon I31 of the drink are digested, etc.] ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons are consumed, thereby corresponding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, there may be more than a plurality of notice icons that are consumed. Further, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may always be consumed, and During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 72 or the notice icon I21 of “house” among the displayed notice icons is exhausted, the first movable icon is displayed. The effect is configured not to be executed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured so that only the first movable effect is not executed, or the displayed notice icon among the displayed notice icons When the fifth notice icon is consumed, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the first movable effect may be configured not to be necessarily executed, or the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons may be used. When the five advance icons are consumed, the first movable effect may be executed.

  Also, only when the fifth advance notice icon among the displayed advance notice icons has been consumed, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the fifth advance notice icon among the displayed advance notice icons may not be executed. The first movable effect may be configured not to be executed even in a case other than when the five advance notice icons are consumed.

In addition, it is provided with an operation means [for example, an effect button 136 or the like] which can be operated by a player,
The first movable means is means for moving the operation means,

The first movable effect means that the mode of the operation means is changed from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 106 (12)] to the second mode [for example, shown in FIG. 106 (17)]. Protruding position etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a change of the operation means may be notified by a notice icon in some cases, and thus the operation means may be noticed in some cases.

  Here, the operation means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by other than the player. Further, it may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be such that only the operation means is movable, or may be anything other than the operation means. In addition, the first movable means may always move the operation means, or may not move the operation means.

  In addition, a “second movable means [for example, a crest character shown in FIG. 98 (d4-2)] is provided.

  The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest drop effect illustrated in FIG. 98 (d4-2)].

When the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of “house”) of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be executed. ing,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the variety of effects produced by the movable means may be increased, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. In addition, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  In addition, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is consumed, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the sixth advance notice icon is exhausted, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may be executed. Further, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or the displayed notice icon among the displayed notice icons may be used. The second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is consumed.

  Also, only when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is consumed, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. The second movable effect may be executed in cases other than when the sixth notice icon is exhausted.

In addition, “losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66)] The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends [for example, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 77 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target is suspended to when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target ends. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In addition, during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  Also, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

Also, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66) and the symbol variation display causing a loss] is suspended, In a period until the display of the fourth symbol change display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed by the time a certain symbol variation display is suspended and before the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  Also, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.

The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 95. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, the “notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations depending on the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 106 (a notice icon I9 for a thousand cars, a notice icon I31 for a drink, etc.)). Is not an icon indicating the number of symbols in which the operation of the symbol variation display of Toku-zu 1 is suspended, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

  Big hit symbol change display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol change display [for example, a symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold shown in FIG. ) Is suspended until the display of the second symbol change display ends, the display of a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of advance icons”) is started. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 73 (2) to 77 (66), a notice icon is displayed during a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended to when the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285, a notice icon I6 for two hats, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes and a notice icon I10 for a fan are displayed, etc.],

  One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIG. 108 (2) to FIG. ]

The notice icon display suggestion display is a display indicating that the display of the notice icon may be started,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where it is suggested in advance that there is a possibility that the display of the notice icon is started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  Further, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, During the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. Further, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  In addition, only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may be something other than that the display of the notice icon may be started. It may be suggestive. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always indicate that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not indicate that the display of the notice icon may be started. There may be.

Further, after the second symbol change display [for example, a symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold as a prefetch target shown in FIG. 108 (1)] is held, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIGS. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the announcement icon I6 of the two hats, the announcement icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the announcement icon of the fan displayed in the announcement icon display area 285 are consumed. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons are consumed, thereby corresponding to these. Since a plurality of effects may be performed, the effect of the effect may be improved.

  Here, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, there may be more than a plurality of notice icons that are consumed. Further, in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may always be consumed, and During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  In addition, only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 108 (2) to FIG. Notice that the notice icon by the lord will be displayed over the pattern fluctuation display of
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, a notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed in some cases.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than the multiple symbol variation displays. May be used. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol change displays.

In addition, it is configured such that, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended [for example, FIG. -As shown in FIG. 5 (5), the notice that the notice icon by the lord's effect is displayed ends before the symbol change display to be prefetched is started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol change display to be pre-read is started, so that it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol change to be pre-read.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, it may be configured such that only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended, or the second symbol variation is displayed. During the display of the symbol change display that is displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end. In addition, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to always end, or the second symbol variation display The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not be ended during the display of the symbol change display displayed earlier than the above.

  Also, only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation display The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be ended even during the period other than the display of the symbol change display displayed before the display.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that display of at least one of a third number (for example, three, etc.) of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 110 (a1-4), in the Amida production, the display of at least one of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I10 of the fan, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is started. Etc.],
The third number is a number of 2 or more;
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, at least one of the advance notice icons suggested in advance may be displayed, so that the player can know which notice icon may be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to entertain a symbol change in which a notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be one that may only suggest that at least one of the third number of advance notice icons may be displayed, or the third notice icon may be displayed. It may also indicate that at least one of the number advance notice icons may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be displayed. May not indicate that at least one of the displays may be started.

Also, the display of at least one of the third number of the advance notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the advance notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. 110 (a1-1) to (a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, a notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, only the display of at least one of the third number of advance icons suggested that the display may be started by the advance icon display suggestion display may be started, or the advance notice may be displayed. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notification icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started in some cases. Further, it may be configured such that display of at least one of the third number of notification icons suggested that the display may be started by the notification icon display suggestion display always starts, There may be a case where the display of at least one of the third number of advance icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display is not started.

In addition, “losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66)] The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends [for example, FIG. As shown in (2) to FIG. 77 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target is suspended to when the symbol variation display as the prefetch target ends. ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in some cases. In addition, during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started, In a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started.

  Also, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

Also, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66) and the symbol variation display causing a loss] is suspended, In a period until the display of the fourth symbol change display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed by the time a certain symbol variation display is suspended and before the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  Also, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.

The holding display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. 108. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number. [For example, a notice icon (a notice icon I6 of a hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that have been changed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

"A gaming table provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays,

One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display,

  Big hit symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display to be a big hit based on the third hold shown in FIG. 111 (2)] which is a prefetch target, etc.] ) Is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 111 (4) to 111 (13)]”). May start,

  In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) are provided. The display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (4) to FIG. 77 (66), the symbol variation display which is started after the symbol variation display which is the big hit to be prefetched is suspended. From the start of the display to the end of the symbol change display of the big hit which is the target of the look-ahead, a notice icon I6 of two hats, a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, and a notice icon I10 of a fan are displayed. etc],

The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which display is started next to the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Also, according to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display relating to the second symbol variation display to be pre-read is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, the game starts after that. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the display of a preview icon as a prefetch notice display related to a second design change display to be prefetched from the displayed pattern change display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the first prefetch notice display, or may be other than the first prefetch notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the first advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the first advance notice display.

  In addition, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. A symbol variation display other than the display may be started. Also, the display of the first symbol variation display may be always started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display may be performed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  Further, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. Only one symbol variation display may be started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, During the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may also be started. In addition, during the period from when the display of the first symbol variation display is started to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started without fail, or the first symbol variation may be displayed. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Also, in the period from when the display of the first symbol variation display is started to when the display of the second symbol variation display ends, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 73 (4) to FIG. 77 (66), after the display of the symbol variation display which becomes the big hit which is the target of the prefetch is suspended, the display of the symbol variation display is started, and then the target of the prefetching is displayed. By the end of the symbol change display that becomes a certain big hit, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are exhausted.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, while the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, it is started thereafter. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy the use of the preview icon as a pre-reading advance display related to the second symbol variation display to be pre-read from the symbol variation display.

  Here, during the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a part other than the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted. In addition, during the period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed, or the first symbol variation display may be performed. During the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

  Also, only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, In a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.

  Also, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.

The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 111. In the display area 281, the number of pending icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations according to the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon (the notice icon I6 of the hat) shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of symbols that have been changed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when the second symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third suspension to be prefetched shown in FIG. 111 (2)] is suspended, a second symbol variation display is performed. The display of the hold display [for example, the display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 111 (2) or the like] is started.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it may be possible to recognize that the second symbol change display has been suspended.

  Here, the display of the second symbol display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol display may be performed in a case other than the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended. The display of the hold display may be started. In addition, the display of the second hold display may be started whenever the second symbol change display is held, or the display of the second hold display may be started when the second symbol change display is held. It does not have to be started.

  Also, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is displayed in a second prefetch display mode [for example, a prefetch preview display mode (Sabohani display mode) shown in FIG. 111 (2)]. May be

In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode [for example, FIG. ), When the symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold, which is the target of the look-ahead, is held, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (Sabohani display mode). Display etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the variation of the pre-read notice display is increased, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold notice may be displayed. A display mode other than the second prefetch display mode may be displayed. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second lookahead display mode, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be the second lookahead display. It may not be displayed in an aspect.

  Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, In the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second look-ahead display mode. In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display In the symbol variation display displayed when is suspended, the second suspension display may not be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

  Also, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

  In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a third pre-reading advance notice display [for example, effect display of pre-reading mode shown in FIGS. 112 (b2) to 112 (b3)],

The third prefetch notice display is a display that may be started after the second symbol change display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 112 (b1) to 112 (b3). Thus, the effect display in the prefetch mode is started after the symbol change display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of prefetch is suspended, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the variation of the pre-reading notice display increases, so that the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be a display that may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the display may be started in some cases. In addition, the third look-ahead notice display may be always started to be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

  In addition, a "losing symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, referred to as a" fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation which becomes a losing based on the third hold which is a prefetching target shown in FIG. 111 (2)] " After that, the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 111 (4) to 111 (13)]”) is performed. ) May begin to appear,

  The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 73 (4) to FIG. 77 (66), the display of the symbol variation display which is started after the symbol variation display which is a loss of the look-ahead is suspended is started after the display of the symbol variation display is started. By the end of the design change display which is a loss, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, the notice icon I10 of the fan, etc. are displayed],

The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display in which display is started after the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Further, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. A symbol variation display other than the display may be started. Also, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display may be performed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

  Also, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the fourth symbol variation display may be started other than after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. Only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started.

  In addition, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, During the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of a plurality of notice icons may also be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation may be displayed. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started during a period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Also, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 74 (21) to 77 (66) and the symbol variation display causing a loss] is suspended, In a period until the display of the fourth symbol change display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIGS. Four notice icons have been consumed by the time a certain symbol variation display is suspended and before the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is consumed, it does not always result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends.

  Here, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, there may be a case where something other than the plurality of notice icons is consumed. Further, in a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be completely consumed. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the termination of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be consumed.

Further, only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed, During a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended to when the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

A game console equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 126D), and the like.

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 123]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,

  One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 123].

  The first display is a description display [for example, a display of “notice icon digestion ...” displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 116 (a). "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.

  The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 123 or the like] in the display unit,

When the notice icon is displayed, the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a7), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. And the notice icon I63 of chance up is displayed (stock) etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area of the display means, or one that can be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Is also good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be something. The notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

In addition, “the first display is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a7), in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, No explanation is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not always be displayed while the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed.

When the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 123 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. When all the notice icons are consumed, the explanation display will be resumed, etc.)
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the display of the first display may be restarted, or when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, or when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ hot heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 illustrated in FIG.
The second display is a notice display,

  The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],

The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display of “notice icon digestion ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one that can be displayed. The second display may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Is also good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may include the explanation display of the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display of the notice icon.
Also, "the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,

  One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],

  One of the plurality of display units is a second display unit [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,

  The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variation display of a decorative pattern shown in FIG. 120].

  The third display means displays a display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR shown in FIGS. 120 (a2) to (a4) and a notice of a swordsman. Or the like in which the icon I62 is stocked).

The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration. Etc. arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means There may be a case where at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not always display the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display in accordance with the display of the second display means, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display in accordance with the display of the second display means. May be something. Further, the third display means may always display a display in accordance with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display in accordance with the display of the second display means. Is also good.

  Further, the first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. May be obtained. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

  Further, “One of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 123],

  The third display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “Castle Town Stage” displayed on the stage name display ST2 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), and a display of the stage name display ST1 shown in FIG. 117 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" displayed, etc.]

  The third display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, a stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 123 (a1)] of the display means,

The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a7), the stage name display section ST2 displays a princess notice icon I64. Two pseudo consecutive notice icons I65 are displayed (stock) etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayable in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. You may. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. The notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the third display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. Further, the third display may not always be displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. May be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned into a square by a line, and the like]. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including something other than a line. In addition, the first display area may be always divided by a line, or may not be divided by a line.

  Also, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.

  The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of suspended icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the reserved number according to the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 123 (a7) (a princess notice icon I64, a pseudo consecutive notice icon I65, The notice icon I62 of the swordsman, the notice icon I63 of the chance up, etc.) are not icons indicating the number for which the operation of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is suspended.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.
According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

A game console equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 126D), and the like.

  The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,

A display area (for example, the tutorial display section TT4, the stage name display section ST2, etc. shown in FIG. 123) in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in a hold icon [for example, a hold icon display area shown in FIG. 123]. This is a display area different from the display area [for example, the hold icon h11, h12, h13, etc.] is displayed (for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 123).
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,

  One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 123].

  The first display is a description display [for example, a display of “notice icon digestion ...” displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 116 (a). "Panda is the master of the lord" displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG.

  When the first display is displayed, the first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 illustrated in FIG. 123 or the like] in the display unit,

The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area. [For example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 displays a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance increase. Notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  In a conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics in the display means can be realized.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying something other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display a notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the advance notice icon may be displayed only as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may be other than the one displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display. Further, the advance notice icon may be always displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display, or may not be displayed as the pre-reading advance notice display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of display. In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Also, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the first display area in the display means when displayed. May also be displayed in the display area. The first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. The notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “the first display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a9), the notice icon is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4. In the displayed state, no explanation is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first notice may be displayed. The display other than the display may be prevented from being displayed. In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may not always be displayed, or in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may be omitted. A display may be displayed.

  Also, only in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display may not be displayed, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, Only the first display may not be displayed.

When the notice icon is exhausted, the display of the first display may be restarted [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 123 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will resume, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is consumed, only the display of the first display may be restarted, or when the notice icon is consumed, displays other than the display of the first display are also resumed. May be present. Further, when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, or when the notice icon is consumed, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  When the first display is, for example, a description of the first character, a tenth display, which is a description display different from the first display, may be displayed.

In addition, “one display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ hot heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 illustrated in FIG.
The second display is a notice display,

  The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. Character display is displayed, etc.],

The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display of “notice icon digestion ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 123 (a1)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the second display may be one that can be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be one that can be displayed. The second display may be always displayed in the first display area when displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Is also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of a number of notice displays.

  The notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, another notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

Also, one of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a character display of “hotter than red” in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. (A6), a character display of "Swordsman Reach is hot" in the balloon portion TT2, a character display of "when the panda enters" in the balloon portion TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,

  The display content of the third display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,

The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, a balloon TT2 or a balloon TT3 illustrated in FIG. 122 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different or entirely different from the display content of the first display.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed other than the second display area in the display means when displayed. May also be displayed in the display area. Further, the third display may be necessarily displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

In addition, "the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 122 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, the character display of "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2, and "Panda breaks in" on the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Display, a display other than the third display may be displayed. In addition, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. May be displayed in some cases.

  In addition, the introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  In addition, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be performed in the second display area. Further, a notice display and an explanation display may be displayed alternatively.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display or the like displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 123]

  The fourth display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “Castle Town Stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 123 (a1), and a display on the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 117 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" displayed, etc.]

  The display content of the fourth display is a display content different from the display content of the first display,

The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, a stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 123 (a1)] of the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,

When a first number (for example, three, etc.) of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, in a state where three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 shown in FIG. 123, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different or entirely different from the display content of the first display.

  The fourth display may be one that can be displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or one that can be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Is also good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

  The third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area, or the first notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In a state where the number of advance notice icons are displayed in the first display area, new notice icons may be displayed in display areas other than the third display area. In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may always be displayed in the third display area, or the first notice icon may be displayed in the first display area. In a state where a number of advance notice icons are displayed in the first display area, new notice icons may not be displayed in the third display area.

Only in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area, or the first number of notice icons may be displayed. May be displayed only in the third display area even in a state other than the state where the advance notice icon is displayed in the first display area.
Here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed on a plurality of display means is also included.

In addition, when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may not be displayed even in the state of. In addition, the fourth display may not always be displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. May be done.
Also, "the display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,

  One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.],

  One of the plurality of display units is a second display unit [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like],

One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.],
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,

  The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variation display of a decorative pattern shown in FIG. 120].

  The third display means displays in cooperation with the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 120 (a2) to (a4) and the swordsman's notice icon I62 That can be displayed, etc.]

The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (a1), the tutorial display section TT1 has a third decoration. Etc. arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means There may be a case where at least one of the means is not included.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not always display the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display associated with the display of the second display means, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display associated with the display of the second display means. May be something. Further, the third display means may always display a display associated with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display associated with the display of the second display means. Is also good.

  Further, the first display area may be provided in a partial area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. May be obtained. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

Also, "the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 123 (a1), the tutorial display section TT4 is partitioned into a square by a line, etc.]. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned by including something other than a line. In addition, the first display area may be always divided by a line, or may not be divided by a line.

  Further, the second display area may be defined by a line, and the third display area may be defined by a line.

  In addition, “holding display means [for example, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.

  The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number corresponding to the number of holdings of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of suspended icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended is displayed, etc.],

The notice icon is an icon that does not display the reserved number according to the displayed number [for example, a notice icon shown in FIG. 123 (a9) (a princess notice icon I64, a pseudo consecutive notice icon I65, The notice icon I62 of the swordsman, the notice icon I63 of the chance up, etc. are not icons indicating the number of the operation of the symbol change display of the special figure 1 being suspended, etc.]. 』
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying the display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. . Further, the hold display means may always display the number corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number corresponding to the number of holds.
Note that the number of reservations and the number of notice icons may happen to coincide with each other.

Further, the maximum reserved number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.
According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations.
Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the following, additional information including what has been described so far will be added.

  (Supplementary Note 1) A game console including image display means, symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display, and notice means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of notices, wherein the image display means includes a hold display. Display means capable of displaying, the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons, the suspension display is a display displayed in a suspension display area in the image display means, The hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations for which the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of suspensions”). The symbol variation display is performed when the suspension is exhausted. The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area of the image display means, and the notice icon is different from the reserved display. The icon display area is an area different from the hold display area, the notice icon display area is an area where one or more notice icons can be displayed, and the notice means is displayed in the notice icon display area. Means for executing the notice of the kind corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons is digested, and the symbol change display is performed once. In the case where the first notice icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is digested to the first number, the second number larger than the first number is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the first number is digested to the first number. A game console characterized by being configured as follows.

  (Supplementary Note 2) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 3) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein the notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same mode as the notice mode, and the notice means includes a notice icon display. Means for executing the fake notice of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the area is digested, wherein the fake notice has been executed. A gaming table, wherein the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be incorrect.

(Supplementary Note 4) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 3, wherein the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area in a period in which the single symbol change display is being executed. A game console characterized in that a fourth number whose number is larger than the third number is more likely to be a big hit than a third number.

  (Supplementary Note 5) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4, further comprising a holding display unit capable of executing a display corresponding to the number of holdings, wherein the holding display unit includes: A gaming table, which is another display means.

  (Supplementary Note 6) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 5, wherein the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit.

  (Supplementary Note 7) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6, further comprising a look-ahead notice unit capable of executing a look-ahead notice, wherein the look-ahead notice means displays the notice icon in the notice icon display area. A game console characterized by being a means capable of executing the pre-reading notice by displaying.

  (Supplementary Note 8) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 7, wherein the notice icon is displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) is being performed. There may be a fifth number digestion, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed is executed. During the period, the notice icon may be digested to a sixth number, the sixth number is different from the fifth number, and the reserved display is the first symbol change. A game console for displaying that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during a period in which the display is being executed.

(Supplementary Note 9) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8, wherein the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is consumed is executed. A game console characterized in that the notice icon may start to be displayed during a certain period.
(Appendix 10)

  In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 9, the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “third symbol variation display”) performed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed is executed. A gaming table, wherein the notice icon, which is consumed during the period in which the fourth symbol change display is being executed, may be started to be displayed.

(Supplementary Note 11) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 10, wherein the hold display area is an area where the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number, and the notice icon display area is , Is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number, the seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note 12) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11, further comprising an effect unit capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, wherein one of the plurality of types of advance notices includes a first Is a notice, one of the plurality of kinds of notices is a second notice, and the first notice is a notice different from the second notice, and among the plurality of kinds of effects. One is the first production,

  One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, the first effect is a different effect from the second effect,

  The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect is executed, and the second notice is an notice that informs that the second effect is executed, A gaming table that features.

  (Supplementary Note 13) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 12, wherein the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be always consumed. A gaming table. (Supplementary note 14) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 13, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine. (Supplementary Note 15) A game console provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon, and the first symbol change display is displayed. The display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon, and the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol change display is the first symbol change display. May not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) displayed after the first symbol variation display. A game console characterized in that the first notice icon that has not been digested during display may be digested. (Supplementary Note 16) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 15, wherein the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. A game console characterized by the following: (Supplementary Note 17) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 15 or 16, wherein the first notice icon is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol change display as a prefetch notice of the second symbol change display. A gaming table characterized by the following. (Supplementary Note 18) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 17, wherein a first number of the first notice icons is consumed during the display of the symbol change display. The second number is greater than the first number when the first notice icon of the second number is consumed, and the second number is larger than the first number. Stand.

  (Supplementary Note 19) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 18, wherein a second notice icon is displayed as the notice icon, and the second notice icon is consumed. A game console configured to be a big hit in symbol variation display. (Supplementary Note 20) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 19, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display, and the first notice icon is exhausted. A game console, wherein a first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.

  (Supplementary Note 21) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 20, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display, and the fake notice is displayed when the first notice icon is consumed. The first false notice display may be displayed as the notice display, and the display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display, and the first false notice display is displayed. A gaming table, wherein the game display is configured so as to be out of alignment in the symbol variation display in which the notice display is displayed. (Supplementary Note 22) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 21, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display, and a third notice icon is provided as the notice icon. A game console configured to be displayable, wherein the prefetch effect display may be started when the third notice icon is exhausted. (Supplementary Note 23) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 22, wherein the display unit is a unit including a plurality of display units. (Supplementary Note 24) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 23, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is a decorative design change display. (Supplementary Note 25) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 24, wherein the first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol change display is the second symbol. A gaming table characterized in that it is configured to be exhausted by the end of the display of the fluctuation display. (Supplementary Note 26) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 25, wherein the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area of the display unit, and the notice icon display area is: A game console, which is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. (Supplementary Note 27) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 26, further comprising an effect control unit, wherein the effect control unit is a unit capable of executing control of the display unit. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 28) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 27, further comprising: main control means; and symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display, wherein the main control means can transmit a command to the effect control means. The effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means. , A gaming table characterized by that. (Supplementary Note 29) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 28, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine. (Supplementary Note 30) A game console including first display means capable of executing symbol change display and second display means, wherein the second display means is capable of displaying a notice icon. The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice displays, and the second display means is provided with a number for which the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter, “suspended”). The display means is capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number in the hold display area, the symbol change display is a display that is started when the hold is exhausted, and the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area of the display means, the notice icon is an icon that does not indicate the number of holds according to the number displayed, and the notice icon display area is Different from The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed, and the second display means displays the notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is exhausted. Display means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon, wherein the notice icon has been subjected to the first number digestion during a period in which the symbol change display is performed once. The case where the second number larger than the first number is digested is more likely to be a big hit than the case, and the second display means is the symbol variation display which is a target of prefetching. (Hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) before the start is started, the display means being capable of displaying the advance notice icon in the advance notice icon display area as a prefetch advance notice display. Game table for the butterflies. (Supplementary Note 31) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 30, wherein the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display is likely to be displayed. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 32) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 30 or 31, wherein the second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same manner as the notice display. Display means for displaying, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the digested notice icon type And wherein the result of the symbol variation display is lost after the fake notice display is displayed. (Supplementary note 33) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 30 to 32, wherein the second display unit is a display unit including a plurality of display units. .

  (Supplementary note 34) The gaming table according to supplementary note 33, wherein one of the plurality of display units is an image display unit, and one of the plurality of display units is a hold unit. Display means, wherein the hold display means is a display means including the hold display area, and the hold display means is capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds in the hold display area. The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol, the image display means is a display means capable of displaying the advance notice icon in the advance notice icon display area, and the suspension display A game console, wherein the means is a display means different from the image display means. (Supplementary note 35) The gaming table according to Supplementary note 34, wherein the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit. (Supplementary Note 36) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 30 to 32, wherein the second display unit is an image display unit, and the image display unit is a display for changing a decorative design. Is a display means that can display a holding icon in the holding display area according to the number of holdings.

  (Supplementary Note 37) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 30 to 36, in a case where the notice icon is used for a fifth number during the period in which the second symbol change display is being executed. During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is displayed. The sixth number may be digested, the sixth number is a number different from the fifth number, and the display according to the reserved number is the first symbol variation display. A game console for notifying that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during a certain period. (Supplementary Note 38) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 30 to 36, wherein the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched ends. A gaming table, which is configured to be digested without fail. (Supplementary Note 39) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 30 to 38, the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is consumed is executed. A game console characterized in that the notice icon may start to be displayed during a certain period. (Supplementary Note 40) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 39, wherein the fourth symbol is displayed during a period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The gaming table, wherein the display of the notice icon which is consumed during a period in which the variable display is being executed may be started.

  (Supplementary note 41) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 30 to 40, wherein the hold display area is an area in which a display corresponding to the number of holds up to a seventh number can be displayed. A game console, wherein an icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number, and the seventh number is different from the eighth number. (Supplementary Note 42) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 30 to 41, further including a rendering unit that can execute a plurality of types of renderings, and configured to display a first preview icon as the preview icon. It is configured to be able to display a second notice icon as the notice icon, the first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon, the plurality of types of One of the advance notice displays is a first advance notice display, one of the plurality of advance notice displays is a second advance notice display, and the first advance notice display is the second advance notice display. It is an advance notice display different from the advance notice display, and when the first advance notice icon is consumed, the first advance notice display is configured to be displayed, and the second advance notice icon is consumed. And the second notice is displayed It is configured as such, one of the plurality of effects is a first effect, one of the plurality of effects is a second effect, the first effect Is an effect different from the second effect, the first notice display is a notice display that informs that the first effect is executed, and the second notice display is A game console, which is a notice display for notifying that a second effect is to be performed.

  (Supplementary note 43) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 30 to 42, further comprising main control means and effect control means, wherein the main control means can transmit a command to the effect control means. Means, the effect control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means, and the main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means Wherein the effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means. (Supplementary note 44) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 43, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 45) A game console provided with a display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon. Yes, the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display, and the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol change display”) to be pre-read is suspended. In the case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) are consumed from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started to when the second symbol variation display ends, the plurality of notice icons are displayed. But One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display, and when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon is displayed. Is configured to be displayed, and one of the plurality of advance notice icons is a first advance notice icon, and one of the plurality of advance notice icons is an advance notice icon, The second notice icon, in which the first number of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “first number notice icons”) are digested in one symbol change display, and thus the effect display is performed. The first effect display is configured to be displayed, the first number notice icon is a notice icon including the first notice icon, and the first number notice icon is the notice icon, Second forecast A notice icon includes an icon, the amusement machine, characterized in that. According to this gaming table, a gaming table having a characteristic display can be realized. Also, according to this game console, there is a possibility that the first effect display will be displayed after one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have expectations for something. Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where the number of the notice icons is made to look like a symbol change before the reservation to be prefetched, so that a sense of expectation to the big hit can be given. Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons, or three or more notice icons. Further, when the first notice icon is consumed, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is consumed, the effect display A is displayed. A corresponding effect display B may be performed, or an effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are consumed. May be performed. Alternatively, only one of the first and second notice icons may be used, or only one of the first and second notice icons may be newly added. May be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 46) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 45, in a single symbol change display, a second number of the advance notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “second number advance notice icons”) are digested. Also, the first effect display is configured not to be displayed, the first number and the second number are different numbers, the notice icon of the second number, the first number An advance notice icon including one of the advance notice icons and the advance notice icon of the second advance notice icon, wherein the second number of advance notice icons are the first advance notice icon and the second advance notice icon. A gaming icon, which does not include the other preview icon. According to this gaming table, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon in one symbol change display. Since the first effect display is not displayed, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who has been able to see the first effect display. Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number. Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number. Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons have been consumed. Further, a part of the first effect display may be displayed or the entire first effect display may be displayed even if the second number of notice icons are consumed.

  In addition, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of noticed icons that have been consumed, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same. When a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may always be used. Also, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested, and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured so that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not deleted. (Supplementary note 47) The gaming table according to supplementary note 45 or 46, wherein one of the plurality of advance notice icons is a third advance notice icon, and the third advance notice icon is consumed. A game console characterized in that a third effect display is displayed as the effect display. According to this gaming table, there are cases where the effect variation can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  (Supplementary Note 48) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 47, a lost symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is reserved. In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed after the third symbol variation display is started and before the fourth symbol variation display ends.

A gaming table characterized by the following. According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a big hit, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends. In addition, in the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the target of the prefetching is a big hit and the case of a loss, it is consumed from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the target of the prefetching. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different. In addition, in the case where the result of the symbol variation display of the target for prefetching is a big hit and the case of a loss, the process is performed from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the target for prefetching. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different. In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, one symbol performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) The maximum number of notice icons consumed in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) depends on whether the result of the symbol variable display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a loss. They may be the same or different. In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, one symbol performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) The minimum number of notice icons to be consumed in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is determined when the result of the symbol variation display to be pre-read is a big hit or a loss. They may be the same or different. In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, the maximum number of the notice icons to be consumed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched (the second symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display) is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different when the result is a big hit and a loss. In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, the minimum number of notice icons to be consumed in the symbol variation display to be prefetched (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different when the result is a big hit and a loss.

  (Supplementary Note 49) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 48, when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. The game console, wherein the plurality of advance notice icons may be displayed before the game ends. According to this gaming table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily result in a lower jackpot, so that it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends. (Supplementary Note 50) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 45 to 49, further comprising a suspension display unit, wherein the suspension display unit is configured to suspend the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, “suspension”). Number ")).

A gaming table characterized by the following. Note that the hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means. (Supplementary Note 51) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 50, wherein the suspended number is not displayed based on the number of the notice icons displayed.

A gaming table characterized by the following. According to this gaming table, there is a case where an effect can be performed regardless of the number of reservations. (Supplementary Note 52) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 45 to 51, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

A gaming table characterized by the following. (Supplementary note 53) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 45 to 51, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note 54) A gaming table provided with a plurality of display means, wherein one of the plurality of display means is a first display means, and one of the plurality of display means is a display. The means are second display means, the first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and the second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. One of the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to a notice icon, and among the plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means, One type of display is a display related to the notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display, and a big hit symbol variation display (a prefetch target) is displayed. Hereinafter, "second symbol variation display" ) Is suspended, a plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) from the start of the first symbol change display to the end of the second symbol change display. ) May be consumed, and in the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, from when the first symbol variation display is started to when the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of advance notice icons may be newly displayed in some cases.

  Note that the display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be such that a pattern appears when a light guide plate is cut with a lens and illuminated by a light source from the side. , An LED or the like, or a 7-segment. The display related to the notice icon may be a display indicating that the notice icon is stocked, a display indicating that the notice icon is consumed, or a notice indicating the stock of the notice icon. It may be a display, or an effect display executed when the notice icon is exhausted. Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, and the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, or the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small. (Supplementary Note 55) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 54, wherein the plurality of advance notice icons are newly displayed on the second display means.

A gaming table characterized by the following. One notice icon may be newly displayed. Also, an effect may be performed in which the notice icon is consumed on the second display means. (Supplementary Note 56) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 54 or 55, wherein the first display unit may perform a display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed.

A gaming table characterized by the following. In addition, you may make it perform "the display which suggests that the notice icon may be displayed" in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which a preview icon is displayed, or the preview icon is displayed. May be performed in the symbol variation display. (Supplementary note 57) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 54 to 56, wherein the first display unit is a unit provided with a first display area, and the second display unit is , A means provided with a second display area, the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area,

A gaming table characterized by the following. (Supplementary Note 58) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 54 to 56, wherein the first display unit is a unit provided with a first display area, and the second display unit is , A means provided with a second display area, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following. (Supplementary Note 59) Display means, movable means,

Wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, one of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon, and the notice icon is , Is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display, and in a case where a jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is suspended, the first symbol is displayed. Between the start of the change display and the end of the second symbol change display, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed. When the symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed after the first symbol variation display is started and before the second symbol variation display ends. If When the notice icon is digested, the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter, referred to as “notice icon digestion effect”) is configured to be performed, and as the notice icon digestion effect, An effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.

A gaming table characterized by the following. The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but may also be performed for another movable means effect different from the first movable means effect. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means on which the effect is performed may be displayed. (Supplementary note 60) The gaming table according to supplementary note 59, wherein when the twenty-first notice icon is consumed as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed. ing,

A gaming table characterized by the following. It should be noted that the first movable means effect may not be performed even if the twenty-first notice icon is digested, or the first movable means may be necessarily rendered when the twenty-first notice icon is digested. A means effect may be performed. Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is consumed, an effect (an effect having a different operation) from the first movable means effect may be performed. In addition, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be performed by another movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon may be digested. In this case, the effect by the first movable means may be necessarily performed. (Supplementary Note 61) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 59 or 60, wherein the first movable means effect is not performed when a twenty-second notice icon is consumed as the notice icon. ing,

A gaming table characterized by the following. Note that the first movable means effect may be performed even if the twenty-second notice icon is digested, or another effect (or effect display) when the twenty-second notice icon is exhausted. May be performed.

  (Supplementary Note 62) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 59 to 61, further including an operation unit, wherein the movable unit is the operation unit, and the first movable unit effect is , Is an effect that the mode of the operating means changes from the first mode to the second mode,

A gaming table characterized by the following. Here, the “change” has a meaning including deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Supplementary Note 63) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 59 to 62, further including a second movable unit, wherein the movable unit is a first movable unit, and the notice icon digestion is performed. As an effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note 64) A gaming table provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon. Yes, the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display, and the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol change display”) to be pre-read is suspended. In the case where a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) are consumed between the start of the first symbol change display and the end of the second symbol change display. In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started to when the second symbol variation display ends, the plurality of notice icons are displayed. But In some cases, one of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display, and the notice icon increase suggestion display displays the notice icon. It is a display that suggests that the notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol change display,

A gaming table characterized by the following. The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed whenever the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed. Also, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only by one symbol change display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed by only one symbol change display. The notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 65) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 64, wherein in the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.

A gaming table characterized by the following. The change in which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. By doing so, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed to the end.

  (Supplementary note 66) The gaming table according to supplementary note 64 or 65, wherein one of the eleventh number of the advance notice icons suggested by the advance notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed as the advance notice icon. May be

A gaming table characterized by the following. The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one. Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display does not have to increase. Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of a gasp that does not increase the notice icon. The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display indicating that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two notice icons may be increased. Further, a notice icon other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased. (Supplementary Note 67) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 64 or 65, wherein a twelfth number of the notice icons out of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is: May be displayed as the notice icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 68) A game console including display means and hold display means, wherein the hold display means is capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds, and the display means Is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, one of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display. In the case where the hold display (hereinafter, referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol change display”) to be prefetched is displayed, Between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) may be consumed. , Said second hold When the first symbol variation display is started and before the second symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed when the first symbol variation display is started. The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 69) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 68, wherein the second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a look-ahead display mode, and a symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed. In some cases, the second hold display may be displayed in the look-ahead display mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 70) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 68 or 69, wherein a display of a lost symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth symbol variation display”) to be prefetched (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth symbol variation display”). "Hold display") is displayed, and the plurality of notice icons are consumed during the period from the start of the third symbol variation display to the end of the fourth symbol variation display. There is
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note 71) A gaming table provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon, the notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon, and the display means Is a means capable of displaying a type of display, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a second display. , The second display is an explanation display, the first display is a display that is displayed in a first display area when displayed, and the second display is a display that is displayed. Is a display displayed in the second display area, the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed is there,

A gaming table characterized by the following. The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display. The second display may be a display indicating the current situation, such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of the effect mode names of selectable effect modes. Here, the effect mode includes, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change in the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a change in the frequency of occurrence of the one-notice effect. There is a mode for making it. Further, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearance animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be set to be shorter than the display position of the animation in the middle. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

Here, the “notification icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only a part of the plurality of notice icons, or may be all of the plurality of notice icons. Notice icon may be used. In addition, the “announcement icon” may be only the announcement icon displayed first among the plurality of announcement icons, or may be a part including the announcement icon displayed first among the plurality of announcement icons. It may be an icon. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or even if a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not be overlapped. In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed in the display period of the first display. In addition, a notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display. Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily need to be displayed at the same time. Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the gaze guidance of the notice icon may be performed. In some cases. In addition, the size may be different between the first display area and the second display area, and the roles may be different between the first display area and the second display area. For example, the advance display may not be performed in the first display area, but the advance display may be performed in the second display area. (Supplementary Note 72) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 71, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note 73) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 71 or 72, wherein the first display is a display of a fluctuating icon, the explanation display is an explanation display of the notice icon, and the notice icon is the notice icon. The second display may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “first part”). When the notice icon is consumed, the first display of the second display is displayed. The overlap to the part is canceled,

A gaming table characterized by the following. According to this game console, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the notice icon related to the relevant and subsequent symbol change display is displayed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is a loss, a new expectation may be given to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the prefetch notice display is consumed. Note that the entire second display may be displayed when the overlap with the first portion is resolved. Further, during the period in which the change icon is displayed, the change icon may be one that can at least suggest a sense of expectation to a big hit in the symbol change display. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed as a pre-read notice display, or may be displayed in a symbol change display to be pre-read. Further, the notice icon may be surely consumed in the symbol variation display which is the target of prefetching, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display which is the subject of prefetching. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be able to be displayed singly, or may be configured to be able to be displayed in plurals. Here, when displaying a plurality of advance notice icons, the advance notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the advance notice icons may be displayed without limitation without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Supplementary Note 74) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 73, wherein the display of the second display may be started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 75) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 73, wherein the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 76) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 75, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the third display is a notice. Display, when the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 77) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 76, wherein the second display area is an area partitioned by a line.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 78) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 77, wherein the “notice icon is more than the first display area when the notice icon is displayed. "Is an icon displayed in a display area close to the display area" means that "when the notice icon is displayed, it is displayed in the second display area".
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 79) In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 71 to 78, the number of the notice icons to be consumed is greater in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than in the symbol variation display that is a loss. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 80) A gaming table provided with a display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon, and In the case where one of the explanation displays is a first explanation display, the first explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon, and the notice icon is displayed as a pre-read notice display. There is an icon, the number of the notice icon is more digested in the jackpot fluctuation than in the loss fluctuation,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 81) In the gaming table according to supplementary note 80, the notice icon is displayed in a display area where the first explanatory display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display area”). There is an icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note 82) In the gaming table according to supplementary note 81, in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is displayed in the first explanation display area. Will not be
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 83) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 80 to 82, wherein one of the plurality of types of the description displays is a second description display, and the second description is a second description display. The display is a display indicating the current stage of the production, and the notice icon may be displayed in a display area where the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “second display area”). Is an icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 84) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 83, the staging stage changes even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 85) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 80 to 84, the display unit includes a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of types of advance notice icons”) as the advance notice icons. Display means, wherein one of the plurality of types of advance notice icons is a first advance notice icon, and one of the plurality of types of advance notice icons is a second advance notice icon. The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect, and the second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect Is,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 86) A game console provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon, and the notice icon is an icon which may be displayed as a pre-read notice display. The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon, the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display. , The first display is an explanation display, the first display is a display displayed in a first display area of the display means, and the notice icon is displayed when the notice icon is displayed. An icon displayed in one display area,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 87) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 86, wherein the first display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 88) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 87, wherein the display of the first display may be restarted when the notice icon is exhausted.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note 89) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, and the second display is a notice. Display, the second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed, the description display is a description display regarding the notice icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 90) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 86 to 89, wherein the display unit is a unit configured by a plurality of display units, and one of the plurality of display units is A first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, one of the plurality of display means is a third display means, The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display, the second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display, and the third display means is the second display means The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the area of the third display means.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary note 91) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 90, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the third display is a description. A display, wherein the third display is a display displayed in a second display area of the display means, and the notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note 92) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 91, wherein the third display is not displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area.

A gaming table characterized by the following. In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining a character displayed on the second display means. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed. Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change. In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the hit jackpot degree of reach. In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the character's jackpot expectation. The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

  Note that the term “announcement icon” described so far is simply named for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif), and when the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, when the notice icon is a display indicating a skill, the notice may be referred to as a notice skill, and when the notice icon is box-shaped, the notice icon may be referred to as a notice box. , Notice medal). Also, the term "notice" in the notice icon is named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that the item is to be stored.

<Overall configuration>
Next, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, as external structures, an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a firing device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 130). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store. The main body 104 is a member which is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is a vertical rectangular game machine base body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112, which is called an inner frame. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is formed in a frame shape so that the inner side thereof can be opened. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at an opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting unit. In the present specification, a lamp that uses an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp. A device that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 130) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door open sensor 609 (see FIG. 131) for detecting opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction about a drive shaft (not shown) provided at a lower portion. Further, the transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission unit 191 of the transmission unit 190 shown in FIG. 128 is at the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a lock function and is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage plate includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be completely stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 for hitting the game area 124 of the game 200, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 130) by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136. Provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to emit light, a. The chance button 136 is an effect button, and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable unit, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 128 is at an initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can perform an advancing / retreating operation. Further, a lower plate full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and a firing rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball firing handle 134 is operated by the player, and an unillustrated hitting the game ball with the tip of the firing rod. And a firing hammer. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 129 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 128 as viewed from the rear side. At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the rear surface.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game ball flowing down into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thereby, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through the outlet 152a and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. Pay out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that forms a main control section 300 that performs a control process of the entire game, and control relating to effects based on processing information generated by the main control section 300. A first sub-board case 162 accommodating the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 that performs the processing, and a second sub-board that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that forms the control unit 500, an payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to paying out game balls, and an error release switch that releases an error by operation of a game clerk A payout board case 172 accommodating a payout board 170 provided with a 168, and a firing base constituting a firing control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to firing of game balls. A launch board case 176 that houses the 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 that turns on and off the power by a game clerk and RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 including a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control section 300, and a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.
FIG. 130 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 130 is a so-called right-handed game board. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which a game ball can roll. In the generally known right-handed game board, the strength of launching a game ball is changed by a player's operation, so that a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special figure starting port 232, which will be described later, One special figure starting port 230 can be divided. Specifically, the game balls that roll in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 by disposing the game nail 238 and the like in the game area 124 are the second game balls. A game ball that is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special figure starting port 232, and conversely, the game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) provided with the second special figure starting port 232 1 It is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the ball into the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 having a right-handed game board, but can be widely applied to pachinko machines having a general game board.

  At a substantially center of the game area 124, an effect device 206 is provided. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as “Public symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “Special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) here. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and here is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are constituted by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced manner. The display device 208 is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of the general figure changing games (details will be described later) that are held, and here, the general number changing game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure reservation lamp 218 and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure fluctuation games (details will be described later). (For example, four) can be reserved. The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state. Turns on when the state is changed to the probability state, and turns off when the state is changed from the high state to the low state.

  In addition, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a general figure starting port 228, a first special figure starting port 230, a second special figure starting port 232, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are provided on the gaming board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when the general winning port 226 is won). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as a reward for winning may be referred to as a "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "ball rental". Ball (game ball) ".

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. Are arranged. For this reason, it is expected that the game ball will enter when the normal figure starting port 228 is hit right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting area in which its size does not change.

  Only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the ordinary figure starting port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and is expected to enter by hitting right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid is provided, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric tuy). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the difficulty of winning the second special figure starting port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, in the case where the player has won the general figure fluctuation game and the general figure display device 210 has hit and stopped and displayed the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Is possible (a winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In a state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable starting area is smaller than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is provided with two variable winning ports. A central variable winning port 234 (corresponding to a first variable winning port) provided at the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and is hit by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a special winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 keeps a closed state until a big hit game in the case of a big hit in a non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state changes between an open state and a closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 maintains the closed state until the jackpot game in the case of a big hit in the power support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. That is, each of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, a closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, an open state) in which a game ball can be more easily won than the first opening / closing state. State) is a variable prize winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one of the states to the other, and when the first special figure display device 212 stops displaying the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won in the non-electric support state. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol in the power support state when the special figure changing game is won, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 is provided for a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. To open and close. In any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the closed state does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state. Even if the opening is slightly open, it is sufficient if the entering of game balls is impossible or difficult. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are set as winning balls. Discharge to 126. Both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the center variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, in the electric support state, In the non-electric support state, hitting is an advantageous way for the player to hit.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped ball-hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are provided in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win any of the winning ports and the starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the firing position of the firing rail, drives the firing motor with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle of the player, and sets the firing rod 146. Then, the shot hammer 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and strikes the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, and the like, and has a winning opening (a general winning opening 226, a center variable winning opening 234, a right variable). The prize port 235) or the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232) is won, or no winning port or starting port is won, or the universal drawing starting port 228 is set. It only reaches the outlet 240 by passing through.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. A warping device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed on the front side of the effect device 206 in a region where the game ball can roll. On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a door) are provided. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warping device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp entrance 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b, a ball riding on a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and a ball passing through the center of the stage 244 is a first special figure starting port 230. A special route 244a is provided to make it easier to enter the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move right and left, respectively, with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the respective inner ends, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the respective inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern is the displayed decorative pattern. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative design display device 208 behind the lattice hole to be visible, or cover the sash part of the lattice hole with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative pattern display device 208 may be vaguely visually recognized by the player, or the sash portion of the hole of the lattice may be completely closed (shielded), and the decorative pattern display device 208 at the rear may be made completely invisible. Is also good.

  The above-mentioned chance button 136 capable of executing the forward / backward movement and the transparent portion 191 rotatable in the front-back direction are also a kind of the effect movable body.

  Further, as the effect movable body, a crest role object 247 (see FIG. 141 and the like), not shown here, and a pair of combination role objects 248 (see FIG. 149 and the like) which are combined with the crest role material 247 are prepared. The crest role object 247 corresponds to an example of a first effect movable body, and the combined effect material 248 corresponds to an example of a second effect movable body. The crest role object 247 is arranged at an initial position above the decorative design display device 208. When the crest role object 247 starts operation, it falls from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined objects 248 are arranged at initial positions on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. When the united work 248 starts operation, the left and right sides advance forward from the initial position to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of union members 248 sandwich the crest member 247 from each of the left and right sides, and unite with the crest member. Regardless of whether the crest role object 247 or the pair of union role objects 248 is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is in.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is mainly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and an effect mainly produced in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. , A second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a command transmitted by the main controller 300. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout of the game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game balls, and the power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are composed of different circuit boards, respectively, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be formed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are controlled by control means (for example, the main control unit (300), the first sub-control unit (400), and the second sub-control unit (500)). )), One of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be considered as the control means, and the main control unit 300 is the first control means, One combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can be considered as the second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and a temporary data 308, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormality in program processing. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random number value generation circuits. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting opening, a winning opening, a variable winning opening, and a door opening sensor such as a front frame door opening sensor and an inner frame opening sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a bottom plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random number value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for controlling display of a symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general figure display device 21 And a driving circuit 326 for performing the display control of each of the above, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reserve lamp 216, a first special-purpose reserve lamp 218, a second special-purpose reserve lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). A drive circuit 330 for performing display control and a predetermined movable member such as a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the center variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like are provided. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are driven to open and close is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. The random number generation circuit 318 generates the random number roughly in two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. The random number mode has two more methods. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derives the calculation result as a random number. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 obtains an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 uses the obtained value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of a random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the random number generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generating circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generating circuit 318 also determines the timing of the random number generating circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random number value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 uses the information output circuit 336 to provide a pachinko machine to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown). The game information of the machine 100 (for example, game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. Is smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main controller 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit and receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, the payout control unit 600 transmits error information, Both are capable of two-way communication. On the other hand, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the whole of the first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. Is connected.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a driving circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shield device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shield device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, a shield device sensor 430 and a chance A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from an operation key unit sensor 425 that detects an operation of the detection unit 710 of the button 136 and the operation key unit 181 to the basic circuit 402, and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404 Reads data etc. and displays it using the work area of VRAM 436 And it generates an image for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface, and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and number of times. 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates a control program and data for controlling the entirety of the second sub-control unit 500, and data for image display. A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502 is used to perform drive control of various movable bodies (a chance button 136 capable of performing an advancing / retreating operation, a transmissive unit 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, a family crest role 247, and a united role 248). Drive circuit 516, various movable body sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248, and a sensor circuit that outputs detection signals from the various movable body sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502. 518 are connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542, A serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. However, the second sub-controller 500 may control the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-controller 400 may control the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248, or any of them. One sub-control unit may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 131, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 also controls the display of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 128.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted from the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a lending ball. Is detected, and communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 transmits a door open command to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, the payout control unit 600 transmits an error command to the main control unit 300.

  For the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without going through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay base. Thus, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 supplying the ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off (for example, for example). , Capacitors). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630 with each other. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main controller 300 may be configured such that a predetermined voltage is directly supplied from the power supply controller 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the first sub-control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be configured to be directly supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the like) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to supply a predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660 via other control units (the main control unit 300, the payout control unit 600, and the like) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, or at least one of them. The first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, or at least one of them.

  In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured to be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 controls the power supply control unit 660 to supply a predetermined voltage earlier than all or one or more of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. You may. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured to directly receive the predetermined voltage from the power control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a gaming machine installation branch, a 100 V AC power supply is stepped down to a 24 V voltage, and a 24 V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 131, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The DC current of 12 V is further reduced by the voltage conversion circuit to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V), and ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main controller 300. The DC current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of 12 V falls below a predetermined value (in this example, 9 V). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Is equivalent to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24 V AC current as it is, or converts it to a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  In addition, the activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 upon power-on reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the operation originally designed due to a runaway due to a program error or a voltage drop due to a lightning strike or a fraud. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described above correspond to an example of the predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power outage in which the power supply is shut down and the power supply is immediately recovered, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a power failure voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out. Is executed. In this reset processing, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be performed is a system reset operation. There are two types of reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when executing the system reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether or not the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, an extension process is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, also when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and the game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, referring to FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps. FIG. 132 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is started on condition that the first starting figure sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second starting port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of the special figure 1” in which all the seven segments are turned on and the central one segment is turned on. Also, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “variable display of special figure 2” in which all the seven segments are turned on and the central one segment is turned on. Do. These “variable display of special figure 1” and “variable display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of symbol variable display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 2 , The second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of the “variable display of Toku-zu 1” to the stop design of the stop symbol mode of Toku-zu 1 and the completion of the final display, or from the start of “variable display of Toku-zu 2”, The process from stop display of the stop symbol mode 2 to completion of the finalized display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 132 (a) shows ten types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" as the stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 132 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

  "Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, as described later, the determination as to whether or not a jackpot in a special figure variable game is made by random selection of hardware random numbers, and the determination as to whether or not a special jackpot is made by random selection of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (big jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, a state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. After the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the state shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, a state in which the state shifts to the time saving state is referred to as a general high probability state, and a state in which the state does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a general low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and "Special figure B" which is a 15R jackpot symbol is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These “special figure A” and “special figure B” are patterns in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability general figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that “special figure C” is 2R as compared with “special figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability general figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that “special figure D” is 2R as compared with “special figure B” which is 15R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability general figure low probability state. The "special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol called suddenly normal, and is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. Each of these "special figure E" and "special figure F" is 2R and is in a state where it does not shift to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, and each is a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the big hit without the 2R time saving. That is, the “special figure G” and the “special figure H” are in the same state as the “special figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different. By providing "G", "special figure H" and "special figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Further, "special figure I" is a first non-standard pattern, and "special figure J" is a second non-standard pattern.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, a symbol other than the "special symbol A" is also prepared as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 132 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns here, “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. That the ball has won the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232, that is, that the first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are provided on condition that the second ignition port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special figure ignition port 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c To perform “decorative display of decorative symbols”. At the beginning of the display of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol changes at a high speed for each symbol display area (scroll display). Then, when notifying the 15R jackpot of the "special figure B", a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 "are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special figure A”, a symbol combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, “decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3” or “decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7”) ) Etc. are stopped and displayed.

  Also, a 2R jackpot called “Tokuzu E” which is called a hidden probability change, a “2R jackpot” called “Tokuzu F” suddenly or a first small hit of “Tokuzu G”, and “Tokuzu H” When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Further, in order to notify a 2R jackpot called "sudden probability change" of "Tokuzu C" or a 2R jackpot called "sudden time saving of" Tokuzu D "," decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5 " Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of the "special figure I" and the second deviation of the "special figure J", symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 130 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 132 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol in the ordinary figure. There are two types of stop and display modes for the ordinary figure, namely, "Picture A", which is a winning symbol, and "Picture B", which is a lost symbol. On the basis of the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol display device 210 repeats all the lighting of seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Performs "Picture change display". Then, when notifying the winning of the normal figure variable game, “standard figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the general figure change game, “standard figure B” is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 132 (c) as well, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131, a counter for generating an initial value for a special hit determination for a big hit, a special random number counter for determining a special hit at a big hit, and a small hit Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of the number determination random number counter is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores the number of reservations, the random number value for big hit determination, the random number value for special figure determination at the time of big hit, the random number value for special figure determination at the time of small hit, and the special figure determination at the time of loss for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Each of the random number for use, the result of prior determination of a special figure, the result of preliminary determination of a special figure, the result of determination of a specific figure, the result of determining a special figure, and the result of determining a special figure timer are stored. Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure holding storage unit divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas where the start of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) can be held is separately provided for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 It is prepared. The reservation storage unit of the special map 1 includes a random number value for determining the special map 1 big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the small hit, and the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the loss. Are set as one set, and these four random numbers are stored for each area in a set in a winning order (reservation order). In addition, the hold storage unit of the special map 2 stores a random number value for determining the special map 2 big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the big hit, a random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the small hit, and The four random number values are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each region in a set of winning order (reservation order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 133A according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, and various types of data stored in the RAM 308. Initial setting of variables, operation permission to the WDT 314, setting of initial values, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in the WDT 314. Next, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this processing is referred to as WDT processing). Subsequent to the WDT processing, in the initialization processing in step S101, whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines that the power management section 660 has the main control section When the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the power supply 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 V), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to the WDT process. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to the initial state. Perform setting 2. Note that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly performed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later at regular intervals in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from one output port to the sub control unit 400, a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  Next, in step S103, after setting interrupt inhibition, a basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value update process, three initial values for generating the initial values of the big hit special figure determination random number counter, the small hit special figure determination random number counter, and the loss special figure determination random number counter are respectively described. Update the value generation counter. After the end of the basic random number initial value updating process, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, an effect random number update process is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number counter for determining a timer number for each of a special figure and a general figure. Generate a random number for use. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After the effect random number updating process is completed, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S103 and S105 except during the execution of the timer interrupt processing started every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main controller timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically reset (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main control section timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 131 including various ball detection sensors are input through input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, It is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. To describe the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided two times before in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ) Is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the sphere detection sensors, and the information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information of the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt processing is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, it is determined that a prize has been won when the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 131 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before last time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined based on predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) In the case of a match with the general winning opening 226, the center variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the start port 228 has passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and these starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in the general winning opening sensor that detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, there is no winning in the general winning opening 226. Is determined, and the following processes associated with winning in the general winning opening 226 are performed. If the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals of the past three times does not match the winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether or not the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update processing (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update processing (step S205), the values of various random number counters are updated. The value is updated in the range of 0 to 99. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determining random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set to the big hit special figure 1 determining random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, and the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is measured. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbols on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined prize production time, predetermined open time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, when there is a winning in the winning opening 226, 234, 235 or the starting opening 230, 232, 228, the winning provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the ball count storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball count storage area is set.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination processing, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has a prize, and the number of reserved special figure changing games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If so, the predetermined start information is stored. That is, if the number of reservations is less than the predetermined number, the big hit determination random number and various special figure determination random numbers are stored. The big hit determination random value is a value obtained by processing a value obtained from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 131 (for example, the obtained value + the value of the R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determining random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 131, the special figure determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 for performing random number processing corresponds to an example of a start information deriving unit. The various random numbers (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in an empty area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) of the special figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The special map reservation storage unit stores start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 as a predetermined upper limit number (here, four). This corresponds to an example of a start information storage unit that can store the start information. At this time, various random numbers (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a hold storage unit of a special figure. The information storage unit may be used, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area of the special map may be used as the start information storage unit. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number of the special figure stored in the RAM 308, and increases the reserved number of the special figure by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  Further, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228 and the number of retained general-purpose changing games is less than a predetermined number (for example, two), the general-purpose winning random at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for generating a numerical value is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308, which is different from that for the special figure, as a general-purpose winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination processing, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to start the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the center variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. When a winning (ball entry) is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the general figure starting port 228, the central variable The winning reception information indicating whether or not there is a winning (entering a ball) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  If the number of reservations is equal to or more than the predetermined number, regardless of the start information of the special figure or the start information of the ordinary figure, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

  When this winning determination processing (step S209) ends, the prefetch processing is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased from the previously executed prefetching process. In other words, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of reservations up to now (the number of reservations at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of reservations). The number of reservations at the time of executing the prefetching process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the number of old reservations, and it is determined whether the number of reservations is increasing. If the number of suspensions has not increased, the prefetching process ends without prefetching the start information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value in the special figure 1 holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special figure in the special figure 2 holding storage unit is stored. FIG. 2 The amount of increase in the random number value for jackpot determination is read in advance. In this case, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the pre-reading here means that the start information is read prior to the determination of the success / failure (final lottery). ) Is sometimes used to mean reading.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is in either the special figure low probability state where the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low or the special figure high probability state which is relatively high. Being in the special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a probability change flag is prepared. When the probability variation graph is set to ON, the state is a special figure high probability state (probability variation is in progress), and when the probability variation graph is set to OFF, the state is a special figure low probability state.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a hit / fail judgment table used in the prefetching process. The randomness range is defined in the special / non-acceptance determination table separately for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random number or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number is completed, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number is determined in advance by the hit / fail judgment. It is determined which of the random number ranges in the application table belongs. That is, referring to the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random number or the special figure 2 big hit determination random number is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the result of the preliminary determination of the success or failure is preliminarily determined to be "big hit", and otherwise, the result of the preliminary determination of the success or failure is preliminarily determined to be "losing". In the special figure related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 133 (b)), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure fluctuating game is performed again using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the success / failure preliminary determination table. The determination result here is a result of the preliminary determination.

  If the result of the preliminary determination is "big hit", the special random number value for determining special hit 1 at the time of big hit in the special storage 1 of special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is read in advance, or the special random number value in the storage of special figure 2 is stored. The random number value for big hit special figure 2 determination is read in advance. When the result of the preliminary determination is "small hit", the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the small hit in the special storage 1 of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read or the special storage of the special figure 2 is stored. First, the random number value for determining the special map 2 at the time of the small hit in the section is read. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of the loss in the special figure 1 holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is read in advance, or the random number value in the special figure 2 The random number value for losing the special figure 2 is pre-read. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure preliminary determination table used in the prefetching process. The special figure advance determination table defines a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbol modes ("Special figure A" to "Special figure J") shown in FIG. 132 (a). Based on which random number range the figure determining random number belongs to, a special figure pre-judgment result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 132 (a) is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Note that the determination result of the special figure is also a result of the preliminary determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related processing (step S213 illustrated in FIG. 133B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information described above and the advance determination using the pre-read start information are executed before the success / failure determination (final lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information prefetch means, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value and various The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of a second start information prefetching unit. In addition, the main control unit 300 that performs a preliminary determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random number and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of a first preliminary determination unit, and The main control unit 300 that performs the preliminary determination based on the random number value and various special figure 2 determining random number values corresponds to an example of a second preliminary determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a temporary read-ahead information storage unit for special figure 1 divided into areas for each reservation and a temporary read-ahead information storage unit for special figure 2 also divided into areas for each reservation. Have been. Information indicating the special figure pre-judgment result (information indicating the special figure and also referred to as prefetch information hereinafter) is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of reservations has not increased, the pre-reading information “no reservation” is stored in the corresponding pre-servation area of the pre-reading information temporary storage unit. In the pre-reading process, when the big hit is being played and when the current control state is the electric power support state (the time-saving flag is on), the pre-reading and the preliminary determination of the start information of the special figure 1 are performed. In these cases, the "undetermined" information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the pre-read start information of the special figure 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To memorize. That is, during the big hit game and during the electric support, the ball is thrown into the starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 is not provided (the first special figure starting port 230 whose state is a fixed starting area). The preliminary determination based on the start information thus performed is not performed, and the notification of the preliminary determination result (prefetch notice) is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is ensured. It should be noted that, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the notification of the result (pre-reading notice) may not be performed. Notification (prefetch notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133 (b), a general-purpose-related process is performed subsequent to the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this general figure related processing, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the general figure state is performed as the general figure state updating processing. For example, in the process in the middle of the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the ON / OFF drive control for repeating the ON and OFF of the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  In addition, in the processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (timing when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the hit symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 132 (c)) and the lost symbol The lighting control of the seven-segment LED included in the general-purpose display device 210 is performed so as to be in one of the display modes of the general-purpose display B illustrated in FIG. 132 (c). Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes as well as the general-purpose-related process here. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of a winning symbol and a lost symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the hit symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the ordinary figure changing game is notified to the player.

  In addition, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used. In the setting area, the normal operation is set, and for a predetermined opening period (for example, two seconds), the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 opens the blade member 2321 in an open state. And the information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a loss, the general figure loss flag is turned on. When the general-figure losing flag is on, even in the general-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made that the normal drawing is not operating.

  Subsequently, in the general figure related lottery process, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is inactive) and the general figure holding state is held. When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general figure variable game is determined to be a win or a non-prize by random number lottery based on the random number random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made to determine whether or not a hit has occurred. If a win is to be achieved, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the general-purpose timer random number value described above is acquired as the general-purpose timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are determined based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. From among the above, one of the times at which the general figure is variably displayed on the general figure display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the general figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in the general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this normal figure reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 133 (b), the special figure related processing (step S213) is performed subsequent to the general figure related processing of step S211 described above. In the special figure related processing, first, the special figure state update processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update processing) is performed, and then the special figure state update processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update) is performed. Processing). The special figure 2 state update processing performs one of the following eight processings according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state updating process during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the above special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED included in the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off. Lighting / light-off drive control that repeats light-off is performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, in the command setting transmission processing (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission processing is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and then the processing is terminated.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure related lottery processing described later will be described. The 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to be turned on and off based on the result of the special figure determination (stop symbol form of the special figure), and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), the 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), the 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and the sudden time saving symbol (special symbol C). (D), Hidden Probable Design (T Special Figure E), Sudden Normal Design (T Special Figure F), First Small Winning Design (T Special Figure G), Second Small Winning Design (T Special Figure H), First Lost Design (T Special Figure) One of the symbols of FIG. I) and the first losing symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. Further, after that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Also, when a value is set in the power support frequency storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times saved, and the subtraction result is 1 to 0. In this case, the time saving flag is turned off unless the special figure probability is fluctuating. Further, the time reduction flag is also turned off during a big hit game (during a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the non-electric support state (first approach rate control state) in the big hit game state and the small hit game state (in the special game state).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a symbol for stopping the variable display is provided. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later, and then the process is terminated.

  Also, a big hit flag is prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. If the big hit flag is ON, the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used to update the RAM 308. While the special figure 2 is in operation in the setting area, a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image notifying the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. For this purpose, information indicating a winning effect period is set in a storage area of a special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 235 in an open state is output to an opening / closing drive solenoid (332) of the 2351 and information indicating the opening period is set in a storage area of a door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. I do. In addition, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening release setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 235 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. The information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update processing which is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and starts at the timing when the door member is opened and closed, the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration The effect waiting period is shown in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for a period during which an image that informs the player of the end of the big hit by the symbol display device 208 is provided. Set information.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / close state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the big hit game state (during the special game state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. The opening / closing pattern of the door members 2341 and 235 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON at the same time as the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probable change flag and the time saving flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is "special figure E", only the certainty change flag among the certainty change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON. Further, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the time-saving flag among the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to ON, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 Set the number of electric support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting area) (entry rate), is changed to the first entry rate control state. This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-power support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing which starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (when the value of the production standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, a loss flag is also provided in the RAM 308, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the losing flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a state where the special figure 2 is not operating is set. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process is shifted to the next process without doing anything.

  When the special figure 2 state update processing is completed, the special figure 1 state update processing is performed. In the special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update processing is the same as the processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

When the special figure state update processing described above ends, a special figure related lottery processing is performed next. In the special figure-related lottery processing, first, the processing for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery processing) is performed, and thereafter, the processing for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery processing) is performed. As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the prize determination processing in the main control unit timer interrupt processing started at a predetermined timing. In step S209), when starting information is obtained based on a game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and starting information is obtained based on a game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232. Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are simultaneously established, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied. Even if there is, the special figure 2 variable game does not start to change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuating game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 is performed by the main control unit 300, and a prize to the second special figure start port 232 is given. The notification of the result of the lottery based on the lottery is performed prior to the notification of the result of the lottery based on the winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure are used as the start information in which the lottery is not performed. When the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored in a state where only the start information of the special figure 1 among the start information of the special figure 2 remains, it is based on the newly stored start information of the special figure 2. The notification of the result of the lottery is performed prior to the notification of the result of the lottery based on the start information of the special figure 1 which has been stored. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery unit (acceptance determination unit).

  In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the lottery (win / fail determination) is executed, the special figure to be stopped and displayed is determined, and the timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined contact determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether the second special map display device 214 is performing the special map change display or the stop display, and if any of the displays is being performed, the main control unit timer interrupt processing is performed. Return, if not in any display, determine whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, main control unit timer interrupt processing If it is set during the non-operation of the special figure, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been satisfied, and it is determined whether a predetermined validity determination condition is satisfied. The determination here refers to the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether or not the number of held special figure 2 variable games is greater than zero. If the hold number is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process, and if it is 1 or more, the predetermined pass / fail determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined acceptance / rejection determination condition is satisfied, a set of random numbers (special figure 2 big hit determination random number value), which is the start information stored most recently, is stored in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , The random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the big hit, the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the small hit, and the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of the loss, and the starting information (random number) still stored in the holding storage unit. Is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, the start information stored most recently is taken out from the hold storage unit of the special figure 2, and if the start information is further stored in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2, the N-th oldest start information is stored in the hold figure of the special figure 2. This means that the start information is set as the (N-1) -th oldest start information in the storage unit. Further, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by one. One set of random number values (special figure 2 big hit determination random number value, big hit special figure 2 determination random number value, small hit special figure 2 determination random number value, The main control unit 300 that performs a process of extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a hit / fail decision table. The contents of the hit / fail judgment table are the same as the contents of the hit / fail judgment table described above. In this hit / fail judgment processing, the random number value for the special figure 2 big hit determination is stored in the hit / fail judgment table according to the control state (the special figure low probability state, the special figure high probability state) with reference to the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308. "Big hit", "small hit", or "losing" is derived as a result of the success / failure determination based on which of the random number ranges belongs to. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to a hit / fail determination (lottery). Here, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that performs the hit / fail determination processing is a lottery means (hit / fail determination means). Corresponds to an example. The “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific result determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special figure symbol determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of this special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In the special figure symbol determination process, if the hit / fail determination result is “big hit”, the special figure 2 at the time of the big hit belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table, The special figure determination result is determined to be one of “Special figure A” to “Special figure F”. When the result of the hit determination is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for the special figure 2 at the time of the small hit belongs to. It is determined to be "Special figure G" or "Special figure H". Further, when the result of the determination is “losing”, the special figure determination result is set to “special” based on which random number range in the special figure determining table the random number value for losing special figure 2 belongs to. Figure I "or" Special Figure J ". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special figure symbol determination processing corresponds to an example of a symbol determination unit.

  In the variable time determination process following the special figure symbol determination processing, the variable display period in the variable figure stop display of the special figure is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is obtained from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the random number for determining the timer number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In this timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special figure display device 214 or the first special figure display device 212 starts changing symbols to when displaying the stop symbol representing the result of the pass / fail judgment, that is, when the special figure is displayed in a variable display. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), but may be the fluctuation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period becomes 2 seconds, which is a very short special figure fluctuation time, and timer 2 shows that the special figure fluctuation stop period becomes 5 seconds, and the reduced special figure fluctuation time Represents Note that what is determined by the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the decorative symbol variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, the reach pattern of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 208 is set to the normal reach. Normal reach means that a decorative symbol in which two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 130) are equal is generally stopped (strictly, temporarily stopped) (first stop and second stop are performed. ), A state in which the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the variably displayed symbol display area is a specific symbol (a symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). This is a state in which a predetermined combination of big hit symbols is stopped and displayed if the symbol (the symbol equal to the symbol) is stopped (third stop or final stop). The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time will be 40 seconds, the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time will be 60 seconds, and the timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time will be 80 seconds. When the timers are determined by the timers 5 to 7, the super-reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The super-reach is one in which the staging effect is improved by further adding a special variable display and the like to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time becomes 120 seconds. When determined by the timer 8, the special pattern is selected as the decorative pattern change pattern in the decorative pattern display device 208. The special variation includes a special multi-line reach, a full rotation reach, a special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 determines, the full rotation reach is selected as the decorative pattern variation pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208. The probability that the timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that another timer is selected, and this full revolution reach corresponds to the premium reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is performed after the result of the right / wrong determination (the lottery) in the special figure-related process is determined to be a specific right / wrong determination result (a predetermined result with a high degree of advantage of the player). This is an announcement effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the determination as to whether or not to reach is determined after performing the determination.

  In the variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which of the random number ranges corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determining random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table specifies the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations in FIG. The timer number may be determined based on this.

  The timer number indicating the special figure fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special figure lottery-related processing is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination processing S209), a special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers that are one or a plurality of pieces of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected on the basis of or based on a predetermined random number random determination, and here, the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table. In determining the timer number, a lottery using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for determining a timer number) may be performed, or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . Further, a timer selection table may be selected in the special figure lottery-related processing, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

  When the variable time determination processing is completed, other processing is performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery processing ends.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related processing, a special figure 1 related lottery processing is performed. The processes performed in the special drawing 1 related lottery process are the same as the processes described above in the special figure 2 related lottery process, except that “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  As described above, the special figure related processing (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 133 (b) ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission processing (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when ON, indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds designation command, special winning opening opening command, special winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type), and information that can specify the type of command, such as a clear command, a special figure pending increase command, and a general figure pending increase command.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating a special figure stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time saving flag and a probable change flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the information includes a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like. In the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect start command, In the case of the command for specifying the number of rounds per hit, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds per hit, and the like are included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of a prize in the second special figure starting port 232, and prize in the central variable winning port 234. And whether there is a prize in the right variable winning opening 235.

  In the above-described general command rotation start setting transmission processing, information indicating a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, information indicating a timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data, Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game is set. In the above-described general command rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating a special figure stop symbol (a special figure determination result), information indicating a control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 in the command data are set. In the above-described general command prize production start setting transmission processing, the command data includes information indicating the result of determining the special figure, information indicating the control state, the number of suspended first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like. Is set. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to the big hit game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, the command data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information, information indicating the number of suspended first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like are set. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Upon receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit on the decorative symbol display device 208, and displays the big hit game. Ends. The end effect start command referred to here corresponds to the big hit game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current round number, information indicating the control state, and the like are set as command data of the special winning opening opening command. . In the above-described general command winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, and the suspended first special figure variable game as command data of the winning opening closing command. Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In addition, in this step S215, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure suspension increase processing, the special figure identification information (information indicating the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure reservation increase command, the control state Is set, and information indicating the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance (the special figure preliminary determination result) is set.

  Further, in this step S215, a general command ordinary drawing hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command general-purpose hold increase process, information indicating a control state or the like is set in the command data of the general-use general hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general figure change start command indicating that the general figure change display has started (performed) as a general figure related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 sends to the first sub-control unit 400 a universal figure variation stop command indicating that the variation display of the universal figure is stopped (performed), or the pair of blade members 2321 starts opening (performed). An electric-chu opening command or an electric-chu closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 has been closed may be transmitted.

In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the winning rounds are completed, based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of one byte. (If ON, this indicates the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate The number of payout requests is shown.

  Next, in the main controller timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 133 (b), an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via an information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is monitored. If an error or a lower plate full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 131 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232, the center variable winning port 234 and the right variable winning port 235, and via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310.

  Upon completion of the device monitoring process in step S219, the process returns to the main control unit main process illustrated in FIG. 133A. Before returning, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are stored in the original registers. Settings and interrupt permission settings. Also, before returning, it is monitored whether the low-voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the power supply is shut off), it returns to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for performing the operation is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a power-off process such as initialization of an input / output port is performed, and thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process. Is also good.

<Process of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed. The effect described below, involving the operating means, is also controlled by the effect control processing. That is, when the symbol variation start command including the information on the symbol variation time is received, it is determined whether or not to perform an effect involving the operating means according to the length of the variation time in this effect control process. When determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. The image display control in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in step S313 according to the effect data read out here, and the movable body control is controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 by the control according to the effect data read out here. The command is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428, it is determined whether the chance button 136 has been pressed. As a result of the determination, when the operation of pressing the chance button 136 is detected, the processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the operation of pressing the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 is performed. When the operation is valid, processing for preparing effect data corresponding to an operation accepting effect described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, the command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a command to the shielding device 246, the command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if there is a control command (for example, a control command related to various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248) to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, this The setting for outputting the control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. When the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 135A. In the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in Step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt process, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, and effect random number values are updated.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. Thereby, the one-frame image stored in the display area not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 406), the VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then sets the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S605; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 stores information on image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the drawing end of the image has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S611. Wait for is entered. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Process of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 9B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 9C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in S701. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for a timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. CPU 504 of second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S709, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when effect data needs to be updated, effect data updating processing is performed. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable body control process is performed, and thereafter, the process returns to step S703. In the movable body control process, various kinds of movable bodies (chance button 136 capable of executing forward / backward movement, transmission part 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, family crest role object 247, combined role When a control command relating to the object 248) is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and operation control of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248 is performed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt triggers the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle. Run with

  In step S901 of the second sub-controller timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-controller main process shown in FIG. 135A. In the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-controller timer interrupt process, an effect random number value update process and the like are performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 will be described.

  FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example of the button effect in a stepwise manner. In this FIG. 136, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to subsequent figures unless otherwise specified). Note that the time interval between the alphabet and the like written in parentheses and the alphabet and the like written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , An interval different from the equal interval may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136, a variable icon display region 208e is provided at the center of the effect display region 208d, and a right side of the variable icon display region 208e is a reserved icon display region 208f. Is provided. A frame image indicating the position of the fluctuating icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuating icon display area 208e. Although this frame-shaped image is always displayed, when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuating icon is not displayed in the fluctuating icon display area, or when the fluctuating icon is displayed, the reach effect is not performed). May be displayed only when it is not turned on). Note that only one of the fluctuating icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or more hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. 136 (a) displays four reserved icons h1 to h4. These four holding icons h1 to h4 are all displayed in black circles, and the display of white circles by dotted lines indicates that the holding icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special figure change display or the start of the special figure pass / fail determination is on hold, and the number of hold icons displayed is basically the number of the special figure change game. This is the same as the number of reservations. However, there may be a timing before and after the reservation exhaustion in which the display number of the reservation icon does not indicate the reservation number. The hold icons include a hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and a hold icon of Toku-zu 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to provide a display area for each of the two icons. In addition, the holding icon can provide a pre-reading notice as to whether the holding is appropriate or not depending on the display mode. The animation related to the hold icon is, for example, an increase animation executed when the hold is increased and a new hold icon is displayed, the order of the hold changes due to the previous hold being consumed, and the hold is changed. The movement animation executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left side), the change animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the pre-reading result, and the hold are exhausted. Animation executed when the hold icon is erased, and evacuation animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority special map is saved when the priority special figure is increased in the priority changer. Etc. In addition to the above-described animation, a standby animation that is executed independently during a period other than the time during which the animation is being executed (for example, a period in which there is no increase or decrease of a hold or a change of a hold icon) and that can be executed in duplicate with the animation There is. An example of the standby animation is an animation performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of an animation of a fixed length). The animations of increasing, moving, changing, deleting, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One change icon can be displayed in the change icon display area 208e. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (b) displays a star-shaped change icon c. The change icon is an icon that is displayed after the reservation is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started and that corresponds to the special figure variable game. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or the change icon is expressed as moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The change icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the change icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. The change icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuating icon is capable of giving an advance notice of the feasibility of the fluctuating (the fluctuating notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the feasibility result of the fluctuating is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be regarded as an icon relating to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before, a same timing as, or a timing after the timing at which the result of the change is notified.

  As the animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the hold icon that is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and has the oldest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. And a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the change icon. These animations may be performed simultaneously in combination. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the change icon is, for example, a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure change game, a deletion animation executed when the special figure change game ends and the change icon is deleted, a change icon And the like, which are executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed simultaneously in combination with each other. Further, the waiting animation of the changing icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the moving animation and the changing animation.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed at the upper right. The fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a circular display, and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In each of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the big hit symbol is being stopped (fixed display), and white indicates that the losing symbol is stopped (fixed display). It represents that.

  Further, in FIG. 136, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol reservation lamp 218, and a second special symbol reservation lamp 220 are shown. ing.

  In addition, FIG. 136 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 136 has a white display indicating a white lighting state or a light-off state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and a hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Indicates the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be a lighting state other than red. Although “lit” is used here, it may be “blinking” (the same applies hereinafter).

  The background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 136 is a background image of a castle town. When the background image is a castle town background image, the pachinko machine 100 is in a castle town mode among a plurality of effect modes prepared. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 136 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmation display) a stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has a symbol “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stopped displays. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 136 (a) are turned on, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special figure 1. Therefore, no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 136 (b), the first special figure display device 212 has started to display a special figure in a fluctuating pattern, and the decoration pattern display apparatus 208 has also started the fluctuating display of a fancy pattern. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbols is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 136 (b) are turned on, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed, and a star-shaped fluctuation icon c is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This is because, out of the four holding icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 11A, the holding icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes the changing icon, and the changing icon is displayed from the holding icon display area 208f. This is the result of moving to the area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (c), a reach effect has been started. Until now, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with a numeral of 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is a production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of developing super reach. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 136 (d), the button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 3) a display of an arrow 136b and a character display of “press” as a promotion display for prompting the user, and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as one set. Note that the remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is received. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 136 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a short time (see FIG. 136 (f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136 illuminated in red is switched to illumination in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation validity period, a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into a super reach is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then, as shown in FIG. I have. The character "Super Reach A" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (h), indicating that the super Reach A effect is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is displayed from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. When the effect display of Super Reach A is started, all of the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 and the frame-shaped image indicating the position of the change icon c and the change icon display area 208e are continuously displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, the change icon c and the frame image may also be erased to make them invisible. Super Reach A is not a super reach that is determined to be a big hit, and just because it has developed into Super Reach A does not always mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display of “CHANCE” that is expected to develop into a super reach is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lost design is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. In some cases. The display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 136 (g) may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 136 (g ′) showing another example subsequent to FIG. 136 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), the display “208” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and thereafter, FIG. As shown in (h ′), the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is not displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 without developing into super reach. Have been. In addition, even if the display of "sorry" is made, there is a case where a big hit is caused by the reversal effect.

The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but an operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state of the pachinko machine 100 within the operation valid period is a state in which the execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated (operation valid state). However, control may be performed such that the operation of the chance button 136 is not always received but is received only during the reception period.
* D3046P

  FIG. 137 is a diagram for describing in detail the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of executing an advancing and retreating operation, and a transmission portion 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 137 (a) shows a state where both the chance button 136 and the transmission unit 191 are at their initial positions, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmissive portion 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or off. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even in the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. Note that the chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the pushed position.

  FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which the transmission unit 191 is rotated from an initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) provided below and inclined forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft that extends in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmissive unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmissive unit 190 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmitting portion 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. 137 (b), it is possible to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. Further, as a strong vibration having a large amplitude of vibration, the transmission part 191 may rotate in small increments in the front-rear direction. Even when the transmission unit 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 can be turned on or off, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or a production sound. The state (second state) of the transmission unit 191 shown in FIG. 137 (b) is closer to the player than the state (first state) at the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate the transmission unit 191 by hand to push the transmission unit 191 toward the initial position, and the transmission unit 191 corresponds to an example of an operation unit. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 lights or blinks, and the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect or a production sound. Note that the transmission unit 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 137 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has begun to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 3D shows a state in which the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in a plurality of stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (projected) from the initial position can also vibrate, and vibrates in the lateral direction or the vertical direction in the advanced (projected) state. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and the speaker 120 can output a sound effect or an effect sound. Further, the chance button 136 advanced (projected) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Also when the chance button 136 is operated and pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or a production sound is output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 may be configured to automatically retreat toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  Note that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission unit 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain set state. For example, the function may be realized by setting by the effect customizing function by the player or by setting of a switch on the game clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be no vibration at all, or only some vibrations.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram for describing an effect involving the operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 137 will be described as the operation means A, and the transmission unit 191 will be described as the operation means B. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although there is a difference that the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operation means B and the operation means A may be reversed, both may be operation means of the same size, May be operation means that can be operated together, or operation means that cannot be operated together.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) is greater than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Is highly expected. The function A is provided with both, but the function B is provided only with the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operation position and a function of shining. Examples of the function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the operation means B is inferior to the operation means A in the number of functions.

However, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation unit A, but the operation unit B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function of performing strong vibration.
The number of functions may be the same between the operation unit A and the operation unit B.

  FIG. 138 (c) is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the decorative symbol display device 208 is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the crest role object 247 and the combined role object 248 is “movable body”, the sound output data from the speaker 120 is “sound”, the frame lamp 122 and the like. , The light emission data of the LED and various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and the vibration data of the operation means A are displayed as “vibe”. "..." in the figure indicates omission of data. Production No. The data of "vibe" in No. 1 is "E0", which means that "E0" does not vibrate. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” indicates that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 2 are effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A vibrating before the operation is operated. And the production after operation is started according to each of these production data. Production No. The data of "vibe" in No. 3 is "E2", and this "E2" indicates that the operating means A is vibrated after the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” in 3 are effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. No. 2 data and effect No. 2 The data of No. 3 may be called even when the operation unit B (the transparent unit 191) is operated. This is because, in some cases, the effect data of “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, “sound”, and “LED” can be used as effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the production No. 2 or the effect No. 2 The effect according to the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable body", "sound", and "LED" in the data of No. 3 is started, and the operating means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, the production No. The data of No. 2 includes data (E1) for causing the operation means A to vibrate before the operation of the operation means A, and the other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operation of the operation means A, but the data of the operation means B By the operation of the production No. When the data of No. 2 is read out, the data of “vibe” is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, the production No. 2 data and production No. 2 The data of "Liquid Crystal" differs from the data of "Liquid Crystal" at least in the data of "A1" and "A2". Is the production No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The effect data on the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated, and after the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable body”, The effect according to the effect data of "sound" and "LED" is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of "vibe". However, the effect data relating to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing execution timings for an effect involving the operating means A and an effect involving the operating means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 139, time elapses from left to right in the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 139 (a) to (c), the “operation unit B-related effect” started in response to the operation of the operation unit B (transmissive unit 191) and the operation unit B are operated in order from the top. Then, the operation unit B-related effect is started, the “operation unit B operation effective state”, the “operation unit B operation” indicating that the operation unit B has been operated, and the operation unit A (chance button 136). "Operation unit A-related effect" started according to the operation, "Operation unit A operation effective state" in which operation unit A-related effect starts when operation unit A is operated, and operation unit A is operated "Operating means A operation" is shown. The “effect related to the operation means B” includes an effect in which the operation means B itself vibrates, an effect display, a sound effect output, an LED light emission, and the like. Further, the “operation unit A-related effect” includes an effect in which the operation unit A itself vibrates, an effect display, a sound effect output, an LED light emission, and the like. However, the “operation unit A-related effect” may indicate only that the operation unit A itself vibrates. During the “operation unit B operation valid state”, there is a case where a notification for prompting operation of the operation unit B is performed, and there is a case where notification is not performed. There is a case where notification for prompting operation of the means A (operation promotion notification) is performed, and a case where notification is not performed. If such notification is performed, the player can know that the operation is effective, but if not performed, each operation means is a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139 (a), the operation unit B is not operated during the operation unit B operation enabled state, but the operation unit B-related effect is started simultaneously with the end of the operation unit B operation enabled state. As described above, the “operation unit B-related effect” may be started even if the operation unit B is not operated. However, the content of the “operation unit B-related effect” may differ depending on whether or not the operation unit B is operated. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect is started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without passing through the "operation means A operation effective state" and without operating the operation means A. . As described above, the “operation unit A-related effect” may be started even if the operation unit A is not operated. However, the content of the “operation unit A-related effect” may be changed depending on whether or not the operation unit A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the effect related to the operation unit B and the execution period of the effect related to the operation unit A are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation unit B (transmission unit 191) and the vibration of the operation unit A (chance button 136) Start at the same time and end at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139 (b), during the operation unit B operation valid state, the operation unit B is operated, and when the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation valid state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B-related effect. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without passing through the "operation means A operation effective state" and without operating the operation means A. Have been. Also in this example, the execution period of the effect related to the operation means B is the same as the execution period of the effect related to the operation means A. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) Start at the same time and end at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139 (c), when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation enabled state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation enabled state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B-related effect. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without passing through the "operation means A operation effective state" and without operating the operation means A. Have been. In the example illustrated in FIG. 139 (c), the execution period of the operation unit B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation unit A-related effect. The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but the vibration of operation means A ends first, and the vibration of operation means B ends after the vibration of operation means A ends.

  Note that the start timings may be the same, and the execution period of the effect related to the operation unit A may be longer than the execution period of the effect related to the operation unit B. Alternatively, the start times are different, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and thereafter, the operation means B-related effect ends. You may. Conversely, even if the operation means A-related effect starts first, then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. The end time may be the same, and the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together. Alternatively, on the contrary, the operation unit A-related effect may start first, and then the operation unit B-related effect may start, and the operation unit A-related effect and the operation unit B-related effect may end together. .

  In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 139 (a), when the effect related to the operation unit B is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation related to the operation unit B is enabled. In a mode in which the operation is performed until the first time elapses from the start of the state, it may be configured such that the earlier the operation means B is operated, the longer the execution time of the effect related to the operation means B. become able to.

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the execution timing relating to the effect involving the operation means. The arrows in each of FIGS. 140A to 140C indicate the vibration period of the operation means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 140 (a) is an example in which the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a swing display of three decorative symbols as a variable display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation display. Eventually, the swing fluctuation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is finally displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 140 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the three decorative symbols is displayed because the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol is already determined. Is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 140 (a), before the notification of the result relating to the profit of the player, such as the confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended, so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result relating to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 140 (b) is an example during a big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated in a state where the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (the transmission unit 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The judge in the judge production here is a judge that is linked to whether or not to shift to the probability change state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 informs the player that he or she is aiming for a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of this notification. Eventually, the next round starts, and it is notified again that the player is aiming for a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening).

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 140 (b), if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, so that a specific winning opening is aimed at in the next round. The execution period of the notification is shortened, and the vibration of the operation means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period of the notification.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the round in which the specific winning opening is to be aimed is limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the state shifts to the certain change state after the end of the big hit game. For this reason, the round in which the specific winning opening is to be aimed is an important round leading to the player's profit, and before the start of the round leading to the player's profit, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended, and the player You can concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  The example shown in FIG. 140 (a) and the example shown in FIG. 140 (b) are examples in which the vibration period of the operation means A remains unchanged even when the operation timing of the operation means B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 140 (c) is an example of a pseudo continuous production during the fluctuating display of a decorative symbol, in which the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136) starts, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol. The vibration of the operation means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol ends, and the vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol ends. Then, the next pseudo-variation display is started, the number of pseudo-runs becomes the n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in the n-th pseudo-variation display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 140 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the stop display of the pseudo continuous symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the termination of the display of the reduced pseudo continuous symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 140 (c), when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including the above description, the operation means A can be vibrated at least during a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating in at least a part of a period during which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being performed. For example, the vibration may be ended simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may be continued even after the end of the judge effect, or the vibration may be ended before the end of the judge effect. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated or the operation timing.

  The upper example shown in FIG. 140D is an example in which the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge that determines whether or not a big hit will occur in the change display during the decorative display change display, or a judge that indicates the end of the reach effect (the final stage reach effect such as strong SP reach). There. In the example above, the period in which the operating means A is vibrating is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judge effect starts. You. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even if the operation means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a fixed period.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 140 (d), the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means B, and the vibration of the operation means A is also started. Therefore, the start timing of the vibration of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them becomes zero. However, a period during which the operation means A vibrates can be secured for a certain period. In addition, while the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation of the operation unit B. As in the case of the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judge effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing step by step an example relating to an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136), and FIG. 142 is a diagram showing stepwise a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 141.

  The description of the items described in the example of the button effect shown in FIG. 136 will be omitted. In each drawing of FIG. 141, in addition to the chance button 136 as the operation means A, a transparent portion 191 as the operation means B is shown on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 as the operation means A shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 is in the initial position at any stage, and the transmitting portion 191 as the operation means B is also in the initial position at any stage.

  In FIG. 141 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (fixed display) a stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stopped displays. The four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 141 (a) are turned on, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special figure 1. Therefore, no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 141 (b), the first special figure display device 212 has started to display the variation of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbols is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 141 (b) are turned on, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Not displayed, and the fluctuating icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 141 (c), a reach effect has been started. Until now, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with a numeral of 3. .

  Here, as in FIG. 136, an example is shown in which a button effect is started when a reach effect is started. The button production here is a kind of judge production, and is an announcement production to judge whether or not to develop into super reach. Note that the button effect may be an effect of judging the type of developing super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red as shown in FIG. Also, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that has begun to light up in red, an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and A set of three characters, a character display of "PUSH" and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period (operation valid period) in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid, is displayed. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. This initial position display 136X corresponds to an example of the second notification. Note that the initial position display 136X may be used without including all of the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display "PUSH". For example, the initial position display 136X that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

  FIG. 141 (e) is within the operation validity period, and the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated at the timing of FIG. 141 (e). When operated, the chance button 136 switches from being lit in red to being lit in white, or being turned off.

  When the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation validity period, the family crest role object 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 141 (f)). The crest role object 247 covers the middle symbol display area 208b, covers a part of the variable icon display area 208e, and also covers a part of the variable icon c. The fall of the family crest object 247 is an indication of the result of the judgment of developing into super reach, and as shown in FIG. 141 (g), the super design effect is started on the decorative design display device 208, and the background image changes. . Since the chance button 136 is turned off at the initial position after being operated within the operation validity period, it does not vibrate.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (h), the family crest role object 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the sliding door. In the super-reach production, the first super-reach production with a relatively low probability of a big hit (weak SP reach production) and the second with a relatively high probability of a big success in the current symbol variation display (Super SP reach effect) is prepared, and the background image of the sliding door corresponds to the background image of the weak SP reach effect. Judge production is also performed in this weak SP reach production. The judge production here is a production to judge whether it will be a big hit or not, and it is equivalent to the final judge production, and if the princess character appears from the inside of the sliding door, the pattern variation display currently being performed It is a sign of the judge result that it is determined that a big hit will be made. In FIG. 141 (i), a cloud-like effect display e1 is displayed. Although not apparent in the diagram of FIG. 141 (j), in FIG. 141 (j), a shadow of something appears in the effect display e1 like a cloud, and in FIG. e1 disappears, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and a character display of “Rescue the princess” is displayed on the upper right. It should be noted that the character display "Rescue the princess" may be displayed from the timing of FIG. 141 (h). The shade behind something described in the description of FIG. 11 (j) is the shade of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The effect display e1 in FIGS. 141 (i) and (j) corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is obtained from FIG. 141 (k) in which the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although started, it can be seen from FIG. 141 (i) that the final judge effect has been started.

  FIG. 141 (l) is within the operation validity period. At the timing of FIG. 141 (l), the chance button 136 as the operation means A is operated again, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (m) subsequent to FIG. 141 (l), no one is present in the open fusuma, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. . During the execution of the final judge effect described above, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is located at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  Even if the chance button 136 as the operation means A is not operated within the operation validity period, the judgment result of the final judge may be displayed, and the chance button 136 is not operated without the chance button 136 being operated. The final judgment result may be displayed even when an operation means different from the above (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) is operated (the same applies to the following examples). This may be the same as the effect of judging whether or not to develop to the previous super reach, or may be limited to the effect of judging whether or not to develop to super reach, It may be limited to the final judge production that is a direct judge about the jackpot.

  When the final judge effect is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts swinging variable display of three decorative symbols as a variable display of the decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 142 (n), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” are displayed in a swinging manner.

  Eventually, when the design change display of the special figure is completed on the first special figure display device 212 and the final display is performed, the decoration design is also finally displayed, and the decoration pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. "-Decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a case where an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after a weak SP reach effect and a big hit is made, and FIG. 144 is an example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of step by step.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 143 (d), the button effect has been started in the reach state. The button production here is also a production to judge whether or not to develop into super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red, and an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (e), when the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated within the operation validity period, in this example, as shown in FIG. On the front side, a judge result that the crest object 247 falls and develops into a super reach is reported.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 143 (h), the crest role object 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image further changes to the background image of the sliding door, thereby starting the weak SP reach effect. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 143 (i), an effect display e1 like a cloud is displayed, and in FIG. 143 (j), a shadow of something appears in the effect display e1. . After the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A starts to advance from the initial position. When the chance button 136 starts to advance, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red, and the chance button 136 itself starts to vibrate. That is, the chance button 136 performs the advance operation (projection operation) while vibrating. Note that the vibration may be started after the protrusion. The chance button 136 reaches a position exactly intermediate between the initial position and the maximum advance position, and stops at the intermediate position. Further, at the timing of FIG. 143 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button lamp 138 illuminated in red with the chance button lamp 138 advanced to the middle position is displayed. Simulated button image 136a1, arrow display 136b, and remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification. This intermediate position display 136Y also corresponds to an example of the second notification. The intermediate position display 136Y does not have to include all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, an intermediate position display 136Y that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate even after stopping at the intermediate position, and continues to vibrate until the remaining period for which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid becomes zero or the chance button 136 is pushed in. The advance start timing of the chance button 136 may be any time during the weak SP reach effect, for example, before the effect display e1 is displayed, or the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification. And at the same time, or after that. In addition, the timing of the advance operation completion (stop) of the chance button 136 may be any time as long as the weak SP reach effect is being produced. Is also good. Also, the start of vibration of the chance button 136 does not need to coincide with the start of advance of the chance button 136, and may be before or after the start of advance. If it is later, for example, the vibration may be started simultaneously with the completion (stop) of the advance operation of the chance button 136 or after that. Further, the chance button 136 may end the vibration if pushed a little, or may continue the vibration until the chance button 136 is pushed to the initial position. The effect display e1 in FIGS. 143 (i) and (j) also corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is started from FIG. 143 (k) in which the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen from FIG. 143 (i) that the final judge effect has been started, from the point in time when the chance button 136 has begun to advance, it can be seen that the final judge effect has been started, and the chance button 136 can be seen. It can be seen that the final judge effect has started from the point at which has reached the intermediate position.

  FIG. 143 (l) is within the operation validity period, and at the timing of FIG. 143 (l), the chance button 136, which has advanced (projected) to the intermediate position, is pushed down to the initial position, and the final judge is operated. The judge result of the production is displayed. In FIG. 144 (m) following FIG. 143 (l), the chance button 136 is at the initial position, does not vibrate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character GC behind the sliding door. In this case, the judge's result will be a big hit. The effect in which the princess character GC appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 144 (m) is a notice effect and corresponds to an example of the second effect. That is, this effect (second effect) is an effect that is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 as the operation means A. The announcement effect (second effect) in which the princess character GC appears may be started at the same time as the operation of the chance button 136 as the operation means A is started, or the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. It may be started at the same time, may be started at the same time when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, or the second condition (for example, (The first time elapsed after the start of the weak SP reach effect) may be started.

  The effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a liquid crystal display, or lighting or blinking of an LED. Further, the second effect may be an effect including N (plural) effects of a plurality of types of effects, and the chance button 136 may vibrate before the second effect is started. It may be configured as such.

When the final judge effect is completed, the decoration symbol display device 208 swings and displays “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” as shown in FIG. 144 (n). As shown in ()), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is fixedly displayed, and a big hit is achieved. In the example shown in FIG. 142 from the fluctuation display to the confirmation display, the background screen is a plain background screen. However, in the case of a big hit, the background screen is where the lords gather. In the case of a big hit, a promotion effect of a type of a big hit (for example, a promotion effect from a big hit without a probability change to a big hit with a positive change) may be performed during the swing fluctuation display (the same applies to the following).
FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 143 and 144.

  The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 145 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIGS. 143 and 144. Hereinafter, differences from the examples illustrated in FIGS. 143 and 144 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 145 is an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 143 (d) to 143 (g)). An effect display e1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (i), and in FIG. 145 (j), a shadow of something appears in the effect display e1. Also in this example, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is illuminated in red from the initial position and starts to advance while vibrating. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the chance button 136 advances to the maximum advance position and stops at the maximum advance position. After the vehicle has advanced to the maximum advance position, it may stop after returning to the initial position by the first amount. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (k), a button image 136a2 imitating the chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red in a state where the button has advanced to the maximum advance position, and an arrow are displayed. 136b and the remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an operation promotion notification maximum advance position display 136Z. This maximum advance position display 136Z also corresponds to an example of the second notification. Note that the maximum advance position display 136Z does not have to include all of the three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c. For example, the maximum advance position display 136Z that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

In the maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification, since the button image 136a2 is large, a part of the character display “Rescue the princess” is hidden. Since the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position display 136Z, the expectation of the big hit is higher than in the case where the chance button 136 has advanced only to the intermediate position or in the case where it does not advance at all and remains at the initial position. .

  FIG. 145 (l) is within the operation validity period. At the timing of FIG. 145 (l), the chance button 136 which has advanced (projected) to the maximum advance position, which is the operating means A, is pushed down to the initial position, and the final operation is performed. The judge's judge result is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 (m), a princess character GC is displayed at the back of the sliding door, and the judgment result here is determined to be a big hit. In FIG. 145 (m), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate at the initial position. That is, in this example, the chance button 136 vibrating at the maximum advance position vibrates even during the pushing operation and after returning to the initial position, and continues to vibrate. However, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be temporarily interrupted by the pushing operation. For example, the chance button 136 may temporarily suspend the vibration if pressed slightly, and may resume the vibration after returning to the initial position, or may suspend the vibration simultaneously with returning to the initial position. May be resumed. Further, regardless of whether the chance button 136 has advanced (projected) or not, and regardless of the advance amount of the chance button 136, at least a part of the period during the execution of the announcement effect in which the princess character GC appears (all Period, or only a partial period such as the beginning), the chance button 136 vibrates. In the example shown in FIG. 145 described above, the chance button 136 as the operation means A vibrates in the announcement effect in which the princess character GC appears, which corresponds to an example of the second effect.

  In addition, the display mode of the princess character GC in the notice effect may change according to the type of the big hit and the degree of expectation of the big hit with the probability change. For example, when the degree of expectation of the jackpot with probability change is high, the display mode (second display mode) in which the fan is spread and dancing is possible.

  FIG. 146 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of a case where the game is lost while the effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after the strong SP reach effect, and FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 146 in a stepwise manner.

  The following description focuses on differences from the examples described so far, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  Also in FIG. 146 (d), the button effect has been started in the reach state. The button production here is also a production to judge whether or not to develop into super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red, and an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (e), when the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated within the operation validity period, in this example, as shown in FIG. On the front side, a judge result that the crest role object 247 falls and develops into super reach is notified.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 146 (h), the crest actor 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image changes to a duel scene between the hero's lord and the enemy. The background image of the duel scene corresponds to the background image of the strong SP reach effect. Even in the strong SP reach production, the final judge production to determine whether or not a big hit will be performed, and if the hero wins, the judge result that it is determined that the big change will be a big hit with the current symbol change display become. As shown in FIG. 146 (i), a flash-like effect display e2 overlaps the display where the lord and the enemy are cut off. Even after the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains at the initial position. In FIG. 146 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position. However, the chance button 136 does not vibrate. The effect display e2 in FIGS. 146 (i) and (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is started from FIG. 146 (k) in which the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen from FIG. 146 (i) that the final judge effect has been started.

  FIG. 146 (l) is within the operation validity period. At the timing of FIG. 146 (l), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 147 (m) displays a scene where the enemy has won, and the judgment result here is highly likely to be lost. Note that the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 147 (m) is off at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  When the final judge effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 147 (n), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in a fluctuating manner on a plain background screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (o), the combination of the loss, “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” is fixedly displayed, and the loss occurs.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a case where a production involving the operation means B (the transparent unit 191) is executed after a strong SP reach production and a big hit is made, and FIG. 149 is shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example step by step.

  Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  After a judge effect (FIGS. 148 (d) to (g)) as to whether or not to develop into super reach, in FIG. 148 (h), a strong SP reach effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 includes: The background image of the duel scene is displayed. Next, in FIG. 148 (i), a flash-like effect display e2 is displayed.

  In FIG. 148, even when the display of the effect display e2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136 as the operating means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148 (j), the transmission unit 191 as the operation means B rotates forward from the initial position and falls down to the player side. Note that the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward simultaneously with the display of the effect display e2, or the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward before the display of the effect display e2. At the timing of FIG. 148 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a transmission part rotation image 191a imitating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission part 191 is rotated forward, and a transmission part. An arrow display 191b suggesting that 191 is pushed in, a character display of “push-in”, and a remaining period meter display 191c indicating the remaining period for receiving the operation of the transmission unit 191 are displayed as one set. . Hereinafter, these three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display of “push-in” are collectively referred to as a transmission part display 191X of operation promotion notification. This transmission part display 191X is equivalent to an example of a first notification. Note that the three images 191a, 191b, and 191c and the character display “press” may not be entirely included, but may be the transmission portion display 191X. For example, the transmission unit display 191X that does not include the remaining period meter display 191c may be used. Note that the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward simultaneously with the display of the transmission unit display 191X, or the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward after the transmission unit display 191X is displayed. Even if the transmissive portion display 191X is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. In addition, the transmitting portion 191 that has turned forward does not vibrate, but may vibrate. The effect display e2 of FIGS. 148 (i) and (j) also corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is obtained from FIG. 148 (k) at which the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge effect has been started from the time when the effect display e2 starts to be started, or that the final judge effect has been started from the time when the transmission unit 191 has rotated forward. .

  FIG. 148 (l) shows the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 148 (l), the transmitting unit 191 as the operating means B is pushed down to the initial position. In this example, when the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 149 (m) following FIG. 148 (l), the family crest role object 247 falls again on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As it comes, the background image changes. Further, a pair of united roles 248 advances from the left and right toward the crest unit 247, and as shown in FIG. 149 (n), the pair of united units 248 sandwiches the crest unit 247 from each of the left and right sides. Combine with family crest. The fact that the transmitting portion 191 that is the operating means B has turned forward itself may be an effect that suggests a big hit, or an effect that suggests that the fall of the family crest role object 247 results in a big hit. Or an effect that suggests that the combination of the pair of combining objects 248 with the family crest combination 247 will be a big hit. Thereafter, first, the pair of united objects 248 returns to the initial position (FIG. 149 (o), then the crest object 247 returns to the initial position (FIG. 149 (p)), and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed in a state in which there is no obstacle, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In this scene in which the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed, the decorative display reduced and displayed in the upper left is still in the reach state in FIG. 149 (q). However, the combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols (for example, “333”) may be displayed, that is, the combination of the jackpots of the decorative symbols is displayed in a small size along with the display of the final judge result. It is, then, may have a structure in which a combination of the jackpot is displayed large decorative pattern.

  Note that the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 149 (q) is turned off at the initial position and does not vibrate.

  When the final judge effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 149 (r), “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” fluctuates on the background screen on which the lords are gathering, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is fixedly displayed, and a big hit is achieved.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 148 and 149 described above, the crest actor 247 (first effect movable body) operates before the start of the final judge effect (FIGS. 148 (f) to (g)). Although the crest role 247 operates in the final judge effect (FIGS. 149 (m) to (o)), the operation of the crest role 247 is not performed before the start of the final judge effect. The operation may be performed only in the judge effect.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the chance button 136 as the operation unit A starts vibrating in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 150 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIGS. 148 and 149. Hereinafter, differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 148 and 149 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 150 is an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). After the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 150 (k) is displayed, that is, after the final judge effect is started, when the transmission part 191 is pushed to the initial position as shown in FIG. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate without permission (see FIG. 150 (m)). In this example, the chance button 136 also starts vibrating at the same time as the start of the final judge effect, and ends the oscillation before the result of the judge of the final judge effect is displayed (see FIG. 150 (p)). That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 is executed only during the period of FIG. 150 (m) to FIG. 150 (p) which is a part of the execution period of the final judge effect, and the judgment result of the final judge effect is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (q), there is a case where vibration does not occur and attention can be paid to the judgment result. However, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate until the final judge effect is completed. In this case, the vibration of the chance button 136 is always the entire execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate even after the final judge effect is completed. In the state where the vibration continues after the final judge effect is completed, the initial position of the operation promotion notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display 136X may or may not be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 150, it can be seen that the chance button 136 is vibrating as part of the final judge effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 150 described above, the final judge effect in FIGS. 150 (m) to (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect, and a preview effect to be started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. It is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 150, the vibrating chance button 136 is not operated, but if the vibrating chance button 136 is operated during execution of the final judge effect, the final judge effect is continued, and In response to the operation, first, the crest role object 247 and the union role object 248 return to the initial position, and then, the judgment result is displayed. Therefore, the earlier the timing of operating the chance button 136, the faster the judgment result can be seen. When the vibrating chance button 136 is operated, the same judge effect shown in FIG. 144 (m) or FIG. 145 (m) is not started. That is, even if the chance button 136 is operated while the chance button 136 (second operation means) is vibrating during execution of the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. The effect (second effect) shown in (m) and FIG. 145 (m) is not started. Further, the effects (second effects) shown in FIGS. 144 (m) and 145 (m) are configured not to be executed simultaneously with the final judge effects (first effects) described with reference to FIG. It is a production.

  FIG. 151 is a diagram showing, at a stage, an example in which, after operating the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B, the chance button 136 as the operation unit A is also operated. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 151 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIGS. 148 and 149. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 150 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 151 is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). In the example shown in FIG. 151, when the transmission part display 191 </ b> X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the transmission part 191 is pushed in at a relatively early timing (FIG. 151 (1)). That is, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission promotion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

  In this example, after the transmission unit 191 has been pressed to the initial position, the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation unit A is pressed. Then, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 indirectly starts vibrating in response to an operation of the transmission unit 191 and directly starts vibrating in response to a pressing operation. Further, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being pressed, but when a predetermined maximum vibration time elapses after starting to vibrate, the vibration ends even if the button is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 151, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate (see FIG. 151 (r1)) even if the final judge effect ends and the swing fluctuation display is started, but the swing fluctuation display is started. After a while, the vibration reaches the maximum time, and the vibration ends even if the button is pressed (see FIG. 151 (r2)). The maximum vibration time corresponds to six frames in FIGS. 151 (m) to (r1). The swing fluctuation display continues for a while after that (FIG. 151 (r3) to FIG. (R4)), and the first time (3 in FIG. 151 (r2) to FIG. 151 (r4)) after the chance button 136 stops vibrating. After the continuation of the time corresponding to the frame), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is definitely displayed as shown in FIG. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 151, the swing fluctuation display is executed over a period corresponding to four frames in FIGS. 151 (r1) to (r4).

  In the example of FIG. 151, it can be seen that the final judge effect has been started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B. That is, when the final judge effect is started, the family crest role object 247 falls. When the final judge effect is started, the chance button 136 vibrates in response to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 151 described above, the final judge effect in FIGS. 151 (m) to 151 (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the operation timing of the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B is later than the example shown in FIG. 151. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 152 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIGS. 148 and 149. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 151 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 152 is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). In the example shown in FIG. 152, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission promotion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about ／. That is, the transmission unit 191 is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 151 (see FIG. 152 (12)). As a result, as compared with the example shown in FIG. 151, the start of the final judge effect is delayed by one frame, the vibration period of the chance button 136 is shifted backward, and the timing at which the predetermined vibration maximum time elapses is also one. It shifts behind the frame. In the example shown in FIG. 152, the longest vibration corresponds to the six frames in FIGS. 152 (m) to (r1), and the chance button 136 ends the vibration at the timing in FIG. 152 (r1). The swing fluctuation display continues for a second time (time corresponding to two frames in FIGS. 152 (r2) to (r3) in FIG. 152) after the chance button 136 stops vibrating, and then changes to FIG. 152 (s). As shown, "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is fixedly displayed, and a big hit is achieved. As described above, the swing fluctuation display has a period corresponding to four frames in the example shown in FIG. 151, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 152, the fluctuation change display is shown in FIGS. 152 (r1) to (r3). ) Is performed over a period corresponding to three frames, and the execution period of the swing fluctuation display is shortened by the delay of the operation timing of the transmission unit 191 as the operation unit B.

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 that is the operation unit B vibrates when the housing vibrates. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 153 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 151. Hereinafter, differences from the example shown in FIG. 151 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  The example shown in FIG. 153 is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 148 (d) to 148 (j)). In this example, as shown in FIG. 153 (k), the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B vibrates at a second position (forward tilt position) rotated forward from an initial position (first position). I have. Even if the transmission part 191 does not vibrate, the transmission part 191 vibrates due to the vibration of the housing to which the transmission part 191 is directly or indirectly attached. The housing here is the main body 104 (inner frame) or the front frame door 106 provided with the transmission unit 190. In this example, the operation of the transmission unit 191 can be prompted by the vibration of the transmission unit 191 in addition to the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 153 (k), and in FIG. The part 191 is pushed to the initial position. When the transmissive part 191 is pushed to the initial position, the vibration of the housing ends, and this time, when the chance button 136 as the operation means A is pressed, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate.

  Note that the vibration of the housing, and thus the vibration of the transmission unit 191 may start when the transmission unit 191 reaches the forward inclined position from the initial position, or the transmission unit 191 starts rotating forward from the initial position. The transmission may be started from the time when the transmission unit 191 is not operated even after the transmission of the first time after the transmission unit 191 reaches the forward inclined position. In addition, the vibration of the housing, and thus the vibration of the transmission unit 191 ends when the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position, may end when the transmission unit 191 is pushed even a little from the forward inclined position, or may end at the initial position. Even if it is pushed, the vibration may be continued for the first vibration period after starting the vibration or returning to the initial position, and there may be a period of vibrating together with the chance button 136.

  Further, like the transmission section 191 of this example, the chance button 136 as the operation means A can be mounted on the housing (for example, directly or indirectly) even if the chance button 136 itself does not vibrate. Alternatively, the door 108 with the ball storage dish may vibrate by vibrating.

  Further, the transmission section 191 itself may be configured to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the horizontal direction.

  FIGS. 150 (m) to (q), FIGS. 151 (m) to (q), FIGS. 152 (m) to (q), and FIGS. 153 (m) to (q) ) Is different from the judge effect shown in FIGS. 144 (m) and 145 (m) described earlier. A different effect mode means that the background screen is different, the characters appearing are different, or the colors of the displayed characters are different.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the transmission unit 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. FIG. 154 shows another example on each of the left side and the right side.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 154 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (g)). The state of FIG. 154 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 146 (k), and the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light red at the initial position.

  FIG. 154 (a) is within the operation validity period, and at the timing of FIG. 154 (a), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed. Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 146, the judgment result of the final judge effect is not immediately displayed, and the crest role object 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. 151 (m) and the like. And the background image changes. Further, in this example, with the fall of the crest actor 247, the transmission unit 191 as the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position (see FIG. 154 (c)). Next, as shown in FIG. 154 (D), the crest role object 247 is sandwiched between the pair of union role objects 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of union role objects 248 and the crest role object 247 are united and the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 154 (e), the transmission unit 191 rotates again from the initial position to the forward inclined position with the pair of combined objects 248 returned to the initial position and the crest object 247 remaining. Further, as shown in FIG. 154 (f), the family crest combination object 247 returns to the initial position, and the transmission portion 191 returns to the initial position from the forward inclined position.

  As described above, in the example on the left side of FIG. 154, at the same time when the final judge effect is started, the transmitting portion 191 as the operating means B repeatedly rotates between the initial position and the forward inclined position. I do. This strong vibration can be seen as being performed as part of the final judge production, or it can be seen as a different production from the final judge production.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 154 will be described. The example shown on the right side is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). The state of FIG. 154 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 151 (k), in which the transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed and the transmission part 191 as the operating means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. doing. Note that the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 154 (i) shows the operation valid period of the transmission unit 191. However, in FIG. 154 (i), not the transmission unit 191 but the chance button 136 which remains off at the initial position is operated.

  Even when the chance button 136 is operated, as in the example on the left side of FIG. 154 in which the transmission unit 191 is operated, the final judge effect is performed, and the transmission unit 191 is moved to the initial position, the forward inclined position, and the like. A strong vibration that repeats the rotation between is performed. That is, the transmission unit 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position in FIG. 154 (U), rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position in FIG. It returns to the position again, and in FIG. Therefore, the chance button 136 is a so-called back button. However, after the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 154 (i), the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a case where a scene where an enemy has won after a strong SP reach production is once displayed, but a big hit is made by a resurrection production. FIG. 156 is shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example step by step.

  The example shown in FIG. 155 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 148. After performing the judge effect (FIGS. 155 (d) to (g)) to determine whether or not to develop into super reach, FIG. 155 (h) , A strong SP reach effect is started, and in FIG. 7I, an effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed.

  Also in FIG. 155 (j), in a state where the effect display e2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and FIG. At the timing of, the effect display e2 disappears, the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transparent portion 191 is still positioned at the forward inclined position.

  In FIG. 155 (l), the transmission unit 191 is pressed. In FIG. 156 (α) following FIG. 155 (l), a scene in which an enemy role similar to that in FIG. 147 (m) is won, which is considered to be the result of the final judge effect, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in 156 (β), the swing fluctuation display of the combination of “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 3” is started once.

  However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (γ), an indication is displayed when the resurrection effect starts, and the resurrection effect is executed from FIG. 156 (m) to FIG. 156 (p). The resurrection effect here is the same effect as the final judge effect shown in FIGS. 149 (m) to (p). In front of the decorative design display device 208, a crest role object 247 and a pair of united role effects 248 are provided. Appears.

  When the resurrection effect ends, as shown in FIG. 156 (r), the swing fluctuation display of the combination of "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is immediately started, and FIG. In the illustrated decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 3” is definitely displayed.

  In the example described above, the display of the duel result displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 156 (α), which is considered to be the judge result of the final judge effect, is a false display. In addition, neither the chance button 136 as the operation means A nor the transmission portion 191 as the operation means B vibrates, but whether true or false, the display of the duel result (display of the judge result of the final judge effect) is not displayed. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit at the displayed timing or at a timing thereafter, if the chance button 136 and / or the transmission part 191 vibrate, a big hit will be given to an advanced player. Is confirmed, and the interest of the game may be improved. That is, the judgment result (true result) of the final judge effect may be notified by using the vibration of the chance button 136 and / or the vibration of the transmission unit 191.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of the third effect in a stepwise manner. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 157 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 141 and the like.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (c), the reach effect has been started, and in this example as well, when the reach effect is started, an effect involving an operation which is a kind of button effect is started. The production involving this operation is also a kind of judge production, and it is a notice production that judges whether or not to develop into super reach. In FIG. 157 (d), as an effect involving the operation, the transmission unit 191 as the operation means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and the decoration design display device 208 displays the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification. 'Is displayed. The transmissive portion display 191X ′ shown in FIG. 6D is slightly different from the transmissive portion display 191X described above, but has the same function. The chance button 136, which is the operation means A, does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (e), the transmitting unit 191 is pushed in during the operation valid period of the transmitting unit 191. In FIG. 157 (f), a family crest role object 247 is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Falling. 157 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (f) displays an effect display e3 with a shadow. Note that part of the effect display e3 is hidden by the crest role object 247. Again, the fall of the family crest object 247 is a sign of a judge's result of developing into super reach, and then developing into super reach. The effect of FIG. 157 (f) described above corresponds to an example of the third effect, and is a notice effect that is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the announcement effect started according to the operation of the transmission unit 191. The alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG. 158 correspond to the alphabetical numbers in parentheses in FIG.

  The example shown in FIG. 158 is also an effect that is executed only after a certain effect (the effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (f)). The judge effect of whether or not to develop into super reach ends in FIG. 158 (g), and the super reach effect starts from FIG. 158 (h ′). This super reach production is different from the strong SP reach production described above and the weak SP reach production, and is the production selected by the production lottery. However, the remaining portion meter display 191c of the transmission portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification remains at least 1/2 of the transmission portion 191 rotated to the forward inclined position shown in FIGS. 148 (j) to (k). When the operation is performed at the timing, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 150 is executed, and when the operation is performed at a timing where less than 1/2 remains, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 158 is executed. Is also good. That is, even if it is configured that one of the final judge effect shown in FIG. 150 and the final judge effect shown in FIG. 158 is started in accordance with the operation of the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B. Good.

  158 (h ') displays a background image in which the protagonist is chasing a bad merchant on the decorative symbol display device 208. In Fig. 158 (h'), an effect display e2 like a flash is displayed. You. Even if the display of the effect display e2 is started, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 158 (j ′), the transmission section 191 which is the operation means B has been rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and is displayed on the effect display e2 at the timing of FIG. 158 (k ′). Instead, a transmission part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed. FIG. 158 (l ') shows the operation valid period, in which the transmission unit 191 is pushed down to the initial position.

  A final judge effect corresponding to an example of the third effect is started according to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191. In FIG. 158 (m ′), the streets of the castle town are different from the background image shown in FIG. 149 (m). 149, and the crest role object 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in FIG. 149 (m). Next, as shown in FIG. 158 (n ′), in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town, the crest role object 247 is sandwiched by the pair of union role objects 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of union role objects 248 and The crest role object 247 is united. Then, as shown in FIG. 158 (o ′), the pair of combined roles 248 returns to the initial position, and the crest role 247 remains in front of the background image of the castle town. As shown in (p ′), the crest role object 247 returns to the initial position from the front of the decorative design display device 208 in which the background image of the castle town is displayed, and there is no obstruction to the display screen of the decorative design display device 208. In this state, the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed. 158 (q ') shows a scene in which the palace has caught a bad merchant on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the judge result here is determined to be a big hit. During the execution period of the final judge effect of FIGS. 158 (m ′) to (q ′), which corresponds to an example of the third effect, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position. . FIGS. 158 (m ′) to (q ′) show the final judge effects in FIGS. 150 (m) to 150 (q), FIGS. 151 (m) to FIG. 151 (q), and FIG. 152 (m). (Q) and (153) to (q) of FIG. 153, the final judge effects are not executed at the same time. Also, unlike the mode of the judge effect shown in FIGS. 144 (m) and 145 (m), the judge effect is not executed at the same time.

  Further, in FIGS. 158 (m ′) to (q ′), the chance button 136 that is turned off at the initial position is operated, but the operation here is not accepted, and the chance button 136 here is not operated. This is not a so-called back button. Note that an operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, a second chance button 137 described later) may be a so-called back button.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described above. FIG. 159 shows another example on each of the left side and the right side.

  First, an example on the left side of FIG. 159 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is executed only after passing through a certain effect (effects of FIGS. 148 (d) to (j)). In this example, an LED lamp 139 is provided near the chance button 136. The LED lamp 139 is a different light emitting means from the chance button lamp 138.

  In FIG. 159 (a), similarly to FIG. 151 (k) and the like, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification, and the transparent portion 191 as the operating means B rotates to the forward inclined position. Moving. In FIG. 159 (a), the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, does not vibrate and remains off at the initial position, but the chance button 136 is operated. Even if the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and the chance button lamp 138 does not light or blink, but the LED lamp 139 lights or blinks. Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the final judge effect is not executed.

  In FIG. 159 (a), the final judge effect is started in response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191 and the family crest role 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The image changes. Until immediately before the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191 is performed, the chance button 136 that is the operation unit A remains off at the initial position without vibrating, but after the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191 is performed, The chance button 136 starts vibrating when operated. The chance button 136 may continuously vibrate during the execution of the final judge effect, or may vibrate only while being pressed during the execution of the final judge effect. The vibration of the chance button 136 may be ended at the same time as the end of the final judge effect, or may be ended before the end of the final judge effect. Even if the chance button 136 starts to vibrate, the chance button lamp 138 is still off. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated, the LED lamp 139 also turns on or blinks. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  In FIG. 159 (c), the final judge effect has been completed, and the swing symbol display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Even if the chance button lamp 138 is operated after the final judge effect ends, the chance button lamp 138 does not vibrate. However, also here, the LED lamp 139 is lit or blinking. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG.

  Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 159 will be described. In the example shown on the right side, as shown in FIG. 159 (A), instead of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, a button image 136a3 illuminated in red and imitating the vibrating chance button 136 is included. The initial position display 136X 'is displayed. The real chance button 136 also lights up in red and vibrates. In addition, even if the button image 136a imitating the non-vibrating chance button 136 is displayed, the real chance button 136 may be vibrating.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. 159. In FIG. 160, four examples are shown on the left side, and one example is shown on the right side. The examples shown in the upper two on the left side (the example in FIG. 160 (a) and the example in FIG. 160 (A)) are also transmitted via certain effects (the effects in FIGS. 148 (d) to (g)). It is a production that will not be executed unless it is from the beginning.

  First, in FIG. 160A, which is the first example, the transparent portion 191 as the operation means B is located at the initial position, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image of the duel scene, and the lower left corner. , A transmission unit rotation image 191a imitating the pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission unit 191 is rotated forward is displayed. In addition, a character display indicating that a glass button indicating the transmission unit 191 is on standby is also displayed. The transmission part rotation image 191a and the display of characters in a standby state thereafter serve as a warning display that the transmission part 191 which is a glass button is rotated to the forward inclined position. When the notice is displayed, the transmission portion 191 which is a glass button always rotates to the forward inclined position.

  In FIG. 160A, which is the second example, the background image of the duel scene is displayed as in FIG. 160A, and the remaining period is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 by digital display. Here, it is displayed that the remaining period is 19.89 seconds. This remaining period display is also a warning display that the transmitting unit 191 is rotated to the forward inclined position. When the remaining period by the remaining period display becomes 0.00 seconds, the transmitting unit 191 which is a glass button is moved to the forward inclined position. Always rotate until.

  In FIG. 160A, which is the third example, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the first display means, and a second display means 209 different from the first display means is also provided. The second display unit 209 is a liquid crystal display device having a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208 as the first display unit and movable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the second display means 209 is a position below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be raised from the initial position. When the transmission unit 191 as the operation means B is operated in a button effect such as a final judge effect, a movable role such as a family crest role 247 and a pair of union role 248 operates, and the second display unit 209 is moved to an initial position. , The second display means 209 at least partially overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second display unit 209 may entirely overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may only partially overlap with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. During the operation of the second display unit 209 or after the operation is completed, the chance button 136 as the operation unit A may vibrate, or the transmission unit 191 may vibrate. Alternatively, the second display unit 209 may be a touch panel and may correspond to an example of a third operation unit. In this case, the second display unit 209 may be a part of the decorative design display device 208. Vibration may be performed in an overlapping state.

  FIG. 160 (a), which is the fourth example, is also an example provided with the same liquid crystal display device as the second display means 209 shown in FIG. The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 160 (a) can perform a stock display of the button images B, and here, six button images B are displayed. One button image B represents that one button effect is performed, and in the example shown in FIG. 160A, the final judge effect is performed with the button effect corresponding to the third button image B. The button effect corresponding to the remaining three button images B is executed during the big hit game. The three button effects during the big hit game may be, for example, three promotion effects of the number of big hit rounds. In addition, as the button effect corresponding to the six button images B, the button operation may be prompted for each of the six cut-in effects.

  Note that the second display unit 209 displays a hold icon instead of the button image B, changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the button image B, and changes the display mode of the button image B from the display mode of the button image B by operating the button. The display mode may be changed according to the degree. Also at this time, the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the transmission unit 191) that receives the button operation may be vibrated.

  In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 160, an effect involving a long press operation of the chance button 136 is executed. That is, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (α), a button image 136a4 imitating the turned-off chance button 136 and an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting a long press operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. In addition, a character display of “Store the meter by long pressing” and a remaining period meter display 136 c indicating a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is validated are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "storing the meter by long pressing" are collectively referred to as a long-press display 136L of the operation promotion notification. The three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display "storing the meter by long pressing" may not be included, but may be a long pressing display 136L. For example, the long press display 136L that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. In addition, at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, a level display L1 is also displayed. This level display L1 is a display for increasing the level according to the long press time of the chance button 136, and the level display L1 shown in FIG.

  After that, the chance button 136 is operated, and the level display L1 reaches the full level before the remaining period of the operation validity period is exhausted, and the button effect is started in response to the level display L1 reaching the full level, Here, the transparent part 191 (not shown), which is the operation means B, rotates to the forward inclined position, and as shown in FIG. 160 (β), the decorative pattern display device 208 has a transparent part display 191X of the operation promotion notification. Is displayed. The operation of the chance button 136 is originally required to be a long press operation. However, here, even if the operation is a long press operation (single press), which is a long press operation that cannot be said to be a long press operation, it is a long press operation. Even a so-called continuous operation, in which handling or pressing for a short period is repeated quickly, is handled as a long pressing operation. Note that, even when a continuous hitting operation is required, a long pressing operation or a single pressing operation may be treated as a continuous hitting operation (the same applies to the following examples). Then, although illustration is omitted, when the transmitting unit 191 is pushed in during the operation valid period, a judge effect is started.

  Subsequently, an effect involving a so-called pseudo-run will be described. The effect involving the pseudo-run is also executed when “execute” is won by the execution possibility lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol in accordance with the symbol variable display of the special figure. However, in the simulated continuous effect, the symbol variable display of the special figure for one time (ie, one start winning prize) is performed. Temporarily suspends the change display of the decorative symbol in a part or all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208 (the update of the decorative symbol has been stopped but has not been confirmed, and the display is swung. After that, the re-variation display for changing and displaying all the decorative symbols again is executed one or more times. For example, in the state in which the decoration symbol is being updated (variable display) in the middle symbol display region 208b, the variation symbol display is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, and then re-displayed. The variation display may be started, or the variation display of the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped in all the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then the re-variation display may be started. In addition, when the temporary stop is performed, a design or a pattern other than the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped. In this pseudo continuous production, how many times the re-variation display is executed for one symbol change display of the special figure (ie, one start winning) is determined by lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. Is done. The pseudo continuous effect may be a jackpot notice effect of the change (so-called normal notice effect) for giving a notice of a big hit in the symbol change display of the special figure currently being performed, or may be a special effect currently being performed. A reach announcement effect for giving an advance notice of developing into a super reach by the symbol variation display of the figure may be used. Alternatively, it may be a look-ahead notice effect that gives a notice of a jackpot in the special figure symbol change display started after the currently performed special figure symbol change display. In any of the announcement effects, the more the number of times of the re-variation display increases, the higher the expectation (the reliability of the announcement) increases, and the effect becomes hotter. In addition, when the first number of times (for example, four times) of re-variation display is performed, the jackpot determination or the super reach determination may be performed. In addition, in the case of a pre-reading notice effect, a step-up notice may be incorporated in which the number of times of re-change display increases as the symbol change table of the special figure to be noticed approaches. For example, in the case where the symbol variation table of the special figure three times later is targeted for the notice, one re-variation display is performed in the pseudo consecutive effect in the symbol variation table of the first special figure, and the second special figure is displayed. In the pseudo continuous production in the symbol fluctuation table of the above, two re-variation displays are performed, and in the pseudo continuous production in the third special pattern fluctuation table, three re-variation displays are performed, and the special figure to be notified is displayed. In the pseudo continuous production in the symbol variation table, four re-variation displays are performed.

In the pseudo continuous production, the first pseudo continuous notification is started simultaneously with the temporary stop. Here, the first pseudo continuous notification is to notify that the pseudo continuous production is started or that the pseudo continuous production is continued. For example, one or a plurality of symbols or all symbols (hereinafter, referred to as “pseudo consecutive symbols”) of the combination of the symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the first pseudo consecutive notification. I do. That is, the pseudo continuous pattern is a decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 7") shown in FIG. 132 (b), a combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6", or the like). (A so-called chance eye) or another pattern or picture. In addition, the pseudo continuous symbol may be a symbol that has been finally stopped (third stop) in a temporary stop, may be a middle symbol, or may be a combination of a left symbol and a right symbol. Alternatively, the first pseudo consecutive notification may be character display, lamp lighting, or sound output, which is started simultaneously with the temporary stop.
FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect involving pseudo-runs in a stepwise manner.

  In the example of FIG. 161, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), a transparent part display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b which continuously displays the variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. 161 (a). At the same time, the transmission section 191 as the operation means B rotates to the forward inclined position. At this stage, the chance button 136 as the operation means A remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 161 (c) shows the operation valid period, in which the transmission unit 191 is pushed down to the initial position. Then, in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191, the transmission unit display 191X disappears as shown in FIG. 161 (d), and the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b this time, The chance button lamp 138 starts to light red, and the chance button 136 starts vibrating at the initial position. In FIG. 161 (d), the pseudo continuous effect is started, and a part of the pseudo continuous symbol N is also displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the initial position display 136X whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 161 (d) is displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous symbol N whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 161 (d). As a result, a part of the pseudo consecutive symbol N is displayed. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate during the operation valid period. When the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 161 (e), the initial position display 136X disappears, the pseudo continuous symbol N remains, and the temporary stop is performed. There is a case where it is performed and a case where it disappears to the pseudo consecutive symbol N together with the initial position display 136X and the temporary stop is not performed. That is, the effects in FIGS. 161 (d) to (f) are judge effects on whether or not the temporary stop is executed. In FIG. 161 (f), the pseudo temporary symbol N remains, and the first temporary stop is performed. Both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 161 (f) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are displayed during the change, and the change icon c is still displayed.

  In FIG. 161 (g), the pseudo continuous symbol N has disappeared, and the update of the decorative symbol (re-variable display) has started in all three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Note that the design change display of the special figure is still continued, and both the first special figure display device 212 and the fourth figure 2081 of the special figure 1 are in the changing state, and the change icon c is still displayed. However, the start of the re-variation display here looks as if the start of the symbol change display of the special figure was performed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (g) displays characters “× 2”. Here, the re-variation display is the first time, but when it is viewed as a special figure symbol display, it looks like the second special figure symbol display due to the start of the pseudo continuous production. The character "x2" is displayed in the meaning to represent. That is, the character display of “× 2” is a notification indicating the number of times related to the start of the pseudo continuous production. The character display of “× 2” corresponds to an example of the second pseudo-serial notification.

In FIG. 161 (i), the symbol variation display in which the first temporary stop has been performed in FIG. 161 (f) continues, and the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed again, and the transparent portion 191 is displayed. When the transmission unit 191 is rotated to the forward inclined position and the transmission unit 191 is pushed down to the initial position, a second temporary stop judge effect is started.
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of another effect involving pseudo-runs.

  In the example in FIG. 162, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b which continuously displays the fluctuation in the reach state shown in FIG. 162 (a). At the same time, the transmission section 191 as the operation means B rotates to the forward inclined position. Also, the transmission part display 191X whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 162 (b) overlaps with the gray provisional pseudo continuous symbol N 'whose display has been started at the timing of FIG. 162 (b). As a result, in FIG. 162 (b), a part of the gray provisional pseudo-continuous symbol N 'is also displayed.

  FIG. 162 (c) is within the operation validity period, and when the transmission unit 191 is pressed down to the initial position, a judge effect is started according to the operation of the transmission unit 191. In this judge effect, when the transmission unit 191 is operated, the transmission unit display 191X disappears, and the temporary pseudo continuous symbol N ′ changes from the gray temporary pseudo continuous symbol N ′ to the white pseudo continuous symbol N and a temporary stop is performed. Even if the transparent portion display 191X disappears, there is a case where the temporary pseudo symbol N 'does not change to the pseudo consecutive symbol N and the temporary pseudo symbol N' disappears and the temporary stop is not performed. In FIG. 162 (d), the first temporary stop is performed while changing to the white pseudo-continuous symbol N. The change from the temporary pseudo consecutive symbol N ′ to the pseudo consecutive symbol N is a change in the display mode, but may change to a completely different symbol. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 162 (d) and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are also in the changing display, and the changing icon c is still displayed.

  In this example, even if the transmission unit 191 is operated, that is, even if the result of the judge effect shown in FIG. 162 (d) is displayed, the chance button 136 as the operation means A is turned off at the initial position without vibrating. Although it remains, the chance button 136 may start vibrating at the initial position in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191, may start vibrating while moving forward, or may start moving forward. Then, it may vibrate after reaching the advance position. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned on or blinking.

  FIGS. 162 (b ') to (d') are modified examples of FIGS. (B) to (d). FIG. 162 (b ′) and FIG. 162 (c ′) show a fantastic effect in which the temporary stop has not yet been started and a pseudo continuous effect may be started. That is, the pseudo consecutive symbol N is displayed above the temporary stop position, and the pseudo consecutive symbol N is not displayed at the temporary stop position. As shown in FIG. 162 (b ′), the chance button 136 as the operation means A is vibrating, and the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 162 (c ′). The vibration of the chance button 136 may be started before the state shown in FIG. 162 (b ′). In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo consecutive symbol N is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 162 (d '), and the temporary stop is performed. Conversely, the pseudo consecutive symbol N may disappear in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and in this case, the pseudo consecutive effect is not started. Thus, the effects of FIGS. 162 (b ′) to (d ′) in which the chance button 136 as the operation means A is involved are a kind of the judge effect, and correspond to an example of the second effect.

  FIGS. 162 (b ″) to (d ″) are modified examples of FIGS. (B ′) to (d ′). In FIG. 162 (b ′) and FIG. 162 (c ′), the chance button 136 as the operating means A is vibrating, but in FIG. 162 (b ″) to FIG. Is not vibrating, and the transmission section 191 as the operation means B is rotated to the forward inclined position. In FIGS. 162 (b ″) to (d ″), as in FIGS. 162 (b ′) and (c ′), a tandem effect in which a pseudo continuous effect may be started is executed. ing. Then, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing shown in FIG. In response to the pushing operation of the transmission unit 191, the second pseudo consecutive symbol N2 is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 162 (d ″), and the temporary stop is performed. The second pseudo consecutive symbol N2 is a different symbol from the pseudo consecutive symbol N. Conversely, also here, the pseudo continuous symbol N may disappear in response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191, and in this case, the pseudo continuous effect is not started. Also in this example, when the judge effect is being executed and the pseudo continuous effect is started, if an operation means (transparent portion 191) different from the chance button 136 is operated, the temporary operation is performed in accordance with the operation of the chance button 136. A pseudo consecutive symbol (second pseudo consecutive symbol N2) different from the pseudo consecutive symbol to be stopped temporarily stops.

  The description of the specific examples of the effects up to now has been an example of the special figure variable display, but the same applies to other than the special figure variable display.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing stepwise an example in which the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed from the swing fluctuation display, and an effect involving the operation means is executed during the big hit game. FIG. 164 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure showing step by step.

  In FIG. 163 (a), the swing fluctuation display of the combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” with no change in probability (normal jackpot) is performed in the central area of the background screen where the lords are gathered. ing. In this example, the promotion effect is started during the execution of the fluctuation display. Here, the promotion effect is a jackpot type promotion effect (probable change promotion effect). As shown in FIG. 163 (b), on the background screen where the lords are gathering, the swing fluctuation display is temporarily reduced to the upper left. At the same time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the center area, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red at the initial position. Probable change promotion production here is a kind of button production and also a kind of judge production.

  FIG. 163 (c) shows the operation valid period. When the chance button 136 is operated, the initial position display 136X disappears in response to the operation, and the fluctuation display of the combination of the decorative symbols is displayed again. In this example, the probabilistic change promotion has failed, and as shown in FIG. 163 (d), the "decorative 4"-"decorative 4"-"decorative 4" which is a combination of even-numbered decorative patterns has no probable change (normal jackpot). Is displayed. On the other hand, if the probable change promotion is successful, the fluctuation display of the odd combination of decorative patterns (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is displayed again. You. However, whether or not a jackpot with a probability change is determined by a win / fail determination (lottery) at the time of winning, and whether the success or failure of the probability change promotion is determined in accordance with the determination of the win / fail determination (lottery) at the time of winning. The same applies to the probable change promotion effect during the jackpot game described below. Thereafter, the combination of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols displayed as the fluctuation fluctuation display in FIG. 163 (d) is confirmed and displayed (see FIG. 163 (e)).

  In FIG. (F) following FIG. 163 (e), a big hit start effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a big hit game is started. In the big hit game, it is suggested that a right hit is performed, and a hitting suggestion notification 110X is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. 163 (g) is displayed as "first time" on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (g). Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (g), the probable change promotion effect is started again. Probable change promotion production here is also a kind of button production and also a kind of judge production. In FIG. 163 (h), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light up in red at the initial position to urge the button to be pressed. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that has begun to light up in red, an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting a continuous tapping operation of the chance button 136, and "continuous tapping" And a remaining period meter display 136c indicating the remaining period for which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "hit repeatedly" are collectively referred to as a continuous hit display 136R of operation promotion notification. It is noted that the three images 136a, 136b, and 136c may not include all of the character indications of "hitting repeatedly", but may be a hitting display 136R. For example, the continuous hit display 136R that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used.

In addition, a level display L2 is also displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This level display L2 is a display in which the level is increased in accordance with the number of continuous hits, and the level display L2 shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, and in FIG. 163 (i), there is no remaining operation valid period. With the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 163 (i), the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the level display L2 on the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached three levels, but has not reached the MAX level. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. (J) subsequent to (i), the continuous hit display 136R and the level display L2 disappear, and a character display of “defense failure” indicating failure of probable change promotion is displayed.

  Further, during the big hit game started in FIG. 163 (f), as shown in FIG. 164 (k) following FIG. 163 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification. In addition to the display, the character display of “press and survive” is also displayed, and the transmission section 191 as the operation means B has been rotated to the forward inclined position, and the button effect has also started. This button effect is an effect for judging whether or not a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening) can be aimed at in a specific round, that is, whether or not the specific winning opening V is in a winable state. Note that the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position.

  FIG. 164 (l) shows the operation valid period of the transmission unit 191 and the transmission unit 191 is pushed down to the initial position. In response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191, the chance button 136 as the operation unit A starts to vibrate at the initial position. Note that the chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking in red, or may remain off. Although the chance button 136 has started to vibrate, the vibration may not be started in some cases.

  Further, in response to the pressing operation of the transmission unit 191, the effect movable body (movable role) operates. That is, the crest actor 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then a pair of union actors 248 advances from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. The pair of combined role objects 248 and the family crest role material 247 are united by being sandwiched by the role items 248.

Next, the crest role object 247 and the pair of union role objects 248 return to the initial position, and the result of the judge effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The character display of "Successful return" indicating that a winning state can be achieved is displayed. Although the chance button 136 does not vibrate at the timing of FIG. 164 (m), it may vibrate at this timing. Further, at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208, a star mark with the letters GET is also displayed. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 164 (o) following FIG. 164 (n) suggests that the next round is a specific round and a specific winning opening V (for example, a V winning opening) is aimed at. Characters are displayed. In FIG. 164 (q), the specific round is started, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to the character display of “Aim for V”, and the game ball passes through the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Then, as shown in FIG. 9 (q), the letter "V" is displayed in a large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, a winning is made in the specific winning opening V, and a bonus (for example, a transition to a certain change state after the end of the big hit game). ) Is given. Then, an end effect of the big hit game is executed (see FIG. 164 (r)), and the big hit game ends.
In the above description,

"First operation means [for example, the transmission unit 191, the cross key 181a, the OK button 181b, the cancel button 181c, the button B (second chance button 137), etc.]"
A second operation means [for example, a chance button 136 or the like];
A gaming table with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,

  The first effect is a notice effect [for example, FIGS. 150 (m) to (q), FIGS. 151 (m) to (q), FIGS. 152 (m) to (q), and FIG. (M) to the final judge effect shown in FIG.

  The first effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the first operation means,

In the first effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. 150 (m) to FIG. 150 (p), FIG. 151 (m) to FIG. 152 (m) to FIG. (R1), FIG. 153 (m) to FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  Both the first operation means and the second operation means may be a button, such as a chance button, another chance button, a cross key, a glass button, or a lever, a touch sensor, or a touch panel. Good. That is, as long as the first operation means and the second operation means are different operation means, these buttons, keys, levers and the like may be appropriately combined. In addition, the operation means includes those that can be operated by holding their hands even if they cannot be directly contacted, in addition to those that can be operated by direct contact.

  Further, even if each operation means has the same function (for example, vibration), the mode may be different depending on the operation means such as the vibration intensity, vibration time, stroke, and pitch. For example, the first operating means may be capable of executing the vibration according to the first aspect, and the second operating means may be capable of executing the vibration according to the second aspect.

  The notice effect may be one of a plurality of notice effects. The notice here may be a jackpot notice, a development notice to super reach, a pseudo consecutive start start notice, or a preliminary notice of the number of pseudo repeats. .

  In addition, the execution period of the preview effect, which is the first effect, may be from the start of display of the image displayed for the first time after the button operation to the temporary stop (fluctuation fluctuation) of the decorative symbol, or the determination of the decorative symbol. It may be up to the display. Alternatively, the moving means may start moving from the first position to the second position and then return to the first position, or may start moving to the first position. Is also good. Further, specifically, when the first effect is a final judge effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation) in a combination of the big hit symbol mode from the start of the notification or the like performed for the first time after the button operation. Or until the result after the button operation (especially the result of successful operation) is displayed, may be the execution period of the first effect.

  Further, the second operating means vibrates in a state where the movable means is located at a second position (for example, a final arrival position) when the first effect is a final judge effect or the like. The vibration may be performed in a state in which an effect display or the like executed along with the movement of the movable unit is displayed, or the state in which the movable unit is located at the second position and the effect It may vibrate while the image is displayed.

  Further, "the first effect is started in response to the operation of the first operating means" may mean that the first effect is started only in response to the operation of the first operating means. Then, the first effect may be started in response to the operation of the first operation unit and other conditions (operation of another operation unit or the like) being satisfied. Further, the first effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means, or even if the first operation means is not operated, if other conditions are satisfied, The first effect may be started. For example, when a certain period of time has elapsed, the first operation may be started even if the first operation unit is not operated, or conversely, if there is no operation of the first operation unit, the certain period of time may be used. Even after the passage, the first effect may not be started.

  Further, the first effect may be configured to be started in response to an operation of the first operation means. In this case, it may be always started, may not be started, may be started other than the operation of the first operation means, or only by the operation of the first operation means It may be started.

  Further, the first effect may be executed when the first operation means is operated in the first state. Here, the first state may be a state in which notification for prompting operation of the first operation unit is performed, or a state in which such notification is not performed.

  Alternatively, when the first condition is satisfied, the first effect may be executed. The satisfaction of the first condition here includes that the first operation means is operated.

  Further, “in the first effect” may or may not extend over the first effect.

  Further, "in the first effect, the second operating means vibrates" includes starting the vibration without permission, and also including starting the vibration when the condition is satisfied.

  Further, the second operation means may be one which does not vibrate unless operated continuously, may be one which continuously vibrates without being pressed, and is not continuous but intermittent. It may vibrate dynamically.

  Further, even after the first effect is finished, the second operating means may be capable of vibrating. In this case, the second operating means may necessarily vibrate, It may not be performed, may execute other than the vibration, or may execute only the vibration.

  Furthermore, it may be one that continuously vibrates from the first effect, or one that temporarily stops and then restarts. Alternatively, conversely, the second operation means may not vibrate after the first effect is completed.

  Further, when the first effect can be divided into a plurality of effects, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of at least one of the plurality of effects. The second operation means may be configured to vibrate during execution of an effect that is performed at intervals among the plurality of effects, or the second operation means may be configured to vibrate in all of the plurality of effects. The second operating means may be configured to vibrate.

Further, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate during the execution of the first effect. Furthermore, "the second operation means is configured to vibrate during the execution of the first effect" means that the vibration in the second operation means is related to the first effect. Regardless of whether or not to do so, it may be configured to be performed.
Also,
"One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,

The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIG. 144 (m) or FIG. 145 (m)),
The aspect of the second effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,

  The second effect is configured to be started in response to an operation of the second operation means (for example, a pressing operation shown in FIG. 143 (l) or FIG. 145 (l)),

Before the second effect is started, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. 143 (j) to FIG. 145 (k), FIG. 145 (j) to FIG. (K) etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the other effect may be such that the second movable means also moves, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

  Further, the second operation means may be configured to start vibration after the start of display of an image prompting an operation, or may be configured to start vibration after the start of an operation reception state. Is also good.

  Further, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate at least before the second effect is started, and may be configured to vibrate simultaneously with the second effect. It may be configured to vibrate even after the end of the second effect.

  Further, an effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the second operation means is prepared, and the second effect is N (plural) effects of a plurality of types of effects. It may be configured so that the second operation means may vibrate before the second effect is started.

  Furthermore, everything that is performed by operating the second operation means may correspond to the second effect, and may include, for example, all of a liquid crystal display, lighting or blinking of an LED, and the like. However, the second effect may be directed to only the effect performed on the liquid crystal display means.

  Further, the vibration of the second operating means performed in the first effect continues even if the second operating means is operated until a predetermined vibration time elapses, and the vibration time elapses. Then, it may be terminated, may be terminated when the second operation means is operated, may be terminated at the same time when the first production is completed, or the first production may be completed. This may be continued until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (may end immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol or simultaneously with the stop display of the decorative symbol).

  On the other hand, the vibration of the second operating means performed before the second effect is started may be terminated when the second operating means is operated, or the second effect may be started. The process may be terminated at the same time. In these cases, even if the vibration of the second operation means is the same, the vibration ending condition is determined depending on whether the vibration is performed in the first performance or before the second performance is started. Will be different.

On the other hand, the vibration of the second operating means performed before the start of the second effect continues even if the first operating means is operated until a predetermined vibration time elapses. Then, it may end after the vibration time elapses, may continue even after the first effect ends, and may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol). Alternatively, the process may end at the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbol.) In these cases, the vibration ending condition is the same between the case where the first effect is performed and the case where the second effect is performed before the second effect is started.
Also,

"A second display means capable of displaying an image [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] is provided.
The first effect is an effect by displaying the image,
The second effect is an effect by displaying the image,

If the second operating means is operated in a state where the second operating means is vibrating during the execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is Configured to run continuously,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this game console, during the execution of the first effect, there is a case where no effect is newly started even if the second operating means is operated while the second operating means is vibrating. The second effect may not be started, but a seventh effect (for example, for outputting music from a speaker) different from the second effect may be started.

  Further, the second operation means may not vibrate before the start of the second effect.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect.

Further, the first effect may be an effect only by displaying the image, and the second effect may be an effect only by displaying the image.
Also,

"In the second effect, the second operation means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIG. 145 (m) or the like]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The second operation means may be vibrating before the start of the second effect, and may be vibrated continuously in the second effect, or may be restarted after being interrupted once. Alternatively, the mode of vibration (for example, vibration intensity, vibration time, stroke, pitch, etc.) may be different before and after the start of the second effect. More specifically, the vibration of the second operating means before the start of the second effect may be executed during a reception state period of the second operating means.

Further, a game console including a first operation means and a second operation means, is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of effects, one of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is , A first effect, one of the plurality of effects is a second effect, the first effect is a notice effect, the second effect is a notice effect. Yes, the first effect is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operating means, in the first effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate In the second effect, the second operation means may be configured to vibrate.
Also,

"The second operation means vibrates [for example, FIG. 143 (j) to FIG. 143 (j)] compared to the case where the second operation means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 141 (j) to FIG. FIG. (L) and the like] are configured to be more easily shifted to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state or a later probable change state).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The “advantageous state for the player” refers to a gaming state of a big hit (small hit) or a loss, a state of a probable change between a probable change and a time saving, a 15R big hit and a 4R big hit. The gaming state of the 15R jackpot (the jackpot with the larger number of rounds) may be the gaming state, or the state where 100 out of 100 and 50 times of the electric support may be given.

  In addition, “to make it easier to shift” may mean that if the advantageous state is the big hit gaming state, the game always shifts to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the vibration of the second operation means in the first effect may be a big hit determination, or the second operation means may necessarily vibrate in the first effect.

  In addition, a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a decorative design display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display is provided.

When the second operating means vibrates [for example, FIG. 143 (j) to FIG. 143], the second operating means vibrates more than when the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIG. 141 (j) to FIG. (L) etc.] may be configured so that the result of the symbol variation display is more likely to be connected to the big hit, and furthermore, may be configured to be more easily connected to the big hit with the probability change.
Also,
"One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,

The third effect is a notice effect [eg, a judge effect shown in FIGS. 158 (m ′) to (q ′)).
The aspect of the third effect is an aspect different from the aspect of the first effect,

  The third effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the first operation means,

In the third effect, the second operation means is configured not to vibrate [for example, FIG. 158 (m ′) to FIG. 158 (q ′), etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The “mode different from the mode of the first effect” may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the other effect may be such that the second movable means also moves, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is Different modes may be used.

Also, the second operation means is vibrating before the start of the third effect, does not vibrate during the third effect, and resumes the vibration when the third effect ends. It may be something.
Also,

"The third effect is an effect that is configured not to be executed simultaneously with the first effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Note that, during a period in which any one of the third effect and the first effect is being executed, the other effect may not be executed.

Furthermore, it may be configured such that one of the first effect and the third effect is started in response to an operation of the first operation means.
Also,
"It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification,

  The first notification is a notification for prompting the operation of the first operation means [for example, FIG. 150 (k) and FIG. 150 (l), FIG. 151 (k) and FIG. 151 (l), FIG. 152 (k). -(L2), FIG. 153 (k), and FIG.

The first effect is performed during a first period [for example, a period of FIG. 150 (k) to FIG. 150 (l), a period of FIG. 151 (k) to FIG. 151 (l), and FIG. 152 (k) to FIG. (L2), the period of FIG. 153 (m) to the period of FIG. 153 (l), etc.].
The first notification is configured to be performed in the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
That is, the first period is a period during which the first notification is performed.
Also,

"The second operation means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is being executed [for example, the entire period in the examples of FIGS. 151 to 152 and FIG. 153, and in the example of FIG. (Q) in the same figure, it does not vibrate, so that it vibrates during a part of the time period, etc.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

"The first operation means is means [for example, a cross key 181a] configured not to vibrate,

The second operating means is a means [for example, a chance button 136] configured to be vibrable.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, "vibration" means the direct vibration that the operating means itself vibrates, and does not include the indirect vibration when the other member vibrates indirectly by vibrating. However, in some cases, indirect vibration may be included.

Note that even in a state in which the first effect is not performed [for example, a state in which the pseudo judge effect shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to (e) is being executed instead of the final judge effect, etc.], May be configured to vibrate the operation means.
Also,

“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The gaming table is a slot machine [eg, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
It may be.
* D3047P
Next, a back button effect in which the start timing changes according to the operation will be described.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 165 (A) is a diagram conceptually showing a configuration of a pachinko machine different from pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those given above. In addition, description of items that have been described so far may be omitted.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 165 (A) has two chance buttons. Hereinafter, the chance button described so far is referred to as a button A or a first chance button 136, and another chance button different from the first chance button 136 is referred to as a button B or a second chance button 137. The button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the ball firing handle 134 than the button A (first chance button 136). That is, the button A (first chance button 136) is provided at a position that is a straight line distance (shortest distance) from the ball launching handle 134 and is LA away from the button B (second chance button 137). Is provided at a position LB away from the ball firing handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), and LA is longer than LB. From another viewpoint, the button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the center position of the pachinko machine 100 in the left-right direction than the button A (second chance button 136). I have.

  The positional relationship between the button A (second chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the relationship described above. Further, the button B (second chance button 137) is also a kind of movable means, like the first chance button 136, may be vibrable, and may further advance (project). Conversely, the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the movable means, but may not be vibrated and may not be able to advance (project). Further, the button B (second chance button 137) may or may not have a built-in chance button lamp. Further, a plurality of chance buttons, such as a third chance button, and operation means different from the chance button may be further provided.

  In each of the examples described up to FIG. 164, a button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 165 (A) can be applied instead of the transmitting unit 191 described as an example of the operation means B. Similarly, an operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 128 can be applied instead of the transmission unit 191. However, since the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 128 does not have a vibration function, it is necessary to provide a vibration function. There is.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 165 (A).

  In FIG. 165 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmation display) the stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has a symbol “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed.

  In FIG. 165 (b), the first special figure display device 212 has started to display the variation of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 165 (c), the reach effect is produced. Has been started. When the reach effect is started, the operation shifts to an operation valid state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is accepted as valid. However, a notification that the operation is valid (for example, lighting or blinking of the chance button lamp 138 in red) or an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) (for example, the initial position display 136X) ) Is not performed, and the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, a person who knows from the information of the slingshot magazine or the like that the operation may be in an effective state when the reach effect is started, operates the button A (first chance button 136). Then, in response to the operation of the button A (first chance button 136), an image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the button A (first chance button 136) is displayed. , So-called back button.

Not only the button A (first chance button 136), but also the button B (second chance button 137) or the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is displayed even in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. May be performed.
FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating an example of the fourth effect and the fifth effect in a stepwise manner.

  In each figure in FIG. 166, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B (second chance button 137) are vertically arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208s. The actual positional relationship between the two is the positional relationship described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 166 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (decision display) a stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (a), four black circle holding icons which are the holding display of the special figure 1 are displayed, and no changing icon is displayed in the changing icon display area 208e. .

  In FIG. 166 (b), the design change display of the special figure has been started on the first special figure display device 212, and the decoration design display device 208 also starts the change display of the decoration design. In addition, the number of hold icons is reduced by one and three (hold icons h1 to h3) are displayed, and a change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 166 (c), the reach effect has been started. Here, the button effect is started according to the start of the reach effect. The button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 166 (d) has begun to light up in red. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (d) has a button image 137a imitating the button B (second chance button 137) that has begun to light red, and a button B (second chance button 137). ), An arrow display 137b and a character display of “PUSH” as a promotion display for prompting the operation (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 137c as a display relating to the operation valid period of the button B (second chance button 137). Are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 137a, 137b, 137c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as an operation prompting button B display 137X.

  In the example shown in FIG. 166, when the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the button B is operated at relatively early timing (FIG. 166 (e)). That is, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

  When the button B is operated, in response to the operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image C of a cut-in notice by the character of the lord instead of the button B display 137X (see FIG. 166 (f)). ). When the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, it returns to a state where the button B is turned off. The effect in which the image C of the cut-in notice is displayed in response to the operation of the button B is a button effect, and corresponds to an example of a fifth effect. The display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character is an effect display displayed in the variation display of the decorative pattern. The button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification corresponds to an example of the third notification, and the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed (the period from FIG. 166 (d) to FIG. 166 (e)) is the third notification. This corresponds to an example of the third period.

  The display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character (fifth effect) may be an effect that is not started unless the button B (the second chance button 137) is operated, but the button B (the fifth effect) may be used. Even if the second chance button 137) is not operated, if the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed, that is, if the operation valid period of the button B elapses, the effect may be started when the period elapses. The production may be started.

  After the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord displayed by the button effect from the reach effect is displayed, the second period is started. That is, the second period is a period started in association with the operation of the button B (the second chance button 137). In this case, after a while after the operation of the button B has been performed (the time for one frame). ) And starts from FIG. 166 (g). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (g) still displays the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord, and prompts the operation of the button A (first chance button 136). Is not displayed. The button A remains off at the initial position. However, the button A is operated at the timing of FIG. 166 (g). In response to the operation of the button A here, the image G of the character “hot” is displayed so as to overlap the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord. The image G of the character “hot” is an image of a cut-in notice that it is determined that a big hit will be made in the currently performed symbol variation display, and will be an indication of the judge result of the final judge effect. In addition, since the effect includes the button A, the effect is also a button effect, and corresponds to an example of the fourth effect started in response to the operation of the button A. The image G of the character “hot” has a different display form from the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character. In addition, the image of the cut-in notice that there is a high possibility of losing in the currently performed symbol change display is an image of a character of “sorry”.

  The second period started from FIG. 166 (g) is the operation valid period of the button A, but the initial position display 136X is not displayed and the operation valid period is not notified. The button A here corresponds to a so-called back button. The display of the image G of the character “hot” (fourth effect) is an effect that is not started unless the button A (first chance button 136) is operated. That is, the display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the lord character (fifth effect) may start even if the button B is not operated, whereas the button A corresponding to the back button may be started. If is not operated, the fourth production is not started. The end timing of the second period is the earlier of the timing when the button A is operated and the timing when the operation valid period ends.

  In this example, the execution period of the button effect of FIGS. 166 (d) to (g) partially overlaps the execution period of the back button effect of FIGS. All may be duplicated. More specifically, the effect period after the button operation of the button effect and the operation effective period of the back button effect overlap at least in part. Conversely, the production period after the button operation of the back button production and the operation validity period of the button production may overlap at least in part of the period.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating, in stages, an example in which the timing of operating the button B is later than the example illustrated in FIG. 166. The timing of the figure number of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 167 matches the timing of the figure number of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 166. Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 166 will be mainly described, and description of the same points may be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 167, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about ／. That is, the button B is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 166 (see FIG. 167 (f)). As a result, as compared with the example shown in FIG. 166, the start of the button effect (fifth effect) started in response to the operation of the button B is delayed by one frame, and the operation of the button B is performed for one frame. The start timing of the second period, which is started after the elapse of time, is also shifted by one frame later. In the example shown in FIG. 167, the button A is operated following the operation of the button B, as shown in FIG. 167. However, at the timing of FIG. 167, the second period is started. The operation of the button A here is accepted, but is not treated as valid. Even if the player operates the button A at the timing of FIG. 167 (g), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change at all. Therefore, the player operates the button A again at the timing of FIG. 167 (h). . In response to the second operation, the image G of the character “hot” is cut-in and the fourth effect is started.

  As described above, the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 166 (FIG. 166 (g) corresponding to an example of the first period) is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 166 (b)). ), The start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 167 (see FIG. 167 corresponding to an example of the second time). (H)) is a time after five frames (corresponding to an example of the second time) have elapsed from the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 167 (b)), and the start timing of the second period is Variable (undefined).

  Although the example of FIG. 166 and the example of FIG. 167 are examples of effects related to the operation of two types of chance buttons, these effects are performed by operating means ( For example, the effect may be replaced with an effect related to the operation of the transmission unit 191 or the third chance button.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram for further explaining the relationship between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137).

  FIG. 168 shows two examples. In the example shown above, the chance button lamp of the button A (first chance button 136) is lit in red, and the button B (second chance button) is lit. The chance button lamp of the chance button 137) is lit in blue. The lighting of the chance button lamp prompts an operation. In this example, the button A has a function of vibrating (first function), and the button B has a function of rotating (second function).

  In FIG. 168 (a), of the buttons A and B, only the button A is operated. When the button A is operated, it performs the first function and starts vibrating. Note that the no-operation button B remains lit.

  In FIG. 168 (b), of the buttons A and B, only the button B is operated. When the button B is operated, it performs a second function and starts rotating. On the other hand, the button A that has not been operated exhibits the first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, the function (first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed by only one operation (here, the operation of button B). Also, in this example, even if the button B137 is operated while the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates and the operated button B rotates.

  In the example shown in the lower part of FIG. 168, both the button A136 and the button B137 are lit. In this example, the button A136 has a function of vibrating (first function) and a function of rotating (second function).

  In FIG. 168 (A), of the buttons A and B, only the button A is operated. When operated, the button A exhibits the first function and starts to vibrate, and also exhibits the second function and starts to rotate. As a result, the button A vibrates while rotating according to the operation. Note that the no-operation button B remains lit.

In FIG. 168 (B), of the buttons A and B, only the button B is operated. The button B remains lit even when operated, and neither vibration nor rotation is started. On the other hand, the button A that has not been operated exhibits the first function and starts vibrating in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, only one of the functions (the operation of the button B) can enjoy only a part of the plurality of functions of the other (the button A) (the first function). Further, in this example, the button A136 vibrates even if the button B137 is operated while the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed.
In the above description,

A game console equipped with a second operation means [for example, a button A (chance button 136) or the like]
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notification,

  One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect [for example, a cut-in notice of “hot fever” shown in each of FIGS. 166 (h) to (i) and 167 (i)). And

The fourth effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the second operation means,
One notification of the plurality of types of notification is a second notification,

  The second notification is a notification that prompts an operation of the second operation unit (for example, an initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, and the like).

  The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed in a variable display of a decorative symbol [for example, 3 ↓ 3 displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in each of FIGS. 166 and 167]. ,

The fourth effect is an effect that is started when the second operation means is operated in a second period (for example, FIG. 166 (g), FIG. 167 (h), etc.),
The second notification is configured not to be performed in the second period,

  The second period is a period that may start at a first time in the variable display (for example, the time in FIG. 166 (g)).

The second period is a period that may start at a second time in the variable display (for example, the time in FIG. 167 (h)).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of effects may always be executed, may not be executed, may be executed other than the plurality of types of effects, or only a plurality of types of effects may be executed. .
Also,

A third operation means [for example, a button B (second chance button 137) or the like]

The second period is a period that is started in association with the operation of the third operation means (for example, after the button B is operated, the cut-in notice by the display of the main character is started, or the like).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“One of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a fifth effect [for example, a cut-in notice by a character display of a lord starting from FIGS. 166 (f) and 167 (g), etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notification is a third notification,

  The third notification is a notification that prompts an operation of the third operation unit (for example, a button B display 137X of an operation promotion notification),

  The fifth effect is configured to be started according to the operation of the third operation means,

The fifth effect is performed in a third period [for example, the period in FIGS. 166 (d) to (e), the period in FIGS. 167 (d) to (f), etc.]. Is operated [for example, FIG. 166 (e), FIG. 167 (f), etc.].
The third notification is configured to be performed in the third period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
That is, the third period is a period during which the third notification is performed.
Also,
"The mode of the fifth effect is a mode different from the mode of the fourth effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The fifth effect is an effect that is performed in the variation display of decorative symbols [eg, FIG. 166 (f), FIG. 167 (g), etc.).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

"The fifth effect is an effect that is not started unless the third operation means is operated in the third period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

"The fifth effect is an effect that is started even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In this case, the fifth effect may be an effect started after the third period has elapsed, or may be an effect started after the third period has elapsed.
Also,

"The fourth effect is an effect that is not started unless the second operation means is operated in the second period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In this way, the fifth effect is clearly different from the effect that is started even when the third operation means is not operated in the third period, and the operation means is changed. It will be possible to give the entangled production a width.
Also,

“The first time is a time after a lapse of a first time (for example, four frames) from the start of the variable display (for example, FIG. 166 (b)).

The second timing is a timing after a lapse of a second time (for example, five frames) from the start of the variable display (for example, FIG. 167 (b)),
The second time is a time different from the first time,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
* D2970P

Subsequently, an example of an icon change display different from the icon change notice will be described by taking a promotion effect as an example.
FIG. 169 is a diagram showing three examples of the promotion effect.

  In the example shown on the left of FIG. 169, during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 168A, the promotion effect starts at the same time as the reach effect starts, or after the reach effect starts. That is, the promotion effect is started during the reach state. In the promotion effect here, a display AT (first display) of a noteworthy item appears in the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In the display AT of noticeable items shown in FIG. 169 (a), it is informed that attention is paid to the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In other words, the display state of the currently displayed decorative pattern in the reach state (“2 ↓ 2”) is directly displayed to notify the user of interest. Next, in FIG. 169 (c), the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, “decoration 7” is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the high-speed fluctuation continues in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is displayed. A symbol combination in which three same even-numbered decorative patterns are arranged (“decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”) is a normal jackpot symbol combination without a probability change, whereas a pattern in which three identical odd-numbered decorative patterns are arranged. Since the combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is a special jackpot symbol combination with certainty change, it is likely that the promotion with certainty change will succeed here. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 169, both the target of interest in the display AT of the item of interest and those that have changed thereafter match in the decorative design. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 169 (a)) matches the actual change display (FIG. 169 (c)). In an effect in which a symbol such as a decorative symbol is changed, a configuration may be adopted in which the advance notice display on the symbol always matches the actual change display.

  In the display AT of the noteworthy items, the display state of the decorative pattern currently in the reach state (“2 ↓ 2”) is directly displayed, but the display state of the decorative pattern after the change is displayed. The state (“7 ↓ 7”) may be directly displayed as a notice display of the effect.

  In the example shown in the center of FIG. 169, in the display AT of noticeable items in the promotion effect, it is informed that attention is paid to the rightmost icon among the four displayed icons. The four icons displayed in the display AT of the noteworthy items are icons corresponding to the reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are not displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f. , Can be seen as a type of hold icon. Therefore, in the display AT of a notable item shown in FIG. 169 (b), it is informed that attention is paid to the fourth right holding icon h4 on the rightmost of the four holding icons displayed. In the display AT of a noteworthy item shown in FIG. 169 (b), four hold icons are displayed, but no change icons are displayed. On the other hand, only three black circles (default display modes) of the reserved icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the black circles (the default) are displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. The change icon c in the display mode) is displayed. In the display AT of a notable item shown in FIG. 169 (b), the display mode of the notable fourth hold icon h4 is a hatched display mode (a first display mode and a display mode of a prefetch notice). Is changing. Next, in FIG. 169 (c), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, and only three black circles of the holding icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Not displayed. However, in the fluctuating icon display area 208e, a fluctuating icon c of a hatched display mode (a normal notice display mode) is displayed. The display mode of this hatching is the same as the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 in the display AT of the item of interest in FIG. 169 (b). The target (the fourth holding icon h4) and the one that has changed thereafter (the changing icon c) are different. That is, in FIG. 169 (b), while a notice is given that the hold icon (fourth hold icon h4) changes, the change icon c has actually changed in FIG. different. In addition, the variable icon itself is not displayed in the display AT of the noteworthy item in FIG. 169 (b), while the fourth icon h4 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is inconsistently not displayed. This example corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 169 (b)) does not match the actual change display (FIG. 169 (c)). In the example shown in the center of FIG. 169, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual fluctuation shown in FIG. The icon c corresponds to an example of the second icon. The display AT of the item to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 169 (c) corresponds to an example of the second display. Note that in FIG. 169 (d), the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” is definitely displayed. In the fluctuating icon display area 208e of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (d), the display mode of the fluctuating icon c has returned from the hatched display mode to the black circle display mode. In addition, there is no winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the fourth holding icon h4 is not displayed.

  The display AT (FIG. 169 (B)) of the notable item of the promotion effect in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 169 is the same as the example shown in the center of FIG. 169, and is one of the four displayed icons. It is informed that attention is paid to the rightmost icon (fourth holding icon h4). The icon to be noted (fourth holding icon h4) is displayed in a hatched display mode (first display mode). This hatched display mode (first display mode) is a display mode of a look-ahead notice in which the reliability of a jackpot is relatively low. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four hold icons h1 to h4 in a default display mode and a change icon c in the same default display mode. In this example, the number of pending icons is the same between the display AT of a notable item of the promotion effect and the actual reserved icon display area 208f. In FIG. 169 (C), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noticeable item disappears, and only three holding icons h1 to h3 are still displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 has changed to the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode). The display mode of the face of the lord (second display mode) is a display mode of a look-ahead notice with a relatively high jackpot reliability. In this example, not only the attention target (fourth holding icon h4) in the display AT of the matter to be noted and the one that has changed thereafter (the first holding icon h1) are different, but also the contents of the change are indicated by hatching. The first display mode is different from the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode). Note that a fluctuating icon c having a default display mode is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 169 (C ′) is a modification example of FIG. (C), and shows a state where the display AT of the noticeable item shown in FIG. (B) has disappeared. Further, FIG. (D ′) is a diagram showing a state at the time of stop display of the decorative symbol, following FIG. (C ′). The display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIGS. 169 (C ') and (D') is not different from the display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 169 (C ′) and (D ′) also show the display state of the fluctuating icons in the fluctuating icon display area 208 e shown in FIG. FIG. 169 (E ′) following FIG. 169 (D ′) shows a state in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon which was the first hold icon h1 has been exhausted, and a new variable display of the decorative symbol has started. FIG. When a new floating display of the decorative symbol is started, a moving animation of the shift display of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon which was the first hold icon h1 moves toward the change icon display area 208e. , Is displayed as a change icon c. The hold icon, which was the second hold icon h2, is displayed as the first hold icon h1. The hold icon is displayed at the same time as the start of the movement animation, during the movement animation, or simultaneously with the end of the movement animation. Or after the end of the moving animation, the display mode changes to the display mode of the lord's face (second display mode). That is, the execution timing of the promotion display is different from the example described so far, and the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) started after the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) in which the display AT of the noteworthy item is performed. In the second symbol variation display), the promotion display is executed. The first hold icon h1 that has been changed to the display mode of the lord's face may be displayed in that display mode during the execution of the second symbol change display (for example, during the execution of the reach effect), or the display mode may be changed. Or it may disappear when the super reach effect is performed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 169 also corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 169 (B)) does not match the actual change display (FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. 169 (E ')).

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 169, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first icon, and FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. The actual first hold icon h1 shown in ') corresponds to an example of the second icon. The display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 169 (C) and (E ') is an example of the second display. Is equivalent to
FIG. 170 is a diagram showing two other examples of the promotion effect.

  In the example on the left side of FIG. 170, a mini icon such as a mini item is displayed above the hold icon. This mini-icon is an icon smaller than the hold icon, and is a notice of an effect to be executed in the symbol change display that is started when the hold corresponding to the displayed hold icon is exhausted, and about the big hit in the symbol change display. This indicates a pre-reading notice or the like. In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208 shown in FIGS. 170 (A) and (B), a mini icon of A display is placed on the leftmost first hold icon h1 of the three hold icons displayed. Two mAs are stacked. For example, the mini icon mA of A display is for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is started once. In the display AT of a notable item shown in FIG. 170 (B), one C display mini icon displayed above the leftmost icon (first hold icon h1) among the four displayed icons It has been reported that attention is paid to mC. The mini icon mA of C display is, for example, a pre-reading notice indicating that it is determined that a big hit will be made. In FIG. 170 (C), while still in the reach state, the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini icon mA of A display and the C display of C display are displayed on the first hold icon h1. Mini icons mC are stacked. That is, as the promotion display, the upper mini icon has changed from the A display mini icon mA to the C display mini icon mC, but the lower mini icon has not changed and the A display mini icon has changed. The icon remains at mA. As a result, while the number of pseudo-runs is reduced from two to one, it is foretold that the symbol variation display, which is determined to be a big hit, will be announced, and the promotion has been successful. In this example, the target of attention in the display AT of the matter to be noted is a mini-icon in which only one is displayed, whereas in the subsequent display, two mini-icons are displayed. There is a change between the first-stage mini-icon (C-display mini-icon mC), which was the target of attention in the display AT of the noticeable matter, and the first-stage mini-icon (A-display mini-icon mA) displayed thereafter. The content is also different. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 170, the mini-icon mC of C display in the display AT of the matter to be noted corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the mini-icon of A display at the first stage shown in FIG. The icon mA corresponds to an example of the second icon. The display AT of the item to be noted corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 170C corresponds to an example of the second display.

  In the example on the right side of FIG. 170, in the reach state, a promotion effect selected from three types of promotion effects is executed. The three types of promotion effects referred to here are the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 169 (a) to (c), the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 169 (a) to (d), and FIG. 169 (A). (C) or FIG. 169 (A) to (C ′) to (E ′) in FIG. In addition, all of a plurality of types of effects for which one effect is selected (here, three types of promotion effects) are displayed in advance as shown in FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 (c). )) And the actual change display (FIG. 169 (c)) may be the same type of effect, or an advance notice display (FIG. 169 (a) to FIG. 169 (d)) may be used. 169 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 169 (c)) may be a non-matching type of effect, or both a matching type of effect and a mismatching type of effect may be included. Is also good.

  In FIG. 170 (b), a display AT1 of a notable item marked “promotion chance A” as the promotion effect A, and a display AT2 of a notable item marked “promotion chance B” as the promotion effect B are shown. A display AT3 of a noteworthy item marked “promotion chance C” is displayed as the promotion effect C, and any one of the promotion effects is selected and executed by internal lottery. The selection operation may be performed by operating the button A (first chance button 136) or the button B (second chance button 137).

In the above description, the promotion effect was described as an example, but the icon change display different from the icon change notice is not limited to the promotion effect.
In the above description,
A game console provided with display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,

  One of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a fourth reserved icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (b), a fourth reserved icon h4 shown in FIG. ), Etc.).

One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a change icon c shown in FIG. 169 (c), a first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. 169 (E '). , The mini icon mA shown in FIG. 170 (C), etc.]
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display,

  After the display of the first display is started, it is configured such that the second display may be displayed,

  The first display is a display indicating that the display mode of the first icon changes [for example, noteworthy FIGS. 169 (b), 169 (B), and 170 (B) each show. Display AT of matters etc.],

The second display is a display in which the display mode of the second icon changes [for example, FIG. 169 (c), FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. 169 (E ′), FIG. 170 (C). Actual display etc. on the decorative symbol display device 208],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

The display means may be means for always displaying the plurality of types of icons, may be means for displaying the icons, or may display other than the plurality of types of icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed.
Also,

“The second icon [for example, the changing icon c shown in FIG. 169 (c)] is a different type of icon from the first icon [for example, the fourth holding icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (b)]. is there,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
[Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying symbol variation display,

  The first icon is a hold icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (b) and the like],

The suspension icon is an icon representing the number of suspension of the start of the symbol variation display by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold,

  The second icon is a change icon [for example, a change icon c illustrated in FIG. 169 (c)],

The change icon is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol change display when the hold represented by the hold icon is exhausted and the symbol change display is started.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The symbol display means may be means for always displaying the symbol change display, may be means for displaying the symbol change display, or may execute other than the symbol change display. Alternatively, only the symbol variation display may be executed.
Also,

“Symbol display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, a decorative design display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,

  The first icon is a first holding icon [for example, a fourth holding icon h4 shown in FIG. 169 (B)].

  The second icon is a second hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 169 (C) or FIG. 169 (E ′) or the like],

The suspension icon is an icon representing the number of suspension of the start of the symbol variation display by the number displayed,
The one hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one hold,

The first hold icon and the second hold icon are different icons when the hold was made,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The first icon is a display of a first type of mini item [for example, a mini icon mC of a look-ahead notice that suggests that a big hit is confirmed],

The second icon is a display of a second type of mini item [for example, a mini icon mA or the like for announcing that the pseudo continuous production is started once].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The first display is a display displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The first display is a display displayed during execution of the reach effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The second display is a display that is displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative pattern,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The second display is a display displayed during execution of the reach effect,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
* D3048P
Next, a timer notice for starting notification by a button effect will be described.
FIG. 171 is a diagram for describing a general timer notice.

  In each drawing in FIG. 171, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B are displayed beside the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation surface of the button B (the second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 165 and the like is circular, but the operation surface of the button B here is a square. The button B is referred to as a button B (operation button 137 ′), but is not limited to the shape of the operation surface, and may be named a chance button.

  In FIG. 171 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmation display) the stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative design display device 208 has the symbol “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stopped displays. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 171 (a) are illuminated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle holding icons, which are the holding displays of the special figure 1. Therefore, no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 171 (b), the first special figure display device 212 has started to display the variation of the special figure, and the decoration design display device 208 has also started the variable display of the decoration design. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbols is continuously performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Also, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 171 (b) are turned on, and only three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208. Not displayed, and the fluctuating icon c is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e in the same display mode as the hold icon. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (c), a reach effect has been started. Until now, the variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with a numeral of 3. .

  The first sub control unit 400 receives a special figure symbol change start command or a special figure hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The symbol change start command includes information indicating the change time of the symbol change display to be started. Further, even when the information indicating the fluctuation time is not included, the information indicating the stop symbol is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the fluctuation time from the information indicating the stop symbol. When the main control unit 300 prefetches up to the fluctuating time, the information indicating the prefetched fluctuating time is included in the special figure hold increase command. Is included, and the first sub control unit 400 can know the fluctuation time from the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol. If the fluctuation time is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery for execution of a timer notice.

  If the lottery for the execution of the timer notice has been won (if the result of the lottery is an execution result), the timer notice is started when the reach effect is started. The timer notice includes a display indicating the remaining time until a new effect is started, and is also a kind of a notice effect indicating that a new effect is started. The new effect referred to here may be a notice effect of a jackpot or an effect effect of whether or not a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect) is started. Note that the jackpot announcement effect includes a normal announcement effect for giving an announcement of a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display, and a look-ahead announcement effect for giving an announcement of a big hit in the subsequent symbol variation display. The display indicating the remaining time may be a meter display, a level display, or a number display. In this example, the display is a numerical display. In FIG. 171 (d), a timer notice display T is displayed on the left of the fluctuation icon display area 208e, and it is notified that the remaining time until the start of a new effect is 30:00 seconds. The remaining time displayed here is counted down as time elapses, and is 0:00 seconds in FIG. When the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the first effect display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (f), a lord character is displayed on the variable icon display area 208e. Note that the fluctuating icon c in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is still displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e in FIG. 171 (f). Further, a timer notice display T of 0:00 seconds is still displayed on the left of the fluctuation icon display area 208e, and the first effect display (character display of the lord) is at the end of the timer notice. It is a production. However, the first effect display (character display of the lord) can also be viewed as the start effect of a new effect for which the start is notified by the timer notice. In particular, the timing at which the timer notice display T disappears at 0:00 seconds may be the moment when it reaches 0:00 seconds, or may disappear at the timing of FIG. Alternatively, the timer notice has ended at 0:00 seconds, but the timer notice display T may be displayed for a certain period of time even when a new effect is started.

  In (g) of FIG. 171 following (f) of FIG. 17, although the timer notice display T has disappeared, the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed on the fluctuation icon display area 208e. A normal notice effect has been started as a new effect announced by the timer notice. In this normal notice effect, the change icon c, which was the default display mode until then, changes to the display mode of the princess face, and there is a possibility that the symbol fluctuation display that is currently continuing in the reach state may hit a big hit Has foretold.

  In FIG. 171 (h), the first effect display (character display of the lord) also disappears, and the changing icon c of the display mode of the princess face continues to be displayed in the changing icon display area 208e. continuing. After that, it develops into super-reach production, and the change icon c disappears (disappears) together with the hold icon, resulting in a big hit or a loss, and further, a loss without developing into a super-reach production. I do. In addition, even if it develops into a super-reach effect, the change icon c of the display mode of the princess's face may be kept visible without disappearing.

  FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example or the like in which a timer notice display T may be displayed in response to a button operation.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter timer, and when the lottery for execution of the timer notice is won, the internal timer is started by the counter timer. The start time of the internal count may be after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure or before the start of the symbol variation display, but in the example shown in FIG. An internal count is started. The count value is set in the counter timer before the start, and is counted by a countdown method. The time represented by the count value is a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure, but may be a time longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure. FIG. 172 shows the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 131 in a pseudo manner. In the example shown in FIG. 172, the value of 40:00 seconds is set in the counter timer 412, and the internal counting is started from FIG.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to a state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is effectively received (operation valid state) at the same time as or immediately after the start of the internal counting. However, even when the operation is shifted to the operation valid state, the chance button lamp 138 of the button A (first chance button 136) remains off, and the operation promotion notification of the button A (for example, the initial position display 136X) is also performed. The player does not know that the operation is valid. However, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed according to the operation. In the example shown in FIG. 172, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated a while after the reach effect has started (see FIG. 172 (c)). The display of the timer notice display T is related to the reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 171, but is irrelevant in this example. The button A (first chance button 136) here corresponds to a so-called back button. Note that the timer notice display T is not displayed when the button B (the operation button 137 ') is operated, but may be displayed. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (e), a timer notice display T is displayed, and it is notified that the remaining time until the start of a new effect is 20:00 seconds. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed immediately, so that the player starts the countdown of the remaining time by operating the button A. Although it looks like, the countdown of the remaining time is started internally before the button operation.

  In this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponds to a so-called back button. However, the operation promotion notification for promoting the operation of the button A may be performed. The operation ends when is operated. Therefore, if a certain period is provided between the time when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated and the time when the timer notice display T is displayed, the operation promotion notification is not issued within that period. Will not be done.

  Further, since the timer notice display T is displayed in response to the operation of the button A, the length of the remaining time at which the display is started differs depending on the timing of the operation of the button A. That is, as shown in FIG. 172 (A), when the button A is operated a little earlier, the display of the timer notice display T is started from the state where the remaining time is 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), even if the button A is operated after the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 becomes equal to or less than the first remaining time (here, 5 seconds or less), the timer notice display is performed. T may not be displayed. In this case, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is before the first remaining time. Alternatively, when the remaining time measured by the counter timer 412 reaches the second remaining time (for example, 6 seconds), the timer notice display T is displayed from the second remaining time even if the button A is not operated. You may. In the example shown in FIG. 172, the operation valid state of the button A (first chance button 136) is continuous, but may be intermittent. For example, if the operation valid state continues for 5 seconds, the transition to the operation invalid state for 3 seconds may be repeated until the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

  Since FIG. 172 (f) and subsequent figures are the same as those of FIG. 171 (e) and subsequent figures, the description is omitted. However, since the button A (first chance button 136) is the back button, the novice does not press the button A. The remaining time may elapse. Even in this case, after the remaining time has elapsed, the display mode of the variable icon c may be changed to the display mode of the face of the princess without performing the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord). In the same manner as in the case where the operation has been performed, the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lord) may be displayed, and then the display mode of the change icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess face.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the timing of the back button operation and the timing of the increase in hold.

  At the time when the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 173 (b), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 2, and the internal counting is started simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display here. That is, when the symbol variation display is started, it is determined that the timer notice is to be executed, and the operation of the button A (the first chance button 136) is valid.

  In FIG. 173 (c), the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the timer notice display T is displayed. When the timer notice display T is displayed (the remaining time is 5:00 seconds), there is one ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figure 1 is increased by one. As shown in 173 (d), three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. Each of these three holding icons h1 to h3 has a black circle display mode (default display mode).

  Eventually, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds (see FIG. 173 (f)), and as shown in FIG. 173 (g), the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lord) is displayed on the fluctuating icon display area 208e. ) Is displayed. Even in this state, the three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this example, a new effect to be started from now on, that is, a new effect for which the start is notified by the timer notice is indicated on the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lord), and the pre-read notice is provided. It is reported that the display mode of the target hold icon changes. In this example, the target of the pre-reading notice is also determined in a control step in the step of determining whether or not to execute the button notice. Therefore, when the second hold of the special figure 1 is increasing during the execution of the symbol variation display one time before the currently performed symbol variation display, the target of the prefetching advance notice is control-wise. The prize after the execution of the timer notice is determined to be the second hold (here, the third hold) cannot be the target of the prefetch notice, but from the player's point of view, before the start of the new effect It appears that all the three hold icons h1 to h3 displayed in the list have the possibility of being subject to the prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (h), the display mode of the second hold icon h2 among the three hold icons h1 to h3 is changed from the black circle display mode (default display mode) to the princess face display mode. (Preview notice display mode), and the prefetch notice effect has been started as a new effect notified by the timer notice. Note that, in this example, the first effect display (the character display N1 of the lord) continues to be displayed until the currently performed symbol variation display ends.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 173 (c ′), when the remaining time is 5:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, and If button A (first chance button 136) is operated (see FIG. 173 (e ')) after the timing of FIG. 173 (d) in which the number has increased by one, the button operation is performed after the hold is increased. For this reason, the player tends to expect that the third hold, which had increased before the button operation, would also be the target of the prefetch notice, but even before the button operation, the hold increase after the execution of the timer notice was decided In control, it is impossible for the third hold to be the target of the prefetch notice. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  If the first hold is increased together with the second hold of the special figure 1 during the execution of the symbol change display one time before the currently performed symbol change display, the first hold icon h1 is displayed. There is a possibility that the display mode may change to the display mode of the prefetch notice, and in this case, it is not known in advance whether the prefetch notice object is the first hold, the second hold, or both. .

  Further, if the control of determining the prefetching advance notice target in response to the operation of the button A is adopted, the number of the prefetching advance notice objects changes according to the operation timing of the button A (first chance button 136). Become. That is, in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 173 (c), only the first hold and the second hold are subject to the prefetching advance notice, but with the button operation at the timing of FIG. 173 (e ′), the first hold to the third hold are performed. Becomes the target of the pre-reading notice, and the target that can be expected differs depending on the timing of the button operation.

Further, the determination of the target of the pre-reading notice may be performed immediately before the start of a new effect, that is, when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.
FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating stepwise two examples of the button effect.

  The example on the left side of FIG. 174 corresponds to an example of a general button effect, and the counter timer 412 does not operate. In this example, the reach state is shown from FIG. 174 (a) to FIG. 174 (d), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (b) has a button imitating the chance button 136 which is turned off at the initial position. An image 136a4, an arrow display 136b and a character display of "press" as a promotion display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136, and a remaining period meter display 136c indicating a remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as valid. One is displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a4, 136b, and 136c and the character display of "press" are collectively referred to as a normal display 136N of operation promotion notification. In FIG. 174 (c), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated in a state where the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is being performed, and the decoration shown in FIG. The symbol display device 208 displays an image C1 of the cut-in notice in which a chance is displayed.

  The example on the right side of FIG. 174 is an example of waiting for the start of the timer notice. FIGS. 174 (A) to 174 (C) are the same as FIGS. 174 (a) to 174 (c), and therefore description thereof is omitted. Also in this example, the counter timer 412 is not operating, and the timer notice is not executed in the currently performed symbol variation display. However, at the stage of receiving the special figure hold increase command when each of the three holds held here is held, based on the information indicating the pre-read stop symbol included in each command, the respective change times are determined. If any of these three holds has a change time longer than the first time, the timer notice is stocked until the hold is exhausted and the symbol change display is started. Keep it. As shown in FIG. 174 (C), when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice is not started in the currently displayed symbol change display, but after that, As a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the symbol change display to be started, as shown in FIG. 10D, the display T 'of "waiting" is displayed at the position where the timer notice display T is displayed. When the timer notice is started, the remaining time is displayed instead of "waiting".

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing a modification of the display method including the timer notice display T. FIG. 175 shows three examples on the left side and two examples on the right side.

  First, in FIG. 175 (a), which is the first example, in the reach state, a display similar to the timer notice display T (hereinafter, referred to as time display T1) is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T with the button A (First chance button 136) It is already displayed before the operation. The time display T1 is also counted down as time elapses, but in FIG. 175 (a), 10:00 seconds is displayed. On the other hand, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 175 (a) is 30:00 seconds, and they do not match. At the timing shown in FIG. 175 (b) when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the time display T1 is displayed in response to this operation. , A timer notice display T is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 175 (b), the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, and the timer notice display T is 25:00 seconds, the same as the counter timer 412.

  In FIG. 175 (A) which is the second example, similarly to FIG. 175 (a) which is the first example, the time display T1 is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T by pressing the button A (first display). Chance button 136) is already displayed before the operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. In response to this operation, the timer notice display T is displayed instead of the time display T2. The timer notice display T shown in FIG. 175 (B) is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412. On the timer notice display T, a difference between the time of the time display T1 displayed so far and the time of the newly displayed timer notice display T is displayed. That is, at the timing of FIG. 175 (B), the time of the time display T1 that had been displayed so far should have been 5:00 seconds, whereas the remaining time displayed in the timer notice display T is Since it is 25:00 seconds, a difference display T2 of “+20” is made.

  In FIG. 175 (a) which is the third example, similarly to FIG. 175 (a) which is the first example, the time display T1 is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T by pressing the button A (first). Chance button 136) is already displayed before the operation. Thereafter, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing of FIG. 175 (a), and here is also the timing at which the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (a), the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, which is 20:00 seconds ahead of the remaining time of the counter timer 412. In this example, the characters "LOCK" are displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the time display T1, and the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Even if the countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped, the countdown of the counter timer 412 is continued, and the character display “LOCK” is displayed until the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds in the time display T1. The countdown in the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Eventually, when the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds, the character display “LOCK” disappears, the time display T1 is replaced with the timer notice display T, and thereafter, the countdown as the timer notice display T is continued. You. In this example, if the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, the time display T1 continues to count down, and eventually reaches 0:00 seconds, and the timer notice is given. The process ends without replacing the display T.

  In FIG. 175 (α), which is the fourth example shown on the upper right, an arrow indicating the lapse of time is displayed, indicating a state in which symbol variation is being displayed. Generally, it can be said that the longer the count value (remaining time) initially set in the counter timer is, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit is. In addition, when the timer notice notifies the start of the final cut-in notice in the currently displayed symbol variation display, various effects are executed as the execution time (remaining time) of the timer notice increases. Becomes possible. For example, in the first half, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon and start the pseudo-run. Further, after the normal reach is started, development to super reach (SP) and effect of changing the title color of the reach can be executed. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a chance-up production during a reach in which the degree of expectation of the jackpot increases. For these reasons, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues to be executed internally, but the display of the remaining time in the timer notice display T is initially displayed a little, and the countdown is temporarily stopped. By stopping or adding the remaining period later, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, as the number of remaining time displays, such as the time display T1 shown in FIG. 175 (a), is increased, the number of times the effect changes when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds is expected to increase. The entertainment of the game may be improved. Then, in the final cut-in notice, a character determined to be a big hit is made to appear. Even if the timer notice display T becomes 0:00 seconds in accordance with the fact that the counter timer 412 reaches 0:00 seconds, a new effect is not started, and a fake timer notice can be executed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which false timer notice is not performed.

  In FIG. 175 (a), which is the fifth example shown in the lower right, the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, (30:00 second) is displayed. In FIG. 175 (i), the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed again. The button A corresponding to the back button is in a state where the second operation is also accepted as valid, and the timer notice display T which has been displayed in the first mode (for example, a single frame) is changed to the second operation. Accordingly, it is displayed in a second mode (for example, a double frame). Note that the timer notice display T that has been displayed in the first color (for example, blue) until now may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue) in response to the second operation.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the timer notice overlaps with another effect involving the countdown of the remaining time.

  FIG. 176 shows two examples, and the example shown above is an example in which the timer notice overlaps with the simultaneous island production. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (a), "25 seconds until the simultaneous island production" is greatly displayed. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 176 (b), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 208e. The timer notice display T is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (b) displays the same size as "20 seconds left for simultaneous island production". In this example, the difference between the time when the remaining time of the timer announcement is 0:00 seconds and the time when the simultaneous island production is started is only 5 seconds, but the timer announcement is based on the effect of the countdown of the simultaneous island production. , The remaining time is displayed according to the countdown of the counter timer 412.

The example shown in the lower part of FIG. 176 is an example where the timer notice overlaps with the mission effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (A), a mission display M is displayed on the upper right of the variable icon display area 208e, and it is displayed that the remaining time is 10:00 seconds. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not displayed. It is a display. In FIG. 176 (a), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 208e. The timer notice display T is displayed. In the mission display M shown in FIG. 176 (a), it is displayed that the remaining time is 5:00 seconds. In this example, both the mission display M and the timer notice display T are displayed in a similar display mode surrounded by a single frame, so that at first glance, there is a risk of being mistakenly recognized. It also has the effect of being seen.
FIG. 177 is a diagram showing another example of the timer notice.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 177, the timer notice display is not a numerical display but a meter display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) lights in red. And encourages them to operate. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (b) has a tutorial-like description on the display of a chance up meter, which is a type of timer notice display. In FIG. 177 (c), the button A is operated in response to the red lighting, and a chance up meter CM is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the operation. The left end of the chance up meter CM is the start S and the right end is the goal G, and the arrow mark moves from left to right as time elapses. This arrow mark indicates the current time point. When the arrow mark reaches the goal G at the right end, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds. Therefore, the distance from the arrow mark to the goal G corresponds to the length of the remaining time. Furthermore, this chance up meter CM not only indicates the remaining time, but also various effects such as a change in the pseudo-run or the hold icon, a change in the reach title color, and a chance up effect during the reach as shown in FIG. The production execution timing is also marked. It should be noted that only the execution timing of the effect may be marked, and the effect to be executed may not be displayed.

  The example shown on the right side of FIG. 177 is an example in which the effect to be executed changes according to the operation timing of the operation means. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) lights in red to urge the user to operate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. Is displayed. A mark JI is attached to the remaining time meter display 136c of the displayed normal display 136N, and when the remaining time meter operates the button A when the remaining time meter approaches the mark JI, the effect of the special mode is obtained. Be started. In FIG. 177 (A), the operation of the button A is too slow and the effect of the special mode is not started, and as shown in FIG. 177 (B), the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in black letters and the chance is displayed. Have been. In FIG. 177 (A), the operation timing of the button A exactly matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 177 (A), an image C2 of a cut-in notice displayed in gray letters and a chance is displayed. ing. The image C2 of the cut-in notice shown in FIG. 177 (B) is the same as the image C1 of the cut-in notice shown in FIG. The type of the font and the type of the base may be different, and further, an image of a character or the like may be added. In FIG. 177 (a), the button B (the operation button 137 ′) for which the operation promotion notification is not performed is operated. The button B here corresponds to a back button. The operation timing of the button B also matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 177 (i), a cut-in notice image C3 of a special mode in which a princess character is displayed is displayed. As described above, the display mode of the effect is different depending on the operation timing, or the display mode of the effect is different depending on the operating means operated. In addition, not only the display mode of the effect, but also the type of effect and the start timing may be different. Further, even if the operating means to be operated is the same, the display mode of the effect, the type of the effect, and the start timing may be different depending on whether or not the back button is used.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a timer notice display means 209 'with a shutter, which is separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. A panel display section 183 shown in FIG. 128 can be applied to the timer notice display means 209 '. In the timer notice display means with shutter 209 'shown in FIG. 178 (a), the shutter is closed and the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated as shown in FIG. 178 (b). Then, the shutter is opened, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed on the timer notice display means 209 '.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display means 209 'becomes 0:00 seconds. Then, as shown in FIG. 178 (d), a first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the timer notice display means 209 ', and then the decorative symbol display device In the fluctuating icon display area 208e of 208, the fluctuating icon c changes to a princess face display mode, and a normal notice effect has started. After the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 'keeps displaying 0:00 seconds without closing the shutter.

  The same display as “waiting” shown in FIG. 174 (D) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (A). “Standby” shown in FIG. 174 (D) is a display for giving a notice that the timer notice will be started in the symbol variation display started thereafter, but “Standby” shown in FIG. 178 (A) is This corresponds to a display for giving a notice that the timer notice will be started in the currently performed symbol change display. In FIG. 178 (B), the “standby” of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, the shutter of the timer notice display means 209 ′ opens, and the remaining time set to the counter timer 412 (not shown) is the same as the remaining time. (Here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed. The release of “standby” may be released automatically when the release time comes, or may be released by operating the button A or the button B again.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a) is in the reach state, and the remaining time (25:00 seconds here) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the left of the variable icon display area 208e. Notice display T is displayed. Then, in the timer notice display means 209 ', the shutter is opened and a character display "CHANCE" is displayed. As described above, the timer notice display means 209 'can display a display other than the display indicating the remaining period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (a) has developed into a super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display T disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208, and instead, the remaining time (here, 20:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is changed to the timer notice display means 209 ′. Will be displayed. By doing so, a part of the super reach effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 does not overlap with the timer notice display T, while the remaining time of the timer notice can be clearly displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 178 (a), the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also on the timer notice display means 209 '. However, while the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 25:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209 'displays 24:95 seconds, and both are not shown in the counter timer 412 (not shown). Although the remaining time should be displayed, a very slight difference has occurred. Since this is a different device such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 ', some time lag occurs in display control and the like, and this is a difference caused by this time lag. Note that a difference may be intentionally generated between the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209 ′ as part of the effect.

Here, the timer notice display means 209 'is used, but instead of the timer notice display means 209', an operable (elevating) second display means 209 shown in FIG. 160 may be used. The second display means 209 may be operated (elevated), may not operate (elevated), may operate in addition to the elevating operation, or may perform only the elevating operation. It may be something.
In the above description,
"The second operation means [for example, the chance button 136 or the like]

Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, timer notice display means 209 ', etc.]
A gaming table with
The display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a first notice display [for example, a timer notice display T or the like],

The third display is a display corresponding to the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 172 (e) and 25:00 shown in FIG. ) And the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in black letters and the image C1 of the cut-in notice in a special mode displayed in gray letters and the chance shown in FIG. 177 (a)]. Display
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  Note that the third display indicates the operation timing of the second operation means [for example, whether the remaining time is less than or equal to the first remaining time or whether it matches the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 177. 172 (e), the non-display shown in FIG. 172 (a), the chance shown in FIG. 177 (B), and the cut-in notice displayed in black characters. 177 (a) and the display shown in FIG. 177 (b) with the chance and the cut-in notice image C of the special mode displayed in gray characters].

In addition, the display means may always display a plurality of types of display, may not display the display, may display other than the plurality of types of display, and may display a plurality of types of display. Only one of them may be displayed.
Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,

  The fourth display is a display [for example, a normal display 136N of operation promotion notification or the like] that prompts an operation of the second operation unit,

  When the second operation means is operated, the display of the third display is started [for example, in the case of an operation within the operation valid period] and when it is not started [for example, the operation valid period Before or after the expiration of the operation validity period, etc.]

The fourth display is a display that is not displayed in the second case until the display of the third display is started after the second operation unit is operated.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Note that the fourth display may be a display that is not displayed in the second case.
Also,
"The first notice display is a display of a timer notice,

  The timer notice is a notice including a display [for example, a timer notice display T or the like] indicating a first remaining time [for example, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 or the like],

  A notice effect after the first remaining time becomes zero [for example, a normal notice effect in which the display mode of the change icon c shown in FIG. 172 (h) changes to the display mode of the princess face, or FIG. 173 (g) In which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 7 changes to the display mode of the lord's face, etc.] is started.

The “display according to the operation timing of the second operation means” described above is a display indicating the first remaining time.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Note that the first remaining time may be a remaining time until a notice effect is started.
Also,

"The notice effect is a notice regarding the symbol change display performed when the display of the third display is started [For example, the display mode of the change icon c shown in FIG. 172 (h) is the display of the face of the princess. Normal notice that changes to the aspect]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

More specifically, as the notice effect, a so-called pseudo-sequence effect, a second reach effect developed from the first reach effect (for example, super reach effect, etc.), and an increase in expectation of a big hit in the reach effect are suggested. (For example, a change in the character color of a title or a line) or a cut-in effect (for example, a cut-in effect immediately before a symbol stops).
Also,
"One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a hold icon,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a display indicating the number of holds, by the number of the hold icons to be displayed,

The announcement effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the look-ahead advance notice [for example, the look-ahead change in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 173 (g) changes to the display mode of the face of the lord. Notice production etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the display means may always display a display indicating the number of holds, may not display the number, may display other than the number of holds, or may display only the number of holds. May be used.
Also,

"If the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the hold icons among the hold icons representing the number of holds before the increase is the display mode of the prefetch notice. [For example, a change in the display mode of the second hold icon shown in FIG. 173 (h)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

When a plurality of the holding icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of holding icons”) are displayed at the time when the display of the third display is started, one or more of the plurality of the holding icons are displayed. The display mode of the plurality of hold icons may change to the display mode of the prefetch notice.
Also,

"If the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the hold icons among the hold icons representing the number of holds after the increase is the display mode of the prefetch notice. May change to
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, when a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of hold icons”) are displayed at the time when the notice effect is started, one or more of the plurality of the hold icons are displayed. May change to the display mode of the prefetch notice.
Also,

“One of the plurality of types of displays is a sixth display [for example, a time display T1 shown in FIG. 175 and the like]

The sixth display includes a display including a display indicating a second remaining time that is different from a display indicating the first remaining time [for example, 25:00 seconds in the timing of FIG. 175 (b)] [for example, 5:00 seconds at the timing of FIG. 175 (b)],
The third display is a display that may be displayed together with the sixth display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
[It is provided with a counting means [for example, a counter timer 412 or the like]

The display indicating the first remaining time is a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  It should be noted that symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214, etc.) capable of executing symbol variation display, first control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.], (For example, a first sub-control unit 400 and the like), wherein the second control means is a control means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, The first control means is a control means [for example, a control means for executing a special figure state update process or the like] capable of controlling the symbol display means, and the second control means controls the display means [for example, , Effect control processing, etc.], and the second control means may be a means provided with the counting means. Further, the second control unit may be a control unit including a plurality of control units [for example, the basic circuit 402, the VDP 434, the VRAM 436, and the like].

The symbol display means may be means for always displaying the symbol change display, may be means for displaying the symbol change display, or may execute other than the symbol change display. Alternatively, only the symbol variation display may be executed. Further, the second control means may be a means that always executes control according to a command from the first control means, or may be a means that may be executed, The control other than the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed, or only the control according to the command from the first control means may be executed.
Also,

"The third display indicates the third display when the operation timing of the second operation means coincides with the first timing [for example, the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 177]. This is a display in which display is started in a display mode [for example, a special mode displayed with a chance and gray characters in FIG. 177 (a)].

When the operation timing of the second operation means does not coincide with the first timing, the third display is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a chance and black characters shown in FIG. 177 (B) are displayed. Cut-in notice image C1 etc.].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

"A third operation means [for example, a button B (operation button 137 ') shown in FIG.

The third display is a display that may be started even when the third operation means is operated [for example, a special mode in which a princess character is displayed as shown in FIG. 177 (i)]. Display of the cut-in notice image C3 etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

A third display unit [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like] capable of executing a variable display of the decorative symbol,

The display means [for example, the timer notice display means 209 'and the like] is a separate means from the third display means.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, the third display means may or may not always perform the variable display of the decorative symbol, and may perform other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Alternatively, only the variable display of the decorative symbol may be executed.
Also,

“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
* D3049P

  Finally, an example will be described in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons each start to change.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the animation of the hold icon is executed.

  In FIG. 179 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (fixedly display) the stop symbol of the loss, and the decorative design display device 208 shows “ "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" are displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are white stopped displays. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 179 (a) are turned on, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays three black circle holding icons, which are the holding displays of the special figure 1. Therefore, no change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows a state immediately after the symbol change display of the special symbol is started on the first special figure display device 212 and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the change display of the decorative symbol. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbols is continuously started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. While only two first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 179 (b) are lit, the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 has three holding icons (holding icons). h1 to h3) are displayed, and the change icon is not yet displayed in the change icon display area 208e. This is a result of the time lag that occurs because the fluctuation has just started. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (c), the moving animation of the hold icon has been started. The moving animation here is an animation in which the hold icon moves diagonally to the upper left and then diagonally to the lower right. The hold icon, which was the first hold icon h1 until now, moves toward the change icon display area 208e. The holding icon that has moved and has been the second holding icon h2 has moved toward the position where the first holding icon h1 was displayed, and the holding icon that has been the third holding icon h3 has changed to the second holding icon h2. It moves toward the position where the hold icon h2 was displayed.

  In FIG. 179 (d), the movement of the suspension icon is completed, and the fluctuation icon c having the same display mode as the suspension icon is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 208e. Further, only two hold icons (hold icons h1 and h2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f.

  Here, there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 increases by one, and the number of the first special pattern reservation lamp 218 shown in FIG. Are lit. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an animation for increasing the reserved icon is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (e), the upper end portion of the increased reserved icon hi is starting to be seen from below the display screen.

  In FIG. 179 (f), the increase icon of the hold icon continues, and the increase hold icon hi is about to reach the position where the third hold icon h3 is displayed. In FIG. 179 (g), the increase of the hold icon The animation has been completed, and a black circle third hold icon h3 is displayed.

  In FIG. 179 (h), the stop symbol of the losing is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a circular display is changed to a stopped display (white). doing. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (h), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The change icon c is still left in 208e. In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 179 (i), the fixed stop symbol design is displayed, and also in the decorative design display device 208, "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3". Is fixedly displayed, and the change icon c has disappeared.

  In FIGS. 179 (j) to (l), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is performed, and in FIG. 179 (m), the stop display is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In the example, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of “decoration 4”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 2” is definitely displayed.

  As described above, FIGS. 179 (a) to (n) show the castle town stage, and the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the townscape of the castle town. Here, a stage change occurs. The stage change is started simultaneously with the start of the design change display of the special figure, and at the same time as the design change display of the next special figure 1 is started in FIG. It temporarily changes to a background image in which a princess character is displayed in the center of the toned background image. This background image does not belong to any stage and is a background image dedicated to stage change. When the background image dedicated to the stage change is displayed, the hold icon, the frame of the fluctuating icon display area 208e, and the fluctuating icon c disappeared, and the fluctuating display of the reduced decorative pattern is displayed at the upper left. While being displayed, the fourth symbol 2081, 2082 is displayed only in the upper right. In this state, the player does not know which stage to change to, and the player pays attention to the background image on the decorative symbol display device 208 with interest. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 179 (p), the background image is switched to a dark background image, and the stage change is completed. Here, it has been switched from the castle town stage to the darkness stage. When the stage change is completed, the display of the hold icon, the frame of the fluctuating icon display area 208e, and the fluctuating icon c itself is also restored, and the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is also performed on the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right This is performed in the symbol display area 208c. On the darkness stage, the default display mode becomes a square on the dark stage, and the black square first hold icon h1 is shown in FIG. 179 (p). , A black square change icon c is displayed. Thus, the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon may change depending on the stage. Also, the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol may be changed to those corresponding to the stage.

  The above-described stages are prepared in a plurality of stages in addition to the castle town stage and the darkness stage, and are stage-changed according to the control state (for example, the probable state / non-probable state, the electric support state / non-electric support state). Is performed, or a stage change is performed according to the number of times of symbol change display.

  FIG. 180 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon during the symbol stop.

  During the movement of the special figure 1 after the movement animation, there is one ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 increases by one to three. That is, here, the third reservation has increased. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 180 (b) are increased by one and turned on three times. Although not shown in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation for increasing the reserved icons described with reference to FIG. 179 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. To h3 are displayed. The third hold that has been increased here is a target of a prefetch notice, but is displayed in a default display mode (a black circle display mode) during the symbol change in FIG. 180 (b). In the following figures, the increase animation of the hold icon may be omitted in the drawings, but the increase animation is executed unless otherwise specified.

  In FIG. 180 (c), a stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 180 (d) to (f), a decorative symbol of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is lost. Is displayed in a fixed manner. During this confirmation display, the effect of the prefetch notice of the third hold increased during the symbol change display (corresponding to an example of the first effect display) is executed. In this effect, the display mode changes along with the increased third hold icon h3 and the hold icons (first hold icon h1 and second hold icon h2) that were displayed when the third hold increased. The first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, and the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 180 (d) all have a black circle display mode (default display mode), but in FIG. 180 (e), The effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, the effect display e4 overlaps the three hold icons h1 to h3, and the three hold icons h1 to h3 become invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 180 (f), all the three hold icons h1 to h3 have changed to the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the pre-reading notice). Here, the change of the display mode is simultaneous and the same display mode is changed. However, the display mode may be changed one by one or may be changed to a different display mode (hereinafter, referred to as a different display mode). The same applies to the simultaneous change described).

  In FIG. 180 (g), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 180 (h), the hold icon of the display mode of the lord's face has started moving animation, and FIG. In this example, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c having the same appearance as that of the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. In addition, in the hold icon display area 208f, two hold icons h1 and h2 in the display mode of the lord's face are displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 180, the period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon corresponds to an example of the first period. During one period, an effect of simultaneous change of the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter, simultaneous change effect) is performed. On the other hand, if there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period (the period from FIG. 180 (a) to immediately before FIG. 180 (c)) after the end of the first period, Does not perform the simultaneous change effect during the second period during which the symbol is changing, but performs the simultaneous change effect during the period during which the fixed display is performed (FIGS. 180 (d) to 180 (f)). Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating stepwise an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the hold increases while the symbol is stopped.

  In FIG. 181 (c), stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIGS. 181 (d) to (f), a decorative symbol of “decoration 2” − “decoration 1” − “decoration 3” is lost. Is displayed in a fixed manner. In addition, since the fixed display is also displayed during the stop display, in the following description, it is referred to as the stop display including the fixed display. During this stop display, there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figure 1 is increased by one to three. That is, here also, the third reservation has increased. The first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 180 (f) are increased by one and turned on three. The third hold that has been increased here is also subject to a prefetch notice. When the hold is increased during the stop display, the decoration symbol display device 208 does not execute the animation of increasing the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 179. That is, the execution of the increase animation has been canceled. However, only a part of the increase animation may be executed, or the whole animation may be executed.

  In FIG. 181 (f), the effect display e4 appears in the reserved icon display area 208f, and the entire reserved icon display area 208f is difficult to visually recognize. That is, the effect display e4 overlaps the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 which have been displayed in the black circle display mode (default display mode), and includes the two hold icons h1 and h2. To be invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 181 (g), the third hold icon h3 has increased. The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is a display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the pre-reading notice). In addition, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the second hold icon h2, which have been the display mode of the black circle (the default display mode) so far, are the display mode of the lord's face (the display mode of the prefetch notice) At the same time. In other words, all the three holding icons h1 to h3 including the increased third holding icon h3 are displayed in the manner of displaying the lord's face (the manner of displaying the prefetch notice). In FIG. 181 (g), the symbol variation display has been started, and the subsequent steps are the same as in the example of FIG. 180, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 181, the number of holdings increases while the symbol is stopped, and a simultaneous change effect using the effect display e4 is executed before the increased holding icon is displayed. That is, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately after the increase in the reservation or simultaneously with the increase in the reservation.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of simultaneous change of the hold icon when the number of holds increases by two during the symbol change.

  FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (c) show that the symbols are changing, and among them, at the timing of FIG. 182 (b) after the end of the moving animation, there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230. The number of reservations in FIG. 1 increases by one to three. That is, here, the third hold is increased, and the third hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice as a result of the lottery of the execution of the prefetch notice in the first sub-control unit 400. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 182 (b) is increased by one to light three lamps, the third holding icon h3 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased, and the three holding icons are displayed. h1 to h3 are displayed. Also, at the subsequent timing of FIG. 182 (c), there is one ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figure 1 is further increased by one to four (full). In other words, although the fourth hold is increased here, as a result of the lottery of the execution of the prefetch notice in the first sub-control unit 400, the fourth hold is not subject to the prefetch notice. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 182 (c) is increased by one and illuminated, and the fourth holding icon h4 in a black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased to increase the four holding icons. h1 to h4 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 182 (d) to (g), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. During this stop display, a simultaneous change effect is executed as an effect of the prefetch notice of the third hold increased during the symbol change display, and an effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f as shown in FIG. 182 (f). After the entire holding icon display area 208f becomes difficult to see, the effect display e4 disappears and the display of the holding icon resumes, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (g), the hold icon (first hold icon h1, second hold icon h1, second hold icon h1, which has already been displayed when the third hold has increased, together with the third hold icon h3 for the prefetch notice. The icon h2) also changes to the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the look-ahead notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the increase of the third hold is displayed. The mode has not changed, and the display mode of the black circle (the default display mode) remains. Thus, even if it is a simultaneous change effect, not all the displayed hold icons are necessarily changed.

  Note that, in this example as well, the period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon corresponds to an example of the first period, and when there is an increase in the hold in the first period, the first Simultaneous change production is performed during the period. On the other hand, if there is no hold increase in the first period, and there is a hold increase in the second period (the period from FIG. 182 (a) to immediately before FIG. 182 (d)) after the end of the first period, , The simultaneous change effect is not performed during the second period during which the symbol is being changed, and the simultaneous change effect is performed during the period during which the display is stopped (FIGS. 182 (d) to (g)).

  Further, the first half period (for example, the period before the start of the reach effect) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol is set as the first period, and the second half period until the end of the variable display (for example, the first period) (The latter half of the period) may be the second period. Note that the end of the first period may be the start of the second period.

  In addition, the first period may be a period from the start of the display of the variable display to the display of the variable icon, that is, a period until the first hold icon h1 moves to the variable icon display area 208e, or from the start of the display of the variable display. It may be a period until one of a plurality of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped (a so-called first stop, or the first temporary stop in the pseudo continuous production), or a combination of decorative symbols from the start of display of the variable display. May be a period until the state becomes a reach state.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of simultaneous change of the holding icon when the number of holdings increases by two while the symbol is stopped.

  FIG. 183 (c) to FIG. 183 (g) show the symbols being stopped. Among them, one ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing of FIG. Is increased by one to three. That is, here, the third reservation has been increased, and this third reservation is a target of the prefetch notice. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 183 (f) is increased by one and illuminated three times, but an effect display e4 appears in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the holding icon The entire display area 208f is difficult to view. The animation of increasing the hold icon accompanying the increase in the third hold has been cancelled.

  Also, at the timing of FIG. 183 (g), there is one ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figure 1 is further increased by one to four (full). In other words, the fourth hold has increased during the execution of the simultaneous change effect, which is the look-ahead notice effect, but this fourth hold is not subject to the look-ahead notice. Although the first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 183 (g) is increased by one and turned on four times, the effect display e4 is continuously displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the holding is performed. The entire icon display area 208f is still difficult to view. The animation of increasing the hold icon accompanying the increase in the fourth hold has also been canceled.

  In FIG. 183 (h), the effect display e4 disappears, and the display of the hold icon resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (h), the third hold icon h3 for the prefetch notice is displayed in the manner of displaying the face of the palace (display form of the lookahead notice), and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon are displayed. The icon h2 has also changed to the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the look-ahead notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold increased after the increase of the third hold is a black circle display mode. (Default display mode). In this way, if the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately started as a pre-reading notice effect, but if there is a hold increase during execution of the simultaneous change effect, the hold The increase icon is excluded from the target, and the hold icons before the simultaneous change effect is executed are simultaneously changed. Note that while the design is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately executed when the number of special figure holds increases, but even if the fourth hold increases before the simultaneous change effect starts, the third hold is a prefetch notice. If it is a target, the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold is not displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In addition, if the fourth hold is the object of the prefetch notice, both the third hold icon h3 and the fourth hold icon h4 are displayed in the display form of the prefetch notice.

  As described above, in both FIG. 183 (f) and FIG. 183 (g), the animation for increasing the hold icon has been canceled, but the hold increase after the start of the simultaneous change effect, which is the prefetch notice effect, is not held. An icon increase animation may be performed. In FIG. 183 (f ′), similarly to FIG. 183 (f), the effect display e4 appears due to the start of the simultaneous change effect associated with the third hold being the prefetch notice target, and the entire hold icon display area 208f is displayed. It is difficult to see. In this state, there is an increase in the fourth hold, but since the simultaneous change effect has started, an animation for increasing the hold icon is started. In FIG. 183 (g1 ′), the upper end portion of the increase pending icon hi is starting to be seen from below the display screen. Since the layer on which the increase hold icon hi is displayed is on the back side of the layer on which the effect display e4 is displayed, the increase hold icon hi is overlapped by the effect display e4. In FIG. (G2 ′) subsequent to FIG. 183 (g1 ′), an increase suspension icon hi in a black circle display mode, a part of which is hidden by the effect display e4, is shown.

In addition, as an animation of increase of the hold icon accompanying the increase of the third hold, an increase hold icon hi of the display mode of the lord's face (display mode of the prefetch notice) may appear together with the effect display e4.
Next, the simultaneous change effect of the holding icons in the winning order changing machine will be described.

  The description so far has been about the special figure 2 priority change. That is, the description has been given of the increase in the reservation of the special figure 1 in the case where the design change of the special figure 2 is performed with priority. Note that the same applies to the reservation increase of the special figure 2.

Here, of the prize in the first special figure starting port 230 and the prize in the second special figure starting port 232, the case of the prize order changing machine which starts the symbol change display from the earlier prize timing. explain.
FIG. 184 is a view for explaining the winning order fluctuation.

  In the holding icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184, eight holding icons including four holdings of the special figure 1 and four holdings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. The change icon display area 208e is provided at the lower left corner.

  In FIG. 184 (a), six hold icons h1 to h6 are displayed. Each of these six hold icons h1 to h6 has a black circle display mode (default display mode). Further, the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the six hold icons h1 to h6 is the hold of the special figure 2.

  In FIG. 184 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change, and the seventh holding icon h7 is added to the holding icon display area 208f. In this case, an increase animation similar to the hold icon increase animation described with reference to FIG. 179 is executed, but is not shown. Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the symbol is stopped (FIGS. 184 (c) to (d)). In this example, the loss effect and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon are not started in the lottery of the execution of the pre-reading notice for the seventh hold.

  Next, the reservation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first reservation icon h1 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 184 (e), the special figure display change display is started on the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative pattern display is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is also started in the device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 179 (c) is started, and in FIG. 184 (g), the movement of the hold icon Is completed, and the fluctuating icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 208e.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of simultaneous change of the holding icon when the holding increases in the winning order change.

  In FIG. 185 (a), seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed. Each of these seven hold icons h1 to h7 has a black circle display mode (default display mode). Further, the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h1 after the seven hold icons h1 to h7 is the hold of the special map 2. The state shown in FIG. 185 (a) is a state after the end of the moving animation.

  In FIG. 185 (b), the holding of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change after the movement animation ends, and the eighth holding icon h8 is added to the holding icon display area 208f and the holding is full. Accordingly, the full tank indication F of the hold MAX is also displayed. In this example, the lottery of the execution of the pre-reading notice for the eighth hold is won, and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is executed thereafter.

  Eventually, the symbol change ends and the display is stopped (FIGS. 185 (c) to 185 (d)). In this example, during the stop display, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is not started.

  Next, the reservation of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first reservation icon h1 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 185 (e), the second special figure display device 214 starts to change the design of the special figure, and displays the decorative pattern. The variable display of the decorative symbol is also started in the device 208. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 179 (c) is started, and in FIG. 185 (g), the movement of the hold icon Is completed, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and a change icon c is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Note that the display mode is a black circle display mode (default display mode) regardless of the seven hold icons h1 to h7 or the change icon c.

  When the movement of the hold icon is completed, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started. That is, the simultaneous change effect is started at the end of the moving animation of the hold icon. Even in this simultaneous change effect, the effect display e5 appears, but as shown in FIG. 185 (h), the effect display e5 is a display that overlaps the change icon display area 208e together with the hold icon display area 208f. In addition, in addition to the seven hold icons h1 to h7, the variable icon c becomes difficult to visually recognize. In addition, in the effect display e5 shown in FIG. 185 (h), the position where the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed does not overlap, but may overlap with this position. Further, an effect display that does not overlap may be displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 185 (i), the effect display e5 disappears, the hold icon becomes visible, and the fluctuating icon c becomes visible. Here, the simultaneous change effect was a look-ahead notice in which the eighth hold at the time of increase of the hold (FIG. 185 (b)) was set as the target of the advance notice. It is on hold, and the eighth hold icon h8 is not displayed in the first place. Therefore, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the change icon c are displayed, and the display mode of all the displayed icons is changed. Moreover, in the simultaneous change effect here, the display does not change to one type of common display mode but changes to a plurality of types of display modes. It should be noted that the display mode of all the simultaneously changed holding icons may be different.

  Further, the simultaneous change effect may be executed at the timing when the moving animation of the hold icon is executed. In FIG. 185 (d ′), the stop display is being performed as in the case of FIG. (D). In FIG. 185 (e ′), as in the case of FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol is also started in the device 208. In the previous example, the movement animation of the hold icon was started immediately thereafter, but in this example, the effect display e5 appears simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol or immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. , Simultaneous change production has begun. In FIG. 185 (f ′), the effect display e5 disappears, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the change icon c are displayed, and all of these displayed icons are displayed. The display mode of the icon has changed

  FIG. 186 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the holdings are increased during the stop display in the winning order fluctuation and the holding is full.

  186 (a) and (b) show a stop display. At the timing between FIGS. 186 (a) and (b), there is a one-ball winning in the first special figure starting port 230. The number of holdings increases by 1 and the number of holdings becomes 8 (full) in Fig. 1. Regarding the holding increase during the stop display, the animation of increasing the holding icon is canceled, and as shown in Fig. 186 (b), The number of the first special symbol holding lamps 218 increases by one, and the number of the lamps increases, and the number of the eighth holding icons h8 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) increases. In the case where the full state is reached and the full state is reached, the full state display F described with reference to Fig. 185 is not displayed. Is short, and the full display F In this way, the next symbol change display is started without displaying the full tank display F (see FIG. 186 (c)), and although not shown, the moving animation of the hold icon is performed. Is performed, and then the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started, and the effect display e5 appears (see FIG. 186 (d)). In FIG. 186 (e), the effect display e5 disappears, and the seventh hold icon is displayed. h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the change icon c are re-displayed, and the display mode of all the re-displayed icons is changed.

  In addition, even if it is a short time, the full display F may be displayed during the stop display. Further, the moving animation of the hold icon may be omitted. Further, the simultaneous change effect of the holding icon may not be started unless the holding is increased during the symbol change or the holding is not full.

  FIG. 187 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the simultaneous change effect is not executed or performed depending on the type of the displayed hold icon.

  In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 187, in FIG. 187 (b), the second holding icon h2 changes to the holding icon of the display mode (second display mode) of the character “heat”. This display mode (second display mode) may be a display mode of a look-ahead notice with the highest reliability (big hit expectation) or a display mode in which two or more are not displayed at the same time. Alternatively, a rare display mode with the lowest appearance rate may be used. Even if the hold is increased while the hold icon in such a display mode is displayed, the simultaneous change effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 187, in FIG. 187 (B), the second holding icon h2 changes to the holding icon of the display mode (first display mode) in which the icon is lit. This display mode (first display mode) may be a display mode of a look-ahead notice with the lowest reliability (expected degree of big hit) or a display mode in which two or more are displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, a display mode having the second highest appearance rate after the default display mode may be used. In the case where the hold is increased while the hold icon having such a display mode is displayed (see the third hold icon h3 in FIG. 187 (C)), if the increased hold becomes a target of the prefetch notice, the simultaneous change is performed. An effect is executed (see FIG. 187 (E)).

  FIG. 188 is a view for explaining a simultaneous change effect when the holding order is full in the winning order change.

  The third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 188 (a) has changed to the display mode of the number-long character. The display status of the third hold icon h3 is changed by an effect different from the simultaneous change effect. For example, there are cases in which the first character appears in the display mode of the first character at the time of winning, or in which only the reserved icon changes to the display mode of the first character at the start of the next change. In FIG. 188 (d), the eighth holding icon h8 increases during the symbol change, and the holding is full. When the reserved full state is reached during the symbol change, the full display F is displayed from the time when the full state is reached to the stop display of the symbol change display currently being performed (FIGS. 188 (c) to (d)). Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 188 (f), when the display becomes the final display, the full display F disappears. Then, even when the display mode of the hold icon is changed in another effect, when the hold is full, after the movement animation of the hold icon in the next change (see FIG. 188 (g)) ends, As shown in FIG. 188 (i), the simultaneous change effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 18 (j), the display modes of all the first to seventh holding icons h1 to h7 and the change icon c change. . In this example, the simultaneous change effect is executed in response to the full state of the hold, irrespective of the display mode of the hold icon described with reference to FIGS. 187 (a) to (e). . Therefore, here, the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 188 (a) is the display mode of the character with the longest character, but even if it is the display mode of the character of "heat" shown in FIG. 187 (b), When the reserve is full, a simultaneous change effect is executed. However, even when the hold is full, the simultaneous change effect may not be executed if the hold icon of the display mode (second display mode) of the character “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 188 (A), the display mode of all the hold icons h1 to h7 has already been changed to the display mode of the face of the lord by the simultaneous change effect. In this case as well, when the reserve is full during the symbol change, the full display F is displayed. Then, even after the simultaneous change effect has already been executed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again according to the full state of the hold (see FIG. 188 (C)). In other words, if the hold icons become full before all the holding icons whose display modes have been changed by the simultaneous change effect are consumed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again.

185, 186, and 188 can be applied to the case where the reserved tank is full even in the case of the special figure 2 priority changing machine or the alternating changing machine. It is an example.
In the above description,
"A gaming table provided with effect display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,

  The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icon according to the number of holds,

The effect display means is means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol [for example, immediately before FIGS. 179 (b) to (h)].
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One effect display of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,

  The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change,

  The first effect display is an effect display that may be started in a first period of the fluctuation display [for example, a period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon]. Yes,

When the display of the first effect display is not started in the first period of the variable display, a second period of the variable display [for example, from the time immediately before FIG. 180 (a) to the time immediately before FIG. 182, a period immediately before FIG. 182 (a) to FIG. 182 (d)], the first effect display is not started to be displayed.
The second period is a period after the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  The “effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change respectively” may be an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons all change at the same time, or an effect display in which the display modes change one by one. Or an effect display that changes a plurality at a time.

  Further, for example, when the number of holdings increases during the first period, the first effect display may be started to be displayed during the first period. Further, when the hold is increased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first effect display is started to be displayed during the first period in the variable display that is started after the stop display of the decorative symbol. In some cases.

Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of hold icons, a means that may display the hold icons, or a means for displaying other than the plurality of hold icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of hold icons may be displayed.
Also,

"The first period is a period in which the beginning is the time of the start of the variable display [for example, the first half period including FIG. 179 (b)].

The second period is a period in which the end period is the end of the variable display [for example, the second half period immediately before FIG. 179 (h)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

For example, when the display of the first effect display is not started when the display of the variable display is started, the display of the first effect display is not started during the display of the variable display. That is, the display of the first effect display is started only at the start of the change during the display of the change display.
Also,
"The end of the first period is the beginning of the second period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
`` The effect display means is means capable of displaying a stop display of the decorative symbol,

The first effect display is an effect display in which a display is started during the display of the stop display (for example, a case illustrated in FIG. 180 (e) or a case illustrated in FIG. 182 (f)).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  For example, when the hold increases while the stop display is being displayed, the first effect display may be started while the stop display is being displayed. Further, even when the hold is increased during the display of the fluctuation display before the stop display, the first effect display may be started during the display of the stop display.

Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol, a means that may display the stop display, or a display other than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be a means or a means for displaying only the stop display of the decorative symbol.
Also,

"The first effect display is a case where the display is started after the variable display when the holding number increases during the display of the variable display [for example, the case shown in FIG. f) etc.] is an effect display.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

"The first effect display is the first period in the variable display started next to the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as" first variable display ") in which the number of holds is increased [for example, FIG. (H) including the period of the first half).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

"The number of the plurality of hold icons, each of which has a display mode changed by the first effect display, is the number before the hold number increased during the display of the first variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 182. Example]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second effect display,

  The second effect display is a moving animation of the hold icon [for example, the animation shown in FIG. 179 (k)].

The moving animation is an animation whose display is completed before the second period starts.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in a first display mode [for example, a shining display mode of a second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 187 (B)].

  The effect display means is means capable of displaying the hold icon in a second display mode [for example, a display mode of a character of “heat” of the second hold icon h2 illustrated in FIG. 187 (b)].

  Even if the hold icon of the first display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the first effect display is configured to be started to be displayed during the first period,

If at least one of the hold icons of the second display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the display of the first effect display is not started even during the first period. It is configured,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Note that the first display mode may be a display mode of a prefetch notice, and the second display mode may be a display mode of a prefetch notice, and the first display mode and the second display mode Is different from the jackpot reliability (expectation), and the second display mode may be a display mode in which the jackpot reliability (expectation) is higher than the first display mode, Conversely, the display mode may be low.

  Further, the effect display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the first display mode, may be a means for displaying the hold icon, or may display the hold icon in the first display mode. It may be a means for displaying other than the display mode, or a means for displaying the hold icon only in the first display mode.

Further, the effect display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the second display mode, or may be means for displaying the hold icon, or may display the hold icon in the second display mode. Means for displaying other than the display mode may be used, or means for displaying the hold icon only in the second display mode.
Also,

“The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In addition,
"A gaming table provided with effect display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,

The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icon according to the number of holds,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One effect display of the plurality of effect displays is a first effect display,

  The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change,

  The first effect display is an effect display that may be started in a first period [for example, a period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the moving animation of the hold icon or the like],

If the display of the first effect display is not started during the first period, the second period [for example, the period immediately before FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (c), FIGS. (During the period immediately before FIG. 9D), the first effect display is not started to be displayed.
The second period is a period after the first period,
A gaming table characterized by the following. "
Was also explained.
further,
"It is a gaming table equipped with effect display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons,

The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a number of the hold icon according to the number of holds,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative symbol,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of the decorative symbol,
The effect display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays,
One effect display of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display,

  The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change,

  The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the stop display.

The first effect display is an effect display that may not be displayed during the execution of the variable display.
A gaming table characterized by the following. "
Was also explained.
further,

"The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during the execution of the stop display when the hold is increased during the execution of the stop display,

The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during the execution of the stop display displayed next to the variable display, when the hold is increased during the execution of the variable display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. "
Was also explained.

136 to 188 described above may be examples in one pachinko machine or examples executed in different pachinko machines.
FIG. 189 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 189, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium fired from the firing means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the firing means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, the total number of balls held, and the like) and other information is provided below the game area 902 on the front of the gaming table. An upper plate 126 and a lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 128 are not provided.
Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  FIG. 190 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001, three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 190) are accommodated. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are driven to rotate by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, each symbol is printed on a band-shaped member at an appropriate interval at an appropriate number, and the band-shaped member is pasted on a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to constitute each of the reels 1010 to 1012. . When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition, as such display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed other than the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 190) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000, and the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. It is configured such that a light-shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the pay line.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid pay line 1014. The activated pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three medals are activated and three medals are bet, five lines, in which a rightward prize line and a rightward prize line are added, are valid as a prize line. The number of the winning lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, a middle horizontal winning line, an upper horizontal winning line, a lower horizontal winning line, Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be made effective as winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that notifies a player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that a player can insert a game medal. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (there is no need to insert medals) when the player has won a re-game which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, and when the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and, when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, notifies that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot for a player to insert medals when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically by using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034, and insertion means both. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for numerically displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034, or the start lever 1035 is operated by operating the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation. In the slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process of performing a lottery to determine which of the multiple types of roles has been won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively disadvantageous state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light-emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light-emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing down and removing medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and medals bet, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 128 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, on the side of the operation key unit 1090, there is provided an effect button 1091 which is the same as the chance button 136 provided on the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decoration lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is provided above the front door 1002. The rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right and left doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (shown in FIG. When the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b open in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed on the front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, what is necessary is just to be able to display various effect images and various game information, and for example, it is composed of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. In addition, the display screen is formed in a rectangular shape, and the entirety thereof is configured to be visually recognizable by a player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may appear irregular. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, besides the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and the like, the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means) ) And effect button 1091 (an example of a second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 190, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like, like the transmission unit 191 shown in FIG. Pivotable in any direction. A light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 190 is at the initial position. When the display panel 1070 is rotated in the forward direction, the display panel 1070 can perform a pressing operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) similarly to the transmission unit 191, and is an example of an operation unit (for example, It corresponds to an example of one operating means) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can be vibrated. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.
In the following, it will be additionally described including what has been described so far.

  (Supplementary Note 1) A game console provided with a first operating means and a second operating means, wherein a plurality of types of effects are configured to be executable, and one of the plurality of types of effects is provided. The effect is a first effect, the first effect is configured to be able to start in response to the operation of the first operating means, the state in which the first effect is being executed A gaming table, wherein the second operating means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states (hereinafter, referred to as a "first state"). Note that the first effect may be a notice effect. Further, the second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a smaller operating means.

  (Supplementary Note 2) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein the first state is a state in an entire period during which the first effect is performed.

  (Supplementary Note 3) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein one of the effects of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect, and the second operating means is in a second period. It is configured such that when operated, the second effect is started, and when the second operation means is operated, the second effect is not started. A game console, wherein the operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated during the second period.

  (Supplementary Note 4) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 3, wherein at least a part of the states in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as a “second state”). A game console, wherein the second operation means is configured to vibrate, and the first state is a state in which the second effect is not executed.

  (Supplementary Note 5) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4, wherein the first effect is started when the first operation unit is operated within a first period. Is configured so that the first effect may not be started even if the first operation means is operated, and the second operation means is configured to perform the second operation within the first period. A game console, which is an operating means that may vibrate when the operating means is operated. That is, the second operation means may be vibrated even in a state where the first effect is not executed.

  (Supplementary Note 6) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 5, wherein a plurality of types of notifications are configured to be executable, one of the plurality of types of notification is a first notification, and The game console according to claim 1, wherein the one notification is a notification for prompting an operation of the first operation means, and the first notification is configured to be performed within the first period. That is, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated while the first notification is being executed.

  (Supplementary Note 7) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6, wherein one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect, and an operation of the first operation unit is performed. According to the, is configured to be able to start any one of the first effect and the third effect, and in a state where the third effect is executed, the second effect A gaming table, wherein the second operation means is configured not to vibrate.

  (Supplementary Note 8) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 7, wherein the first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operation unit is not operated. A gaming table that features.

  (Supplementary Note 9) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 10) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. In addition, even if it is a component contained only in each of the examples and the supplementary descriptions described above, the component may be applied to other examples and supplementary notes.

  The game console according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, and includes, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and respective reels. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for judging the success or failure of internal winning of a plurality of combinations by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing the stop control relating to the stop of the reel and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internally won combination. Determination means for determining whether or not, when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode, It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed in the game machine are used in a circulating manner. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured as one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Good. Further, while the main control unit and the first sub-control unit enable bidirectional communication, the communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, among the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further expand the range of the game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a ball-and-ball game machine (pachinko machine), a torso gaming machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine. it can.

100 Pachinko machine 200 Game board 200a5 Game ball storage unit 200a10 Second game ball storage unit 208 Decorative design display device 244 Stage 300 Main control unit 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit 700 Falling unfolding unit 712a Fourth structure 712b First structure 712d Second structure 712c Third structure 730,760 Falling and deploying agent 731,761,821,831 First structure 732,762,822,832 Second Structure 750 Ascending character unit 800 Launching character unit 820,830 Character 823,833 Third structure 850 V-forming character unit 900 Center character

Claims (7)

A first structure,
A second structure;
With movable characters,
First driving means;
A gaming table with
The movable role is a movable role including the first structure,
The movable accessory is a movable accessory including the second structure,
The first structure is a structure that can be located at a first position,
The first structure is a structure that can be located at a third position,
The second structure is a structure that can be located at a second position,
The second structure is a structure that can be located at a fourth position,
The first position is a position different from the third position,
The second position is a position different from the fourth position,
The first structure, the thus driven in the first drive means is the first structure to change the position to the third position from the position of,
Said second structure, said thus be driven in the first driving means, a said second structural member for changing the position in the fourth position from the position of,
The first structure located at the first position overlaps a part of the second structure located at the second position,
The position in the front-rear direction of the front end of the second structure located at the fourth position is closer to the front than the position in the front-rear direction of the front end of the first structure located at the third position. Is the position of
The movable character is a movable character capable of executing a notice,
The movable character is a movable character that can be located at an initial position,
In a state where the movable role is located at the initial position, the first structure and the second structure are not visible ,
When the first structure is located at the third position, a portion that is visible from the front when the first structure is located at the first position is not visible from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1,
It said second structure, rather viewability from the front towards the case located at the fourth position than when located in the second position,
When the second structure is located at the second position, a part of the second structure can be visually recognized from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1 or 2,
Display means,
The movable accessory is a movable accessory that may be located in front of the display unit.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
A second driving means,
The second driving means is means for driving the movable role in the vertical direction,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first structure is capable of rotating operation.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.